Check Point Software Technologies Safe@Office 1000NW User guide
Реклама
Реклама
Check Point Safe@Office
Internet Security Appliance
User Guide
Version 8.2
Part No: 700797, November 2010
COPYRIGHT & TRADEMARKS
Copyright © 2010 SofaWare, All Rights Reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means without written permission from SofaWare.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on part of SofaWare Technologies Ltd.
SofaWare, Safe@Home and Safe@Office are trademarks, service marks, or registered trademarks of SofaWare Technologies Ltd.
Check Point, AlertAdvisor, Application Intelligence, Check Point Express, Check Point Express CI, the Check Point logo, Check Point Pointsec
Protector, ClusterXL, Confidence Indexing, ConnectControl, Connectra, Connectra Accelerator Card, Cooperative Enforcement, Cooperative Security
Alliance, CoSa, DefenseNet, Dynamic Shielding Architecture, Eventia, Eventia Analyzer, Eventia Reporter, Eventia Suite, FireWall-1, FireWall-1
GX, FireWall-1 SecureServer, FloodGate-1, Hacker ID, Hybrid Detection Engine, IMsecure, INSPECT, INSPECT XL, Integrity, Integrity Clientless
Security, Integrity SecureClient, InterSpect, IPS-1, IQ Engine, MailSafe, NG, NGX, Open Security Extension, OPSEC, OSFirewall, Pointsec,
Pointsec Mobile, Policy Lifecycle Management, Provider-1, SecureClient, SecureClient Mobile, SecureKnowledge, SecurePlatform, SecurePlatform
Pro, SecuRemote, SecureServer, SecureUpdate, SecureXL, SecureXL Turbocard, Sentivist, SiteManager-1, SmartCenter, SmartCenter Express,
SmartCenter Power, SmartCenter Pro, SmartCenter UTM, SmartConsole, SmartDashboard, SmartDefense, SmartDefense Advisor, Smarter Security,
SmartLSM, SmartMap, SmartPortal, SmartUpdate, SmartView, SmartView Monitor, SmartView Reporter, SmartView Status, SmartViewTracker,
SofaWare, SSL Network Extender, Stateful Clustering, TrueVector, Turbocard, UAM, UserAuthority, User-to-Address Mapping, UTM-1, VPN-1,
VPN-1 Accelerator Card, VPN-1 Edge, VPN-1 Express, VPN-1 Express CI, VPN-1 Power, VPN-1 Power VSX, VPN-1 Pro, VPN-1 SecureClient,
VPN-1 SecuRemote, VPN-1 SecureServer, VPN-1 UTM, VPN-1 UTM Edge, VPN-1 VSX, Web Intelligence, ZoneAlarm, ZoneAlarm Anti-Spyware,
ZoneAlarm Antivirus, ZoneAlarm Internet Security Suite, ZoneAlarm Pro, ZoneAlarm Secure Wireless Router, Zone Labs, and the Zone Labs logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Check Point Software Technologies Ltd. or its affiliates. ZoneAlarm is a Check Point Software
Technologies, Inc. Company. All other product names mentioned herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
The products described in this document are protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,606,668, 5,835,726, 5,987,611, 6,496,935, 6,873,988, 6,850,943, and
7,165,076 and may be protected by other U.S. Patents, foreign patents, or pending applications. Any reproduction of this alert other than as an unmodified copy of this file requires authorization from Check Point. Permission to electronically redistribute this alert in its unmodified form is granted. All other rights, including the use of other media, are reserved by Check Point Software Technologies Inc.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright © 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
PREAMBLE
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software
Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program" means either the
Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices.
Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software
Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER
PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR
ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED
INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
To receive the SofaWare GPL licensed code, contact [email protected].
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Carefully read the Safety Instructions the Installation and Operating Procedures provided in this User's Guide before attempting to install or operate the appliance. Failure to follow these instructions may result in damage to equipment and/or personal injuries.
Before cleaning the appliance, unplug the power cord. Use only a soft cloth dampened with water for cleaning.
When installing the appliance, ensure that the vents are not blocked.
Do not place this product on an unstable surface or support. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, as well as serious damage to the product.
Do not use the appliance outdoors.
Do not expose the appliance to liquid or moisture.
Do not expose the appliance to extreme high or low temperatures.
Do not disassemble or open the appliance. Failure to comply will void the warranty.
Do not use any accessories other than those approved by Check Point. Failure to do so may result in loss of performance, damage to the product, fire, electric shock or injury, and will void the warranty.
Route power adapter cords where they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed on or against them. Pay particular attention to cords where they are attached to plugs and convenience receptacles, and examine the point where they exit the unit.
Do not connect or disconnect power adapter cables and data transmission lines during thunderstorms.
Do not overload wall outlets or extension cords, as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Overloaded AC outlets, extension cords, frayed power cords, damaged or cracked wire insulation, and broken plugs are dangerous. They may result in a shock or fire hazard.
Periodically examine the cord, and if its appearance indicates damage or deteriorated insulation, have it replaced by your service technician.
If the unit or any part of it is damaged, disconnect the power plug and inform the responsible service personnel. Non-observance may result in damage to the router.
POWER ADAPTER
Operate this product only from the type of power source indicated on the product’s marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supplied to your home, consult your dealer or local power company.
Use only the power adapter provided with your product. Check whether the device’s set supply voltage is the same as the local supply voltage.
To reduce risk of damage to the unit, remove it from the outlet by holding the power adapter rather than the cord.
SECURITY DISCLAIMER
The appliance provides your network with the highest level of security. However, no single security product can provide you with absolute protection.
We recommend using additional security measures to secure highly valuable or sensitive information.
Contents
Contents
i Contents
Contents
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide ii
Contents
iii Contents
Contents
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide iv
Contents
v Contents
Contents
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide vi
Contents
vii Contents
About Your Check Point Safe@Office Appliance
About This Guide
To make finding information in this guide easier, some types of information are marked with special symbols or formatting.
Boldface type is used for command and button names.
Note: Notes are denoted by indented text and preceded by the Note icon.
Warning: Warnings are denoted by indented text and preceded by the Warning icon.
Each task is marked with an icon indicating the Safe@Office product required to perform the task, as follows:
If this icon appears... You can perform the task using these products...
Safe@Office 500 or Safe@Office 500W, with or without the Power
Pack or ADSL
Safe@Office 500W only, with or without the Power Pack or ADSL
Safe@Office 1000N or Safe@Office 1000NW, with or without the
Power Pack or ADSL
Safe@Office 1000NW only, with or without the Power Pack or ADSL
All products, with or without ADSL, with the Power Pack only
All products with USB ports
Chapter 1: About This Guide ix
About Your Check Point Safe@Office Appliance
All products, with or without the Power Pack, with ADSL only
All products, with or without the Power Pack, without ADSL only x Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
About Your Check Point Safe@Office Appliance
Chapter 1
Introduction
This chapter introduces the Check Point Safe@Office appliance and this guide.
This chapter includes the following topics:
About Your Check Point Safe@Office Appliance ....................................... 1
Safe@Office Product Family ....................................................................... 2
Safe@Office 1000N and 1000N ADSL Product Features ............................ 3
Safe@Office 1000NW and 1000NW ADSL Product Features .................... 8
Safe@Office 500 and 500 ADSL Product Features ................................... 14
Safe@Office 500W and 500W ADSL Product Features ............................ 19
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N Appliance ............................. 27
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance .................. 32
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance ......................... 38
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance .............. 44
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 Appliance .................................. 51
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance ....................... 55
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W Appliance .............................. 60
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W ADSL Appliance ................... 65
Contacting Technical Support .................................................................... 70
About Your Check Point Safe@Office Appliance
The Check Point Safe@Office appliance is a unified threat management (UTM) appliance that enables secure high-speed Internet access from the office. Developed and supported by
SofaWare Technologies, an affiliate of Check Point Software Technologies, the worldwide leader in securing the Internet, the Safe@Office product family includes both wired and wireless models, with and without an integrated ADSL modem. The Safe@Office firewall, based on the world-leading Check Point Embedded NGX Stateful Inspection technology, inspects and filters all incoming and outgoing traffic, blocking all unauthorized traffic.
Chapter 1: Introduction 1
Safe@Office Product Family
The Safe@Office appliance also allows sharing your Internet connection among several
PCs or other network devices, enabling advanced office networking and saving the cost of purchasing static IP addresses.
With the Safe@Office appliance, you can subscribe to additional security services available from select service providers, including firewall security and software updates,
Antivirus, Antispam, Web Filtering, reporting, VPN management, and Dynamic DNS. By supporting integrated VPN capabilities, the Safe@Office appliance allows teleworkers and road warriors to securely connect to the office network, and enables secure interconnection of branch offices.
Safe@Office Product Family
The Safe@Office series includes the following hardware models:
• Safe@Office 1000N Internet Security Appliance
• Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Internet Security Appliance
• Safe@Office 1000NW Wireless Security Appliance
• Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Wireless Security Appliance
• Safe@Office 500 Internet Security Appliance
• Safe@Office 500 ADSL Internet Security Appliance
• Safe@Office 500W Wireless Security Appliance
• Safe@Office 500W ADSL Wireless Internet Security Appliance
You can upgrade your Safe@Office appliance to include additional features without replacing the hardware by installing the Safe@Office Power Pack, and you can increase the number of licensed users by installing node upgrades. Contact your reseller for more details.
2 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Safe@Office 1000N and 1000N ADSL Product Features
Safe@Office 1000N and 1000N ADSL Product
Features
Table 1: Safe@Office 1000N and 1000N ADSL Features
Feature Safe@Office 1000N Safe@Office 1000N ADSL
SKU Prefix CPSB-1000N-n CPSB-1000N-n-ADSL
25/Unlimited Concurrent Users
Capacity
Firewall Throughput 1 Gbps
200 Mbps
60,000
VPN Throughput
Concurrent Firewall
Connections
Hardware Features
4-Port LAN Switch
WAN Port
ADSL Standards
Ethernet, 10/100/1000 Mbps
ADSL2+ Ethernet, 10/100/1000 Mbps
— ADSL2, ADSL2+, T.1413 G.DMT
(G.992.1)
G.Lite (G.992.2)
Either:
ANNEX A (ADSL over POTS)
Or:
ANNEX B (ADSL over ISDN)
Chapter 1: Introduction 3
Safe@Office 1000N and 1000N ADSL Product Features
DMZ/WAN2 Port Ethernet / SFP, 10/100/1000 Mbps
Dialup Backup With external serial / USB modem
Console Port (Serial)
ExpressCard Port
Print Server
—
—
— USB 2.0 Ports
Firewall & Security Features
Check Point Stateful
Inspection Firewall
Application
Intelligence
SmartDefense™ (IPS)
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Four Preset Security
Policies
Anti-spoofing
Voice over IP Support
Instant Messenger
Blocking / Monitoring
SIP, H.323
2
4 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
P2P File Sharing
Blocking / Monitoring
Port-based and Tagbased VLAN
Port-based Security
(802.1x)
EAP Authenticator
Web Rules
Secure HotSpot
(Guest Access)
VPN
VPN Tunnels
VPN Server with
OfficeMode and
RADIUS Support
Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway
Route-based VPN
Backup VPN
Gateways
Remote Access VPN
Client
Safe@Office 1000N and 1000N ADSL Product Features
*
*
*
400
Check Point VPN Clients, L2TP
SecuRemote / SecureClient / L2TP / Endpoint Connect
Chapter 1: Introduction 5
Safe@Office 1000N and 1000N ADSL Product Features
IPSEC Features Hardware-accelerated DES, 3DES, AES, MD5, SHA-1, Hardware
Random Number Generator (RNG), Internet Key Exchange (IKE),
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS), IPSEC Compression, IPSEC NAT
Traversal (NAT-T), IPSEC VPN Pass-through
Networking
Supported Internet
Connection Methods
Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP,
Telstra, Cable, Dialup
Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP,
Telstra, Cable, EoA, PPPoA,
IPoA, Dialup
Transparent Bridge
Mode
Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP)
Traffic Shaper (QoS) Basic/Advanced*
Traffic Monitoring
Dead Internet
Connection Detection
(DCD)
WAN Load Balancing
Backup Internet
Connection
DHCP Server, Client, and Relay
DHCP Leases
DNS Server
1024
6 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
MAC Cloning
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Rules
Static Routes, Source
Routes, and Service-
Based Routes
Ethernet Cable Type
Recognition
DiffServ Tagging
Automatic Gateway
Failover (HA)
Multicast Routing
Dynamic Routing
Management
Central Management
Local Management
Remote Desktop
Local Diagnostics
Tools
NTP Automatic Time
Safe@Office 1000N and 1000N ADSL Product Features
*
*
*
*
SMP
HTTP / HTTPS / SSH / SNMP / Serial CLI
Integrated Microsoft Terminal Services Client
Ping, WHOIS, Packet Sniffer, Status Monitor, Traffic Monitor, My
Computers Display, Connection Table Display, Network Interface
Monitor, VPN Tunnel Monitor, Routing Table Display, Event Log,
Security Log
Chapter 1: Introduction 7
Safe@Office 1000NW and 1000NW ADSL Product Features
Setting
Rapid Deployment
Hardware Specifications
Power 100/110/120/210/220/230VAC (Linear Power Adapter) or 100~240VAC
(Switched Power Adapter)
Mounting Options Desktop, Wall, or Rack Mounting**
Warranty 1 Year Hardware
* Requires Power Pack upgrade CPSB-1000-UPG-PPACK.
** Rack mounting requires the optional rack mounting kit (sold separately).
Safe@Office 1000NW and 1000NW ADSL Product
Features
Table 2: Safe@Office 1000NW and 1000NW ADSL Features
Feature Safe@Office 1000NW Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL
SKU Prefix CPSB-1000NW-n CPSB-1000NW-n-ADSL
25/Unlimited Concurrent Users
Capacity
Firewall Throughput
VPN Throughput
Concurrent Firewall
Connections
1 Gbps
200 Mbps
60,000
8 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Hardware Features
4-Port LAN Switch
WAN Port
ADSL Standards
DMZ/WAN2 Port
Dialup Backup
Console Port (Serial)
ExpressCard Port
Print Server
USB 2.0 Ports
Firewall & Security Features
Check Point Stateful
Inspection Firewall
Application
Chapter 1: Introduction
Safe@Office 1000NW and 1000NW ADSL Product Features
Ethernet, 10/100/1000 Mbps
Ethernet
10/100/1000 Mbps
ADSL2+
— ADSL2, ADSL2+, T.1413 G.DMT
(G.992.1)
G.Lite (G.992.2)
Either:
ANNEX A (ADSL over POTS)
Or:
ANNEX B (ADSL over ISDN)
Ethernet
10/100/1000 Mbps
With external serial / USB modem
—
2 1
9
Safe@Office 1000NW and 1000NW ADSL Product Features
Intelligence
SmartDefense™ (IPS)
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Four Preset Security
Policies
Anti-spoofing
SIP, H.323 Voice over IP Support
Instant Messenger
Blocking / Monitoring
P2P File Sharing
Blocking / Monitoring
Port-based and Tagbased VLAN
Port-based Security
(802.1x)
EAP Authenticator
*
*
Web Rules
*
Secure HotSpot
(Guest Access)
VPN
VPN Tunnels 400
10 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
VPN Server with
OfficeMode and
RADIUS Support
Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway
Route-based VPN
Safe@Office 1000NW and 1000NW ADSL Product Features
Check Point VPN Clients, L2TP
Backup VPN
Gateways
Remote Access VPN
Client
IPSEC Features
SecuRemote / SecureClient / L2TP / Endpoint Connect
Hardware-accelerated DES, 3DES, AES, MD5, SHA-1, Hardware
Random Number Generator (RNG), Internet Key Exchange (IKE),
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS), IPSEC Compression, IPSEC NAT
Traversal (NAT-T), IPSEC VPN Pass-through
Networking
Supported Internet
Connection Methods
Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP,
Telstra, Cable, Dialup
Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP,
Telstra, Cable, EoA, PPPoA,
IPoA, Dialup
Transparent Bridge
Mode
Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP)
Traffic Shaper (QoS)
Traffic Monitoring
Basic/Advanced*
Chapter 1: Introduction 11
Safe@Office 1000NW and 1000NW ADSL Product Features
Dead Internet
Connection Detection
(DCD)
WAN Load Balancing
Backup Internet
Connection
DHCP Server, Client, and Relay
DHCP Leases
DNS Server
MAC Cloning
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Rules
Static Routes, Source
Routes, and Service-
Based Routes
Ethernet Cable Type
Recognition
DiffServ Tagging
1024
*
Automatic Gateway
Failover (HA)
Multicast Routing
*
*
12 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Dynamic Routing
Management
Central Management
Local Management
Remote Desktop
Local Diagnostics
Tools
Safe@Office 1000NW and 1000NW ADSL Product Features
*
SMP
HTTP / HTTPS / SSH / SNMP / Serial CLI
Integrated Microsoft Terminal Services Client
Ping, WHOIS, Packet Sniffer, Status Monitor, Traffic Monitor, My
Computers Display, Connection Table Display, Network Interface
Monitor, VPN Tunnel Monitor, Routing Table Display, Event Log,
Security Log
NTP Automatic Time
Setting
Rapid Deployment
Hardware Specifications
Power 100/110/120/210/220/230VAC (Linear Power Adapter) or 100~240VAC
(Switched Power Adapter)
Mounting Options Desktop, Wall, or Rack Mounting**
Warranty 1 Year Hardware
* Requires Power Pack upgrade CPSB-1000-UPG-PPACK.
** Rack mounting requires the optional rack mounting kit (sold separately).
Chapter 1: Introduction 13
Safe@Office 500 and 500 ADSL Product Features
Safe@Office 500 and 500 ADSL Product Features
Table 3: Safe@Office 500 and 500 ADSL Features
Feature Safe@Office 500 Safe@Office 500 ADSL
SKU Prefix CPSB-500G-n CPSB-500G-n-ADSL
5/25/U Concurrent Users
Capacity
Firewall Throughput 190 Mbps
35 Mbps
8,000
VPN Throughput
Concurrent Firewall
Connections
Hardware Features
4-Port LAN Switch
WAN Port
ADSL Standards
DMZ/WAN2 Port
10/100 Mbps
Ethernet, 10/100 Mbps
—
ADSL2+
ADSL2, ADSL2+, T.1413 G.DMT
(G.992.1)
G.Lite (G.992.2)
Either:
ANNEX A (ADSL over POTS)
Or:
ANNEX B (ADSL over ISDN)
10/100 Mbps
14 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Dialup Backup
Console Port (Serial)
Print Server
USB 2.0 Ports
Firewall & Security Features
Check Point Stateful
Inspection Firewall
Application
Intelligence
SmartDefense™ (IPS)
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Four Preset Security
Policies
Anti-spoofing
Voice over IP Support
Instant Messenger
Blocking / Monitoring
P2P File Sharing
Blocking / Monitoring
Chapter 1: Introduction
Safe@Office 500 and 500 ADSL Product Features
—
With external serial / USB modem
— 2
SIP, H.323
15
Safe@Office 500 and 500 ADSL Product Features
Port-based and Tagbased VLAN
Port-based Security
(802.1x)
EAP Authenticator
Web Rules
Secure HotSpot
(Guest Access)
VPN
VPN Tunnels
VPN Server with
OfficeMode and
RADIUS Support
Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway
Route-based VPN
Backup VPN
Gateways
Remote Access VPN
Client
IPSEC Features
*
*
*
100 (with Management)
Check Point VPN Clients, L2TP
SecuRemote / SecureClient / L2TP / Endpoint Connect
Hardware-accelerated DES, 3DES, AES, MD5, SHA-1, Hardware
Random Number Generator (RNG), Internet Key Exchange (IKE),
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS), IPSEC Compression, IPSEC NAT
Traversal (NAT-T), IPSEC VPN Pass-through
16 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Networking
Supported Internet
Connection Methods
Safe@Office 500 and 500 ADSL Product Features
Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP,
Telstra, Cable, Dialup
Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP,
Telstra, Cable, EoA, PPPoA, IPoA,
Dialup
Transparent Bridge
Mode
Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP)
Traffic Shaper (QoS)
Traffic Monitoring
Basic/Advanced*
Dead Internet
Connection Detection
(DCD)
WAN Load Balancing
Backup Internet
Connection
DHCP Server, Client, and Relay
DNS Server
MAC Cloning
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Rules
Chapter 1: Introduction 17
Safe@Office 500 and 500 ADSL Product Features
Static Routes, Source
Routes, and Service-
Based Routes
Ethernet Cable Type
Recognition
DiffServ Tagging
Automatic Gateway
Failover (HA)
Multicast Routing
Dynamic Routing
Management
Central Management
Local Management
Remote Desktop
Local Diagnostics
Tools
*
*
*
*
SMP
HTTP / HTTPS / SSH / SNMP / Serial CLI
Integrated Microsoft Terminal Services Client
Ping, WHOIS, Packet Sniffer, Status Monitor, Traffic Monitor, My
Computers Display, Connection Table Display, Network Interface
Monitor, VPN Tunnel Monitor, Routing Table Display, Event Log,
Security Log
NTP Automatic Time
Setting
Rapid Deployment
18 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Hardware Specifications
Power
Safe@Office 500W and 500W ADSL Product Features
100/110/120/210/220/230VAC (Linear Power Adapter) or 100~240VAC
(Switched Power Adapter)
Mounting Options Desktop, Wall, or Rack Mounting**
Warranty 1 Year Hardware
* Requires Power Pack upgrade CPSB-500-UPG-PPACK.
** Rack mounting requires the optional rack mounting kit (sold separately).
Safe@Office 500W and 500W ADSL Product
Features
Table 4: Safe@Office 500W and 500W ADSL Features
Feature Safe@Office 500W Safe@Office 500W ADSL
SKU Prefix CPSB-500WG-n CPSB-500WG-n-ADSL
5/25/U Concurrent Users
Capacity
Firewall Throughput
VPN Throughput
Concurrent Firewall
Connections
Hardware Features
4-Port LAN Switch
190 Mbps
35 Mbps
8,000
10/100 Mbps
Chapter 1: Introduction 19
Safe@Office 500W and 500W ADSL Product Features
WAN Port
ADSL Standards
Ethernet, 10/100 Mbps
—
DMZ/WAN2 Port
ADSL2+
ADSL2, ADSL2+, T.1413 G.DMT
(G.992.1)
G.Lite (G.992.2)
Either:
ANNEX A (ADSL over POTS)
Or:
ANNEX B (ADSL over ISDN)
10/100 Mbps
Dialup Backup
Console Port (Serial)
Print Server
With external serial / USB modem
2 USB 2.0 Ports
Firewall & Security Features
Check Point Stateful
Inspection Firewall
Application
Intelligence
SmartDefense™ (IPS)
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
20 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Four Preset Security
Policies
Anti-spoofing
Voice over IP Support
Instant Messenger
Blocking / Monitoring
P2P File Sharing
Blocking / Monitoring
Port-based and Tagbased VLAN
Port-based Security
(802.1x)
EAP Authenticator
Web Rules
Secure HotSpot
(Guest Access)
VPN
VPN Tunnels
VPN Server with
OfficeMode and
RADIUS Support
Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway
Chapter 1: Introduction
Safe@Office 500W and 500W ADSL Product Features
*
*
*
SIP, H.323
100 (with Management)
Check Point VPN Clients, L2TP
21
Safe@Office 500W and 500W ADSL Product Features
Route-based VPN
Backup VPN
Gateways
Remote Access VPN
Client
IPSEC Features
SecuRemote / SecureClient / L2TP / Endpoint Connect
Hardware-accelerated DES, 3DES, AES, MD5, SHA-1, Hardware
Random Number Generator (RNG), Internet Key Exchange (IKE),
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS), IPSEC Compression, IPSEC NAT
Traversal (NAT-T), IPSEC VPN Pass-through
Networking
Supported Internet
Connection Methods
Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP,
Telstra, Cable, Dialup
Static IP, DHCP, PPPoE, PPTP,
Telstra, Cable, EoA, PPPoA, IPoA,
Dialup
Transparent Bridge
Mode
Spanning Tree
Protocol (STP)
Traffic Shaper (QoS)
Traffic Monitoring
Basic/Advanced*
Dead Internet
Connection Detection
(DCD)
WAN Load Balancing
Backup Internet
22 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Connection
DHCP Server, Client, and Relay
DNS Server
MAC Cloning
Network Address
Translation (NAT)
Rules
Static Routes, Source
Routes, and Service-
Based Routes
Ethernet Cable Type
Recognition
DiffServ Tagging
Automatic Gateway
Failover (HA)
Multicast Routing
Dynamic Routing
Management
Central Management
Local Management
Remote Desktop
Chapter 1: Introduction
Safe@Office 500W and 500W ADSL Product Features
*
*
*
*
SMP
HTTP / HTTPS / SSH / SNMP / Serial CLI
Integrated Microsoft Terminal Services Client
23
Safe@Office 500W and 500W ADSL Product Features
Local Diagnostics
Tools
Ping, WHOIS, Packet Sniffer, Status Monitor, Traffic Monitor, My
Computers Display, Connection Table Display, Network Interface
Monitor, VPN Tunnel Monitor, Routing Table Display, Event Log,
Security Log
NTP Automatic Time
Setting
Rapid Deployment
Hardware Specifications
Power 100/110/120/210/220/230VAC (Linear Power Adapter) or 100~240VAC
(Switched Power Adapter)
Mounting Options Desktop, Wall, or Rack Mounting**
Warranty 1 Year Hardware
* Requires Power Pack upgrade CPSB-500-UPG-PPACK.
** Rack mounting requires the optional rack mounting kit (sold separately).
24 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Wireless Features
Table 5: Safe@Office Wireless Features
Feature Safe@Office 500W /
Safe@Office 500W ADSL
Wireless Protocols
Wireless Security
802.11b (11 Mbps), 802.11g (54
Mbps), Super G (108 Mbps)**
Wireless Features
Safe@Office 1000NW /
Safe@Office 1000W ADSL
802.11b (11 Mbps), 802.11g (54
Mbps), 802.11n (300 Mbps)
VPN over Wireless, WEP, WPA2 (802.11i), WPA-Personal, WPA-
Enterprise, 802.1x
Wireless QoS
(WMM)
Dual Diversity
Antennas
Virtual Access Points
(VAP)
Wireless Distribution
System (WDS) Links
Wireless Range
(Standard Mode)
Wireless Range (XR
Mode)**
Chapter 1: Introduction
*
*
Up to 100 m Indoors and 300 m Outdoors
Up to 300 m Indoors and 1 km Outdoors
25
Optional Security Services
* Requires Power Pack upgrade CPSB-500-UPG-PPACK or CPSB-1000-UPG-PPACK, depending on series.
** Super G and XR mode are only available with select wireless network adapters. Actual ranges are subject to change in different environments.
Optional Security Services
The following subscription security services are available to Safe@Office owners by connecting to a Service Center:
• Firewall Security and Software Updates
• Web Filtering
• Email Antivirus and Antispam Protection
• VStream Embedded Antivirus Updates
• VStream Embedded Antispam Service
• Dynamic DNS Service
• VPN Management
• Security Reporting
• Vulnerability Scanning Service
These services require an additional purchase of subscription. For more information, contact your Check Point reseller.
Software Requirements
One of the following browsers:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher
• Netscape Navigator 6.0 and higher
• Mozilla Firefox
Note: For proper operation of the Safe@Office Portal, disable any pop-up blockers for http://my.firewall.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 26
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N Appliance
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N Appliance
Package Contents
The Safe@Office 1000N package includes the following:
• Safe@Office 1000N Internet Security Appliance
• Power adapter
• CAT5 Straight-through Ethernet cable
• Getting Started Guide
• Documentation CDROM
• Wall mounting kit
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9)
Network Requirements
• 10BaseT or 100BaseT or 1000BaseT Network Interface Card installed on each computer
• CAT 5 STP (Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair) Straight Through Ethernet cable for each attached device
• A broadband Internet connection via cable or DSL modem with Ethernet interface (RJ-45)
Chapter 1: Introduction 27
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N Appliance
Rear Panel
All physical connections (network and power) are made via the rear panel of your
Safe@Office appliance.
Figure 1: Safe@Office 1000N Appliance Rear Panel
The following table lists the Safe@Office 1000N appliance's rear panel elements.
Table 6: Safe@Office 1000N Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
LAN 1-4 Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting computers or other network devices
DMZ/
WAN2
WAN
Serial
A dedicated Ethernet port (RJ-45) used to connect a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) computer or network. Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port or as a
VLAN trunk.
Wide Area Network: An Ethernet port (RJ-45) used for connecting your broadband modem, a wide area network router, or a network leading to the Internet
A serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the
Safe@Office CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup modem.
An RJ-45 to DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
Warning: Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 serial port.
28 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Label
RESET
PWR
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N Appliance
Description
A button used for rebooting the Safe@Office appliance or resetting the
Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press this button.
• Short press. Reboots the Safe@Office appliance
• Long press (10 seconds or until SYS LED begins to blink rapidly). Resets the
Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults, and resets your firmware to the version that shipped with the Safe@Office appliance. This results in the loss of all security services and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will have to re-configure your Safe@Office appliance.
Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.
A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power adapter to this jack.
Front Panel
The Safe@Office 1000N appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 2: Safe@Office 1000N Appliance Front Panel
For an explanation of the Safe@Office 1000N appliance’s status LEDs, see the table below.
Chapter 1: Introduction 29
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N Appliance
Table 7: Safe@Office 1000N Appliance Status LEDs
LED State Explanation
Off Power off Power
On (Green) Normal operation
System On (Red)
Flashing quickly (Red)
Flashing slowly (Orange)
Flashing quickly (Green)
Boot failed or TFTP mode
High temperature or system failure
Writing update to flash memory
System boot in progress
Flashing slowly (Green)
On (Green)
Establishing Internet connection
Normal operation
Security Off Normal operation
Flashing for 5 sec (Orange) Virus blocked
Flashing for 1 sec (Red)
GbE Status
(WAN / DMZ /
LAN 1-4)
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT Off
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT On (Green)
1000Mbps On (Orange),
LINK/ACT On
1000Mbps On (Green),
LINK/ACT On
Hacker attack blocked
No Link
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
1000 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
30 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance
VPN
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
1000Mbps On (Orange),
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
1000Mbps On (Green),
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
Off
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
RS232/Serial Off
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
1000 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
No VPN tunnel established
VPN idle / No activity
VPN activity
No data terminal connected
Data terminal ready
Serial activity
Chapter 1: Introduction 31
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N ADSL
Appliance
Package Contents
The Safe@Office 1000N ADSL package includes the following:
• Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Internet Security Appliance
• Power adapter
• CAT5 Straight-through Ethernet cable
• Getting Started Guide
• Documentation CDROM
• Wall mounting kit
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9)
• RJ11 telephone cable
Network Requirements
• 10BaseT or 100BaseT or 1000BaseT Network Interface Card installed on each computer
• CAT 5 STP (Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair) Straight Through Ethernet cable for each attached device
• An ADSL line suitable for your appliance model:
• For Annex A ADSL models, an ADSL over POTS line (regular telephone line)
• For Annex B ADSL models, an ADSL over ISDN line (digital line)
• A splitter with a micro-filter, installed on all the jacks connected to the same phone line
32 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance
• If desired, you can connect your appliance to an external broadband Internet connection via a cable or DSL modem with an Ethernet interface (RJ-45).
Rear Panel
All physical connections (network and power) are made via the rear panel of your
Safe@Office appliance.
Figure 3: Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance Rear Panel
The following table lists the Safe@Office 1000N ADSL appliance's rear panel elements.
Table 8: Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
LAN 1-4 Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting computers or other network devices
DMZ/
WAN2
DMZ/WAN2 switch: Two ports used for connecting a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) computer or network:
• An Ethernet port (RJ-45) on the left
• An SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) port on the right
Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port or as a VLAN trunk.
Only one of these ports can be used at a time.
Chapter 1: Introduction 33
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance
Label
DSL
Description
An RJ-11 ADSL port used for connecting the integrated ADSL modem to an ADSL line.
A splitter with a micro-filter is usually required when connecting this port to the phone jack. If unsure, check with your ADSL service provider.
Before connecting this port to the line, make sure that you are using the correct
Safe@Office model for your phone line: Annex A for POTS (regular) phone lines, and Annex B for ISDN (digital) phone lines. Your Safe@Office model's ADSL annex type appears on the bottom of the appliance.
Serial
USB
RESET
PWR
A serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the
Safe@Office CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup modem.
An RJ-45 to DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
Warning: Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 serial port.
Two USB 2.0 ports used for connecting USB-based printers or modems
A button used for rebooting the Safe@Office appliance or resetting the
Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press this button.
• Short press. Reboots the Safe@Office appliance
• Long press (10 seconds or until the SYS LED begins to blink rapidly). Resets the Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults, and resets your firmware to the version that shipped with the Safe@Office appliance.
This results in the loss of all security services and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will have to re-configure your Safe@Office appliance.
Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.
A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power adapter to this jack.
34 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance
Side Panel
The side panel includes a slot for inserting an ExpressCard cellular modem.
Figure 4: Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance Side Panel
Front Panel
The Safe@Office 1000N ADSL appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 5: Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance Front Panel
For an explanation of the Safe@Office 1000N ADSL appliance’s status LEDs, see the table below.
Table 9: Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance Status LEDs
LED State Explanation
Power Off Power off
On (Green) Normal operation
System On (Red) Boot failed or TFTP mode
Chapter 1: Introduction 35
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance
Flashing quickly (Red) High temperature or system failure
Flashing slowly (Orange) Writing update to flash memory
Flashing quickly (Green) System boot in progress
Flashing slowly (Green) Establishing Internet connection
On (Green) Normal operation
Security Off Normal operation
Flashing for 5 sec (Orange) Virus blocked
Flashing for 1 sec (Red)
GbE Status
(LAN 1-4 /
DMZ/WAN2)
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT Off
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT On (Green)
1000Mbps On (Orange),
LINK/ACT On
1000Mbps On (Green),
LINK/ACT On
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
Hacker attack blocked
No Link
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
1000 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
1000Mbps On (Orange),
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
36 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000N ADSL Appliance
DSL
VPN
Link Off
Link Flashing
Link On
DAT Off
DAT Flashing
Off
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
RS232/Serial Off
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
USB Off
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
Off EXC
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
1000Mbps On (Green),
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
1000 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
Link is down
Establishing ADSL connection
ADSL connection established
ADSL line is idle
Data is being transmitted/received
No VPN tunnel established
VPN idle / No activity
VPN activity
No data terminal connected
Data terminal ready
Serial activity
No USB device connected
USB device connected
Activity on the USB device
No ExpressCard connected
ExpressCard connected
Activity on the ExpressCard
Chapter 1: Introduction 37
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW
Appliance
Package Contents
The Safe@Office 1000NW package includes the following:
• Safe@Office 1000NW Wireless Security Appliance
• Power adapter
• CAT5 Straight-through Ethernet cable
• Getting Started Guide
• Documentation CDROM
• Wall mounting kit
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9)
• Two antennas
• USB extension cable
Network Requirements
• 10BaseT or 100BaseT or 1000BaseT Network Interface Card installed on each computer
• CAT 5 STP (Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair) Straight Through Ethernet cable for each attached device
• An 802.11b, 802.11g, or 802.11n wireless card installed on each wireless station
• A broadband Internet connection via cable or DSL modem, with Ethernet (RJ-
45)
38 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance
Rear Panel
All physical connections (network and power) are made via the rear panel of your
Safe@Office appliance.
Figure 6: Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance Rear Panel
The following table lists the Safe@Office 1000NW appliance's rear panel elements.
Table 10: Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
LAN 1-4 Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting computers or other network devices
DMZ/
WAN2
WAN
A dedicated Ethernet port (RJ-45) used to connect a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) computer or network. Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port or as a
VLAN trunk.
Wide Area Network switch: An Ethernet port (RJ-45) used for connecting your broadband modem, a wide area network router, or a network leading to the
Chapter 1: Introduction 39
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance
Label Description
Internet.
Serial
USB
RESET
PWR
ANT 1/
ANT 2
A serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the
Safe@Office CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup modem.
An RJ-45 to DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
Warning: Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 serial port.
Two USB 2.0 ports used for connecting USB-based printers or modems
A button used for rebooting the Safe@Office appliance or resetting the
Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press this button.
• Short press. Reboots the Safe@Office appliance
• Long press (10 seconds or until the SYS LED begins to blink rapidly). Resets the Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults, and resets your firmware to the version that shipped with the Safe@Office appliance.
This results in the loss of all security services and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will have to re-configure your Safe@Office appliance.
Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.
A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power adapter to this jack.
Antenna connectors, used to connect the supplied wireless antennas .
40 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance
Front Panel
The Safe@Office 1000NW appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 7: Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance Front Panel
For an explanation of the Safe@Office 1000NW appliance’s status LEDs, see the table below.
Table 11: Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance Status LEDs
LED State Explanation
Off Power off Power
On (Green) Normal operation
System On (Red)
Flashing quickly (Red)
Flashing slowly (Orange)
Boot failed or TFTP mode
High temperature or system failure
Writing update to flash memory
Chapter 1: Introduction 41
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance
Flashing quickly (Green) System boot in progress
Flashing slowly (Green) Establishing Internet connection
On (Green) Normal operation
Security Off Normal operation
Flashing for 5 sec (Orange) Virus blocked
Flashing for 1 sec (Red)
GbE Status
(WAN / DMZ /
LAN 1-4)
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT Off
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT On (Green)
1000Mbps On (Orange),
LINK/ACT On
1000Mbps On (Green),
LINK/ACT On
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
Hacker attack blocked
No Link
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
1000 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
1000Mbps On (Orange),
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
1000Mbps On (Green),
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
1000 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
42 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
USB
VPN Off
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
RS232/Serial Off
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
WLAN Off
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
Off
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW Appliance
No VPN tunnel established
VPN idle / No activity
VPN activity
No data terminal connected
Data terminal ready
Serial activity
WLAN not enabled/connected
WLAN connected in idle /
No activity
WLAN activity
No USB device connected
USB device connected
Activity on the USB device
Chapter 1: Introduction 43
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL
Appliance
Package Contents
The Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL package includes the following:
• Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Wireless Security Appliance
• Power adapter
• CAT5 Straight-through Ethernet cable
• Getting Started Guide
• Documentation CDROM
• Wall mounting kit
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9)
• Two antennas
• USB extension cable
• RJ11 telephone cable
Network Requirements
• 10BaseT or 100BaseT or 1000BaseT Network Interface Card installed on each computer
• CAT 5 STP (Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair) Straight Through Ethernet cable for each attached device
• An 802.11b, 802.11g, or 802.11n wireless card installed on each wireless station
• An ADSL line suitable for your appliance model:
• For Annex A ADSL models, an ADSL over POTS line (regular telephone line)
• For Annex B ADSL models, an ADSL over ISDN line (digital line)
44 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance
• A splitter with a micro-filter, installed on all the jacks connected to the same phone line
• If desired, you can connect your appliance to an external broadband Internet connection via a cable or DSL modem with an Ethernet interface (RJ-45).
Rear Panel
All physical connections (network and power) are made via the rear panel of your
Safe@Office appliance.
Figure 8: Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance Rear Panel
The following table lists the Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL appliance's rear panel elements.
45 Chapter 1: Introduction
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance
Table 12: Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
LAN 1-4 Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting computers or other network devices
DMZ/
WAN2
DSL
Serial
USB
RESET
A dedicated Ethernet port (RJ-45) used to connect a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) computer or network. Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port or as a
VLAN trunk.
An RJ-11 ADSL port used for connecting the integrated ADSL modem to an ADSL line.
A splitter with a micro-filter is usually required when connecting this port to the phone jack. If unsure, check with your ADSL service provider.
Before connecting this port to the line, make sure that you are using the correct
Safe@Office model for your phone line: Annex A for POTS (regular) phone lines, and Annex B for ISDN (digital) phone lines. Your Safe@Office model's ADSL annex type appears on the bottom of the appliance.
A serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the
Safe@Office CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup modem.
An RJ-45 to DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
Warning: Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 serial port.
A USB 2.0 port used for connecting a USB-based printer or modem
A button used for rebooting the Safe@Office appliance or resetting the
Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press this button.
• Short press. Reboots the Safe@Office appliance
• Long press (10 seconds or until the SYS LED begins to blink rapidly). Resets the Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults, and resets your
46 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Label
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance
PWR
Description firmware to the version that shipped with the Safe@Office appliance.
This results in the loss of all security services and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will have to re-configure your Safe@Office appliance.
Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.
A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power adapter to this jack.
Antenna connectors, used to connect the supplied wireless antennas . ANT 1/
ANT 2
Side Panel
The side panel includes a slot for inserting an ExpressCard cellular modem.
Figure 9: Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance Side Panel
Chapter 1: Introduction 47
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance
Front Panel
The Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 10: Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance Front Panel
For an explanation of the Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL appliance’s status LEDs, see the table below.
Table 13: Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance Status LEDs
LED State Explanation
Off Power off Power
On (Green) Normal operation
System
Security
On (Red)
Flashing quickly (Red)
Flashing slowly (Orange)
Flashing quickly (Green)
Boot failed or TFTP mode
High temperature or system failure
Writing update to flash memory
System boot in progress
Flashing slowly (Green)
On (Green)
Establishing Internet connection
Normal operation
Off Normal operation
Flashing for 5 sec (Orange) Virus blocked
Flashing for 1 sec (Red) Hacker attack blocked
48 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
DSL
GbE Status
(LAN 1-4 /
DMZ/WAN2)
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT Off
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT On (Green)
1000Mbps On (Orange),
LINK/ACT On
1000Mbps On (Green),
LINK/ACT On
1000Mbps Off,
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
1000Mbps On (Orange),
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
1000Mbps On (Green),
LINK/ACT Flashing (Green)
Link Off
Link Flashing
Link On
DAT Off
DAT Flashing
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance
No Link
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
1000 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
1000 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
Link is down
Establishing ADSL connection
ADSL connection established
ADSL line is idle
Data is being transmitted/received
Chapter 1: Introduction 49
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL Appliance
Off No VPN tunnel established VPN
On (Green) VPN idle / No activity
Flashing (Green) VPN activity
RS232/Serial Off
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
No data terminal connected
Data terminal ready
Serial activity
No USB device connected USB Off
On (Green) USB device connected
Activity on the USB device
WLAN
Flashing (Green)
Off
On (Green)
WLAN not enabled/connected
WLAN connected in idle /
No activity
Flashing (Green)
Off
WLAN activity
No ExpressCard connected EXC
On (Green)
Flashing (Green)
ExpressCard connected
Activity on the ExpressCard
50 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 Appliance
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 Appliance
Package Contents
The Safe@Office 500 package includes the following:
• Safe@Office 500 Internet Security Appliance
• Power adapter
• CAT5 Straight-through Ethernet cable
• Getting Started Guide
• Documentation CDROM
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9); model SBX-166LHGE-5 only
Network Requirements
• 10BaseT or 100BaseT Network Interface Card installed on each computer
• CAT 5 STP (Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair) Straight Through Ethernet cable for each attached device
• A broadband Internet connection via cable or DSL modem with Ethernet interface (RJ-45)
Rear Panel
All physical connections (network and power) are made via the rear panel of your
Safe@Office appliance.
Figure 11: Safe@Office 500 SBX-166LHGE-5 Appliance Rear Panel
Chapter 1: Introduction 51
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 Appliance
Figure 12: Safe@Office 500 SBX-166LHGE-6 Appliance Rear Panel
The following table lists the Safe@Office 500 appliance's rear panel elements.
Table 14: Safe@Office 500 Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
PWR A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power adapter to this jack.
RESET
Serial
A button used for rebooting the Safe@Office appliance or resetting the
Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press this button.
• Short press. Reboots the Safe@Office appliance
• Long press (7 seconds). Resets the Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults, and resets your firmware to the version that shipped with the
Safe@Office appliance. This results in the loss of all security services and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will have to re-configure your Safe@Office appliance.
Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.
A serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the
Safe@Office CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup modem.
Depending on the appliance model, this port may have either a DB9 RS232 connector, or an RJ-45 connector. In models with an RJ-45 connector, an RJ-45 to
DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
Warning: Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 serial port.
52 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Label
WAN
DMZ/
WAN2
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 Appliance
Description
Wide Area Network: An Ethernet port (RJ-45) used for connecting your broadband modem, a wide area network router, or a network leading to the Internet.
A dedicated Ethernet port (RJ-45) used to connect a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) computer or network. Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port or as a
VLAN trunk.
LAN 1-4 Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting computers or other network devices.
Front Panel
The Safe@Office 500 appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 13: Safe@Office 500 Appliance Front Panel
For an explanation of the Safe@Office 500 appliance’s status LEDs, see the following table.
Table 15: Safe@Office 500 Appliance Status LEDs
LED State Explanation
PWR/SEC Off
Flashing quickly (Green)
Power off
System boot-up, or rapid deployment in progress
Flashing slowly (Green) Establishing Internet connection
Chapter 1: Introduction 53
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance
LED State
Flashing (Red)
VPN
Serial
LAN 1-4/
WAN/
DMZ/WAN2
On (Green)
On (Red)
LINK/ACT Off, 100 Off
LINK/ACT On, 100 Off
LINK/ACT On, 100 On
LNK/ACT Flashing
Off
Flashing (Green)
On (Green)
Off
Flashing (Green)
Explanation
Hacker attack blocked, or error occurred during rapid deployment process
Normal operation
Error
Link is down
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
No VPN activity
VPN activity
VPN tunnels established, no activity
No Serial port activity
Serial port activity
54 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 ADSL
Appliance
Package Contents
The Safe@Office 500 ADSL package includes the following:
• Safe@Office 500 ADSL Internet Security Appliance
• Power adapter
• CAT5 Straight-through Ethernet cable
• Getting Started Guide
• Documentation CDROM
• Wall mounting kit
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9)
• USB extension cable
• RJ11 telephone cable
Network Requirements
• 10BaseT or 100BaseT Network Interface Card installed on each computer
• CAT 5 STP (Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair) Straight Through Ethernet cable for each attached device
• An ADSL line suitable for your appliance model:
• For Annex A ADSL models, an ADSL over POTS line (regular telephone line)
• For Annex B ADSL models, an ADSL over ISDN line (digital line)
• A splitter with a micro-filter, installed on all the jacks connected to the same phone line
Chapter 1: Introduction 55
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance
• If desired, you can connect your appliance to an external broadband Internet connection via a cable or DSL modem with an Ethernet interface (RJ-45).
Rear Panel
All physical connections (network and power) are made via the rear panel of your
Safe@Office appliance.
Figure 14: Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance Rear Panel
The following table lists the Safe@Office 500 ADSL appliance's rear panel elements.
Table 16: Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
PWR A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power adapter to this jack.
RESET
USB
A button used for rebooting the Safe@Office appliance or resetting the
Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press this button.
• Short press. Reboots the Safe@Office appliance
• Long press (7 seconds). Resets the Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults, and resets your firmware to the version that shipped with the
Safe@Office appliance. This results in the loss of all security services and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will have to re-configure your Safe@Office appliance.
Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.
Two USB 2.0 ports used for connecting USB-based printers or modems
56 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Label
Serial
DSL
DMZ/
WAN2
LAN 1-4
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance
Description
An RJ-45 serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the Safe@Office CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup modem.
An RJ-45 to DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
Warning: Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 serial port.
An RJ-11 ADSL port used for connecting the integrated ADSL modem to an ADSL line.
A splitter with a micro-filter is usually required when connecting this port to the phone jack. If unsure, check with your ADSL service provider.
Before connecting this port to the line, make sure that you are using the correct
Safe@Office model for your phone line: Annex A for POTS (regular) phone lines, and Annex B for ISDN (digital) phone lines. Your Safe@Office model's ADSL annex type appears on the bottom of the appliance.
A dedicated Ethernet port (RJ-45) used to connect a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) computer or network. Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port or as a
VLAN trunk.
Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting computers or other network devices.
Chapter 1: Introduction 57
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance
Front Panel
The Safe@Office 500 ADSL appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 15: Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance Front Panel
For an explanation of the Safe@Office 500 ADSL appliance’s status LEDs, see the following table.
Table 17: Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance Status LEDs
LED State Explanation
PWR/SEC Off
Flashing quickly (Green)
Power off
System boot-up, or rapid deployment in progress
Flashing slowly (Green) Establishing Internet connection
Flashing (Red) Hacker attack blocked, or error occurred during rapid deployment process
On (Green) Normal operation
Error On (Red)
LINK/ACT Off, 100 Off
Link is down LAN 1-4/
DMZ/WAN2
LINK/ACT On, 100 Off
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
58 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
LED
DSL
VPN
Serial
USB
State
LINK/ACT On, 100 On
LNK/ACT Flashing
Link Off
Link Flashing
Link On
DAT Off
DAT Flashing
Off
Flashing (Green)
On (Green)
Off
Flashing (Green)
Off
Flashing (Green)
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500 ADSL Appliance
Explanation
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
Link is down
Establishing ADSL connection
ADSL connection established
ADSL line is idle
Data is being transmitted/received
No VPN activity
VPN activity
VPN tunnels established, no activity
No Serial port activity
Serial port activity
No USB port activity
USB port activity
Chapter 1: Introduction 59
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W Appliance
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W Appliance
Package Contents
The Safe@Office 500W package includes the following:
• Safe@Office 500W Internet Security Appliance
• Power adapter
• CAT5 Straight-through Ethernet cable
• Getting Started Guide
• Documentation CDROM
• Wall mounting kit
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9); model SBXW-166LHGE-5 only
• Two antennas
• USB extension cable
60 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W Appliance
Network Requirements
• 10BaseT or 100BaseT Network Interface Card installed on each computer
• CAT 5 STP (Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair) Straight Through Ethernet cable for each attached device
• An 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11 Super G wireless card installed on each wireless station
• A broadband Internet connection via cable or DSL modem with Ethernet interface (RJ-45)
Rear Panel
All physical connections (network and power) are made via the rear panel of your
Safe@Office appliance.
Figure 16: Safe@Office 500W SBXW-166LHGE-5 Appliance Rear Panel
Figure 17: Safe@Office 500W SBXW-166LHGE-6 Appliance Rear Panel
The following table lists the Safe@Office 500W appliance's rear panel elements.
Chapter 1: Introduction 61
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W Appliance
Table 18: Safe@Office 500W Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
PWR A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power adapter to this jack.
RESET
USB
Serial
WAN
DMZ/
WAN2
A button used for rebooting the Safe@Office appliance or resetting the
Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press this button.
• Short press. Reboots the Safe@Office appliance
• Long press (7 seconds). Resets the Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults, and resets your firmware to the version that shipped with the
Safe@Office appliance. This results in the loss of all security services and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will have to re-configure your Safe@Office appliance.
Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.
Two USB 2.0 ports used for connecting USB-based printers or modems
A serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the
Safe@Office CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup modem.
Depending on the appliance model, this port may have either a DB9 RS232 connector, or an RJ-45 connector. In models with an RJ-45 connector, an RJ-45 to
DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
Warning: Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 serial port.
Wide Area Network: An Ethernet port (RJ-45) used for connecting your broadband modem, a wide area network router, or a network leading to the Internet.
A dedicated Ethernet port (RJ-45) used to connect a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) computer or network. Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port or as a
VLAN trunk.
62 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Label
LAN 1-4
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W Appliance
Description
Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting computers or other network devices.
ANT 1/
ANT 2
Antenna connectors, used to connect the supplied wireless antennas .
Front Panel
The Safe@Office 500W appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 18: Safe@Office 500W Appliance Front Panel
For an explanation of the Safe@Office 500W appliance’s status LEDs, see the following table.
Table 19: Safe@Office 500W Appliance Status LEDs
LED State Explanation
PWR/SEC Off
Flashing quickly (Green)
Power off
System boot-up, or rapid deployment in progress
Flashing slowly (Green) Establishing Internet connection
Flashing (Red) Hacker attack blocked, or error occurred during rapid deployment process
On (Green) Normal operation
Chapter 1: Introduction 63
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W Appliance
LED
LAN 1-4/
WAN/
DMZ/WAN2
State
On (Red)
Flashing (Orange)
LINK/ACT Off, 100 Off
LINK/ACT On, 100 Off
VPN
Serial
USB
WLAN
LINK/ACT On, 100 On
LNK/ACT Flashing
Off
Flashing (Green)
On (Green)
Off
Flashing (Green)
Off
Flashing (Green)
Off
Flashing (Green)
Explanation
Error
Software update in progress
Link is down
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
No VPN activity
VPN activity
VPN tunnels established, no activity
No Serial port activity
Serial port activity
No USB port activity
USB port activity
No WLAN activity
WLAN activity
64 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W ADSL Appliance
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W ADSL
Appliance
Package Contents
The Safe@Office 500W ADSL package includes the following:
• Safe@Office 500W ADSL Internet Security Appliance
• Power adapter
• CAT5 Straight-through Ethernet cable
• Getting Started Guide
• Documentation CDROM
• Wall mounting kit
• RS232 serial adaptor (RJ45 to DB9)
• Two antennas
• USB extension cable
• RJ11 telephone cable
Network Requirements
• 10BaseT or 100BaseT Network Interface Card installed on each computer
• CAT 5 STP (Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair) Straight Through Ethernet cable for each attached device
• An ADSL line suitable for your appliance model:
• For Annex A ADSL models, an ADSL over POTS line (regular telephone line)
• For Annex B ADSL models, an ADSL over ISDN line (digital line)
• A splitter with a micro-filter, installed on all the jacks connected to the same phone line
Chapter 1: Introduction 65
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W ADSL Appliance
• If desired, you can connect your appliance to an external broadband Internet connection via a cable or DSL modem with an Ethernet interface (RJ-45).
• An 802.11b, 802.11g or 802.11 Super G wireless card installed on each wireless station
Rear Panel
All physical connections (network and power) are made via the rear panel of your
Safe@Office appliance.
Figure 19: Safe@Office 500W ADSL Appliance Rear Panel
The following table lists the Safe@Office 500W ADSL appliance's rear panel elements.
Table 20: Safe@Office 500W ADSL Appliance Rear Panel Elements
Label Description
PWR A power jack used for supplying power to the unit. Connect the supplied power adapter to this jack.
RESET
USB
A button used for rebooting the Safe@Office appliance or resetting the
Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults. You need to use a pointed object to press this button.
• Short press. Reboots the Safe@Office appliance
• Long press (7 seconds). Resets the Safe@Office appliance to its factory defaults, and resets your firmware to the version that shipped with the
Safe@Office appliance. This results in the loss of all security services and passwords and reverting to the factory default firmware. You will have to re-configure your Safe@Office appliance.
Do not reset the unit without consulting your system administrator.
Two USB 2.0 ports used for connecting USB-based printers or modems
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 66
Label
Serial
DSL
DMZ/
WAN2
LAN 1-4
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W ADSL Appliance
Description
An RJ-45 serial (RS-232) port used for connecting computers in order to access the Safe@Office CLI (Command Line Interface), or for connecting an external dialup modem.
An RJ-45 to DB9 converter is supplied for your convenience.
Warning: Do not connect an Ethernet cable to the RJ-45 serial port.
An RJ-11 ADSL port used for connecting the integrated ADSL modem to an ADSL line.
A splitter with a micro-filter is usually required when connecting this port to the phone jack. If unsure, check with your ADSL service provider.
Before connecting this port to the line, make sure that you are using the correct
Safe@Office model for your phone line: Annex A for POTS (regular) phone lines, and Annex B for ISDN (digital) phone lines. Your Safe@Office model's ADSL annex type appears on the bottom of the appliance.
A dedicated Ethernet port (RJ-45) used to connect a DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) computer or network. Alternatively, can serve as a secondary WAN port or as a
VLAN trunk.
Local Area Network switch: Four Ethernet ports (RJ-45) used for connecting computers or other network devices.
Antenna connectors, used to connect the supplied wireless antennas . ANT1 /
ANT2
Chapter 1: Introduction 67
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W ADSL Appliance
Front Panel
The Safe@Office 500W ADSL appliance includes several status LEDs that enable you to monitor the appliance’s operation.
Figure 20: Safe@Office 500W ADSL Appliance Front Panel
For an explanation of the Safe@Office 500W ADSL appliance’s status LEDs, see the following table.
Table 21: Safe@Office 500W ADSL Appliance Status LEDs
LED State Explanation
PWR/SEC Off
Flashing quickly (Green)
Power off
System boot-up, or rapid deployment in progress
Flashing slowly (Green) Establishing Internet connection
Flashing (Red) Hacker attack blocked, or error occurred during rapid deployment process
On (Green) Normal operation
Error On (Red)
LINK/ACT Off, 100 Off
Link is down LAN 1-4/
DMZ/WAN2
LINK/ACT On, 100 Off
10 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
68 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
LED
DSL
VPN
Serial
USB
WLAN
State
LINK/ACT On, 100 On
LNK/ACT Flashing
Link Off
Link Flashing
Link On
DAT Off
DAT Flashing
Off
Flashing (Green)
On (Green)
Off
Flashing (Green)
Off
Flashing (Green)
Off
Flashing (Green)
Getting to Know Your Safe@Office 500W ADSL Appliance
Explanation
100 Mbps link established for the corresponding port
Data is being transmitted/received
Link is down
Establishing ADSL connection
ADSL connection established
ADSL line is idle
Data is being transmitted/received
No VPN activity
VPN activity
VPN tunnels established, no activity
No Serial port activity
Serial port activity
No USB port activity
USB port activity
No WLAN activity
WLAN activity
Chapter 1: Introduction 69
Contacting Technical Support
Contacting Technical Support
In case of a problem with your Safe@Office appliance, see http://www.sofaware.com/support.
You can also download the latest version of this guide from the site.
70 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Introduction to Information Security
Chapter 2
Safe@Office Security
This chapter explains the basic security concepts on which Safe@Office security is based.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Introduction to Information Security .......................................................... 71
Introduction to Information Security
Network security is but a small part of information security, which in turn is only a fraction of general security. In order to understand why the Safe@Office appliance is the best product for securing the business network, we must first examine information security requirements in general.
Information is Valuable!
The most valuable asset an organization has is its information. The type of information maintained by an organization depends on the organization's type and purpose. For example:
• Almost every organization stores information about its operations, such as employees' names and other personal details, salaries, and so on.
• Depending on the role of different governmental offices, they may store personal information about citizens, residential addresses, car licenses registration, and so on.
• The army stores information about its soldiers, weapons inventory, and intelligence information about other armies. Much of this information is confidential.
• A bank stores information about its customers' accounts, their money transactions, ATM machine access codes, and so on. Much of this information is confidential.
Chapter 2: Safe@Office Security 71
Introduction to Information Security
• Commercial companies store information about their revenues, business and marketing plans, current and future product lines, information about competitors, and so on.
Just as the type of information may differ from organization to organization, the form in which it is stored may vary. For example, some forms of information are:
• Information recorded in written media, such as paper documents, books, and files
• Knowledge that is stored in a person's mind and can be exchanged verbally
• Information stored on electronic media, such as computers' hard drives, CDs, and tapes
The form in which an organization stores its information may make the information more or less accessible to people outside the organization.
Why Protect Business Information?
There are various reasons why it is necessary to protect business information:
• To prevent the theft, abuse, misuse, or any form of damage to crucial information
For example, no business wants to find its customer list or future secret product line plans in the hands of the competition.
• To comply with local laws
Local laws may enforce the protection, integrity, and availability of specific information, such as an individual's personal details, in order to respect the individual's right to privacy. Local laws may also enforce the security requirements made in the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act of 1996 (HIPAA).
• To comply with another organization's security requirements
Some organizations require their business partners to comply with international standards of security.
72 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Introduction to Information Security
Information Security Challenges
The challenges of information security can be divided into the following areas:
• Confidentiality and Privacy - Ensuring that only the intended recipients can read certain information
• Authentication - Ensuring that information is actually sent by the stated sender
• Integrity - Ensuring that the original information was not altered and that no one tampered with it
• Availability - Ensuring that important information can be accessed at all times and places
The Security Policy
In order to meet these challenges, an organization must create and enforce a security
policy. A security policy is a set of rules that defines how and by whom sensitive information should be accessed, handled, and distributed, both within and outside of the organization. For example, a security policy may include the following rules regarding visitors who arrive at an enterprise building's lobby:
• Visitors must sign in at the entrance desk.
• Visitors must wear a visitor badge and be escorted while in the building.
• Visitors cannot use their badge to open electronic doors.
Other types of security policy rules and measures might be:
• Only the executive manager has access to financial reports.
• Visitors must open their bags for a security check.
• Surveillance cameras should be positioned in the area of the building.
• Passwords must be changed on a daily basis.
• Confidential papers must be shredded after use.
An organization's security policy is usually designed by a person who is in charge of handling all security matters for the organization. This person is called a security manager.
Chapter 2: Safe@Office Security 73
Introduction to Information Security
In order for a security policy be effective, it must be accompanied by the following measures:
• Awareness - A security policy must be accompanied by steps taken to increase the employees' awareness of security issues. If employees are unaware of a security policy rule and the reason for it, they are likely to break it.
• Enforcement - To enforce a security policy, an organization can take various measures, both human and electronic. For example:
• Installing surveillance cameras in strategic locations throughout the organization
• Positioning human guards who have the authority to prevent other people from entering the premises or certain areas on the premises
• Installing alarms that are triggered upon certain conditions
• Using magnetic identification tags to enforce and log access permissions to different areas on the premises
• Using “red phones” to encrypt highly confidential voice phone calls
• Updating - A security policy is a living thing that must be updated from time to time according to changing situations.
Unfortunately, even when a security policy is accompanied by these measures, its effectiveness is limited against a person with malicious intent.
Computer and Network Security
A great deal of an organization's existing information is processed and stored electronically by single (standalone) computers or computer networks. Therefore, an attack on an organization's computers or computer networks can result in extensive information theft or abuse. However, computers and computer networks today are not just tools used to store information; they are the heart of an organization's operations and crucial to its communication and business transactions. For example:
• Nowadays, most of an organization's communication and business transactions are conducted via email (regardless of the organization's size).
• Online stores process orders and supply products over the Internet.
• Emerging technology today allows an organization's branch offices to communicate, share data, and even establish low-cost VoIP (Voice over IP) communications, rather then using the traditional phone system.
74 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Introduction to Information Security
• Applications are hosted on a main computer rather than on personal workstations. This helps organizations share application resources. For example, in service departments, the customer database is located on a main computer, while all customer relations transactions are managed by software clients running on the agents' computers.
• In order to withdraw money from any ATM machine, your PIN and the details on your magnetic card are scanned and verified against the details on the main bank computer.
• A department store in New York can query the inventory of the main warehouse located in Chicago and enter orders for missing products, all in real time.
In other words, on top of the damage done by computer information theft or abuse, unauthorized access to a computer or a computer network can seriously damage the entire organization's essential operations, communications, and productivity. For example:
• An online store's Web site can be hacked, so customers cannot enter orders.
• An unauthorized user can take advantage of an organization's email server to send unsolicited bulks of email. As a result, the organization's Internet communication lines will be overloaded, and employees in the organization will be unable to send or receive emails.
Since computer and network security has become a central part of information and general security, security managers must either have an understanding of computers and networking, or work closely with network administrators and network security specialists.
Network Security and the Small Business
Network security has been and continues to be a major concern for large, enterprise-sized organizations. However, small businesses are no less of a target for Internet attacks, and they require a similar network security level, for the following reasons:
• Small business owners lack awareness of network security and unwittingly leave the door open to threats from within the network. For example, peer-to-peer applications are a source of virus-infected files, Trojans, and worms, any of which can be used to steal confidential information such as credit card numbers; however, many small business owners are unaware of the risk, and therefore do not block their employees from using peer-to-peer applications.
Chapter 2: Safe@Office Security 75
The Safe@Office Firewall
• Large businesses have the funds and expertise to constantly enhance their security and are therefore a difficult target for hackers. This makes small businesses a far more attractive target for network attacks.
• The state's awareness of privacy and data protection is enforced through legislation. For example, the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability
Act (HIPAA) that was enacted by the U.S. Congress in 1996 gives patients access to their medical files electronically, and therefore strictly defines the requirements for protecting electronic confidential data.
Not only are small businesses more vulnerable to Internet attacks, but due to their relative lack of technical and financial resources, they may suffer more damage than large organizations and the recovery may be more difficult.
The Safe@Office Firewall
What Is a Firewall?
The most effective way to secure an Internet link is to put a firewall between the local network and the Internet. A firewall is a system designed to prevent unauthorized access to or from a secured network. Firewalls act as locked doors between internal and external networks: data that meets certain requirements is allowed through, while unauthorized data is not.
To provide robust security, a firewall must track and control the flow of communication passing through it. To reach control decisions for TCP/IP-based services, (such as whether to accept, reject, authenticate, encrypt, and/or log communication attempts), a firewall must obtain, store, retrieve, and manipulate information derived from all communication layers and other applications.
76 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The Safe@Office Firewall
Security Requirements
In order to make control decisions for new communication attempts, it is not sufficient for the firewall to examine packets in isolation. Depending upon the communication attempt, both the communication state (derived from past communications) and the application state
(derived from other applications) may be critical in the control decision. Thus, to ensure the highest level of security, a firewall must be capable of accessing, analyzing, and utilizing the following:
• Communication information - Information from all seven layers in the packet
• Communication-derived state - The state derived from previous communications.
For example, the outgoing PORT command of an FTP session could be saved so that an incoming FTP data connection can be verified against it.
• Application-derived state - The state information derived from other applications.
For example, a previously authenticated user would be allowed access through the firewall for authorized services only.
• Information manipulation - The ability to perform logical or arithmetic functions on data in any part of the packet. For example, the ability to encrypt packets.
Old Firewall Technologies
Older firewall technologies, such as packet filtering and application-layer gateways, are still in use in some environments. It is important to familiarize yourself with these technologies, so as to better understand the benefits and advantages of the Check Point
Stateful Inspection firewall technology.
Packet Filters
Historically implemented on routers, packet filters filter user-defined content, such as IP addresses. They examine a packet at the network or transport layer and are applicationindependent, which allows them to deliver good performance and scalability.
Packet filters are the least secure type of firewall, as they are not application-aware, meaning that they cannot understand the context of a given communication. This makes them relatively easy targets for unauthorized entry to a network. A limitation of this type of filtering is its inability to provide security for basic protocols.
Chapter 2: Safe@Office Security 77
The Safe@Office Firewall
Packet filters have the following advantages and disadvantages:
Table 22: Packet Filter Advantages and Disadvantages
Advantages Disadvantages
Application independence Low security
High performance No screening above the network layer
Scalability
Application-Layer Gateways
Application-layer gateways improve security by examining all application layers, bringing context information into the decision-making process. However, the method they use to do this disrupts the client/server model, reducing scalability. Ordinarily, a client sends requests for information or action according to a specific protocol, and the server responds, all in one connection. With application-layer gateways, each client/server communications requires two connections: one from a client to a proxy, and one from a proxy to a server. In addition, each proxy requires a different process (or daemon), making support for new applications a problem.
Application-layer gateways have the following advantages and disadvantages:
Table 23: Application-Layer Gateway Advantages and Disadvantages
Advantages Disadvantages
Good security Poor performance
Full application-layer awareness Limited application support
Poor scalability (breaks the client/server model)
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 78
The Safe@Office Firewall
Check Point Stateful Inspection Technology
Invented by Check Point, Stateful Inspection is the industry standard for network security solutions. A powerful inspection module examines every packet, ensuring that packets do not enter a network unless they comply with the network's security policy.
Stateful Inspection technology implements all necessary firewall capabilities between the data and network layers. Packets are intercepted at the network layer for best performance
(as in packet filters), but the data derived from layers 3-7 is accessed and analyzed for improved security (compared to layers 4-7 in application-layer gateways). Stateful
Inspection incorporates communication and application-derived state and context information, which is stored and updated dynamically. This provides cumulative data against which subsequent communication attempts can be evaluated. Stateful Inspection also delivers the ability to create virtual-session information for tracking connectionless protocols, such as UDP-based and RPC applications.
Safe@Office appliances use Stateful Inspection technology to analyze all packet communication layers and extract the relevant communication and application state information. The Safe@Office appliance is installed at the entry point to your network, and serves as the gateway for the internal network computers. In this ideal location, the inspection module can inspect all traffic before it reaches the network.
Packet State and Context Information
To track and act on both state and context information for an application is to treat that traffic statefully. The following are examples of state and context-related information that a firewall should track and analyze:
• Packet-header information (source and destination address, protocol, source and destination port, and packet length)
• Connection state information (which ports are being opened for which connection)
• TCP and IP fragmentation data (including fragments and sequence numbers)
• Packet reassembly, application type, and context verification (to verify that the packet belongs to the communication session)
• Packet arrival and departure interface on the firewall
• Layer 2 information (such as VLAN ID and MAC address)
• Date and time of packet arrival or departure
79 Chapter 2: Safe@Office Security
The Safe@Office Firewall
The Safe@Office firewall examines IP addresses, port numbers, and any other information required. It understands the internal structures of the IP protocol family and applications, and is able to extract data from a packet's application content and store it, to provide context in cases where the application does not provide it. The Safe@Office firewall also stores and updates the state and context information in dynamic tables, providing cumulative data against which it inspects subsequent communications.
The Stateful Inspection Advantage - Passive FTP Example
In order to discuss the strength of Stateful Inspection technology in comparison to the other firewall technologies mentioned, we will examine the Passive FTP protocol and the ways that firewalls handle Passive FTP traffic pass-through.
FTP connections are unique, since they are established using two sessions or channels: one for command (AKA control) and one for data. The following table describes the steps of establishing a Passive FTP connection, where:
• C is the client port used in the command session,
• D is the client port used in the data session, and
• P is the server port used in the data session.
Table 24: Establishment of Passive FTP Connection
Step Channel
Type
Description Source TCP
Source
Port
Destination TCP
Destination
Port
1 CMD Client initiates a
PASV command to the FTP server on port 21
FTP client
C > 1023 FTP server 21
2 CMD Server responds with data port information P >
1023
FTP server
21 FTP client C
80 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The Safe@Office Firewall
Step Channel
Type
3 Data
Description Source TCP
Source
Port
Destination TCP
Destination
Port
Client initiates data connection to server on port P
FTP client
D > 1023 FTP server P
4 Data Server acknowledges data connection
FTP server
P FTP client D
The following diagram demonstrates the establishment of a Passive FTP connection through a firewall protecting the FTP server.
Figure 21: Establishment of Passive FTP Connection
From the FTP server's perspective, the following connections are established:
• Command connection from the client on a port greater than 1023, to the server on port 21
• Data connection from the client on a port greater than 1023, to the server on a
port greater than 1023
The fact that both of the channels are established by the client presents a challenge for the firewall protecting the FTP server: while a firewall can easily be configured to identify incoming command connections over the default port 21, it must also be able to handle incoming data connections over a dynamic port that is negotiated randomly as part of the
81 Chapter 2: Safe@Office Security
The Safe@Office Firewall
FTP client-server communication. The following table examines how different firewall technologies handle this challenge:
Table 25: Firewall Technologies and Passive FTP Connections
Firewall Technology Action
Packet Filter Packet filters can handle outbound FTP connections in either of the following ways:
• By leaving the entire upper range of ports (greater than
1023) open. While this allows the file transfer session to take place over the dynamically allocated port, it also exposes the internal network.
• By shutting down the entire upper range of ports. While this secures the internal network, it also blocks other services.
Thus packet filters' handling of Passive FTP comes at the expense of either application support or security.
Application-Layer Gateway
(Proxy)
Application-layer gateways use an FTP proxy that acts as a gobetween for all client-server sessions.
This approach overcomes the limitations of packet filtering by bringing application-layer awareness to the decision process; however, it also takes a high toll on performance. In addition, each service requires its own proxy (an FTP proxy for FTP sessions, an HTTP proxy for HTTP session, and so on), and since the application-layer gateway can only support a certain number of proxies, its usefulness and scalability is limited. Finally, this approach exposes the operating system to external threats.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 82
The Safe@Office Firewall
Firewall Technology Action
Stateful Inspection Firewall A Stateful Inspection firewall examines the FTP application-layer data in an FTP session. When the client initiates a command session, the firewall extracts the port number from the request. The firewall then records both the client and server's IP addresses and port numbers in an FTP-data pending request list. When the client later attempts to initiate a data connection, the firewall compares the connection request's parameters (ports and IP addresses) to the information in the FTP-data pending request list, to determine whether the connection attempt is legitimate.
Since the FTP-data pending request list is dynamic, the firewall can ensure that only the required FTP ports open. When the session is closed, the firewall immediately closes the ports, guaranteeing the
FTP server's continued security.
What Other Stateful Inspection Firewalls Cannot Do
The level of security that a stateful firewall provides is determined by the richness of data tracked, and how thoroughly the data is analyzed. Treating traffic statefully requires application awareness. Firewalls without application awareness must open a range of ports for certain applications, which leads to exploitable holes in the firewall and violates security “best practices”.
TCP packet reassembly on all services and applications is a fundamental requirement for any Stateful Inspection firewall. Without this capability, fragmented packets of legitimate connections may be dropped, or those carrying network attacks may be allowed to enter a network. The implications in either case are potentially severe. When a truly stateful firewall receives fragmented packets, the packets are reassembled into their original form.
The entire stream of data is analyzed for conformity to protocol definition and for packetpayload validity.
True Stateful Inspection means tracking the state and context of all communications. This requires a detailed level of application awareness. The Safe@Office appliance provides true Stateful Inspection.
83 Chapter 2: Safe@Office Security
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
Chapter 3
Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office
This chapter describes how to properly set up and install your Safe@Office appliance in your networking environment.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance ......................................... 85
Wall Mounting the Safe@Office Appliance............................................. 103
Securing the Safe@Office Appliance against Theft ................................. 105
Setting Up the Safe@Office Appliance .................................................... 107
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
Prior to connecting and setting up your Safe@Office appliance for operation, you must do the following:
• Check if TCP/IP Protocol is installed on your computer.
• Check your computer’s TCP/IP settings to make sure it obtains its IP address automatically.
Refer to the relevant section in this guide in accordance with the operating system that runs on your computer. The sections below will guide you through the TCP/IP setup and installation process.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 85
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
Windows Vista
Checking the TCP/IP Installation
1. Click
Start > Control Panel.
The
Control Panel window appears.
2. Under
Network and Internet, click View network status and tasks.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 86
The
Network Sharing Center screen appears.
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
3. In the
Tasks pane, click Manage network connections.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 87
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
The
Network Connections screen appears.
4. Double-click the
Local Area Connection icon.
The
Local Area Connection Status window opens.
5. Click
Properties.
88 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
The
Local Area Connection Properties window opens.
6. Check if
Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) appears in the list box and if it is properly configured with the Ethernet card installed on your computer.
TCP/IP Settings
1. In the
Local Area Connection Properties window, double-click the Internet
Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) component, or select it and click Properties.
The
Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4) Properties window appears.
2. Click the
Obtain an IP address automatically radio button.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 89
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
Note: Normally, it is not recommended to assign a static IP address to your PC but rather to obtain an IP address automatically. If for some reason you need to assign a static IP address, select
Specify an IP address, type in an IP address in the range of
192.168.10.129-254, enter 255.255.255.0 in the Subnet Mask field, and click OK to save the new settings.
(Note that 192.168.10 is the default value, and it may vary if you changed it in the
Network > My Network page.)
3. Click the
Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.
4. Click
OK to save the new settings.
Your computer is now ready to access your Safe@Office appliance.
Windows 2000/XP
Checking the TCP/IP Installation
1. Click
Start > Settings > Control Panel.
The
Control Panel window appears.
2. Double-click the
Network and Dial-up Connections icon.
90 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
The
Network and Dial-up Connections window appears.
3. Right-click the opens.
icon and select
Properties from the pop-up menu that
The
Local Area Connection Properties window appears.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 91
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
4. In the above window, check if
TCP/IP appears in the components list and if it is properly configured with the Ethernet card installed on your computer. If
TCP/IP does not appear in the Components list, you must install it as described in the next section.
92 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
Installing TCP/IP Protocol
1. In the
Local Area Connection Properties window click Install.
The
Select Network Component Type window appears.
2. Select
Protocol and click Add.
The
Select Network Protocol window appears.
3. Choose
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click OK.
TCP/IP protocol is installed on your computer.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 93
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
TCP/IP Settings
1. In the
Local Area Connection Properties window, double-click the Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) component, or select it and click Properties.
The
Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window opens.
2. Click the
Obtain an IP address automatically radio button.
Note: Normally, it is not recommended to assign a static IP address to your PC but rather to obtain an IP address automatically. If for some reason you need to assign a static IP address, select
Specify an IP address, type in an IP address in the range of
192.168.10.129-254, enter 255.255.255.0 in the Subnet Mask field, and click OK to save the new settings.
(Note that 192.168.10 is the default value, and it may vary if you changed it in the
Network > My Network page.)
3. Click the
Obtain DNS server address automatically radio button.
4. Click
OK to save the new settings.
Your computer is now ready to access your Safe@Office appliance.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 94
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
Mac OS
Use the following procedure for setting up the TCP/IP Protocol.
1. Choose
Apple Menus -> Control Panels -> TCP/IP.
The
TCP/IP window appears.
2. Click the
Connect via drop-down list, and select Ethernet.
3. Click the
Configure drop-down list, and select Using DHCP Server.
4. Close the window and save the setup.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 95
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
Mac OS-X
Use the following procedure for setting up the TCP/IP Protocol.
1. Choose
Apple -> System Preferences.
The
System Preferences window appears.
2. Click
Network.
96 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Network window appears.
Before You Install the Safe@Office Appliance
3. Click
Configure.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 97
Appliance Installation
TCP/IP configuration fields appear.
4. Click the
Configure IPv4 drop-down list, and select Using DHCP.
5. Click
Apply Now.
98 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Appliance Installation
Installing Non-ADSL Models
Appliance Installation
To install the Safe@Office appliance
1. Verify that you have the correct cable type.
For information, see Network Requirements on page 61.
2. Connect the LAN cable: a. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to one of the appliance's
LAN ports. b. Connect the other end to PCs, hubs, or other network devices.
3. Connect the WAN cable: a) Connect one end of an Ethernet cable to the appliance's Ethernet
WAN port. a. Connect the other end of the cable to a cable modem, DSL modem, or office network.
4. Connect the power adapter to the appliance's power socket, labeled
PWR.
5. Plug the power adapter into the wall electrical outlet.
Warning: The Safe@Office appliance power adapter is compatible with either 100,
120 or 230 VAC input power. Verify that the wall outlet voltage is compatible with the voltage specified on your power adapter. Failure to observe this warning may result in injuries or damage to equipment.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 99
Appliance Installation
Figure 22: Typical Connection Diagram
Installing ADSL Models
To install the Safe@Office appliance
1. Verify that you have the correct cable type.
For information, see Network Requirements on page 61.
2. Connect the LAN cable: a. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to one of the appliance's
LAN ports. b. Connect the other end to PCs, hubs, or other network devices.
3. Connect the ADSL cable: a. Connect one end of the telephone cable to the appliance's
DSL port. b. Connect the other end of the cable to the ADSL line or micro-filter.
In most cases, a micro-filter is required for each phone jack on your line. The micro-filter prevents the standard phone lines from interfering with your ADSL service. Check with your service provider whether a micro-filter is required at your location.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 100
Appliance Installation
4. To use the appliance with a non-ADSL connection, or with an existing ADSL modem, connect an Ethernet cable: a. Connect one end of the Ethernet cable to the appliance's
DMZ/WAN2 port. b. Connect the other end of the cable to an external cable modem, DSL modem, or office network.
5. Connect the power adapter to the appliance's power socket, labeled
PWR.
6. Plug the power adapter into the wall electrical outlet.
Warning: The Safe@Office appliance power adapter is compatible with either 100,
120 or 230 VAC input power. Verify that the wall outlet voltage is compatible with the voltage specified on your power adapter. Failure to observe this warning may result in injuries or damage to equipment.
Figure 23: Typical Connection Diagram
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 101
Appliance Installation
Cascading Your Appliance
The Safe@Office appliance protects all computers and network devices that are connected to its
LAN and DMZ ports. If desired, you can increase the appliance's port capacity by cascading hubs or switches.
To cascade the Safe@Office appliance to a hub or switch
1. Connect a standard Ethernet cable to one of the appliance's
LAN ports or to its
DMZ/WAN2 Ethernet port.
The Safe@Office appliance automatically detects cable types, so you can use either a straight-through or crossed Ethernet cable.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to an Ethernet hub or switch.
3. Connect additional computers and network devices to the hub or switch as desired.
Preparing the Appliance for a Wireless Connection
To prepare the Safe@Office wireless appliance for a wireless connection
1. Connect the antennas that came with your Safe@Office wireless appliance to the antenna connectors in the appliance's rear panel.
2. Bend the antennas at the hinges, so that they point upwards.
102 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Wall Mounting the Safe@Office Appliance
Connecting the Appliance to Network Printers
In models with a print server, you can connect network printers.
To connect network printers
1. Connect one end of a USB cable to one of the appliance's
USB ports.
If needed, you can use the provided USB extension cord.
2. Connect the other end to a printer or a USB 2.0 hub.
Warning: Verify that the USB devices' power requirement does not exceed the appliance's USB power adapter capabilities. Failure to observe this warning may cause damage to the appliance and void the warranty.
For information on setting up network printers, see Setting up Network Printers on page
Wall Mounting the Safe@Office Appliance
For your convenience, the Safe@Office appliance includes a wall mounting kit, which consists of two plastic conical anchors and two cross-head screws.
To mount the Safe@Office appliance on the wall
1. Decide where you want to mount your Safe@Office appliance.
2. Decide on the mounting orientation.
You can mount the appliance on the wall facing up, down, left, or right.
Note: Mounting the appliance with the ports facing upwards is not recommended, as dust might accumulate in unused ports.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 103
Wall Mounting the Safe@Office Appliance
3. Mark two drill holes on the wall, in accordance with the following sketch:
4. Drill two 3.5 mm diameter holes, approximately 25 mm deep.
5. Insert two plastic conical anchors into the holes.
Note: The conical anchors you received with your Safe@Office appliance are suitable for concrete walls. If you want to mount the appliance on a plaster wall, you must use anchors that are suitable for plaster walls.
6. Insert the two screws you received with your Safe@Office appliance into the plastic conical anchors, and turn them until they protrude approximately 5 mm from the wall.
7. Align the holes on the Safe@Office appliance's underside with the screws on the wall, then push the appliance in and down.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 104
Securing the Safe@Office Appliance against Theft
Your Safe@Office appliance is wall mounted. You can now connect it to your computer.
Securing the Safe@Office Appliance against Theft
The Safe@Office appliance features a security slot to the rear of the right panel, which enables you to secure your appliance against theft, using an anti-theft security device.
Note: Anti-theft security devices are available at most computer hardware stores.
This procedure explains how to install a looped security cable on your appliance. A looped security cable typically includes the parts shown in the diagram below.
Figure 24: Looped Security Cable
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 105
Securing the Safe@Office Appliance against Theft
While these parts may differ between devices, all looped security cables include a bolt with knobs, as shown in the diagram below:
Figure 25: Looped Security Cable Bolt
The bolt has two states, Open and Closed, and is used to connect the looped security cable to the appliance's security slot.
To install an anti-theft device on the Safe@Office appliance
1. If your anti-theft device has a combination lock, set the desired code, as described in the documentation that came with your device.
2. Connect the anti-theft device's loop to any sturdy mounting point, as described in the documentation that came with your device.
3. Slide the anti-theft device's bolt to the
Open position.
4. Insert the bolt into the Safe@Office appliance's security slot, then slide the bolt to the
Closed position until the bolts holes are aligned.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 106
Setting Up the Safe@Office Appliance
5. Thread the anti-theft device's pin through the bolt’s holes, and insert the pin into the main body of the anti-theft device, as described in the documentation that came with your device.
Setting Up the Safe@Office Appliance
After you have installed the Safe@Office appliance, you must set it up using the steps shown below.
When setting up your Safe@Office appliance for the first time after installation, these steps follow each other automatically. After you have logged in and set up your password, the
Safe@Office Setup Wizard automatically opens and displays the dialog boxes for performing the initial configuration of the router. If desired, you can exit the Setup Wizard and perform each of these steps separately.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 107
Setting Up the Safe@Office Appliance
Logging in to the Safe@Office Portal and setting up your password
Initial Login to the Safe@Office Portal on page 111
Configuring an Internet connection
Using the Internet Wizard on page 126
Setting the time on your Safe@Office appliance
Setting the Time on the Appliance on page 735
Setting up a wireless network (wireless appliances only)
Configuring a Wireless Network on page 305
Installing the Product Key
Upgrading Your Software Product on page 722
Setting up subscription services
Connecting to a Service Center on page 591
108 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting Up the Safe@Office Appliance
You can access the Setup Wizard at any time after initial setup, using the procedure below.
To access the Setup Wizard
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The
Firmware page appears.
2. Click
Safe@Office Setup Wizard.
Chapter 3: Installing and Setting Up Safe@Office 109
Setting Up the Safe@Office Appliance
The
Safe@Office Setup Wizard opens with the Welcome page displayed.
110 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Initial Login to the Safe@Office Portal
Chapter 4
Getting Started
This chapter contains all the information you need in order to get started using your
Safe@Office appliance.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Initial Login to the Safe@Office Portal .................................................... 111
Logging in to the Safe@Office Portal ...................................................... 114
Accessing the Safe@Office Portal Remotely Using HTTPS ................... 116
Using the Safe@Office Portal .................................................................. 118
Initial Login to the Safe@Office Portal
The first time you log in to the Safe@Office Portal, you must set up your password.
To log in to the Safe@Office Portal for the first time
1. Browse to http://my.firewall.
Chapter 4: Getting Started 111
Initial Login to the Safe@Office Portal
The initial login page appears.
2. Type a password both in the
Password and the Confirm password fields.
Note: The password must be five to 25 characters (letters or numbers).
Note: You can change your username and password at any time. For further
information, see Changing Your Password on page 677.
3. Click
OK.
112 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Initial Login to the Safe@Office Portal
The
Safe@Office Setup Wizard opens, with the Welcome page displayed.
4. Configure your Internet connection using one of the following ways:
• Internet Wizard
The Internet Wizard is the first part of the Setup Wizard, and it takes you through basic Internet connection setup, step by step. For information on using the
Internet Wizard, see Using the Internet Wizard on page 126.
After you have completed the Internet Wizard, the Setup Wizard continues to guide you through appliance setup. For more information, see Setting Up the
Safe@Office Appliance on page 107.
• Internet Setup
Internet Setup offers advanced setup options, such as configuring two Internet connections. To use Internet Setup, click
Cancel and refer to Using Internet Setup
113 Chapter 4: Getting Started
Logging in to the Safe@Office Portal
Logging in to the Safe@Office Portal
Note: By default, HTTP and HTTPS access to the Safe@Office Portal is not allowed from the WLAN, unless you do one of the following:
• Configure a specific firewall rule to allow access from the WLAN. See
Or
• Enable HTTPS access from the Internet. See Configuring HTTPS on
To log in to the Safe@Office Portal
1. Do one of the following:
• Browse to http://my.firewall.
Or
• To log in through HTTPS (locally or remotely), follow the procedure
Accessing the Safe@Office Portal Remotely on page 116.
114 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The login page appears.
Logging in to the Safe@Office Portal
2. Type your username and password.
3. Click
OK.
Chapter 4: Getting Started 115
Accessing the Safe@Office Portal Remotely Using HTTPS
The
Welcome page appears.
Accessing the Safe@Office Portal Remotely Using
HTTPS
You can access the Safe@Office Portal remotely (from the Internet) through HTTPS.
HTTPS is a protocol for accessing a secure Web server. It is used to transfer confidential user information. If desired, you can also use HTTPS to access the Safe@Office Portal from your internal network.
116 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Accessing the Safe@Office Portal Remotely Using HTTPS
Note: In order to access the Safe@Office Portal remotely using HTTPS, you must first do both of the following:
• Configure your password, using HTTP. See Initial Login to the
Safe@Office Portal on page 111.
• Configure HTTPS Remote Access. See Configuring HTTPS on page
Note: Your browser must support 128-bit cipher strength. To check your browser's cipher strength, open Internet Explorer and click
Help > About Internet Explorer.
To access the Safe@Office Portal from your internal network
• Browse to https://my.firewall.
(Note that the URL starts with “https”, not “http”.)
The Safe@Office Portal appears.
To access the Safe@Office Portal from the Internet
• Browse to https://<firewall_IP_address>:981.
(Note that the URL starts with “https”, not “http”.)
The following things happen in the order below:
If this is your first attempt to access the Safe@Office Portal through HTTPS, the certificate in the Safe@Office appliance is not yet known to the browser, so the
Security Alert dialog box appears.
To avoid seeing this dialog box again, install the certificate of the destination
Safe@Office appliance. If you are using Internet Explorer 6, do the following: a. Click
View Certificate.
The
Certificate dialog box appears, with the General tab displayed. b. Click
Install Certificate.
The
Certificate Import Wizard opens. c. Click
Next. d. Click
Next. e. Click
Finish. f. Click
Yes.
Chapter 4: Getting Started 117
Using the Safe@Office Portal g. Click
OK.
The
Security Alert dialog box reappears. h. Click
Yes.
The Safe@Office Portal appears.
Using the Safe@Office Portal
The Safe@Office Portal is a Web-based management interface, which enables you to manage and configure the Safe@Office appliance operation and options.
The Safe@Office Portal consists of three major elements.
Table 26: Safe@Office Portal Elements
Element Description
Main menu Used for navigating between the various topics (such as Reports, Security, and Setup).
Main frame
Status bar
Displays information and controls related to the selected topic. The main frame may also contain tabs that allow you to view different pages related to the selected topic.
Shows your Internet connection and managed services status.
118 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Figure 26: Safe@Office Portal
Using the Safe@Office Portal
Chapter 4: Getting Started 119
Using the Safe@Office Portal
Main Menu
The main menu includes the following submenus.
Table 27: Main Menu Submenus
This submenu… Does this…
Welcome Displays general welcome information.
Reports
Logs
Security
Antivirus
Provides reporting capabilities in terms of appliance status, traffic monitoring, active computers, established connections, and more.
Provides a general event log displaying appliance events, and a security event log displaying firewall events.
Provides controls and options for setting the security of any computer in the network.
Allows you to configure VStream Antivirus settings.
Antispam
Services
Network
Setup
Users
VPN
Help
Allows you to configure VStream Antispam settings.
Allows you to control your subscription to subscription services.
Allows you to manage and configure your network settings and Internet connections.
Provides a set of tools for managing your Safe@Office appliance. Allows you to upgrade your license and firmware and to configure HTTPS access to your Safe@Office appliance.
Allows you to manage Safe@Office appliance users.
Allows you to manage, configure, and log in to VPN sites.
Provides context-sensitive online help.
120 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using the Safe@Office Portal
This submenu… Does this…
Logout Allows you to log out of the Safe@Office Portal.
Main Frame
The main frame displays the relevant data and controls pertaining to the menu and tab you select. These elements sometimes differ depending on what model you are using. The differences are described throughout this guide.
Status Bar
The status bar is located at the bottom of each page. It displays the fields below, as well as the date and time.
Table 28: Status Bar Fields
This field… Displays this…
Internet Your Internet connection status.
The connection status may be one of the following:
• Connected. The Safe@Office appliance is connected to the Internet.
• Connected – Probing OK. Connection probing is enabled and has detected that the Internet connectivity is OK.
• Connected – Probing Failed. Connection probing is enabled and has detected problems with the Internet connectivity.
• Not Connected. The Internet connection is down.
• Establishing Connection. The Safe@Office appliance is connecting to the
Internet.
• Contacting Gateway. The Safe@Office appliance is trying to contact the
Internet default gateway.
• Disabled. The Internet connection has been manually disabled.
Note: You can configure both a primary and a secondary Internet connection. When both connections are configured, the Status bar displays both statuses. For example “Internet [Primary]: Connected”. For information on configuring a secondary Internet connection, see Configuring the Internet Connection on
Chapter 4: Getting Started 121
Using the Safe@Office Portal
This field… Displays this…
Service Center Displays your subscription services status.
Your Service Center may offer various subscription services. These include the firewall service and optional services such as Web Filtering and Email Antivirus.
Your subscription services status may be one of the following:
• Not Subscribed. You are not subscribed to security services.
• Connection Failed. The Safe@Office appliance failed to connect to the
Service Center.
• Connecting. The Safe@Office appliance is connecting to the Service
Center.
• Connected. You are connected to the Service Center, and security services are active.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 122
Logging Out
Logging Out
Logging out terminates your administration session. Any subsequent attempt to connect to the Safe@Office Portal will require re-entering of the administration password.
To log out of the Safe@Office Portal
• Click Logout in the main menu.
The
Login page appears.
Chapter 4: Getting Started 123
Overview
Chapter 5
Configuring the Internet Connection
This chapter describes how to configure and work with a Safe@Office Internet connection.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Viewing Internet Connection Information ................................................ 188
Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection............................................. 190
Using Quick Internet Connection/Disconnection ..................................... 190
Configuring a Backup Internet Connection .............................................. 191
Configuring WAN Load Balancing .......................................................... 192
Overview
In order to access the Internet through your Safe@Office appliance, you must configure one of the following connection types:
• Ethernet-based connection
You can configure an Ethernet-based connection in all models. An Ethernet-based connection can be connected to another network by means of a switch, a router, a bridge, or an Ethernet-enabled broadband modem.
In ADSL models, the Ethernet-based connection is configured on the DMZ/WAN2 port. In non-ADSL models, you can use the WAN port, the DMZ/WAN2 port, or both ports for an Ethernet-based Internet connection.
• Direct ADSL connection
You can configure a direct ADSL connection in Safe@Office ADSL models only.
These models include an integrated ADSL modem, which enables you to connect the appliance directly to your ADSL line without using an additional modem or router.
125 Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection
Using the Internet Wizard
You can configure your Internet connection using any of the following setup tools:
• Setup Wizard. Guides you through the Safe@Office appliance setup step by step.
The first part of the Setup Wizard is the Internet Wizard. For further information
on the Setup Wizard, see Setting Up the Safe@Office Appliance on page 107.
• Internet Wizard. Guides you through the Internet connection configuration process step by step. For further information, see Using the Internet Wizard on
• Internet Setup. Offers the following advanced setup options:
• Configure two Internet connections.
For information, see Configuring a Backup Internet Connection on page 191.
• Enable Traffic Shaper for traffic flowing through the connection.
For information on Traffic Shaper, see Using Traffic Shaper on page 293.
• Configure a dialup Internet connection.
Before configuring the connection, you must first set up the modem. For
information, see Setting Up Modems on page 176.
Using the Internet Wizard
The Internet Wizard allows you to configure your Safe@Office appliance for Internet connection quickly and easily through its user-friendly interface.
Note: The first time you log in to the Safe@Office Portal, the Internet Wizard starts automatically as part of the Setup Wizard. In this case, you should skip to step 3 in the following procedure.
126 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using the Internet Wizard
Configuring an Ethernet-Based Connection on Non-
ADSL Models
To configure an Ethernet-Based connection
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The
Internet page appears.
2. Click
Internet Wizard.
The Internet Wizard opens with the
Welcome page displayed.
3. Click
Next.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 127
Using the Internet Wizard
The
Internet Connection Method dialog box appears.
4. Select the Internet connection method you want to use for connecting to the
Internet.
If you are uncertain regarding which connection method to use, contact your ISP.
Note: If you selected PPTP or PPPoE, do not use your dial-up software to connect to the Internet.
5. Click
Next.
If you chose PPPoE, continue at Using a PPPoE Connection on page 129.
If you chose PPTP, continue at Using a PPTP Connection on page 131.
If you chose Cable Modem, continue at Using a Cable Modem Connection on page
If you chose Static IP, continue at Using a Static IP Connection on page 133.
If you chose DHCP, continue at Using a DHCP Connection on page 134.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 128
Using the Internet Wizard
Using a PPPoE Connection
If you selected the PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) connection method, the
PPP Configuration dialog box appears.
1. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
2. Click
Next.
The
Confirmation screen appears.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 129
Using the Internet Wizard
3. Click
Next.
The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the specified connection.
The
Connecting… screen appears.
At the end of the connection process the
Connected screen appears.
4. Click
Finish.
Table 29: PPPoE Connection Fields
In this field… Do this…
Username Type your user name.
Password
Confirm password
Service
Type your password.
Type your password again.
Type your service name.
This field can be left blank.
130 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using the Internet Wizard
Using a PPTP Connection
If you selected the PPTP connection method, the
PPP Configuration dialog box appears.
1. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
2. Click
Next.
The
Confirmation screen appears.
3. Click
Next.
The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the specified connection.
The
Connecting… screen appears.
At the end of the connection process the
Connected screen appears.
4. Click
Finish.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 131
Using the Internet Wizard
Table 30: PPTP Connection Fields
In this field… Do this…
Username Type your user name.
Password
Confirm password
Service
Server IP
Internal IP
Type your password.
Type your password again.
Type your service name.
Type the IP address of the PPTP modem.
Type the local IP address required for accessing the PPTP modem.
Subnet Mask Select the subnet mask of the PPTP modem.
Using a Cable Modem Connection
No further settings are required for a cable modem connection. The
Confirmation screen appears.
1. Click
Next.
The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the specified connection.
The
Connecting… screen appears.
At the end of the connection process the
Connected screen appears.
2. Click
Finish.
132 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using the Internet Wizard
Using a Static IP Connection
If you selected the Static IP connection method, the
Static IP Configuration dialog box appears.
1. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
2. Click
Next.
The
Confirmation screen appears.
3. Click
Next.
The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the specified connection.
The
Connecting… screen appears.
At the end of the connection process the
Connected screen appears.
4. Click
Finish.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 133
Using the Internet Wizard
Table 31: PPPoE Connection Fields
In this field… Do this…
IP Address Type the static IP address of your Safe@Office appliance.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Primary DNS Server
Select the subnet mask that applies to the static IP address of your
Safe@Office appliance.
Type the IP address of your ISP’s default gateway.
Type the IP address of your ISP's primary DNS server.
Secondary DNS Server Type the IP address of your ISP's secondary DNS server.
This field is optional.
WINS Server Type the IP address of your ISP's WINS server.
This field is optional.
Using a DHCP Connection
No further settings are required for a DHCP (Dynamic IP) connection. The
Confirmation screen appears.
1. Click
Next.
The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the specified connection.
The
Connecting… screen appears.
At the end of the connection process the
Connected screen appears.
2. Click
Finish.
134 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using the Internet Wizard
Configuring an Ethernet-Based Connection on ADSL
Models
Note: In ADSL models, an Ethernet-based connection is made on the DMZ/WAN2 port.
To configure an Ethernet-based connection
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The
Internet page appears.
2. Click
Internet Wizard.
The Internet Wizard opens with the
Welcome page displayed.
3. Click
Next.
The
Internet Connection Port dialog box appears.
4. Click
Use the WAN2 port to connect to another network or router.
5. Click
Next.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 135
Using the Internet Wizard
The
Internet Connection Method dialog box appears.
6. Select the Internet connection method you want to use for connecting to the
Internet.
7. Click
Next.
If you chose PPPoE, continue at Using a PPPoE Connection on page 129.
If you chose PPTP, continue at Using a PPTP Connection on page 131.
If you chose Cable Modem, continue at Using a Cable Modem Connection on page
If you chose Static IP, continue at Using a Static IP Connection on page 133.
If you chose DHCP, continue at Using a DHCP Connection on page 134.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 136
Configuring a Direct ADSL Connection
To configure a direct ADSL connection
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The
Internet page appears.
2. Click
Internet Wizard.
The Internet Wizard opens with the
Welcome page displayed.
3. Click
Next.
The
Internet Connection Port dialog box appears.
4. Click
Use the ADSL port.
The
ADSL Connection Settings dialog box appears.
Using the Internet Wizard
5. Do one of the following:
• To automatically fill in the supported ADSL settings for your ISP, do the following:
1) Click
Search by country and ISP.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 137
Using the Internet Wizard
The
ADSL Configuration Assistant opens.
2) In the
Country drop-down list, select your country.
3) In the
ISP / Telco drop-down list, select your ISP or telephone company.
The
ADSL Configuration Assistant closes, and the fields are filled in with the correct values for your ISP.
• To manually fill in the supported ADSL settings for your ISP, complete the fields using the information in the following table.
6. Click
Next.
The
Internet Connection Method dialog box appears.
7. Select the Internet connection method you want to use for connecting to the
Internet.
8. Click
Next.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 138
Using the Internet Wizard
If you chose PPPoE or PPPoA, continue at Using a PPPoE or PPPoA Connection on
If you chose Static IP, continue at Using a Static IP Connection on page 133.
If you chose DHCP, continue at Using a DHCP Connection on page 134.
Table 32: ADSL Connection Fields
In this field… Do this…
DSL Standard
VPI Number
Select the standard to support for the DSL line, as specified by your
ISP. This can be one of the following:
• ADSL2
• ADSL2+
• Multimode
• T.1413
• G.lite
• G.DMT
Type the VPI number to use for the ATM virtual path, as specified by your ISP.
VCI Number
Encapsulation Type
Type the VCI number to use for the ATM virtual circuit, as specified by your ISP.
Select the encapsulation type to use for the DSL line, as specified by your ISP. This can be one of the following:
• LLC
• VCMUX
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 139
Using the Internet Wizard
Using a PPPoE or PPPoA Connection
If you selected the PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) or PPPoA (PPP over ATM) connection method, the
PPP Configuration dialog box appears.
1. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
2. Click
Next.
The
Confirmation screen appears.
3. Click
Next.
The system attempts to connect to the Internet via the specified connection.
The
Connecting… screen appears.
At the end of the connection process the
Connected screen appears.
4. Click
Finish.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 140
Table 33: PPPoE Connection Fields
In this field… Do this…
Username Type your user name.
Password Type your password.
Confirm password Type your password again.
Using Internet Setup
Using Internet Setup
Internet Setup allows you to manually configure your Internet connection.
For information on configuring bridged Internet connections, see Adding Internet
Connections to Bridges on page 274.
To configure the Internet connection using Internet Setup
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 141
Using Internet Setup
The
Internet page appears.
2. Next to the desired Internet connection, click
Edit.
142 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Internet Setup page appears.
Using Internet Setup
3. Do one of the following:
• To configure an ADSL connection using the internal ADSL modem, continue
at Configuring a Direct ADSL Connection on page 144.
This option is available in ADSL models only.
• To configure an Ethernet-based connection, continue at Configuring an
Ethernet-Based Connection on page 153.
• To configure a Dialup connection, continue at Configuring a Dialup
• To configure no connection, continue at Using No Connection on page 168.
143 Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection
Using Internet Setup
Configuring a Direct ADSL Connection
1. In the
Port drop-down list, select ADSL.
2. Do one of the following:
• To automatically fill in the supported ADSL settings for your ISP, do the following:
1) Click
Search by country and ISP.
The
ADSL Configuration Assistant opens.
2) In the
Country drop-down list, select your country.
3) In the
ISP / Telco drop-down list, select your ISP or telephone company.
The
ADSL Configuration Assistant closes. The Connection Type drop-down list and the
ADSL Link Settings fields are filled in with the correct values for your ISP.
• To manually fill in the supported ADSL settings for your ISP, in the
Connection Type drop-down list, select the Internet connection type you intend to use.
The display changes according to the selected connection type.
For PPPoA, continue at Using a PPPoA Connection on page 145.
For EoA, continue at Using an EoA Connection on page 147.
For PPPoE, continue at Using a PPPoE Connection on page 149.
For IPoA, continue at Using an IPoA (IP over ATM) Connection on page 151.
For information on configuring bridged connections, see Adding Internet
Connections to Bridges on page 274.
144 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using a PPPoA (PPP over ATM) Connection
Using Internet Setup
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 145
Using Internet Setup
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
2. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 146
Using Internet Setup
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
Using an EoA (Ethernet over ATM) Connection
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 147
Using Internet Setup
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
2. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 148
Using a PPPoE (PPP over Ethernet) Connection
Using Internet Setup
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 149
Using Internet Setup
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
2. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 150
Using Internet Setup
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
Using an IPoA (IP over ATM) Connection
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 151
Using Internet Setup
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
2. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 152
Configuring an Ethernet-Based Connection
Using Internet Setup
1. In the
Port drop-down list, do one of the following:
• To configure an Ethernet-based connection through the WAN port, select
WAN.
• To configure an Ethernet-based connection through the DMZ/WAN2 port, select
WAN2.
This option is available in non-ADSL models only.
• To configure an Ethernet-based connection through a LAN port, select the desired LAN port.
This option is available with the Power Pack license only.
The selected port is automatically configured for use with an Internet connection. For
information on viewing a port's status, see Viewing Port Statuses. on page 247
2. In the
Connection Type drop-down list, select the Internet connection type you intend to use.
The display changes according to the connection type you selected.
If you chose LAN, continue at Using a LAN Connection on page 154.
If you chose Cable Modem, continue at Using a Cable Modem Connection on page
If you chose PPPoE, continue at Using a PPPoE Connection on page 158.
If you chose PPTP, continue at Using a PPTP Connection on page 160.
If you chose L2TP, continue at Using an L2TP Connection on page 162.
If you chose Telstra, continue at Using a Telstra (BPA) Connection on page 164.
For information on configuring bridged connections, see Adding Internet
Connections to Bridges on page 274.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 153
Using Internet Setup
Using a LAN Connection
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
154 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
Using Internet Setup
2. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
155 Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection
Using Internet Setup
Using a Cable Modem Connection
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
156 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
Using Internet Setup
2. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
157 Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection
Using Internet Setup
Using a PPPoE Connection
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
158 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
Using Internet Setup
2. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
159 Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection
Using Internet Setup
Using a PPTP Connection
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 160
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
Using Internet Setup
2. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
161 Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection
Using Internet Setup
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
Using an L2TP Connection
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 162
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
Using Internet Setup
2. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
163 Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection
Using Internet Setup
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
Using a Telstra (BPA) Connection
Use this Internet connection type only if you are subscribed to Telstra® BigPond™
Internet. Telstra BigPond is a trademark of Telstra Corporation Limited.
1. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 164
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
Using Internet Setup
2. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
165 Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection
Using Internet Setup
Configuring a Dialup Connection
Note: To use this connection type, you must first set up the dialup or cellular modem.
For information, see Setting Up Modems on page 176.
1. In the
Port drop-down list, do one of the following:
• To configure a Dialup connection on the Serial port (using a connected RS232 modem), select
Serial.
• To configure a Dialup connection on a USB port (using a connected USB modem), select
Cellular Modem.
The
Connection Type field displays Dialup.
2. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup Fields on
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 166
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
Using Internet Setup
3. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Establishing Connection”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
167 Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection
Using Internet Setup
Configuring No Connection
1. In the
Port drop-down list, select None.
The fields disappear.
2. Click
Apply.
Table 34: Internet Setup Fields
In this field…
ADSL Link Settings
Do this…
DSL Standard Select the standard to support for the DSL line, as specified by your ISP.
VPI Number
VCI Number
Type the VPI number to use for the ATM virtual path, as specified by your
ISP.
Type the VCI number to use for the ATM virtual circuit, as specified by your ISP.
Encapsulation Type Select the encapsulation type to use for the DSL line, as specified by your
ISP.
PPP Settings
Username Type your user name.
Password Type your password.
Confirm password Type your password.
168 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
Service
Authentication
Method
Server IP
Phone Number
Connect on demand
Using Internet Setup
Do this…
Type your service name.
If your ISP has not provided you with a service name, leave this field empty.
Specify the authentication method to use for PPP connections, by selecting one of the following:
• Auto. If possible, use CHAP; otherwise, use PAP. This is the default.
• PAP
• CHAP
If you selected PPTP, type the IP address of the PPTP server as given by your ISP.
If you selected Telstra (BPA), type the IP address of the Telstra authentication server as given by Telstra.
If you selected Dialup, type the phone number that the modem should dial, as given by your ISP.
Select this option if you do not want the appliance to be constantly connected to the Internet. The appliance will establish a connection only under certain conditions.
This option is useful when configuring a backup connection. For information, see Configuring a Backup Internet Connection on page
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 169
Using Internet Setup
In this field… Do this…
When no higher priority connection is available
Select this option to specify that the appliance should only establish a connection in the following cases:
• When no other connection exists, and the Safe@Office appliance is not acting as a Backup appliance.
If another connection opens, the appliance will disconnect.
For information on configuring the appliance as a Backup or
Master, see Configuring High Availability on page 281.
• When there is interesting traffic (that is, traffic for which no static route is defined).
On outgoing activity Select this option to specify that the appliance should only establish a connection if no other connection exists, and there is outgoing activity
(that is, packets need to be transmitted to the Internet).
If another connection opens, or if the connection times out, the appliance will disconnect.
Idle timeout
Delay before connecting
Type the amount of time (in minutes) that the connection can remain idle.
Once this period of time has elapsed, the appliance will disconnect.
The default value is 1.
Type the amount of time (in seconds) that the appliance should wait to reconnect to the Internet, if the connection goes down.
If you have an unstable Internet connection that tends to go down and then return almost immediately, this setting allows you to avoid unnecessary and costly dialing during outage periods, by deferring reconnection for a few seconds.
The default value is 0.
Obtain IP address automatically (using
DHCP)
Clear this option if you do not want the Safe@Office appliance to obtain an IP address automatically using DHCP.
170 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Name Servers
Obtain Domain
Name Servers automatically
Obtain WINS
Server automatically
Primary DNS
Server
Secondary DNS
Server
WINS Server
Traffic Shaper
Shape Upstream:
Link Rate
Do this…
Type the static IP address of your Safe@Office appliance.
Using Internet Setup
Select the subnet mask that applies to the static IP address of your
Safe@Office appliance.
Type the IP address of your ISP’s default gateway.
Clear this option if you want the Safe@Office appliance to obtain an IP address automatically using DHCP, but not to automatically configure
DNS servers.
Clear this option if you want the Safe@Office appliance to obtain an IP address automatically using DHCP, but not to automatically configure the
WINS server.
Type the IP address of your ISP's primary DNS server.
Type the IP address of your ISP's secondary DNS server.
Type the IP address of your ISP's WINS server.
Select this option to enable Traffic Shaper for outgoing traffic. Then type a rate (in kilobits/second) slightly lower than your Internet connection's maximum measured upstream speed in the field provided.
It is recommended to try different rates in order to determine which one provides the best results.
For information on using Traffic Shaper, see Using Traffic Shaper on
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 171
Using Internet Setup
In this field… Do this…
Shape
Downstream: Link
Rate
Select this option to enable Traffic Shaper for incoming traffic. Then type a rate (in kilobits/second) slightly lower than your Internet connection's maximum measured downstream speed in the field provided.
It is recommended to try different rates in order to determine which one provides the best results.
Note: Traffic Shaper cannot control the number or type of packets it receives from the Internet; it can only affect the rate of incoming traffic by dropping received packets. This makes the shaping of inbound traffic less accurate than the shaping of outbound traffic. It is therefore recommended to enable traffic shaping for incoming traffic only if necessary.
For information on using Traffic Shaper, see Using Traffic Shaper on
Advanced
External IP If you selected PPTP, type the IP address of the PPTP client as given by your ISP.
If you selected PPPoE, this field is optional, and you do not have to fill it in unless your ISP has instructed you to do so.
MTU
MAC Cloning
This field allows you to control the maximum transmission unit size.
As a general recommendation you should leave this field empty. If however you wish to modify the default MTU, it is recommended that you consult with your ISP first and use MTU values between 1300 and 1500.
A MAC address is a 12-digit identifier assigned to every network device. If your ISP restricts connections to specific, recognized MAC addresses, you must select this option to clone a MAC address.
172 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
Hardware MAC
Address
Cloned MAC
Address
Load Balancing
Load Balancing
Weight
Using Internet Setup
Do this…
Note: When configuring MAC cloning for the secondary Internet connection, the DMZ/WAN2 port must be configured as WAN2; otherwise this field is disabled. For information on configuring ports, see Managing
This field displays the Safe@Office appliance's MAC address.
This field is read-only.
Do one of the following:
• Click This Computer to automatically "clone" the MAC address of your computer to the Safe@Office appliance.
• If the ISP requires authentication using the MAC address of a different computer, type the MAC address in this field.
Note: In the secondary Internet connection, this field is enabled only if the
DMZ/WAN2 port is set to WAN2.
If you are using WAN load balancing, type a value indicating the amount of traffic that should be routed though this connection relative to the other connection.
For example, if you assign the primary connection a weight of 100, and you assign the secondary connection a weight of 50, twice as much traffic will be routed through the primary connection as through the secondary connection.
To ensure full utilization of both Internet connections, the ratio between the connections' load balancing weights should reflect the ratio between the connections' bandwidths.
The default value is 50.
For information on WAN load balancing, see Configuring WAN Load
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 173
Using Internet Setup
In this field… Do this…
High Availability
Do not connect if this gateway is in passive state
The High Availability area only appears in Safe@Office <500PP>.
If you are using High Availability (HA), select this option to specify that the gateway should connect to the Internet only if it is the Active Gateway in the HA cluster. This is called WAN HA.
This field is only enabled if HA is configured.
For information on HA, see Configuring High Availability on page 281.
Dead Connection
Detection
Probe Next Hop Select this option to automatically detect loss of connectivity to the default gateway. If you selected LAN, this is done by sending ARP requests to the default gateway. If you selected PPTP, PPPoE, or Dialup, this is done by sending PPP echo reply (LCP) messages to the PPP peer.
By default, if the default gateway does not respond, the Internet connection is considered to be down.
If it is determined that the Internet connection is down, and two Internet connections are defined, a failover will be performed to the second
Internet connection, ensuring continuous Internet connectivity.
This option is selected by default.
174 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Internet Setup
In this field… Do this…
Connection Probing
Method
While the
Probe Next Hop option checks the availability of the next hop router, which is usually at your ISP, connectivity to the next hop router does not always indicate that the Internet is accessible. For example, if there is a problem with a different router at the ISP, the next hop will be reachable, but the Internet might be inaccessible. Connection probing is a way to detect Internet failures that are more than one hop away.
Specify what method to use for probing the connection, by selecting one of the following:
• None. Do not perform Internet connection probing. Next hop probing will still be used, if the
Probe Next Hop check box is selected. This is the default value.
• Ping Addresses. Ping anywhere from one to three servers specified by IP address or DNS name in the
1, 2, and 3 fields. If for 45 seconds none of the defined servers respond to pinging, the Internet connection is considered to be down.
Use this method if you have reliable servers that can be pinged, that are a good indicator of Internet connectivity, and that are not likely to fail simultaneously (that is, they are not at the same location).
• Probe DNS Servers. Probe the primary and secondary DNS servers. If for 45 seconds neither gateway responds, the
Internet connection is considered to be down.
Use this method if the availability of your DNS servers is a good indicator for the availability of Internet connectivity.
• Probe VPN Gateway (RDP). Send RDP echo requests to up to three Check Point VPN gateways specified by IP address or
DNS name in the
1, 2, and 3 fields. If for 45 seconds none of the defined gateways respond, the Internet connection is considered to be down.
Use this option if you have Check Point VPN gateways, and you want loss of connectivity to these gateways to trigger ISP failover to an Internet connection from which these gateways are reachable.
175 Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection
Setting Up Modems
In this field…
1, 2, 3
Do this…
If you chose the
Ping Addresses connection probing method, type the IP addresses or DNS names of the desired servers.
If you chose the
Probe VPN Gateway (RDP) connection probing method, type the IP addresses or DNS names of the desired VPN gateways.
You can clear a field by clicking
Clear.
Setting Up Modems
You can use a connected modem as a primary or secondary Internet connection method.
This is useful in locations where broadband Internet access is unavailable.
When used as a backup Internet connection, the modem can be automatically disconnected when not in use. For information on setting up a backup connection, see Configuring a
Backup Internet Connection on page 191.
The Safe@Office appliance supports the connecting following modems:
• RS232 dialup modem (regular or ISDN)
You can connect one RS232 to the appliance's Serial port.
See Setting Up an RS232 Modem on page 177.
• USB-based modems, including dialup (PSTN/ISDN) and cellular
(GPRS/EVDO/3G) modems
You can connect up to two USB-based modems to the appliance's USB port.
See Setting Up a USB Modem on page 181.
Note: Only one USB modem can be used at a time.
• ExpressCard cellular modem (on ADSL models only)
You can insert one ExpressCard cellular modem into the appliance's ExpressCard slot.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 176
See Setting Up an ExpressCard Cellular Modem on page 185.
Setting Up an RS232 Modem
Setting Up Modems
Note: Your RS232 dialup modem and your Safe@Office appliance's Serial port must be configured for the same speed.
By default, the appliance's Serial port's speed is 57600 bps. For information on changing the Serial port's speed, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
To set up an RS232 dialup modem
1. Connect an RS232 dialup modem to your Safe@Office appliance's serial port.
For information on locating the serial port, see Introduction on page 1.
2. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 177
Setting Up Modems
3. Next to
Serial, click Edit.
The
Port Setup page appears.
4. In the
Assign to Network drop-down list, select Dialup.
178 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
New fields appear.
Setting Up Modems
5. Complete the fields using the information in Dialup Fields on page 180.
6. Click
Apply.
7. To check that that the values you entered are correct, click
Test.
The page displays a message indicating whether the test succeeded.
8. Configure a Dialup Internet connection on the Serial port.
See Using Internet Setup on page 141.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 179
Setting Up Modems
Table 35: RS232 Dialup Fields
In this field… Do this…
Modem Type Select the modem type.
You can select one of the predefined modem types or
Custom.
If you selected
Custom, the Installation String field is enabled. Otherwise, it is filled in with the correct installation string for the modem type.
Initialization String Type the installation string for the custom modem type.
If you selected a standard modem type, this field is read-only.
Select the dial mode the modem uses. Dial Mode
Port Speed Select the Serial port's speed (in bits per second).
The Serial port's speed must match that of the attached dialup modem.
The default value is 57600.
Flow Control
Answer incoming
PPP calls
Select the method of flow control supported by the attached device:
• RTS/CTS. Hardware-based flow control, using the Serial port's
RTS/CTS lines.
• XON/XOFF. Software-based flow control, using XON/XOFF characters.
Select this option to specify that the modem should answer incoming
PPP calls. This allows accessing the appliance out of band for maintenance purposes, in case the primary Internet connection fails.
The client is assigned an IP address from the OfficeMode network; therefore, the OfficeMode network must be enabled. For information on enabling the OfficeMode network, see Configuring the OfficeMode
180 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting Up a USB Modem
Setting Up Modems
Warning: Before attaching a USB modem, ensure that the total power drawn by all connected USB devices does not exceed 2.5W per port (0.5A at 5V). If the total current consumed by a port exceeds 0.5A, a powered USB hub must be used, to avoid damage to the gateway.
To set up a USB modem
1. Connect a USB-based modem to one of your Safe@Office appliance's USB ports.
For information on locating the USB ports, see Introduction on page 1.
2. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 181
Setting Up Modems
3. Next to
USB, click Edit.
The
USB Devices page appears. If the Safe@Office appliance detected the modem, the modem is listed on the page.
If the modem is not listed, check that you connected the modem correctly, then click
Refresh to refresh the page.
4. Next to the modem, click
Edit.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 182
The
USB Modem Setup page appears.
Setting Up Modems
5. Complete the fields using the information in USB Dialup Fields on page 184.
6. Click
Apply.
7. To check that that the values you entered are correct, click
Test.
The page displays a message indicating whether the test succeeded.
8. Configure a Dialup Internet connection on the Cellular Modem port.
See Using Internet Setup on page 141.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 183
Setting Up Modems
Table 36: USB Dialup Fields
In this field… Do this…
Modem Type Select the modem type.
You can select one of the predefined modem types or
Custom.
If you selected
Custom, the Installation String field is enabled. Otherwise, it is filled in with the correct installation string for the modem type.
Initialization String Type the installation string for the custom modem type.
If you selected a standard modem type, this field is read-only.
Dial Mode
Port Speed
Answer incoming
PPP calls
Select the dial mode the modem uses.
Select the modem's port speed (in bits per second).
Select this option to specify that the modem should answer incoming
PPP calls. This allows accessing the appliance out of band for maintenance purposes, in case the primary Internet connection fails.
The client is assigned an IP address from the OfficeMode network; therefore, the OfficeMode network must be enabled. For information on enabling the OfficeMode network, see Configuring the OfficeMode
Cellular
APN Type your Access Point Name (APN) as given by your cellular provider.
If your cellular provider has not provided you with an APN, leave this field empty.
184 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting Up Modems
In this field… Do this…
PIN Type the Personal Identification Number (PIN) code that you received with your cellular SIM card, if required by your modem.
The PIN code is usually 4 digits long.
Warning: Entering an incorrect PIN code may cause your SIM card to be blocked.
Setting Up an ExpressCard Cellular Modem
To set up an ExpressCard cellular modem
1. Insert an ExpressCard into the ExpressCard slot on the side of the appliance.
For information on locating the ExpressCard slot, see Introduction on page 1.
2. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 185
Setting Up Modems
The
Ports page appears.
3. Next to
ExC, click Edit.
The
USB Devices page appears. If the Safe@Office appliance detected the modem, the modem is listed on the page.
If the modem is not listed, check that you connected the modem correctly, then click
Refresh to refresh the page.
4. Next to the modem, click
Edit.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 186
The
Cellular Modem Setup page appears.
Setting Up Modems
5. Complete the fields using the information in USB Dialup Fields on page 184.
6. Click
Apply.
7. To check that that the values you entered are correct, click
Test.
The page displays a message indicating whether the test succeeded.
8. Configure a Dialup Internet connection on the Cellular Modem port.
See Using Internet Setup on page 141.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 187
Viewing Internet Connection Information
Viewing Internet Connection Information
You can view information on your Internet connection(s) in terms of status, duration, and activity.
To view Internet connection information
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The
Internet page appears.
For an explanation of the fields on this page, see the following table.
2. To refresh the information on this page, click
Refresh.
188 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Viewing Internet Connection Information
Table 37: Internet Page Fields
Field Description
Status Indicates the connection’s status.
Duration
IP Address
Enabled
Indicates the connection duration, if active. The duration is given in the format hh:mm:ss, where: hh=hours mm=minutes ss=seconds
Your IP address.
Indicates whether or not the connection is enabled.
For further information, see Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 189
Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection
Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection
You can temporarily disable an Internet connection. This is useful if, for example, you are going on vacation and do not want to leave your computer connected to the Internet. If you have two Internet connections, you can force the Safe@Office appliance to use a particular connection, by disabling the other connection.
The Internet connection’s Enabled/Disabled status is persistent through Safe@Office appliance reboots.
To enable/disable an Internet connection
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The
Internet page appears.
2. Next to the Internet connection, do one of the following:
• To enable the connection, click
.
The button changes to and the connection is enabled.
• To disable the connection, click
.
The button changes to and the connection is disabled.
Using Quick Internet Connection/Disconnection
By clicking the
Connect or Disconnect button (depending on the connection status) on the
Internet page, you can establish a quick Internet connection using the currently-selected connection type. In the same manner, you can terminate the active connection.
The Internet connection retains its Connected/Not Connected status until the Safe@Office appliance is rebooted. The Safe@Office appliance then connects to the Internet if the connection is enabled. For information on enabling an Internet connection, see
Enabling/Disabling the Internet Connection on page 190.
190 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring a Backup Internet Connection
Configuring a Backup Internet Connection
You can configure both a primary and a secondary Internet connection. The secondary connection acts as a backup, so that if the primary connection fails, the Safe@Office appliance remains connected to the Internet.
You have full flexibility in deciding which port to use for each Internet connection. You can assign the primary connection to use any of the following ports:
• WAN port (on Non-ADSL models)
• DSL port (on ADSL models)
• Serial port (for use with an RS232 modem)
• DMZ/WAN2 port
• USB ports (for use with a USB modem)
• ExpressCard slot
You can assign the secondary connection to use any of the above ports that is not being used by the primary connection.
Note: You can configure different DNS servers for the primary and secondary connections. The Safe@Office appliance acts as a DNS relay and routes requests from computers within the network to the appropriate DNS server for the active
Internet connection.
Note: You can easily swap the roles of the primary and secondary connections, while simultaneously shifting all relevant port assignments between the primary and secondary connections, by using the
swap wanconn CLI command. For information, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 191
Configuring WAN Load Balancing
Configuring WAN Load Balancing
If your network is prone to congestion, for example in large offices which include multiple active clients and/or servers, you can increase the amount of available bandwidth by configuring WAN load balancing. By default, the Safe@Office appliance routes all traffic to the primary Internet connection, and the secondary Internet connection is used only when the primary connection is down, or when a routing rule specifically states that traffic should be sent through the secondary connection. WAN load balancing automatically distributes traffic between the primary and secondary connections, allowing you to use both connections in parallel.
When one IP address sends packets to another IP address, the Safe@Office appliance examines each Internet connection's recent bandwidth utilization in kilobits per second to determine its load. The Safe@Office appliance then enters the source-destination pair in a load balancing table and specifies the least-loaded Internet connection as the connection to use for traffic between this pair. To prevent disruption of stateful protocols, the
Safe@Office appliance will route all traffic between this pair to the specified Internet connection, so long as the pair remains in the load balancing table.
Note: By default, load balancing is performed when the amount of bandwidth utilization exceeds a threshold of 64 kilobits per second. You can change this threshold via the CLI. For information, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Guide.
Note: By default, a source-destination pair is removed from the load balancing table after 1 hour of inactivity. You can change the default value via the CLI. For information, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Guide.
Note: In order for WAN load balancing to be effective, there must be more than one active source-destination pair.
By default, the load distribution between Internet connections is symmetric; however, you can configure non-symmetric load balancing by assigning a different load balancing weight to each Internet connection. For example, if you assign the primary connection a weight of 100, and you assign the secondary connection a weight of 50, the Safe@Office appliance will only route traffic to the secondary connection if the primary connection's current load is more than twice the secondary connection's current load. Therefore, to
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 192
Configuring WAN Load Balancing ensure full utilization of both Internet connections, the ratio between the connections' load balancing weights should reflect the ratio between the connections' bandwidths.
Note: To ensure continuous Internet connectivity, if one of the Internet connections fails, all traffic will be routed to the other connection.
To configure WAN load balancing
1. Configure the desired load balancing weight for both the primary and secondary Internet connections.
For further information, see the
Load Balancing Weight field in Using Internet Setup
2. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The
Internet page appears.
3. In the
WAN Load Balancing area, drag the load balancing lever to On.
WAN load balancing is enabled. Traffic will be distributed automatically across the defined Internet connections, according to the configured load balancing weights.
Note: You can view the effect of WAN load balancing in the Traffic Monitor.
Chapter 5: Configuring the Internet Connection 193
Configuring Network Settings
Chapter 6
Managing Your Network
This chapter describes how to manage and configure your network connection and settings.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Configuring Network Settings .................................................................. 195
Using the Internal DNS Server ................................................................. 224
Configuring Network Service Objects ...................................................... 237
Configuring Network Settings
Note: If you accidentally change the network settings to incorrect values and are unable to connect to the my.firewall Web portal, you can connect to the appliance
through the serial console and correct the error (see Using a Console on page 714).
Alternatively, you can reset the Safe@Office appliance to its default settings (see
Resetting the Safe@Office appliance to Defaults on page 762).
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 195
Configuring Network Settings
Configuring the LAN Network
To configure the LAN network
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. Click
Edit in the LAN network’s row.
196 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Edit Network Settings page for the LAN network appears.
Configuring Network Settings
3. In the
Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
The fields are enabled.
4. If desired, change your Safe@Office appliance’s internal IP address.
See Changing IP Addresses on page 198.
5. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 199.
6. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 200.
7. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
8. Click
OK.
A success message appears.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 197
Configuring Network Settings
Changing IP Addresses
If desired, you can change your Safe@Office appliance’s internal IP address, or the entire range of IP addresses in your internal network.
To change IP addresses
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. In the desired network's row, click
Edit.
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. To change the Safe@Office appliance’s internal IP address, enter the new IP address in the
IP Address field.
4. To change the internal network range, enter a new value in the
Subnet Mask field.
Note: The internal network range is defined both by the Safe@Office appliance’s internal IP address and by the subnet mask.
For example, if the Safe@Office appliance’s internal IP address is 192.168.100.7, and you set the subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, the network’s IP address range will be 192.168.100.1 – 192.168.100.254.
5. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
6. Click
OK.
• The Safe@Office appliance's internal IP address and/or the internal network range are changed.
• A success message appears.
7. Do
one of the following:
• If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically
(using DHCP), and the Safe@Office DHCP server is enabled, restart your computer.
198 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Network Settings
Your computer obtains an IP address in the new range.
• Otherwise, manually reconfigure your computer to use the new address range using the TCP/IP settings. For information on configuring
TCP/IP, see TCP/IP Settings on page 94.
Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT
Hide Network Address Translation (Hide NAT) enables you to share a single public
Internet IP address among several computers, by “hiding” the private IP addresses of the internal computers behind the Safe@Office appliance’s single Internet IP address.
Note: If Hide NAT is disabled, you must obtain a range of Internet IP addresses from your ISP. Hide NAT is enabled by default.
Note: Static NAT, Hide NAT, and custom NAT rules can be used together.
To enable/disable Hide NAT
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. In the desired network's row, click
Edit.
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. From the
Hide NAT list, select Enabled or Disabled.
4. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
5. Click
OK.
• If you chose to disable Hide NAT, it is disabled.
• If you chose to enable Hide NAT, it is enabled.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 199
Configuring Network Settings
Configuring a DHCP Server
By default, the Safe@Office appliance operates as a DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol) server. This allows the Safe@Office appliance to automatically configure all the devices on your network with their network configuration details.
Note: The DHCP server only serves computers that are configured to obtain an IP address automatically. If a computer is not configured to obtain an IP address automatically, it is recommended to assign it an IP address outside of the DHCP address range. However, if you do assign the computer an IP address within the
DHCP address range, the DHCP server will detect this and will not assign this IP address to another computer.
If you already have a DHCP server in your internal network, and you want to use it instead of the Safe@Office DHCP server, you must disable the Safe@Office DHCP server, since you cannot have two DHCP servers or relays on the same network segment.
If you want to use a DHCP server on the Internet or via a VPN, instead of the Safe@Office
DHCP server, you can configure DHCP relay. When in DHCP relay mode, the
Safe@Office appliance relays information from the desired DHCP server to the devices on your network.
Note: You can perform DHCP reservation using network objects. For information, see
Using Network Objects on page 227.
Note: The following DHCP server configurations are not available for the OfficeMode network:
• Enabling and disabling the Safe@Office DHCP Server
• Setting the DHCP range manually
• Configuring DHCP relay
200 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Enabling/Disabling the Safe@Office DHCP Server
Configuring Network Settings
You can enable and disable the Safe@Office DHCP Server for internal networks.
To enable/disable the Safe@Office DHCP server
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. In the desired network's row, click
Edit.
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. From the
DHCP Server list, select Enabled or Disabled.
4. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
5. Click
OK.
A success message appears
6. If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically (using
DHCP), and either the Safe@Office DHCP server or another DHCP server is enabled, restart your computer.
If you enabled the DHCP server, your computer obtains an IP address in the DHCP address range.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 201
Configuring Network Settings
Configuring the DHCP Address Range
By default, the Safe@Office DHCP server automatically sets the DHCP address range.
The DHCP address range is the range of IP addresses that the DHCP server can assign to network devices. IP addresses outside of the DHCP address range are reserved for statically addressed computers.
If desired, you can set the Safe@Office DHCP range manually.
To configure the DHCP address range
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. In the desired network's row, click
Edit.
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. Do one of the following:
• To allow the DHCP server to set the IP address range, select the Automatic
DHCP range check box.
• To set the DHCP range manually:
1) Clear the
Automatic DHCP range check box.
202 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
DHCP IP range fields appear.
Configuring Network Settings
2) In the
DHCP IP range fields, type the desired DHCP range.
4. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
5. Click
OK.
A success message appears
6. If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically (using
DHCP), and either the Safe@Office DHCP server or another DHCP server is enabled, restart your computer.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the new DHCP address range.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 203
Configuring Network Settings
Configuring DHCP Relay
You can configure DHCP relay for internal networks.
Note: DHCP relay will not work if the appliance is located behind a NAT device.
To configure DHCP relay
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. In the desired network's row, click
Edit.
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. In the
DHCP Server list, select Relay.
204 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Network Settings
The
Automatic DHCP range check box is disabled, and new fields appear.
4. In the
Primary DHCP Server IP field, type the IP address of the primary DHCP server.
5. In the
Secondary DHCP Server IP field, type the IP address of the DHCP server to use if the primary DHCP server fails.
6. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
7. Click
OK.
A success message appears
8. If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically (using
DHCP), and either the Safe@Office DHCP server or another DHCP server is enabled, restart your computer.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the DHCP address range.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 205
Configuring Network Settings
Configuring DHCP Server Options
If desired, you can configure the following custom DHCP options for an internal network:
• Domain suffix
• DNS servers
• WINS servers
• Default gateway
• NTP servers
• VoIP call managers
• TFTP server and boot filename
• Avaya, Nortel, and Thomson IP phone configuration strings
To configure DHCP options
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. In the desired network's row, click
Edit.
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. In the
DHCP area, click Options.
206 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
DHCP Server Options page appears.
Configuring Network Settings
4. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 207
Configuring Network Settings
New fields appear, depending on the check boxes you selected.
5. Click
Apply.
6. If your computer is configured to obtain its IP address automatically (using
DHCP), restart your computer.
Your computer obtains an IP address in the DHCP address range.
208 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Network Settings
Table 38: DHCP Server Options Fields
In this field… Do this…
Domain Name Type a default domain suffix that should be passed to DHCP clients.
The DHCP client will automatically append the domain suffix for the resolving of non-fully qualified names. For example, if the domain suffix is set to "mydomain.com", and the client tries to resolve the name
“mail”, the suffix will be automatically appended to the name, resulting in “mail.mydomain.com”.
Name Servers
Automatically assign
DNS server
(recommended)
DNS Server 1, 2
Clear this option if you do not want the gateway to act as a DNS relay server and pass its own IP address to DHCP clients.
Normally, it is recommended to leave this option selected.
The
DNS Server 1 and DNS Server 2 fields appear.
Type the IP addresses of the Primary and Secondary DNS servers to pass to DHCP clients instead of the gateway.
Automatically assign
WINS server
WINS Server 1, 2
Clear this option if you do not want DHCP clients to be assigned the same WINS servers as specified by the Internet connection configuration (in the
Internet Setup page).
The
WINS Server 1 and WINS Server 2 fields appear.
Type the IP addresses of the Primary and Secondary WINS servers to use instead of the gateway.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 209
Configuring Network Settings
In this field…
Automatically assign default gateway
Default Gateway
Do this…
Clear this option if you do not want the DHCP server to pass the current gateway IP address to DHCP clients as the default gateway's
IP address.
Normally, it is recommended to leave this option selected.
The
Default Gateway field is enabled.
Type the IP address to pass to DHCP clients as the default gateway, instead of the current gateway IP address.
Other Services
Time Server 1, 2
Call Manager 1, 2
TFTP Server
TFTP Boot File
X-Windows Display
Manager
Avaya IP Phone
These fields are not available for the OfficeMode network.
To use Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers to synchronize the time on the DHCP clients, type the IP address of the Primary and
Secondary NTP servers.
To assign Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) call managers to the IP phones, type the IP address of the Primary and Secondary VoIP servers.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) enables booting diskless computers over the network.
To assign a TFTP server to the DHCP clients, type the IP address of the TFTP server.
Type the boot file to use for booting DHCP clients via TFTP.
To assign X-Windows terminals the appropriate X-Windows Display
Manager when booting via DHCP, type the XDM server's IP address.
To enable Avaya IP phones to receive their configuration, type the phone's configuration string.
210 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
Nortel IP Phone
Configuring Network Settings
Do this…
To enable Nortel IP phones to receive their configuration, type the phone's configuration string.
Thomson IP Phone To enable Thomson IP phones to receive their configuration, type the phone's configuration string.
Configuring a DMZ Network
In addition to the LAN network, you can define a second internal network called a DMZ
(demilitarized zone) network.
For information on default security policy rules controlling traffic to and from the DMZ,
see Default Security Policy on page 393.
To configure a DMZ network
1. Connect the DMZ computer to the DMZ port.
If you have more than one computer in the DMZ network, connect a hub or switch to the DMZ port, and connect the DMZ computers to the hub.
2. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 211
Configuring Network Settings
The
Ports page appears.
3. Next to the
DMZ/WAN2 port, click Edit.
212 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Port Setup page appears.
Configuring Network Settings
4. In the
Assign to network drop-down list, select DMZ.
5. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
6. Click
OK.
7. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
8. In the DMZ network's row, click
Edit.
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
9. In the
Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
The fields are enabled.
10. In the
IP Address field, type the IP address of the DMZ network's default gateway.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 213
Configuring Network Settings
Note: The DMZ network must not overlap other networks.
11. In the
Subnet Mask drop-down list, select the DMZ’s internal network range.
12. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 199.
13. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 200.
14. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
15. Click
OK.
A success message appears.
Configuring the OfficeMode Network
By default, VPN Clients connect to the VPN Server using an Internet IP address locally assigned by an ISP. This may lead to the following problems:
• VPN Clients on the same network will be unable to communicate with each other via the Safe@Office Internal VPN Server. This is because their IP addresses are on the same subnet, and they therefore attempt to communicate directly over the local network, instead of through the secure VPN link.
• Some networking protocols or resources may require the client’s IP address to be an internal one.
OfficeMode solves these problems by enabling the Safe@Office DHCP Server to automatically assign a unique local IP address to the VPN client, when the client connects and authenticates. The IP addresses are allocated from a pool called the OfficeMode
network.
214 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Network Settings
Note: OfficeMode requires either Check Point SecureClient, an L2TP client, or an
Endpoint Connect client to be installed on the VPN clients. It is not supported by
Check Point SecuRemote.
When OfficeMode is not supported by the VPN client, traditional mode will be used instead.
To configure the OfficeMode network
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. In the OfficeMode network's row, click
Edit.
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
3. In the
Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
The fields are enabled.
4. In the
IP Address field, type the IP address to use as the OfficeMode network's default gateway.
Note: The OfficeMode network must not overlap other networks.
5. In the
Subnet Mask text box, type the OfficeMode internal network range.
6. If desired, enable or disable
Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 199.
7. If desired, configure DHCP options.
See Configuring DHCP Server Options on page 206.
8. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
9. Click
OK.
A success message appears.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 215
Configuring Network Settings
Configuring VLANs
Your Safe@Office appliance allows you to partition your network into several virtual LAN networks (VLANs). A VLAN is a logical network behind the Safe@Office appliance.
Computers in the same VLAN behave as if they were on the same physical network: traffic flows freely between them, without passing through a firewall. In contrast, traffic between a VLAN and other networks passes through the firewall and is subject to the security policy. By default, traffic from a VLAN to any other internal network (including other
VLANs) is blocked. In this way, defining VLANs can increase security and reduce network congestion.
For example, you can assign each division within your organization to a different VLAN, regardless of their physical location. The members of a division will be able to communicate with each other and share resources, and only members who need to communicate with other divisions will be allowed to do so. Furthermore, you can easily transfer a member of one division to another division without rewiring your network, by simply reassigning them to the desired VLAN.
216 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Network Settings
The Safe@Office appliance supports the following VLAN types:
• Tag-based
In tag-based VLAN you use one of the gateway’s ports as a 802.1Q VLAN trunk, connecting the appliance to a VLAN-aware switch. Each VLAN behind the trunk is assigned an identifying number called a “VLAN ID”, also referred to as a "VLAN tag". All outgoing traffic from a tag-based VLAN contains the VLAN's tag in the packet headers. Incoming traffic to the VLAN must contain the VLAN's tag as well, or the packets are dropped. Tagging ensures that traffic is directed to the correct VLAN.
Figure 27: Tag-Based VLAN
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 217
Configuring Network Settings
• Port-based
Port-based VLAN allows assigning the appliance's LAN ports to VLANs, effectively transforming the appliance's four-port switch into up to four firewall-isolated security zones. You can assign multiple ports to the same VLAN, or each port to a separate
VLAN.
Port-based VLAN does not require an external VLAN-capable switch, and is therefore simpler to use than tag-based VLAN. However, port-based VLAN is limited by the number of appliance LAN ports.
Figure 28: Port-Based VLAN
• Virtual access point (VAP)
In wireless Safe@Office models, you can partition the primary WLAN network into wireless VLANs called virtual access points (VAPs). You can use VAPs to grant different permissions to groups of wireless users, by configuring each VAP with the desired security policy and network settings, and then assigning each group of wireless users to the relevant VAP. For example, you could assign different permissions to employees and guests on the company's wireless network, by configuring two VAPs called “Guest” and “Employee” with the desired set of permissions.
To use VAPs, you must enable the primary WLAN network.
For more information on VAPs, see Overview on page 305.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 218
Configuring Network Settings
• Wireless Distribution System (WDS) links
In wireless Safe@Office models, you can extend the primary WLAN's coverage area, by creating a Wireless Distribution System (WDS). A WDS is a system of access points that communicate with each other wirelessly, without any need for a wired backbone. WDS is usually used together with bridge mode to connect the networks behind the access points.
To create a WDS, you must add WDS links between the desired access points. For example, if your business extends across a large area, and a single access point does not provide sufficient coverage, then you can add a second access point and create a
WDS link between the two access points.
To use WDS links, you must enable the primary WLAN network.
For more information on WDS links, see Overview on page 305.
In Safe@Office models with unlimited nodes, you can define up to 64 VLAN networks
(port-based, tag-based, VAP, and WDS links combined), while in other models, you can define up to ten VLAN networks. In wireless models, up to three of the VLAN networks can be VAPs, and up to seven of the VLAN networks can be WDS links. For information
on counting VAPs and WDS links, see Configuring a Wireless Network on page 305.
For information on the default security policy for VLANs, see Default Security Policy on
Adding and Editing VLANs
For information on adding and editing port-based VLANs, see Adding and Editing Port-
For information on adding and editing tag-based VLANs, see Adding and Editing Tag-
For information on adding and editing VAPs, see Configuring Virtual Access Points on
For information on adding and editing WDS links, see Configuring WDS Links on page
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 219
Configuring Network Settings
Adding and Editing Port-Based VLANs
To add or edit a port-based VLAN
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a VLAN, click Add Network.
• To edit a VLAN, click Edit in the desired VLAN’s row.
The
Edit Network Settings page for VLAN networks appears.
3. In the
Network Name field, type a name for the VLAN.
4. In the
Type drop-down list, select Port Based VLAN.
The
VLAN Tag field disappears.
220 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Network Settings
5. In the
Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
The fields are enabled.
6. In the
IP Address field, type the IP address of the VLAN network's default gateway.
Note: The VLAN network must not overlap other networks.
7. In the
Subnet Mask field, type the VLAN's internal network range.
8. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 199.
9. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 200.
10. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
11. Click
OK.
A success message appears.
12. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
13. Next to the LAN port you want to assign, click
Edit.
The
Port Setup page appears.
14. In the
Assign to network drop-down list, select the VLAN network's name.
You can assign more than one port to the VLAN.
15. Click
Apply.
221 Chapter 6: Managing Your Network
Configuring Network Settings
Adding and Editing Tag-Based VLANs
To add or edit a tag-based VLAN
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a VLAN, click Add Network.
• To edit a VLAN, click Edit in the desired VLAN’s row.
The
Edit Network Settings page for VLAN networks appears.
3. In the
Network Name field, type a name for the VLAN.
4. In the
Type drop-down list, select Tag Based VLAN.
The
VLAN Tag field appears.
5. In the
VLAN Tag field, type a tag for the VLAN.
This must be an integer between 1 and 4095.
6. In the
Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
The fields are enabled.
7. In the
IP Address field, type the IP address of the VLAN network's default gateway.
Note: The VLAN network must not overlap other networks.
8. In the
Subnet Mask field, type the VLAN's internal network range.
9. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 199.
10. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 200.
11. Click
Apply.
222 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Network Settings
A warning message appears.
12. Click
OK.
A success message appears.
13. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
14. In the
DMZ/WAN2 drop-down list, select VLAN Trunk.
15. Click
Apply.
The DMZ/WAN2 port now operates as a VLAN Trunk port. In this mode, it will not accept untagged packets.
16. Configure a VLAN trunk (802.1Q) port on the VLAN-aware switch, according to the vendor instructions. Define the same VLAN IDs on the switch.
17. Connect the Safe@Office appliance's DMZ/WAN2 port to the VLAN-aware switch's VLAN trunk port.
Deleting VLANs
To delete a VLAN
1. If the VLAN is port-based, do the following: a. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears. b. Remove all port assignments to the VLAN, by selecting other networks in the drop-down lists. c. Click
Apply.
2. Delete any firewall rules or VStream Antivirus rules that use this VLAN.
3. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
4. In the desired VLAN’s row, click
Erase.
A confirmation message appears.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 223
Using the Internal DNS Server
5. Click
OK.
The VLAN is deleted.
Using the Internal DNS Server
The Safe@Office appliance includes an internal DNS server, which can resolve DNS names for hosts defined as network objects. Each host is assigned a DNS name in the format <networkobjectname>.<domainsuffix>, where
<networkobjectname> is the name of the network object representing the host, and
<domainsuffix> is the domain name suffix configured for the internal DNS server.
The internal DNS server will reply to all DNS requests for the host's DNS name with the host's IP address.
In addition to resolving network objects, the internal DNS server also resolves requests for the current gateway. If a gateway hostname is defined, the DNS server will reply to DNS requests in the format <hostname>.<domainsuffix> with the gateway’s internal IP address. For information on configuring the gateway's hostname, see Configuring a
Note: The internal DNS server responds to DNS requests from internal network hosts only. It does not respond to requests from the Internet.
Example
If a computer with the IP address 192.188.22.1 is represented by a network object called
"server1", and the internal DNS server is configured with the domain suffix
"mycompany.com", then the computer's DNS name will be "server1.mycompany.com", and the internal DNS server will reply to all DNS requests for "server1.mycompany.com" with the IP address 192.188.22.1.
In addition, if the gateway is configured with the hostname "mygateway", the DNS server will reply to all DNS requests for "mygateway.mycompany.com" with the gateway’s internal IP address.
224 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Enabling the Internal DNS Server
To enable the internal DNS server
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the DNS Server tab.
The
DNS Server page appears.
Using the Internal DNS Server
2. Select the
Enable the Internal DNS Server check box.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 225
Using the Internal DNS Server
The
Domain Name Suffix field appears.
3. In the
Domain Name Suffix field, type the desired domain name suffix.
4. Click
Apply.
226 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Network Objects
Using Network Objects
You can add individual computers or networks as network objects. This enables you to configure various settings for the computer or network represented by the network object.
You can configure the following settings for a network object:
• Static NAT (or One-to-One NAT)
Static NAT allows the mapping of Internet IP addresses or address ranges to hosts inside the internal network. This is useful if you want a computer in your private network to have its own Internet IP address. For example, if you have both a mail server and a Web server in your network, you can map each one to a separate Internet
IP address.
Static NAT rules do not imply any security rules. To allow incoming traffic to a host for which you defined Static NAT, you must create an Allow rule. When specifying firewall rules for such hosts, use the host’s internal IP address, and not the Internet IP address to which the internal IP address is mapped. For further information, see Using
Note: Static NAT, Hide NAT, and custom NAT rules can be used together.
Note: The Safe@Office appliance supports Proxy ARP (Address Resolution
Protocol). When an external source attempts to communicate with such a computer, the Safe@Office appliance automatically replies to ARP queries with its own MAC address, thereby enabling communication. As a result, the Static NAT Internet IP addresses appear to external sources to be real computers connected to the WAN interface.
• Assign the network object's IP address to a MAC address
Normally, the Safe@Office DHCP server consistently assigns the same IP address to a specific computer. However, if the Safe@Office DHCP server runs out of IP addresses and the computer is down, then the DHCP server may reassign the IP address to a different computer.
If you want to guarantee that a particular computer's IP address remains constant, you can reserve the IP address for use by the computer's MAC address only. This is called
227 Chapter 6: Managing Your Network
Using Network Objects
DHCP reservation, and it is useful if you are hosting a public Internet server on your network.
• Web Filtering enforcement
You can specify whether or not to enforce the Web Filtering service and Web rules for the network object. Network objects that are excluded from such enforcement will be able to access the Internet without restriction. For information on Web Filtering, see
Web Filtering on page 575. For information on Web rules, see Using Web Rules on
• Secure HotSpot enforcement
In Safe@Office products with Power Pack, you can specify whether or not to exclude the network object from HotSpot enforcement. Excluded network objects will be able to access the network without viewing the
My HotSpot page. Furthermore, users on
HotSpot networks will be able to access the excluded network object without viewing the My HotSpot page. For information on Secure HotSpot, see Configuring Secure
• 802.1x port-based security enforcement
In Safe@Office products with Power Pack, when DHCP reservation is used, you can specify whether or not to exclude a computer from 802.1x port-based security enforcement. Excluded computers will be able to connect to the Safe@Office appliance's ports and access the network without authenticating. For information on
802.1x port-based security, see Using Port-Based Security on page 413.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 228
Adding and Editing Network Objects
Using Network Objects
You can add or edit network objects via:
• The Network Objects page
This page enables you to add both individual computers and networks.
• The My Computers page
This page enables you to add only individual computers as network objects. The computer's details are filled in automatically in the wizard.
To add or edit a network object via the Network Objects page
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Network Objects tab.
The
Network Objects page appears with a list of network objects.
229 Chapter 6: Managing Your Network
Using Network Objects
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a network object, click New.
• To edit an existing network object, click the Edit icon next to the desired computer in the list.
The
Safe@Office Network Object Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Network Object Type dialog box displayed.
3. Do one of the following:
• To specify that the network object should represent a single computer or device, click
Single Computer.
• To specify that the network object should represent a network, click Network.
4. Click
Next.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 230
Using Network Objects
The
Step 2: Computer Details dialog box appears. If you chose Single Computer, the dialog box includes the
Reserve a fixed IP address for this computer option.
If you chose
Network, the dialog box does not include this option.
5. Complete the fields using the information in the tables below.
6. Click
Next.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 231
Using Network Objects
The
Step 3: Save dialog box appears.
7. Type a name for the network object in the field.
8. Click
Finish.
To add or edit a network object via the My Computers page
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the My Computers tab.
232 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
My Computers page appears.
Using Network Objects
If a computer has not yet been added as a network object, the
Add button appears next to it. If a computer has already been added as a network object, the
Edit button appears next to it.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a network object, click Add next to the desired computer.
• To edit a network object, click Edit next to the desired computer.
The
Safe@Office Network Object Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Network Object Type dialog box displayed.
3. Do one of the following:
• To specify that the network object should represent a single computer or device, click
Single Computer.
• To specify that the network object should represent a network, click Network.
4. Click
Next.
The
Step 2: Computer Details dialog box appears.
233 Chapter 6: Managing Your Network
Using Network Objects
The computer's IP address and MAC address are automatically filled in.
5. Complete the fields using the information in the tables below.
6. Click
Next.
The
Step 3: Save dialog box appears with the network object's name. If you are adding a new network object, this name is the computer's name.
7. To change the network object name, type the desired name in the field.
8. Click
Finish.
The new object appears in the
Network Objects page.
Table 39: Network Object Fields for a Single Computer
In this field…
IP Address
Do this…
Type the IP address of the local computer, or click
This Computer to specify your computer.
Reserve a fixed IP address for this computer and
Allow this computer to connect when MAC
Select this option to assign the network object's IP address to a
MAC address, and to allow the network object to connect to the
WLAN when MAC Filtering is used.
For information about MAC Filtering, see Configuring a Wireless filtering is enabled
The
MAC Address and Exclude this computer from 802.1x Port Security fields are enabled.
MAC Address Type the MAC address you want to assign to the network object's IP address, or click
This Computer to specify your computer's MAC address.
234 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Network Objects
In this field… Do this…
Exclude this computer Select this option to exclude this computer from 802.1x port-based from 802.1x Port Security security enforcement.
The computer will be able to connect to a Safe@Office appliance port and access the network without authenticating.
Perform Static NAT
(Network Address
Translation)
External IP
Exclude this computer from HotSpot enforcement
Exclude this computer from Web Filtering
Select this option to map the local computer's IP address to an
Internet IP address.
You must then fill in the
External IP field.
Type the Internet IP address to which you want to map the local computer's IP address.
Select this option to exclude this computer from Secure HotSpot enforcement.
This computer will be able to access the network without viewing the
My HotSpot page. Furthermore, users on HotSpot networks will be able to access this computer without viewing the My HotSpot page.
Select this option to exclude this computer from the Web Filtering service and Web rule enforcement.
235 Chapter 6: Managing Your Network
Using Network Objects
Table 40: Network Object Fields for a Network
In this field… Do this…
IP Range Type the range of local computer IP addresses in the network.
Perform Static NAT
(Network Address
Translation)
External IP Range
Exclude this network from HotSpot enforcement
Exclude this network from Web Filtering
Select this option to map the network's IP address range to a range of
Internet IP addresses of the same size.
You must then fill in the
External IP Range field.
Type the Internet IP address range to which you want to map the network's IP address range.
Select this option to exclude this network from Secure HotSpot enforcement.
Computers on the excluded network will be able to access your network without viewing the
My HotSpot page. Furthermore, users on
HotSpot networks will be able to access computers on the excluded network without viewing the My HotSpot page.
Select this option to exclude this network from the Web Filtering service and Web rules.
236 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Viewing and Deleting Network Objects
Configuring Network Service Objects
To view or delete a network object
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Network Objects tab.
The
Network Objects page appears with a list of network objects.
2. To delete a network object, do the following: a. In the desired network object's row, click
Erase.
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The network object is deleted.
Configuring Network Service Objects
You can add custom services as network service objects. This enables you to configure firewall rules, VStream Antivirus rules, custom NAT rules, and static routes for the services represented by the network service objects.
Defining network service objects can make your policies easier to understand and maintain. When a network service object is modified, the change automatically takes effect in all rules and settings that reference the network service object.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 237
Configuring Network Service Objects
Adding and Editing Network Service Objects
To add or edit a network service object
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Network Services tab.
The
Network Services page appears with a list of network service objects.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a network service object, click New.
• To edit an existing network service object, click Edit next to the desired object in the list.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 238
Configuring Network Service Objects
The
Safe@Office Network Service Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Network Service
Details dialog box displayed.
3. Complete the fields using the information in the table below.
4. Click
Next.
The
Step 2: Network Service Name dialog box appears.
5. Type a name for the network service object in the field.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 239
Configuring Network Service Objects
6. Click
Finish.
Table 41: Network Service Fields
In this field… Do this…
Protocol Select the network service's IP protocol.
If you select
Other, the Protocol Number field appears. If you select TCP or
UDP, the Port Ranges field appears.
Protocol Number Type the number of the network service's IP protocol.
Port Ranges Type the network service's port or port ranges.
Multiple ports or port ranges must be separated by commas. For example: "1000-1003,2000-2001,2005".
Viewing and Deleting Network Service Objects
To view or delete a network service object
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Network Services tab.
The
Network Services page appears with a list of network service objects.
2. To delete a network service object, do the following: a. In the desired network service object's row, click
Erase.
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The network service object is deleted.
240 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Static Routes
Using Static Routes
A static route is a setting that explicitly specifies the route to use for packets, according to
one of the following criteria:
• The packet's source IP address and/or destination IP address
• The network service used to send the packet
Packets that match the criteria for a specific static route are sent to the route's defined destination, or next hop, which can be a specific gateway's IP address or an Internet connection. Specifying an Internet connection as the static route's next hop is useful in cases where the ISP's default gateway IP address is dynamically assigned to the gateway, as this approach allows you to route traffic to the Internet connection by specifying its name, instead of a static IP address.
Note: If the static route's next hop is an Internet connection that is currently unavailable, the Safe@Office appliance sends matching traffic through the static route with the next-lowest metric.
Packets with a source, destination, or network service that do not match any defined static route are routed to the default gateway. To modify the default gateway, see Using a LAN
When a static route is based on the packet's source, it is called a source route. Source routing can be used, for example, for load balancing between two Internet connections. For instance, if you have an Accounting department and a Marketing department, and you want each to use a different Internet connection for outgoing traffic, you can add a static route specifying that traffic originating from the Accounting department should be sent via
WAN1, and another static route specifying that traffic originating from the Marketing department should be sent via WAN2.
A static route that is based on the network service used to send the packet is called a
service route. Service routing is useful for directing all traffic of a particular type to a specific Internet connection. For example, you can choose to route all HTTP traffic to the secondary Internet connection, while routing all other traffic to the primary Internet connection. Service routes can be defined for network service objects, enabling you to create routes for custom protocols and port ranges.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 241
Using Static Routes
The
Static Routes page lists all existing routes, including the default, and indicates whether each route is currently "Up" (reachable) or not.
Adding and Editing Static Routes
To add a static route
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Routes tab.
The
Static Routes page appears, with a list of existing static routes.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a static route, click New Route.
• To edit an existing static route, click Edit next to the desired route in the list.
242 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Static Routes
The
Static Route Wizard opens displaying the Step 1: Source and Destination dialog box.
3. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
4. Click
Next.
The
Step 2: Next Hop and Metric dialog box appears.
5. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 243
Using Static Routes
6. Click
Next.
The new static route is saved.
Table 42: Static Route Fields
In this field… Do this…
Source Specify the source network (source routing). This can be either of the following:
• ANY. This route applies to packets originating in any network.
• Specified Network. This route applies to packet originating in a specific network. The
Network and Netmask fields appear.
Source - Network Type the source network's IP address.
Select the source network's subnet mask. Source -
Netmask
Destination Specify the destination network. This can be either of the following:
• ANY. This route applies to packets sent to any network.
• Specified Network. This route applies to packets sent to a specific network. The
Network and Netmask fields appear.
Type the destination network's IP address. Destination -
Network
Destination -
Netmask
Service
Select the destination network's subnet mask.
Specify the service used to send packets (service routing). This can be either of the following:
• ANY. This route applies to packets sent using any service.
• A specific service or network service object.
Note: When defining a static route for a specific service, the Source and
Destination fields must be set to ANY.
244 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Static Routes
In this field… Do this…
Next Hop IP
Metric
Specify the next hop to which packets should be sent. This can be any of the following:
• Specified IP. Traffic matching this static route's criteria will be routed to a specific gateway. Type the IP address of the desired gateway (next hop router) in the field provided.
• WAN (Internet). Traffic matching this static route's criteria will be routed to the Internet connection on the WAN1 interface.
• WAN2 (Internet). Traffic matching this static route's criteria will be routed to the Internet connection on the WAN2 interface.
Type the static route's metric.
When a packet matches multiple static routes' criteria, the gateway sends the packet to the matching route with the lowest metric.
The default value is 10.
Viewing and Deleting Static Routes
To view or delete a static route
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Routes tab.
The
Static Routes page appears, with a list of existing static routes.
2. To refresh the view, click
Refresh.
3. To delete a route, do the following: a. In the desired route's row, click
Erase.
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The route is deleted.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 245
Managing Ports
Managing Ports
The Safe@Office appliance enables you to quickly and easily assign its ports to different uses, as shown in the following table. If desired, you can also disable ports.
Table 43: Ports and Assignments
You can assign this port... To these uses...
LAN 1-4 LAN network
A WAN Internet connection
A port-based VLAN
A VLAN that is dynamically assigned by a RADIUS server, as part of an 802.1x port-based security scheme
DMZ/WAN2
DSL
WAN
Serial
ExC
DMZ network
A WAN Internet connection
VLAN trunk
A port-based VLAN
A VLAN that is dynamically assigned by a RADIUS server, as part of an 802.1x port-based security scheme
An ADSL Internet connection
A WAN Internet connection
RS232 modem
Serial console
An ExpressCard cellular modem
246 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Managing Ports
You can assign this port... To these uses...
USB Printers
USB-based modems
The Safe@Office appliance also allows you to restrict each port to a specific link speed and duplex setting and to configure its security scheme. For information on port-based
security, see Using Port-Based Security on page 413.
Viewing Port Statuses
You can view the status of the Safe@Office appliance's ports on the
Ports page, including each Ethernet connection's duplex state. This is useful if you need to check whether the appliance's physical connections are working, and you can’t see the LEDs on front of the appliance.
To view port statuses
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 247
Managing Ports
The
Ports page appears. In non-ADSL models, this page appears as follows:
248 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In ADSL models, this page appears as follows:
Managing Ports
The page displays the information for each port, as described in the following table.
2. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
Table 44: Ports Fields
This field… Displays…
Assign To The port's current assignment.
For example, if the DMZ/WAN2 port is currently used for the DMZ, the field displays "DMZ".
249 Chapter 6: Managing Your Network
Managing Ports
This field…
Status
Displays…
The port's current status.
Ethernet ports can have the following statuses:
Status Description
The detected link speed and duplex (
Full
Duplex or Half Duplex)
The port is in use.
No Link
The appliance does not detect anything connected to the port.
Disabled
The port is disabled.
For example, the DMZ/WAN2 port's status will be "Disabled" if the port is assigned to
"None", or if it assigned to "DMZ" and the
DMZ is disabled.
250 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
This field…
Managing Ports
Displays…
The ADSL port can have the following statuses:
Status
Sync OK
No Sync
Disabled
Description
The ADSL modem synchronized with the
ADSL service provider.
The ADSL modem failed to synchronize with the ADSL service provider.
Check that a micro-filter is properly connected, and check that your
DSL Standard setting is compatible with your service provider. You can view this setting in the
Network > Internet Setup page.
The port is disabled.
The port's status will be disabled, if it is assigned to "None".
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 251
Managing Ports
This field… Displays…
The USB port can have the following statuses:
Status
Connected (number)
Not Connected
Description
USB devices (printers or modem) are connected to the USB ports. The number of connected devices appears in parentheses.
No USB devices are connected to the USB ports.
The ExC port can have the following statuses:
Status
Connected (number)
Not Connected
Description
A ExpressCard modems is inserted in the
ExpressCard slot.
No ExpressCard modem is inserted in the
ExpressCard slot.
252 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
This field…
802.1x
Managing Ports
Displays…
The port's security scheme. This can be any of the following:
Scheme
N/A
Unauthorized
Authorized (network)
Quarantine (network)
Description
No security scheme is defined for the port.
An 802.1x security scheme is defined for the port. Users have not yet connected to the port and attempted to authenticate, or a user failed to authenticate and no Quarantine network is configured.
An 802.1x security scheme is defined for the port. A user connected to the port, authenticated successfully, and was assigned to a network. The name of the assigned network appears in parentheses.
An 802.1x security scheme is defined for the port. A user connected to the port, failed to authenticate, and was assigned to the
Quarantine network. The name of the
Quarantine network appears in parentheses.
For information on configuring 802.1x port-based security, see Using
Port-Based Security on page 413.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 253
Managing Ports
Modifying Port Assignments
You can assign ports to different networks or purposes. Since modifying port assignments often requires additional configurations, use the following table to determine which procedure you should use.
Table 45: Modifying Port Assignments
To assign a port to... See...
No network The procedure below. This disables the port.
LAN
VLAN or
VLAN Trunk
A WAN Internet connection
The procedure below
The procedure below.
Note: When you configure an Ethernet-based Internet connection on a port, the port is automatically assigned to
Internet use. For information on configuring an Internet
connection, see Using Internet Setup on page 141.
DMZ
Console
A VLAN network, dynamically assigned by a RADIUS server
A printer
An RS232 Modem
A USB-based modem
Configuring a DMZ Network
Configuring Port-Based Security on page 415
Setting Up Network Printers on page 768
Setting Up an RS232 Modem on page 177
Setting Up a USB Modem on page 181
254 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Managing Ports
To assign a port to... See...
An ExpressCard modem
Setting Up an ExpressCard Cellular Modem on page 185
To modify a port assignment
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
2. Next to the desired port, click
Edit.
The
Port Setup page appears.
3. In the
Assign to Network drop-down list, do one of the following:
• To assign a network port to the LAN, select LAN.
• To configure a network port for use with a WAN Internet connection, select
Internet.
• To disable a network port, select None.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 255
Managing Ports
• To disable the Serial port, select Disabled.
4. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
5. Click
OK.
The port is reassigned to the specified network or purpose.
Modifying Link Configurations
By default, the Safe@Office appliance automatically detects the link speed and duplex. If desired, you can manually restrict the appliance's ports to a specific link speed and duplex setting.
To modify a port's link configuration
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
2. Next to the desired port, click
Edit.
The
Port Setup page appears.
3. In the
Link Configuration drop-down list, do one of the following:
• Select the desired link speed and duplex.
• Select Automatic Detection to configure the port to automatically detect the link speed and duplex.
This is the default.
4. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
5. Click
OK.
The port uses the specified link speed and duplex.
256 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Resetting Ports to Defaults
Managing Ports
You can reset the Safe@Office appliance's ports to their default link configurations
("Automatic Detection") and default assignments (shown in the following table).
Table 46: Default Port Assignments
Port Default Assignment
LAN 1-4 LAN
DMZ / WAN2
WAN
ADSL
Serial
DMZ
This port is always assigned to the WAN.
This port is always assigned to the WAN.
Console
Note: Resetting ports to their defaults may result in the loss of your Internet connection. Therefore, it is recommended to be particularly careful when performing this procedure remotely.
Chapter 6: Managing Your Network 257
Managing Ports
Resetting All Ports to Defaults
To reset all ports to defaults
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
2. Click
Default.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click
OK.
All ports are reset to their default assignments and to "Automatic Detection" link configuration.
Resetting Individual Ports to Defaults
To reset a port to defaults
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
2. Next to the desired port, click
Edit.
The
Port Setup page appears.
3. Click
Default.
A confirmation message appears.
4. Click
OK.
The port is reset to its default assignment and to "Automatic Detection" link configuration.
258 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Overview
Chapter 7
Using Bridges
This chapter describes how to connect multiple network segments at the data-link layer, using a bridge.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Adding and Editing Bridges ..................................................................... 266
Adding Internal Networks to Bridges ....................................................... 270
Adding Internet Connections to Bridges .................................................. 274
Overview
The Safe@Office appliance enables you to connect multiple network segments at the datalink layer, by configuring a bridge. Bridges offer the following advantages:
• Easy network segmentation
Bridges can be used to compartmentalize an existing network into several security zones, without changing the IP addressing scheme or the routers' configuration.
Ordinarily, if you need to deploy a firewall within an internal network, you can divide the existing subnet into two networks and configure a new routing scheme. However, in some deployments, the amount of network reconfiguration required prohibits such a solution. Adding a bridge not only allows you to segment your network quickly and easily, but it allows you to choose whether to enable the firewall between network segments.
Chapter 7: Using Bridges 259
Overview
If you enable the firewall between bridged network segments, the gateway operates as a regular firewall between network segments, inspecting traffic and dropping or blocking unauthorized or unsafe traffic. In contrast, if you disable the firewall between bridged network segments, all network interfaces assigned to the bridge are connected directly, with no firewall filtering the traffic between them. The network interfaces operate as if they were connected by a hub or switch.
Figure 29: Bridge with Four VLANs
260 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Overview
For example, if you assign the LAN and primary WLAN networks to a bridge and disable the bridge's internal firewall, the two networks will act as a single, seamless network, and only traffic from the LAN and primary WLAN networks to other networks (for example, the Internet) will be inspected by the firewall. If you enable the internal firewall, it will enforce security rules and inspect traffic between the LAN and primary WLAN networks.
Figure 30: Bridge Firewalling
Chapter 7: Using Bridges 261
Overview
• Transparent roaming
In a routed network, if a host is physically moved from one network area to another, then the host must be configured with a new IP address. However, in a bridged network, there is no need to reconfigure the host, and work can continue with minimal interruption.
The Safe@Office appliance allows you to configure anti-spoofing for bridged network segments. When anti-spoofing is configured for a segment, only IP addresses within a specific IP address range can be sent from that network segment. For example, if you configure anti-spoofing for the “Marketing” network segment, the following things happens:
• If a host with an IP address outside of the allowed IP address range tries to connect from a port or VLAN that belongs to the “Marketing” network segment, the connection will be blocked and logged as “Spoofed IP”.
• If a host with an IP address within the bridge IP address range tries to connect from a port or VLAN that belongs to a network segment other than the
“Marketing” segment, the connection will be blocked and logged as “Spoofed
IP”.
Note: The following Safe@Office models do not support using bridge mode with portbased VLAN:
• SBX166-LHGE-2
• SBX166-LHGE-3
Note: If the Safe@Office 1000N Power Pack upgrade is not installed, you can configure only one bridge.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 262
Overview
How Does Bridge Mode Work?
Bridges operate at layer 2 of the OSI model, therefore adding a bridge to an existing network is completely transparent and does not require any changes to the network's structure.
Each bridge maintains a forwarding table, which consists of <MAC Address, Port> associations. When a packet is received on one of the bridge ports, the forwarding table is automatically updated to map the source MAC address to the network port from which the packet originated, and the gateway processes the received packet according to the packet's type.
When a bridge receives an IP packet, the gateway processes the packet as follows:
1. The destination MAC address is looked up in the bridge's forwarding table.
2. If the destination MAC address is found in the forwarding table, the packet is forwarded to the corresponding port.
3. If the destination MAC address is not found in the forwarding table, the destination IP address is searched for in all the defined bridge IP address ranges.
4. If the destination IP address is found in the bridge IP address range of exactly one port, the IP address is transmitted to that port.
5. If the IP address is found in the bridge IP address range of more than one port, the packet is dropped. The gateway then sends an ARP query to each of the relevant ports.
6. If a host responds to the ARP request packet with an ARP reply, the forwarding table is updated with the correct <MAC Address, Port> association. Subsequent packets will be forwarded using the forwarding table.
If a bridge receives a non-IP packet, and the bridge is configured to forward non-IP protocol Layer-2 traffic, the gateway processes the packet as follows:
1. The destination MAC address is looked up in the bridge's forwarding table.
2. If the destination MAC address is found in the forwarding table, the packet is forwarded to the corresponding port.
3. If the destination MAC address is not found in the forwarding table, the packet is flooded to all the ports on the bridge.
263 Chapter 7: Using Bridges
Overview
Multiple Bridges and Spanning Tree Protocol
When using multiple bridges, you can enable fault tolerance and optimal packet routing, by configuring Spanning Tree Protocol (STP - IEEE 802.1d). When STP is enabled, each bridge communicates with its neighboring bridges or switches to discover how they are interconnected. This information is then used to eliminate loops, while providing optimal routing of packets. STP also uses this information to provide fault tolerance, by recomputing the topology in the event that a bridge or a network link fails.
Figure 31: Dual Redundant Bridges with STP
264 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Workflow
Figure 32: Link Redundancy with STP
Workflow
To use a bridge
1. Add a bridge.
See Adding and Editing Bridges on page 266.
2. Add the desired internal networks to the bridge.
See Adding Internal Networks to Bridges on page 270.
3. Add the desired Internet connections to the bridge.
See Adding Internet Connections to Bridges on page 274.
4. If you enabled the firewall between networks on this bridge, add security rules and VStream Antivirus rules as needed.
Chapter 7: Using Bridges 265
Adding and Editing Bridges
For information on adding security rules, see Adding and Editing Rules on page 404.
For information on adding VStream Antivirus rules, see Adding and Editing Vstream
Adding and Editing Bridges
To add or edit a bridge
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a bridge, click Add Bridge.
• To edit a bridge, click Edit in the desired bridge's row.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 266
The
Bridge Configuration page appears.
Adding and Editing Bridges
3. Complete the fields using the following table.
4. Click
Apply.
A success message appears.
Chapter 7: Using Bridges 267
Adding and Editing Bridges
Table 47: Bridge Configuration Fields
In this field… Do this…
Network Name Type a name for the bridge.
Firewall Between Members
Non IP Traffic
Spanning Tree Protocol
Specify whether the firewall should be enabled between networks on this bridge, by selecting one of the following:
• Enabled. The firewall is enabled, and it will inspect traffic between networks on the bridge, enforcing firewall rules and SmartDefense protections. This is the default value.
• Disabled. The firewall is disabled between networks on the bridge.
Specify how the firewall should handle non-IP protocol traffic between networks on this bridge, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. The firewall will block all non-IP protocol traffic on the bridge. This is the default value.
• Pass. The firewall will allow all non-IP protocol traffic on the bridge and process it as described in Using
Specify whether to enable STP for this bridge, by selecting one of the following:
• Enabled. STP is enabled.
• Disabled. STP is disabled. This is the default value.
If you selected
Enabled, the Bridge Priority field appears.
268 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
Bridge Priority
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Adding Internal Networks to Bridges
Do this…
Select this bridge's priority.
The bridge's priority is combined with a bridged network's MAC address to create the bridge's ID. The bridge with the lowest ID is elected as the root bridge. The other bridges in the tree calculate the shortest distance to the root bridge, in order to eliminate loops in the topology and provide fault tolerance.
To increase the chance of this bridge being elected as the root bridge, select a lower priority.
Note: If you select the same priority for all bridges, the root bridge will be elected based on MAC address.
The default value is 32768.
This field only appears if STP is enabled.
Type the IP address to use for this gateway on this bridge.
Note: The bridge must not overlap other networks.
Select this bridge's subnet mask.
Chapter 7: Using Bridges 269
Adding Internal Networks to Bridges
Adding Internal Networks to Bridges
Note: In order to add a VLAN of any type (port-based, tag-based, VAP, or WDS link) to the bridge, you must first create the desired VLAN.
For information on adding port-based VLANs, see Adding and Editing Port-Based
VLANs on page 220. For information on adding tag-based VLANs, see Adding and
Editing Tag-Based VLANs on page 222.For information on adding VAPs, see
Configuring Virtual Access Points on page 333. For information on adding WDS
links, see Configuring WDS Links on page 338.
To add an internal network to a bridge
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
2. Click
Edit in the desired network's row.
3. In the
Mode drop-down list, select Bridged.
270 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
New fields appear.
Adding Internal Networks to Bridges
4. Complete these fields as described below.
Chapter 7: Using Bridges 271
Adding Internal Networks to Bridges
If the assigned bridge uses STP, additional fields appear.
5. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
6. Click
OK.
A success message appears.
In the
My Network page, the internal network appears indented under the bridge.
272 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 48: Bridged Network Fields
In this field… Do this…
Assign to Bridge
Adding Internal Networks to Bridges
Select the bridge to which the network should be assigned.
Bridge Anti-Spoofing
Allowed IP Range
Select this option to enable anti-spoofing.
If anti-spoofing is enabled, only IP addresses within the
Allowed
IP Range can be source IP addresses for packets on this network.
Type the range of IP addresses that should be allowed on this network.
Note: When assigning IP addresses to machines in a bridged network segment, the Safe@Office DHCP server allocates only addresses within the allowed IP address range.
To enable clients to move between bridged networks without changing IP addresses, configure identical IP address ranges for the desired networks, thus allowing the IP addresses to be used on either of the bridged networks.
Note: Configuring overlapping or identical allowed IP address ranges will decrease the effectiveness of anti-spoofing between the bridged networks.
Spanning Tree Protocol - Port
Cost
Type the port's cost.
STP uses the available port with the lowest cost to forward frames to the root port. All other ports are blocked.
It is recommended to set a lower value for faster links.
This field only appears if the bridge uses STP.
273 Chapter 7: Using Bridges
Adding Internet Connections to Bridges
In this field… Do this…
Spanning Tree Protocol - Port
Priority
Select the port's priority.
The port's priority is combined with the port's logical number to create the port's ID. The port with the lowest ID is elected as the root port, which forwards frames out of the bridge. The other ports in the bridge calculate the least-cost path to the root port, in order to eliminate loops in the topology and provide fault tolerance.
To increase the chance of this port being elected as the root port, select a lower priority.
Note: If you select the same priority for all ports, the root port will be elected based on the port's logical number.
The default value is 128.
This field only appears if the bridge uses STP.
Adding Internet Connections to Bridges
To add an Internet connection to a bridge
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The
Internet page appears.
2. Next to the desired Internet connection, click
Edit.
The
Internet Setup page appears.
3. In the
Port drop-down list, specify the port that the Internet connection should use, by doing one of the following:
• To use the ADSL port, select ADSL.
274 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding Internet Connections to Bridges
This option is available in ADSL models only.
• To use the WAN port, select WAN.
This option is available in non-ADSL models only.
• To use the DMZ/WAN2 port, select WAN2.
4. Do one of the following:
• To configure a Bridged PPPoA connection, in the Connection Type field, select
PPPoA.
This option is available in ADSL models only.
• Otherwise, in the Connection Type field, select Bridged.
New fields appear.
5. Complete the fields specified in the table below.
Chapter 7: Using Bridges 275
Adding Internet Connections to Bridges
6. Complete the rest of the fields using the relevant information in Internet Setup
New fields appear, depending on the selected options, and whether the selected bridge uses STP.
7. Click
Apply.
The Safe@Office appliance attempts to connect to the Internet, and the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connecting”. This may take several seconds.
Once the connection is made, the Status Bar displays the Internet status “Connected”.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 276
Adding Internet Connections to Bridges
Table 49: Bridged Connection Fields
In this field… Do this…
Bridge Mode Select this option to configure a Bridged PPPoA connection.
The
Bridge To field appears.
This field is relevant for Bridged PPPoA connections only.
Bridge To
Assign to Bridge
Select the bridge to which you want to add the PPPoA connection.
This field is relevant for Bridged PPPoA connections only.
Select the bridge to which the connection should be assigned.
This field is relevant for regular bridged connections only.
Spanning Tree Protocol - Port
Cost
Type the port's cost.
STP uses the available port with the lowest cost to forward frames to the root port. All other ports are blocked.
It is recommended to set a lower value for faster links.
This field only appears if the selected bridge uses STP. It is relevant for regular bridged connections only.
Chapter 7: Using Bridges 277
Deleting Bridges
In this field… Do this…
Spanning Tree Protocol - Port
Priority
Select the port's priority.
The port's priority is combined with the port's logical number to create the port's ID. The port with the lowest ID is elected as the root port, which forwards frames out of the bridge. The other ports in the bridge calculate the least-cost path to the root port, in order to eliminate loops in the topology and provide fault tolerance.
To increase the chance of this port being elected as the root port, select a lower priority.
Note: If you select the same priority for all ports, the root port will be elected based on the port's logical number.
The default value is 128.
This field only appears if the selected bridge uses STP. It is relevant for regular bridged connections only.
Deleting Bridges
To delete a bridge
1. Remove all internal networks from the bridge, by doing the following for each network: a. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears. b. Click
Edit in the desired network's row. c. In the
Mode drop-down list, select Enabled. d. Click
Apply.
278 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Deleting Bridges
2. Remove all Internet connections from the bridge, by doing the following for each connection: a. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Internet tab.
The
Internet page appears. b. Next to the desired Internet connection, click
Edit. c. The
Internet Setup page appears. d. In the
Connection Type field, select the desired connection type (not
Bridged). e. Click
Apply.
3. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
4. In the desired bridge’s row, click
Erase.
A confirmation message appears.
5. Click
OK.
The bridge is deleted.
279 Chapter 7: Using Bridges
Overview
Chapter 8
Configuring High Availability
This chapter describes how to configure High Availability (HA) for two or more
Safe@Office appliances.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Configuring High Availability on a Gateway ........................................... 284
Sample Implementation on Two Gateways .............................................. 289
Overview
You can create a High Availability (HA) cluster consisting of two or more Safe@Office appliances. For example, you can install two Safe@Office appliances on your network, one acting as the “Master”, the default gateway through which all network traffic is routed, and one acting as the “Backup”. If the Master fails, the Backup automatically and transparently takes over all the roles of the Master. This ensures that your network is consistently protected by a Safe@Office appliance and connected to the Internet.
The gateways in a HA cluster each have a separate IP address within the local network. In addition, the gateways share a single virtual IP address, which is the default gateway address for the local network. Control of the virtual IP address is passed as follows:
1. Each gateway is assigned a priority, which determines the gateway's role: the gateway with the highest priority is the "Active Gateway" and uses the virtual
IP address, and the rest of the gateways are "Passive Gateways".
2. The Active Gateway sends periodic signals, or “heartbeats”, to the network via a synchronization interface.
The synchronization interface can be any internal network or bridge existing on both gateways, except the WAN interface and the primary WLAN.
3. If the heartbeat from the Active Gateway stops (indicating that the Active
Gateway has failed), the gateway with the highest priority becomes the new
Active Gateway and takes over the virtual IP address.
Chapter 8: Configuring High Availability 281
Overview
4. When a gateway that was offline comes back online, or a gateway's priority changes, the gateway sends a heartbeat notifying the other gateways in the cluster.
If the gateway's priority is now the highest, it becomes the Active Gateway.
The Safe@Office appliance supports Internet connection tracking, which means that each appliance tracks its Internet connection's status and reduces its own priority by a userspecified amount, if its Internet connection goes down. If the Active Gateway's priority drops below another gateway's priority, then the other gateway becomes the Active
Gateway.
Note: You can force a fail-over to a passive Safe@Office appliance. You may want to do this in order to verify that HA is working properly, or if the active Safe@Office appliance needs repairs. To force a fail-over, switch off the primary box or disconnect it from the LAN network.
The Safe@Office appliance supports configuring multiple HA clusters on the same network segment. To this end, each cluster must be assigned a unique ID number.
When HA is configured, you can specify that only the Active Gateway in the cluster should connect to the Internet. This is called WAN HA, and it is useful in the following situations:
• Your Internet subscription cost is based is on connection time, and therefore having the Passive appliances needlessly connected to the Internet costs you money.
• You want multiple appliances to share the same static IP address without creating an IP address conflict.
WAN HA avoids an IP address change, and thereby ensures virtually uninterrupted access from the Internet to internal servers at your network.
On the other hand, you might prefer to keep Passive Gateways connected to the Internet at all times, so that they can download updates from the Service Center and be accessible for remote management, even when not acting as the Active Gateway. In this case, you must assign a virtual IP address to the WAN interface. Each Passive Gateway will remain constantly connected to the Internet using its WAN interface's primary IP address, while remaining on standby to take over the WAN virtual IP address, in the event that the Active
Gateway fails. If desired, you can configure a WAN virtual IP address for the WAN2 interface, as well.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 282
Overview
Note: To use a WAN virtual IP address, the Internet connection method must be
"Static IP". PPP-based connections and dynamic IP connections are not supported.
Before configuring HA, the following requirements must be met:
• You must have at least two identical Safe@Office appliances.
• The appliances must have identical firmware versions and firewall rules.
• The appliances' internal networks and bridges must be the same.
• The appliances must have different real internal IP addresses, but share the same virtual IP address.
• The appliances' synchronization interface ports must be connected either directly, or via a hub or a switch. For example, if the DMZ is the synchronization interface, then the DMZ/WAN2 ports on the appliances must be connected to each other.
The synchronization interface need not be dedicated for synchronization only. It may be shared with an active internal network or bridge.
You can configure HA for the WAN interface, for any bridge, and for any internal network except wireless networks and the OfficeMode network.
Note: You can enable the DHCP server in all Safe@Office appliances. A Passive
Gateway’s DHCP server will start answering DHCP requests only if the Active
Gateway fails.
Note: If you configure HA for the primary WLAN network:
• A passive appliance's wireless transmitter will be disabled until the gateway becomes active.
• The two primary WLAN networks can share the same SSID and wireless frequency.
• Wireless interfaces cannot serve as the synchronization interface.
283 Chapter 8: Configuring High Availability
Configuring High Availability on a Gateway
Configuring High Availability on a Gateway
The following procedure explains how to configure HA on a single gateway. You must perform this procedure on each Safe@Office appliance that you want to include in the HA cluster.
To configure HA on a Safe@Office appliance
1. Set the appliance’s internal IP addresses and network range.
Each appliance must have a different internal IP address.
See Changing IP Addresses on page 198.
2. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the High Availability tab.
The
High Availability page appears.
3. Select the
Gateway High Availability check box.
284 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The fields are enabled.
Configuring High Availability on a Gateway
4. Next to each network for which you want to enable HA, select the
HA check box.
The
Internet-Primary field represents the WAN interface, and the Internet-Secondary field represents the WAN2 interface.
5. In the
Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address.
285 Chapter 8: Configuring High Availability
Configuring High Availability on a Gateway
This can be any unused IP address in the network, and must be the same for all gateways.
You can assign a virtual IP address to any internal interface, as well as to "LAN Static
IP"
Internet connections (that is, LAN connections for which the Obtain IP address
automatically (using DHCP) check box is cleared).
6. Click the
Synchronization radio button next to the network you want to use as the synchronization interface.
Note: The synchronization interface must be the same for all gateways, and must always be connected and enabled on all gateways. Otherwise, multiple appliances may become active, causing unpredictable problems.
The synchronization interface cannot be an Internet connection or a wireless interface.
7. Complete the fields using the information the following table.
8. Click
Apply.
A success message appears.
9. If desired, configure WAN HA for both the primary and secondary Internet connection.
This setting should be the same for all gateways. For further information, see the
Do
not connect if this gateway is in passive state field in Using Internet Setup on page
10. If you configured a virtual IP address for the WAN or WAN2 interface, configure the Internet connection to use the "Static IP" connection method.
See Using Internet Setup on page 141.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 286
Table 50: High Availability Page Fields
In this field…
Priority
Do this…
My Priority
Configuring High Availability on a Gateway
Type the gateway's priority.
This must be an integer between 1 and 255.
Internet Connection
Tracking
Internet - Primary
Internet - Secondary
Port Tracking
LAN1-4
DMZ
Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the primary Internet connection goes down.
This must be an integer between 0 and 255.
Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the secondary
Internet connection goes down.
This must be an integer between 0 and 255.
Note: This value is only relevant if you configured a backup connection.
For information on configuring a backup connection, see Configuring
a Backup Internet Connection on page 191.
Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the LAN port's
Ethernet link is lost.
This must be an integer between 0 and 255.
Type the amount to reduce the gateway's priority if the DMZ / WAN2 port's Ethernet link is lost.
This must be an integer between 0 and 255.
Chapter 8: Configuring High Availability 287
Configuring High Availability on a Gateway
In this field…
When in passive state
Disable VPN
Do this…
Disable OSPF
Disable BGP
Disable RIP
Disable Multicast routers
Disable Wireless
Transmitter
Advanced
Select this option to specify that VPN connectivity should be disabled when the gateway is a Passive Gateway.
Select this option to specify that Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) dynamic routing should be disabled when the gateway is a Passive
Gateway.
Select this option to specify that Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) dynamic routing should be disabled when the gateway is a Passive
Gateway.
Select this option to specify that Routing Information Protocol (RIP) dynamic routing should be disabled when the gateway is a Passive
Gateway.
This field is only relevant for N series appliances.
Select this option to specify that Distance Vector Multicast Routing
Protocol (DVMRP) and Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse-Mode
(PIM-SM) multicast routing should be disabled when the gateway is a
Passive Gateway.
This field is only relevant for N series appliances.
Indicates that the appliance's wireless transmitter should be disabled when the gateway is a Passive Gateway.
This option only appears for wireless appliances, and it cannot be cleared.
288 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Sample Implementation on Two Gateways
In this field…
Group ID
Do this…
If multiple HA clusters exist on the same network segment, type the ID number of the cluster to which the gateway should belong.
This must be an integer between 1 and 255.
The default value is 55. If only one HA cluster exists, there is no need to change this value.
Sample Implementation on Two Gateways
The following procedure illustrates how to configure HA for the following two
Safe@Office gateways, Gateway A and Gateway B:
Table 51: Gateway Details
Internal Networks
Gateway A
LAN, DMZ
Gateway B
LAN, DMZ
Internet Connections
LAN Network IP Address
LAN Network
Subnet Mask
DMZ Network IP Address
Primary and secondary
192.169.100.1
255.255.255.0
Primary only
192.169.100.2
255.255.255.0
192.169.101.1 192.169.101.2
DMZ Network
Subnet Mask
255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
The gateways have two internal networks in common, LAN and DMZ. This means that you can configure HA for the LAN network, the DMZ network, or both. You can use either of the networks as the synchronization interface.
Chapter 8: Configuring High Availability 289
Sample Implementation on Two Gateways
The procedure below shows how to configure HA for both the LAN and DMZ networks.
The synchronization interface is the DMZ network, the LAN virtual IP address is
192.168.100.3, and the DMZ virtual IP address is 192.168.101.3. Gateway A is the Active
Gateway.
To configure HA for Gateway A and Gateway B
1. Connect the LAN port of Gateways A and B to hub 1.
2. Connect the DMZ port of Gateways A and B to hub 2.
3. Connect the LAN network computers of Gateways A and B to hub 1.
4. Connect the DMZ network computers of Gateways A and B to hub 2.
5. Do the following on Gateway A: a. Set the gateway's internal IP addresses and network range to the values specified in the table above.
See Changing IP Addresses on page 198.
b. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the High Availability tab.
The
High Availability page appears. c. Select the
Gateway High Availability check box.
The
Gateway High Availability area is enabled. The LAN and DMZ networks are listed. d. Next to
LAN, select the HA check box. e. In the LAN network's
Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address
192.168.100.3. f. Next to
DMZ, select the HA check box. g. In the DMZ network's
Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address
192.168.101.3. h. Click the
Synchronization radio button next to DMZ. i. In the
My Priority field, type "100".
The high priority means that Gateway A will be the Active Gateway. j. In the
Internet - Primary field, type "20".
Gateway A will reduce its priority by 20, if its primary Internet connection goes down. k. In the
Internet - Secondary field, type "30".
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 290
Sample Implementation on Two Gateways
Gateway A will reduce its priority by 30, if its secondary Internet connection goes down. l. Click
Apply.
A success message appears.
6. Do the following on Gateway B: a. Set the gateway's internal IP addresses and network range to the values specified in the table above.
See Changing IP Addresses on page 198.
b. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the High Availability tab.
The
High Availability page appears. c. Select the
Gateway High Availability check box.
The
Gateway High Availability area is enabled. The LAN and DMZ networks are listed. d. Next to
LAN, select the HA check box. e. In the LAN network's
Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address
192.168.100.3. f. Next to
DMZ, select the HA check box. g. In the DMZ network's
Virtual IP field, type the default gateway IP address
192.168.101.3. h. Click the
Synchronization radio button next to DMZ. i. In the
My Priority field, type "60".
The low priority means that Gateway B will be the Passive Gateway. j. In the
Internet - Primary field, type "20".
Gateway B will reduce its priority by 20, if its Internet connection goes down. k. Click
Apply.
A success message appears.
Gateway A's priority is 100, and Gateway B's priority is 60. So long as one of Gateway A's
Internet connections is up, Gateway A is the Active Gateway, because its priority is higher than that of Gateway B.
If both of Gateway A's Internet connections are down, it deducts from its priority 20 (for the primary connection) and 30 (for the secondary connection), reducing its priority to 50.
In this case, Gateway B's priority is the higher priority, and it becomes the Active
Gateway.
291 Chapter 8: Configuring High Availability
Sample Implementation on Two Gateways
292 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Overview
Chapter 9
Using Traffic Shaper
This chapter describes how to use Traffic Shaper to control the flow of communication to and from your network.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Viewing and Deleting Classes .................................................................. 302
Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults ............................................................ 303
Overview
Traffic Shaper is a bandwidth management solution that allows you to set bandwidth policies to control the flow of communication. Traffic Shaper ensures that important traffic takes precedence over less important traffic, so that your business can continue to function with minimum disruption, despite network congestion.
Traffic Shaper uses Stateful Inspection technology to access and analyze data derived from all communication layers. This data is used to classify traffic in Quality of Service (QoS) classes. Traffic Shaper divides available bandwidth among the classes according to weight.
For example, suppose Web traffic is deemed three times as important as FTP traffic, and these services are assigned weights of 30 and 10 respectively. If the lines are congested,
Traffic Shaper will maintain the ratio of bandwidth allocated to Web traffic and FTP traffic at 3:1.
If a specific class is not using all of its bandwidth, the leftover bandwidth is divided among the remaining classes, in accordance with their relative weights. In the example above, if only one Web and one FTP connection are active and they are competing, the Web connection will receive 75% (30/40) of the leftover bandwidth, and the FTP connection will receive 25% (10/40) of the leftover bandwidth. If the Web connection closes, the FTP connection will receive 100% of the bandwidth.
Chapter 9: Using Traffic Shaper 293
Overview
Each class has a bandwidth limit, which is the maximum amount of bandwidth that connections belonging to that class may use together. Once a class has reached its bandwidth limit, connections belonging to that class will not be allocated further bandwidth, even if there is unused bandwidth available. For example, traffic used by Peer-
To-Peer file-sharing applications may be limited to a specific rate, such as 512 kilobit per second. Each class also has a “Delay Sensitivity” value, indicating whether connections belonging to the class should be given precedence over connections belonging to other classes.
Your Safe@Office appliance offers different degrees of traffic shaping, depending on its model:
• Simplified Traffic Shaper. Includes a fixed set of four predefined classes. You can assign network traffic to each class, but you cannot modify the classes, delete them, or create new classes. Available in Safe@Office 1000N.
• Advanced Traffic Shaper. Includes a set of four predefined classes, but enables you to modify the classes, delete them, and create new classes. You can define up to eight classes, including weight, bandwidth limits, and DiffServ
(Differentiated Services) Packet Marking parameters. DiffServ marks packets as belonging to a certain Quality of Service class. These packets are then granted priority on the public network according to their class. Available in Safe@Office products with Power Pack.
Note: You can prioritize wireless traffic from WMM-compliant multimedia applications, by enabling Wireless Multimedia (WMM) for the desired wireless network. See
Manually Configuring a Wireless Network on page 321.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 294
Setting Up Traffic Shaper
Setting Up Traffic Shaper
To set up Traffic Shaper
1. Enable Traffic Shaper for the Internet connection, using the procedure Using
You can enable Traffic Shaper for incoming or outgoing connections.
• When enabling Traffic Shaper for outgoing traffic:
Specify a rate (in kilobits/second) slightly lower than your Internet connection's maximum measured upstream speed.
• When enabling Traffic Shaper for incoming traffic:
Specify a rate (in kilobits/second) slightly lower than your Internet connection's maximum measured downstream speed.
It is recommended to try different rates in order to determine which ones provide the best results.
Note: Traffic Shaper cannot control the number or type of packets it receives from the
Internet; it can only affect the rate of incoming traffic by dropping received packets.
This makes the shaping of inbound traffic less accurate than the shaping of outbound traffic. It is therefore recommended to enable traffic shaping for incoming traffic only if necessary.
2. If you are using a Safe@Office product with Power Pack, you can add QoS classes that reflect your communication needs, or modify the four predefined
QoS classes.
See Adding and Editing Classes on page 298.
Note: If you are using Safe@Office 1000N, you have Simplified Traffic Shaper, and you cannot add or modify the classes. To add or modify classes, upgrade to
Safe@Office with Power Pack, which supports Advanced Traffic Shaper.
3. Use Allow or Allow and Forward rules to assign different types of connections to QoS classes.
For example, if Traffic Shaper is enabled for outgoing traffic, and you create an Allow rule associating all outgoing VPN traffic with the Urgent QoS class, then Traffic
295 Chapter 9: Using Traffic Shaper
Predefined QoS Classes
Shaper will handle outgoing VPN traffic as specified in the bandwidth policy for the
Urgent class.
See Adding and Editing Rules on page 404.
Note: Traffic Shaper must be enabled for the direction of traffic specified in the rule.
Note: If you do not assign a connection type to a class, Traffic Shaper automatically assigns the connection type to the predefined "Default" class.
Predefined QoS Classes
Traffic Shaper provides the following predefined QoS classes.
To assign traffic to these classes, define firewall rules as described in Using Rules on page
Table 52: Predefined QoS Classes
Class Weight Delay Sensitivity Useful for
Default 10 Medium
(Normal Traffic)
Normal traffic.
All traffic is assigned to this class by default.
296 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Class
Urgent
Important
Adding and Editing Classes
Weight Delay Sensitivity Useful for
15 High
(Interactive Traffic)
Traffic that is highly sensitive to delay. For example, IP telephony, videoconferencing, and interactive protocols that require quick user response, such as telnet.
Note that the weight (amount of bandwidth) allocated to this class is less than the weight allocated to the “Important” class. The "Urgent" class is ideal for delay-sensitive traffic that does not demand a high amount of bandwidth.
20 Medium
(Normal Traffic)
Low Priority 5 Low
(Bulk Traffic)
Important traffic that requires a high allocation of bandwidth, but which is not exceptionally sensitive to delays. For example, you can prioritize the HTTP traffic of a company's executive officers over other types of traffic, by assigning it to the “Important” class.
Traffic that is not sensitive to long delays, and which does not require a high guaranteed bandwidth. For example, SMTP traffic
(outgoing email).
Note: In Simplified Traffic Shaper, these classes cannot be changed.
297 Chapter 9: Using Traffic Shaper
Adding and Editing Classes
Adding and Editing Classes
To add or edit a QoS class
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Traffic Shaper tab.
The
Quality of Service Classes page appears.
2. Click
Add.
298 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding and Editing Classes
The
Safe@Office QoS Class Editor wizard opens, with the Step 1 of 3: Quality of Service
Parameters dialog box displayed.
3. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
4. Click
Next.
The
Step 2 of 3: Advanced Options dialog box appears.
5. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
Chapter 9: Using Traffic Shaper 299
Adding and Editing Classes
Note: Traffic Shaper may not enforce guaranteed rates and relative weights for incoming traffic as accurately as for outgoing traffic. This is because Traffic Shaper cannot control the number or type of packets it receives from the Internet; it can only affect the rate of incoming traffic by dropping received packets. It is therefore recommended to enable traffic shaping for incoming traffic only if necessary. For information on enabling Traffic Shaper for incoming and outgoing traffic, see Using
6. Click
Next.
The
Step 3 of 3: Save dialog box appears with a summary of the class.
7. Type a name for the class.
For example, if you are creating a class for high priority Web connections, you can name the class "High Priority Web".
8. Click
Finish.
The new class appears in the
Quality of Service Classes page.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 300
Table 53: QoS Class Fields
In this field… Do this…
Relative Weight
Adding and Editing Classes
Type a value indicating the class's importance relative to the other defined classes.
For example, if you assign one class a weight of 100, and you assign another class a weight of 50, the first class will be allocated twice the amount of bandwidth as the second when the lines are congested.
Delay Sensitivity Select the degree of precedence to give this class in the transmission queue:
• Low (Bulk Traffic) - Traffic that is not sensitive to long delays. For example, SMTP traffic (outgoing email).
• Medium (Normal Traffic) - Normal traffic
• High (Interactive Traffic) - Traffic that is highly sensitive to delay.
For example, IP telephony, videoconferencing, and interactive protocols that require quick user response, such as telnet.
Traffic Shaper serves delay-sensitive traffic with a lower latency. That is,
Traffic Shaper attempts to send packets with a "High (Interactive Traffic)" level before packets with a "Medium (Normal Traffic)" or "Low (Bulk
Traffic)" level.
Outgoing Traffic:
Guarantee At Least
Select this option to guarantee a minimum bandwidth for outgoing traffic belonging to this class. Then type the minimum bandwidth (in kilobits/second) in the field provided.
Outgoing Traffic:
Limit rate to
Select this option to limit the rate of outgoing traffic belonging to this class.
Then type the maximum rate (in kilobits/second) in the field provided.
Incoming Traffic:
Guarantee At Least
Select this option to guarantee a minimum bandwidth for incoming traffic belonging to this class. Then type the minimum bandwidth (in kilobits/second) in the field provided.
301 Chapter 9: Using Traffic Shaper
Viewing and Deleting Classes
In this field…
Incoming Traffic:
Limit rate to
Do this…
Select this option to limit the rate of incoming traffic belonging to this class.
Then type the maximum rate (in kilobits/second) in the field provided.
DiffServ Code Point Select this option to mark packets belonging to this class with a DiffServ
Code Point (DSCP), which is an integer between 0 and 63. Then type the
DSCP in the field provided.
The marked packets will be given priority on the public network according to their DSCP.
To use this option, your ISP or private WAN must support DiffServ. You can obtain the correct DSCP value from your ISP or private WAN administrator.
Viewing and Deleting Classes
You cannot delete a class that is currently used by a rule. You can determine whether a class is in use or not, by viewing the
Rules page.
To view or delete an existing QoS class
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Traffic Shaper tab.
The
Quality of Service Classes page appears with a list of all defined QoS classes.
2. To delete a QoS class, do the following: a. In the desired class's row, click
Erase.
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The class is deleted.
302 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults
Restoring Traffic Shaper Defaults
If desired, you can reset the Traffic Shaper bandwidth policy to use the four predefined classes, and restore these classes to their default settings. For information on these classes
and their defaults, see Predefined QoS Classes on page 296.
Note: This will delete any additional classes you defined in Traffic Shaper and reset all rules to use the Default class.
If one of the additional classes is currently used by a rule, you cannot reset
Traffic Shaper to defaults. You can determine whether a class is in use or not, by viewing the
Rules page.
To restore Traffic Shaper defaults
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Traffic Shaper tab.
The
Quality of Service Classes page appears.
2. Click
Restore Defaults.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click
OK.
Chapter 9: Using Traffic Shaper 303
Overview
Chapter 10
Working with Wireless Networks
This chapter describes how to configure wireless internal networks.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Configuring Wireless Networks ............................................................... 314
Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity ................................................... 342
Overview
Your Safe@Office wireless appliance features a built-in 802.11b/g/n access point that is tightly integrated with the firewall and VPN.
Safe@Office 1000NW wireless appliances support the latest 802.11n standard (up to 300
Mbps) which integrates multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO) features. MIMO is a technology that uses multiple antennas to coherently resolve more information than possible using a single antenna, and reduces problems with reflected signals. In addition,
MIMO includes Spatial Division Multiplexing (SDM), which spatially multiplexes independent data streams that are transferred simultaneously within one spectral channel of bandwidth. MIMO SDM can significantly increase data throughput, as the number of resolved special data streams is increased.
In addition to MIMO, 802.11n also supports 40MHz channels, a channel width that is double the 20MHz available in previous 802.11 PHYs, allowing for doubling of the PHY data rate over a single 20 MHz channel.
Safe@Office 1000NW appliances are backwards compatible with the older 802.11b standard (up to 11 Mbps) and 802.11g standard (up to 54 Mbps), so that both new and old adapters of these standards are interoperable. Safe@Office 500W appliances also support a special Super G mode that allows reaching a throughput of up to 108 Mbps with Super G
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 305
Overview compatible stations. For more information on the Super G mode refer to: http://www.super-ag.com.
Safe@Office wireless appliances transmit in 2.4GHz range, using dual diversity antennas to increase the range. When the 802.11n standard is employed with Safe@Office 1000NW, the appliance can transmit in the 5GHz range, as well. Safe@Office 500W appliances support a special extended range (XR) mode that allows up to three times the range of a regular 802.11g access point. XR dramatically stretches the performance of a wireless
LAN, by enabling long-range connections. The architecture delivers receive sensitivities of up to 105 dBm, over 20 dB more than the 802.11 specification. This allows ranges of up to
300 meters indoors, and up to 1 km (3200 ft) outdoors, with XR-enabled wireless stations
(actual range depends on environment).
The Primary WLAN
In addition to the LAN and DMZ networks, you can define a wireless internal network called the primary WLAN (wireless LAN) network. The primary WLAN is the main wireless network, and it controls all other wireless network's statuses: wireless networks can be enabled only if the primary WLAN is enabled, and disabling the primary WLAN automatically disables all other wireless network. In addition, all wireless networks inherit certain settings from the primary WLAN.
You can configure the primary WLAN in either of the following ways:
• Wireless Configuration Wizard. Guides you through the primary WLAN setup, step by step.
See Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard on page 314.
• Manual configuration. Offers advanced setup options for the primary WLAN.
See Manually Configuring a WLAN on page 321.
Note: If the Safe@Office 1000N Power Pack upgrade is not installed, the primary
WLAN is the only wireless network.
306 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Virtual Access Points
Overview
The Safe@Office appliance enables you to partition the primary WLAN into virtual access points (VAPs). A VAP is a logical wireless network behind the Safe@Office appliance and
is a type of VLAN (see Configuring VLANs on page 216). Like other types of VLANs,
VAPs are isolated from each other and can have separate security policies, IP network segments, and Traffic Shaper settings. This enables you to configure separate policies for different groups of wireless users.
For example, you could assign different permissions to employees and guests using your company's wireless network, by defining two VAPs called “Guest” and “Employee”. The
Guest VAP would use simple WPA-Personal encryption, and the security policy would mandate that stations connected to this network can access the Internet, but not sensitive company resources. You could configure Traffic Shaper bandwidth management to give stations in the Guest network a low priority, and by enabling Secure HotSpot on this network, you could define terms of use that the guest users must accept before accessing the Internet. In contrast, the Employee VAP would use the more secure WPA2-Enterprise
(802.11i) encryption standard and allow employees to access company resources such as the intranet.
You can configure up to three VAPs, in addition to the primary WLAN. For information
on configuring VAPs, see Configuring VAPs on page 333.
Wireless Distribution System Links
The Safe@Office appliance enables you to extend the primary WLAN's coverage area, by creating a Wireless Distribution System (WDS). A WDS is a system of access points that communicate with each other wirelessly via WDS links, without any need for a wired backbone. For example, if your business has expanded across two buildings, and a single access point no longer provides sufficient coverage, you can add another access point that acts as a repeater. If it is impractical or costly to run wires between the access points, you can connect them by configuring a WDS that includes both access points.
WDS is usually used together with bridge mode to connect the networks behind the access points. For example, if you have two network segments, each of which is served by a
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 307
Overview different access point, you can bridge the two network segments over WDS links. The network segments will communicate with each other wirelessly via their access points and
act as a single network. For information on bridge mode, see Using Bridges on page 259.
WDS links are considered a type of VLAN (see Configuring VLANs on page 216).
Therefore, they can have separate security policies, IP network segments, and Traffic
Shaper settings.
You can use WDS links to create loop-free topologies, such as a star or tree of access points.
Figure 33: WDS Star of Wireless Access Points
308 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Overview
When used together with bridge mode and Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), you can use
WDS links to create redundant topologies, such as a loop or mesh of linked access points.
Figure 34: Two Access Points Linked by a WDS Bridge
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 309
Overview
Figure 35: Redundant Loop of Access Points Linked by WDS and STP
Note: Mesh topology is only supported in Safe@Office 500W.
You can configure up to seven WDS links, in addition to the primary WLAN. For
information on configuring WDS links, see Configuring WDS Links on page 338.
Note: All access points in a WDS must use the same radio channel for the WDS link and for communicating with wireless stations. Therefore, using WDS may have a negative impact on wireless throughput. In this case, it is recommended to use a traditional wired backbone to connect the access points, instead of WDS links.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 310
Network Count Limitations
Overview
You can configure a total of eight wireless objects, including any combination of the following:
• The primary WLAN
• Up to three virtual access points (VAPs)
• Up to seven WDS links
For example, if you configure the primary WLAN and two VAPs, then you can configure five WDS links, or one more VAP and four WDS links.
When Extended Range (XR) mode is enabled for a wireless object, then it is counted as two objects. For example, if you configure XR mode for the primary WLAN and one
VAP, they are counted as four wireless objects.
For information on default security policy rules controlling traffic to and from the primary
WLAN and VAPs, see Default Security Policy on page 393.
Wireless Security Protocols
The Safe@Office wireless security appliance supports the following security protocols:
Table 54: Wireless Security Protocols
Security
Protocol
Description
None No security method is used. This option is not recommended, because it allows unauthorized users to access your wireless network, although you can still limit access from the wireless network by creating firewall rules. This method is suitable for creating public access points.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 311
Overview
Security
Protocol
WEP encryption
Description
802.1x: RADIUS authentication, no encryption
In the 802.1x security method, wireless stations (supplicants) attempting to connect to the access point (authenticator) must first be authenticated, either by a RADIUS server (authentication server) which supports 802.1x, or by the
Safe@Office appliance's built-in EAP authenticator. All messages are passed in EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol).
This method is recommended for situations in which you want to authenticate wireless users, but do not need to encrypt the data.
This security method is not supported for WDS links.
Note: To use this security method, you must first configure either a RADIUS server that supports 802.1x, or set up the network for use with the
Safe@Office EAP authenticator. For information on configuring a RADIUS
server, see Using RADIUS Authentication. on page 688 For information on
using the Safe@Office EAP authenticator, see Using the Safe@Office EAP
WPA-Enterprise:
RADIUS authentication, encryption
In the WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encryption security method, wireless stations must use a pre-shared key to connect to your network. This method is not recommended, due to known security flaws in the WEP protocol. It is provided for compatibility with existing wireless deployments.
Note: The appliance and the wireless stations must be configured with the same WEP key.
The WPA-Enterprise (Wi-Fi Protected Access) security method uses MIC
(message integrity check) to ensure the integrity of messages, and TKIP
(Temporal Key Integrity Protocol) to enhance data encryption.
Furthermore, WPA-Enterprise includes 802.1x and EAP authentication, based either on a central RADIUS authentication server, or on the
Safe@Office appliance's built-in EAP authenticator. This method is
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 312
Security
Protocol
Description
Overview
WPA-Personal: password authentication, encryption
WPA2 (802.11i) recommended for situations where you want to authenticate wireless stations, and to encrypt the transmitted data.
Note: To use this security method, you must first configure either a RADIUS server that supports 802.1x, or set up the network for use with the
Safe@Office EAP authenticator. For information on configuring a RADIUS
server, see Using RADIUS Authentication. on page 688 For information on
using the Safe@Office EAP authenticator, see Using the Safe@Office EAP
The WPA-Personal security method (also called WPA-PSK) is a variation of
WPA-Enterprise that does not require an authentication server. WPA-
Personal periodically changes and authenticates encryption keys. This is called rekeying.
This option is recommended for small networks, which want to authenticate and encrypt wireless data, but do not want to install a RADIUS server or use the Safe@Office EAP authenticator.
Note: The appliance and the wireless stations must be configured with the same passphrase.
The WPA2 security method uses the more secure Advanced Encryption
Standard (AES) cipher, instead of the RC4 cipher used by WPA and WEP.
When using WPA-Enterprise or WPA-Personal security methods, the
Safe@Office appliance enables you to restrict access to the wireless network to wireless stations that support the WPA2 security method. If this setting is not selected, the Safe@Office appliance allows clients to connect using both
WPA and WPA2.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 313
Configuring Wireless Networks
Note: For increased security, it is recommended to enable the Safe@Office internal
VPN Server for users connecting from your internal networks, and to install
SecuRemote/SecureClient/L2TP/Endpoint Connect on each computer in the wireless network. This ensures that all connections from the wireless network to the LAN are
encrypted and authenticated. For information, see Internal VPN Server on page 606
and Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server on page 607.
Configuring Wireless Networks
Note: It is recommended to configure wireless networks via Ethernet and not via a wireless connection, because the wireless connection could be broken after making a change to the configuration.
Using the Wireless Configuration Wizard
The Wireless Configuration Wizard provides a quick and simple way of setting up your basic primary WLAN parameters for the first time.
Note: You cannot configure WPA-Enterprise and 802.1x using this wizard. For information on configuring these modes, see Manually Configuring a Wireless
To configure a WLAN using the Wireless Configuration Wizard
1. Prepare the appliance for a wireless connection as described in Preparing the
Appliance for a Wireless Connection on page 102.
2. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
3. In the WLAN network's row, click
Edit.
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
4. Click
Wireless Wizard.
314 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Wireless Networks
The
Wireless Configuration Wizard opens, with the Wireless Configuration dialog box displayed.
5. Select the
Enable wireless networking check box to enable the primary WLAN.
The fields are enabled.
6. Complete the fields using the information in Basic WLAN Settings Fields on
7. Click
Next.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 315
Configuring Wireless Networks
8. The
Wireless Security dialog box appears.
9. Do one of the following:
• Click WPA-Personal to use the WPA-Personal security mode.
WPA-Personal (also called WPA-PSK) uses a passphrase for authentication. This method is recommended for small, private wireless networks, which want to authenticate and encrypt wireless data, but do not want to install a RADIUS server or use the Safe@Office EAP authenticator. Both WPA and the newer, more secure WPA2 (802.11i) will be accepted. To allow only the more secure
WPA2 and not WPA, see Manually Configuring a WLAN on page 321. For
larger wireless networks with many users, configure the primary WLAN to use
WPA-Enterprise, using the procedure Manually Configuring a WLAN on page
• Click WEP to use the WEP security mode.
Using WEP, wireless stations must use a pre-shared key to connect to your network. WEP is widely known to be insecure, and is supported mainly for compatibility with existing networks and stations that do not support other methods.
• Click No Security to use no security to create a public, unsecured access point.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 316
Configuring Wireless Networks
10. Do one of the following:
• To bridge the LAN and WLAN networks so that they appear as a single unified network, click
Bridge Mode.
Traffic from the WLAN to the LAN will be allowed to pass freely, and the LAN and WLAN will share a single IP address range.
Note: This option creates a bridge called "default-bridge", which includes the WLAN and the LAN. If desired, you can later remove this bridge by running the Wireless
Configuration Wizard again, and choosing
Firewall Mode. For information on bridges,
see Using Bridges on page 259.
• To isolate the LAN from the WLAN, click Firewall Mode.
The WLAN and LAN will be assigned separate, isolated IP networks, and traffic from the WLAN to the LAN will be subjected to the defined firewall policy.
By default, traffic from the WLAN to the LAN will be blocked, and traffic from the LAN to the WLAN will be allowed. To allow traffic from the WLAN to the
LAN, you must create firewall rules. For information, see Using Firewall Rules.
11. Click
Next.
WPA-Personal
If you chose
WPA-Personal, the Wireless Configuration-WPA-Personal dialog box appears.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 317
Configuring Wireless Networks
Do the following:
1. In the text box, type the passphrase for accessing the network, or click
Random to randomly generate a passphrase.
This must be between 8 and 63 characters. It can contain spaces and special characters, and is case-sensitive.
2. Click
Next.
The
Wireless Security Confirmation dialog box appears.
3. Click
Next.
318 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
4. The
Wireless Security Complete dialog box appears.
Configuring Wireless Networks
5. Click
Finish.
The wizard closes.
6. Prepare the wireless stations.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 319
Configuring Wireless Networks
WEP
If you chose
WEP, the Wireless Configuration-WEP dialog box appears.
Do the following:
1. Choose a WEP key length.
The possible key lengths are:
• 64 Bits - The key length is 10 hexadecimal characters.
• 128 Bits - The key length is 26 hexadecimal characters.
• 152 Bits - The key length is 32 hexadecimal characters.
Some wireless card vendors call these lengths 40/104/128, respectively.
Note that WEP is generally considered to be insecure, regardless of the selected key length.
2. In the text box, type the WEP key, or click
Random to randomly generate a key matching the selected length.
The key is composed of characters 0-9 and A-F, and is not case-sensitive. The wireless stations must be configured with this same key.
3. Click
Next.
The
Wireless Security Confirmation dialog box appears.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 320
4. Click
Next.
The
Wireless Security Complete dialog box appears.
5. Click
Finish.
The wizard closes.
6. Prepare the wireless stations.
No Security
The
Wireless Security Complete dialog box appears.
• Click Finish.
The wizard closes.
Manually Configuring a Wireless Network
Configuring Wireless Networks
To manually configure a wireless network
1. If you intend to use the 802.1x or WPA-Enterprise security mode for the wireless network, do one of the following:
• To use the Safe@Office EAP authenticator for authenticating wireless clients, follow the workflow Using the Safe@Office EAP Authenticator for
Authentication of Wireless Clients on page 434.
You will be referred back to this procedure at the appropriate stage in the workflow, at which point you can continue from the next step.
• To use a RADIUS server for authenticating wireless clients, configure a
RADIUS server.
See Using RADIUS Authentication on page 688.
2. Prepare the appliance for a wireless connection as described in Preparing the
Appliance for a Wireless Connection on page 102.
3. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
4. In the desired wireless network's row, click
Edit.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 321
Configuring Wireless Networks
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
The fields that appear depend on the hardware type.
5. In the
Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
The fields are enabled.
6. In the
IP Address field, type the IP address of the wireless network network's default gateway.
The wireless network must not overlap other networks.
7. In the
Subnet Mask field, type the wireless network’s internal network range.
8. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 199.
9. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 200.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 322
Configuring Wireless Networks
10. Complete the fields using the information in Basic Wireless Settings Fields on
11. To configure advanced settings, click
Show Advanced Settings and complete the fields using the information in Advanced Wireless Settings Fields on page
New fields appear.
The fields that appear depend on the hardware type.
12. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears, telling you that you are about to change your network settings.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 323
Configuring Wireless Networks
13. Click
OK.
A success message appears.
Note: Some wireless cards have "Infrastructure" and "Ad-hoc" modes. These modes are also called "Access Point" and "Peer to Peer". On the wireless client, choose the
"Infrastructure" or "Access Point" mode.
You can set the wireless cards to either "Long Preamble" or "Short Preamble".
Table 55: Basic Wireless Settings Fields
In this field…
Wireless Settings
Do this…
Network Name
(SSID)
Type the network name (SSID) that identifies your wireless network. This name will be visible to wireless stations passing near your access point, unless you enable the
Hide the Network Name (SSID) option.
It can be up to 32 alphanumeric characters long and is case-sensitive.
Country
Operation Mode
Select the country where you are located.
Warning: Choosing an incorrect country may result in the violation of government regulations.
This field only appears when configuring the primary WLAN, and it is inherited by all VAPs and WDS links.
Select an operation mode:
• 802.11b (11 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 11 Mbps. When using this mode, only 802.11b stations will be able to connect.
• 802.11g (54 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 54 Mbps. When using this mode, only 802.11g stations will be able to connect.
• 802.11b/g (11/54 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 54 Mbps. When using this mode, both 802.11b stations and 802.11g stations will be able to connect.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 324
In this field…
Channel
Configuring Wireless Networks
Do this…
• 802.11g Super (54/108 Mbps). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 108 Mbps. When using this mode, 802.1g stations and 802.11g Super stations will be able to connect.
This mode is not available in Safe@Office 1000NW.
• 802.11g Super (11/54/108). Operates in the 2.4 GHz range, and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 108 Mbps. When using this mode, 802.11b stations, 802.11g stations, and 802.11g Super stations will be able to connect.
This mode is not available in Safe@Office 1000NW.
• 802.11n. Operates in the 5 GHz or 2.4 GHz range, and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 300 Mbps. When using this mode, only 802.11n stations will be able to connect.
This mode is only available in Safe@Office 1000NW.
• 802.11ng. Operates in the 5 GHz or 2.4 GHz range, and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 300 Mbps. When using this mode,
802.11g stations and 802.11n stations will be able to connect.
This mode is only available in Safe@Office 1000NW.
The list of modes is dependent on the selected country.
You can prevent older wireless stations from slowing down your network, by choosing an operation mode that restricts access to newer wireless stations.
Note: The actual data transfer speed is usually significantly lower than the maximum theoretical bandwidth and degrades with distance.
Important: The station wireless cards must support the selected operation mode. For a list of cards supporting 802.11g Super, refer to http://www.super-ag.com.
This field only appears when configuring the primary WLAN, and it is inherited by all VAPs and WDS links.
Select the radio frequency to use for the wireless connection:
• Automatic. The Safe@Office appliance automatically selects a channel. This is the default.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 325
Configuring Wireless Networks
In this field… Do this…
• A specific channel. The list of channels is dependent on the selected country and operation mode.
Note: If there is another wireless network in the vicinity, the two networks may interfere with one another. To avoid this problem, the networks should be assigned channels that are at least 25 MHz (5 channels) apart.
Alternatively, you can reduce the transmission power.
This field only appears when configuring the primary WLAN, and it is inherited by all VAPs and WDS links.
Channel Width
Security
Select the desired channel width:
• Auto (20/40 Mhz). The Safe@Office automatically selects the channel width: 20Mhz or 40Mhz.
• 20Mhz
Selecting
Auto can increase wireless performance, if a 40Mhz channel is available. However, in some cases it may interfere with other access points or wireless equipment in the area.
This field is only available in Safe@Office 1000NW.
Select the security protocol to use. For information on the supported
security protocols, see Wireless Security Protocols on page 311.
If you select
WEP encryption, the WEP Keys area opens.
If you select
802.1x, the Authentication Server field appears.
If you select
WPA-Enterprise, the Authentication Server, Require WPA2 (802.11i), and
WPA Encryption fields appear.
If you select
WPA-Personal, the Passphrase, Require WPA2 (802.11i), and WPA
Encryption fields appear.
Note: When configuring a WDS link, 802.1x is not supported.
326 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
Authentication
Server
Passphrase
Require WPA2
(802.11i)
WPA Encryption
Configuring Wireless Networks
Do this…
Specify which authentication server to use, by selecting one of the following:
• RADIUS. A RADIUS server.
• Internal User Database. The Safe@Office EAP authenticator.
Type the passphrase for accessing the network, or click
Random to randomly generate a passphrase.
This must be between 8 and 63 characters. It can contain spaces and special characters, and is case-sensitive.
For the highest security, choose a long passphrase that is hard to guess, or use the
Random button.
Note: The wireless stations must be configured with this passphrase as well.
Specify whether you want to require wireless stations to connect using
WPA2, by selecting one of the following:
• Enabled. Only wireless stations using WPA2 can access the wireless network.
• Disabled. Wireless stations using either WPA or WPA2 can access the wireless network. This is the default.
Select the encryption method to use for authenticating and encrypting wireless data:
• Auto. The Safe@Office appliance automatically selects the cipher used by the wireless client. This is the default.
• AES. Advanced Encryption Standard
• TKIP. Temporal Key Integrity Protocol
Note: AES is more secure than TKIP; however, some devices do not support
AES.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 327
Configuring Wireless Networks
In this field…
WEP Keys
Do this…
If you selected
WEP encryption, you must configure at least one WEP key.
The wireless stations must be configured with the same key, as well.
Key 1, 2, 3, 4 radio button
Click the radio button next to the WEP key that this gateway should use for transmission.
The selected key must be entered in the same key slot (1-4) on the station devices, but the key need not be selected as the transmit key on the stations.
Note: You can use all four keys to receive data.
Key 1, 2, 3, 4 length
Select the WEP key length from the drop-down list.
The possible key lengths are:
• 64 Bits. The key length is 10 characters.
• 128 Bits. The key length is 26 characters.
• 152 Bits. The key length is 32 characters.
Note: Some wireless card vendors call these lengths 40/104/128, respectively.
Note: WEP is generally considered to be insecure, regardless of the selected key length.
Key 1, 2, 3, 4 text box
Type the WEP key, or click
Random to randomly generate a key matching the selected length. The key is composed of hexadecimal characters 0-9 and A-F, and is not case-sensitive.
328 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Wireless Networks
Table 56: Advanced Wireless Settings Fields
In this field…
Advanced Security
Do this…
Hide the Network
Name (SSID)
Specify whether you want to hide your network's SSID, by selecting one of the following:
• Yes. Hide the SSID.
Only devices to which your SSID is known can connect to your network.
• No. Do not hide the SSID.
Any device within range can detect your network name and attempt to connect to your network. This is the default.
Note: Hiding the SSID does not provide strong security, because a determined attacker can still discover your SSID. Therefore, it is not recommended to rely on this setting alone for security.
MAC Address
Filtering
Specify whether you want to enable MAC address filtering, by selecting one of the following:
• Yes. Enable MAC address filtering.
Only MAC addresses that you added as network objects can connect to your network.
For information on network objects, see Using Network
• No. Disable MAC address filtering. This is the default.
Note: MAC address filtering does not provide strong security, since MAC addresses can be spoofed by a determined attacker. Therefore, it is not recommended to rely on this setting alone for security.
Station-to-Station
Traffic
Specify whether you want to allow wireless stations on this network to communicate with each other, by selecting one of the following:
• Allow. Allow stations to communicate with each other. This is the default.
• Block. Block traffic between wireless stations.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 329
Configuring Wireless Networks
In this field…
Wireless Transmitter
Do this…
Transmission Rate Select the transmission rate:
• Automatic. The Safe@Office appliance automatically selects a rate. This is the default.
• A specific rate
This field only appears when configuring the primary WLAN, and it is inherited by all VAPs and WDS links.
Transmitter Power Select the transmitter power.
Setting a higher transmitter power increases the access point's range. A lower power reduces interference with other access points in the vicinity.
The default value is
Full. It is not necessary to change this value, unless there are other access points in the vicinity.
This field only appears when configuring the primary WLAN, and it is inherited by all VAPs and WDS links.
Guard Interval Select the guard interval, which is the amount of time between symbol transmissions (in nanoseconds). The guard interval allows reflections from the previous data transmission to settle before transmitting a new symbol.
This can have the following values:
• Normal. 800ns
• Short. 400ns
Selecting
Short can increase throughput. However, in some cases it can also increase error rate, due to increased sensitivity to RF reflections.
This field appears only for Safe@Office 1000NW.
330 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Wireless Networks
In this field… Do this…
Antenna Selection Multipath distortion is caused by the reflection of Radio Frequency (RF) signals traveling from the transmitter to the receiver along more than one path. Signals that were reflected by some surface reach the receiver after non-reflected signals and distort them.
Safe@Office appliances avoid the problems of multipath distortion by using an antenna diversity system. To provide antenna diversity, each wireless security appliance has two antennas.
Specify which antenna to use for communicating with wireless stations:
• Automatic. The Safe@Office appliance receives signals through both antennas and automatically selects the antenna with the lowest distortion signal to use for communicating. The selection is made on a per-station basis. This is the default.
• ANT 1. The ANT 1antenna is always used for communicating.
• ANT 2. The ANT 2 antenna is always used for communicating.
Use manual diversity control (
ANT 1 or ANT 2), if there is only one antenna connected to the appliance.
This field only appears when configuring the primary WLAN, and it is inherited by all VAPs and WDS links.
This field does not appear for Safe@Office 1000NW.
Fragmentation
Threshold
Type the smallest IP packet size (in bytes) that requires that the IP packet be split into smaller fragments.
If you are experiencing significant radio interference, set the threshold to a low value (around 1000), to reduce error penalty and increase overall throughput.
Otherwise, set the threshold to a high value (around 2000), to reduce overhead.
The default value is 2346.
331 Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks
Configuring Wireless Networks
In this field…
RTS Threshold
Do this…
Type the smallest IP packet size for which a station must send an RTS
(Request To Send) before sending the IP packet.
If multiple wireless stations are in range of the access point, but not in range of each other, they might send data to the access point simultaneously, thereby causing data collisions and failures. RTS ensures that the channel is clear before the each packet is sent.
If your network is congested, and the users are distant from one another, set the RTS threshold to a low value (around 500).
Setting a value equal to the fragmentation threshold effectively disables
RTS.
The default value is 2346.
Extended Range
Mode (XR)
Multimedia QoS
(WMM)
Specify whether to use Extended Range (XR) mode:
• Disabled. XR mode is disabled.
• Enabled. XR mode is enabled. XR will be automatically negotiated with XR-enabled wireless stations and used as needed. This is the default.
This field does not appear for Safe@Office 1000NW.
Specify whether to use the Wireless Multimedia (WMM) standard to prioritize traffic from WMM-compliant multimedia applications. This can have the following values:
• Disabled. WMM is disabled. This is the default.
• Enabled. WMM is enabled. The Safe@Office appliance will prioritize multimedia traffic according to four access categories
(Voice, Video, Best Effort, and Background). This allows for smoother streaming of voice and video when using WMM aware applications.
332 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
WDS
Configuring Wireless Networks
Do this…
Specify whether to enable WDS links:
• Disabled. WDS links are disabled.
• Enabled. WDS links are enabled. For information on configuring
WDS links, see Configuring Wireless Distribution System
This field appears only for Safe@Office 1000NW.
C onfiguring Virtual Access Points
You can partition the wireless network into wireless VLANs called virtual access points
(VAPs). You can use VAPs to grant different permissions to groups of wireless users, by configuring each VAP with the desired security policy and network settings, and then assigning each group of wireless users to the relevant VAP. For more information on
VAPs, see Overview on page 305.
Note: While virtual access points (VAPs) can have different security settings and network names, all VAPs inherit the following wireless settings from the primary
WLAN:
• Country
• Operation Mode
• Channel
• Transmission Rate
• Transmitter Power
• Antenna Selection
For information on configuring these settings in the primary WLAN, see Manually
Configuring a Wireless Network on page 321.
Note: To enable VAPs, you must first enable the primary WLAN network. If you disable the primary WLAN network, all VAPs are automatically disabled.
The procedure below explains how to add or edit a VAP. For information on deleting a
VAP, see Deleting VLANs on page 223.
333 Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks
Configuring Wireless Networks
To add or edit a VAP
1. Configure and enable the primary WLAN.
For information on configuring the primary WLAN manually, see Manually
Configuring a Wireless Network on page 321.
For information on using a wizard to configure the primary WLAN, see Using the
2. If you intend to use the 802.1x or WPA-Enterprise security mode for the VAP, do one of the following:
• To use the Safe@Office EAP authenticator for authenticating wireless clients, follow the workflow Using the Safe@Office EAP Authenticator for
Authentication of Wireless Clients on page 434.
You will be referred back to this procedure at the appropriate stage in the workflow, at which point you can continue from the next step.
• To use a RADIUS server for authenticating wireless clients, configure a
RADIUS server.
See Using RADIUS Authentication on page 688.
3. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
4. Click
Add Network.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 334
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
Configuring Wireless Networks
5. In the
Network Name field, type a name for the VAP.
6. In the
Type drop-down list, select Virtual Access Point.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 335
Configuring Wireless Networks
New fields appear.
The fields that appear depend on the hardware type.
7. In the
Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
The fields are enabled.
8. In the
IP Address field, type the IP address of the VAP network's default gateway.
The VAP network must not overlap other networks.
9. In the
Subnet Mask field, type the VAP's internal network range.
10. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 199.
11. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 336
Configuring Wireless Networks
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 200.
12. Complete the fields using the information in Basic Wireless Settings Fields on
13. To configure advanced settings, click
Show Advanced Settings and complete the fields using the information in Advanced Wireless Settings Fields on page
New fields appear.
The fields that appear depend on the hardware type.
14. Click
Apply.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 337
Configuring Wireless Networks
Note: Some wireless cards have "Infrastructure" and "Ad-hoc" modes. These modes are also called "Access Point" and "Peer to Peer". On the wireless client, choose the
"Infrastructure" or "Access Point" mode.
You can set the wireless cards to either "Long Preamble" or "Short Preamble".
Configuring Wireless Distribution System Links
You can extend the wireless network across multiple access points, or connect the networks behind different access points, by creating a Wireless Distribution System
(WDS). To create a WDS, you must add WDS links between the desired access points.
For more information on WDS links, see Overview on page 305.
Note: While WDS links can have different security settings, all WDS links inherit the following wireless settings from the primary WLAN:
• Country
• Operation Mode
• Channel
• Transmission Rate
• Transmitter Power
• Antenna Selection
• Security
For information on configuring these settings in the primary WLAN, see Manually
Configuring a Wireless Network on page 321.
Note: To enable WDS links, you must first enable the primary WLAN network. If you disable the primary WLAN network, all WDS links are automatically disabled.
The procedure below explains how to add or edit a WDS link. For information on deleting
a WDS link, see Deleting VLANs on page 223.
To add or edit a WDS link
1. Configure the primary WLAN as follows: a) Enable the primary WLAN.
338 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Wireless Networks b) If using Safe@Office1000NW, enable WDS links.
For information on configuring these settings, see Manually Configuring a Wireless
2. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the My Network tab.
The
My Network page appears.
3. Click
Add Network.
The
Edit Network Settings page appears.
4. In the
Network Name field, type a name for the WDS link.
5. In the
Type drop-down list, select Wireless Distribution System.
New fields appear.
The fields that appear depend on the hardware type.
6. In the
Peer WLAN MAC Address field, type the WLAN MAC address of the access point to which you want to create a WDS link.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 339
Configuring Wireless Networks
Note: This is the MAC address of the WLAN interface, not the WAN MAC address. To see your access point's WLAN MAC address, click
Reports in the main menu, and then click
Wireless.
7. Do one of the following:
• To create a bridged WDS link:
1) In the
Mode drop-down list, select Bridged.
The fields are enabled and additional fields appear.
2) Complete these fields as described in Bridged Network Fields on
• To create a routed WDS link, do the following:
1) In the
Mode drop-down list, select Enabled.
The fields are enabled.
2) In the
IP Address field, type the IP address of the WDS link's default gateway.
The WDS link must not overlap other networks.
3) In the
Subnet Mask field, type the WDS link's internal network range.
8. If desired, enable or disable Hide NAT.
See Enabling/Disabling Hide NAT on page 199.
9. If desired, configure a DHCP server.
See Configuring a DHCP Server on page 200.
10. Complete the fields using the relevant information in Basic Wireless Settings
11. To configure advanced settings, click
Show Advanced Settings and complete the fields using the relevant information in Advanced Wireless Settings Fields
340 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
New fields appear.
Configuring Wireless Networks
The fields that appear depend on the hardware type.
12. Click
Apply.
Note: Both sides of the WDS link must use the same radio channel and security settings.
Note: The access point can use any supported security protocol to communicate with wireless stations.
Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks 341
Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity
Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity
I cannot connect to a wireless network from a wireless station. What should I do?
• Check that the SSID configured on the station matches the Safe@Office appliance's SSID. The SSID is case-sensitive.
• Check that the encryption settings configured on the station (encryption mode and keys) match the Safe@Office appliance's encryption settings.
• If MAC filtering is enabled, verify that the MAC address of all stations is listed in the
Network Objects page (see Viewing and Deleting Network Objects on
• Check that the wireless card region matches the access point region.
• Check the wireless card supports the wireless standard that you configured.
I cannot connect to an access point over a WDS link. What should I do?
• Check that both sides of the WDS link are configured with their peer's WLAN
MAC address (and not the WAN MAC address).
• Check that both sides of the WDS link are configured to use the same radio channel and security settings.
• Make sure that the peer access points are not too far apart for proper reception.
How do I test wireless reception?
• Look at the Wireless page, and check for excessive errors or dropped packets.
• Look at the My Computers page, to see information for specific wireless stations, such as the number of transmission errors, and the current reception power of each station.
• On the wireless station, open a command window and type ping my.firewall. If you see a large number of dropped packets, you are experiencing poor reception.
Wireless reception is poor. What should I do?
• Adjust the angle of the antennas, until the reception improves. The antennas radiate horizontally in all directions.
• If both antennas are connected to the Safe@Office appliance, check that the
Antenna Selection parameter in the primary WLAN's advanced settings is set to
Automatic (see Manually Configuring a Wireless Network on page 321).
342 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity
• Relocate the Safe@Office appliance to a place with better reception, and avoid obstructions, such as walls and electrical equipment. For example, try mounting the appliance in a high place with a direct line of sight to the wireless stations.
• Check for interference with nearby electrical equipment, such as microwave ovens and cordless or cellular phones.
• Check the Transmission Power parameter in the primary WLAN's advanced settings.
• Make sure that you are not using two access points in close proximity and on the same frequency. For minimum interference, channel separation between nearby access points must be at least 25 MHz (5 channels).
• The Safe@Office appliance supports XR (Extended Range) technology. For best range, enable XR mode in the wireless network's advanced settings, and use XRenabled stations.
• Range outdoors is normally much higher than indoors, depending on environmental conditions.
Note: You can observe any changes in the wireless reception in the My Computers page. Make sure to refresh the page after making a change.
Note: Professional companies are available for help in setting up reliable wireless networks, with access to specialized testing equipment and procedures.
There are excessive collisions between wireless stations. What should I do?
If you have many concurrently active wireless stations, there may be collisions between them. Such collisions may be the result of a "hidden node" problem: not all of the stations are within range of each other, and therefore are "hidden" from one another. For example, if station A and station C do not detect each other, but both stations detect and are detected by station B, then both station A and C may attempt to send packets to station B simultaneously. In this case, the packets will collide, and Station B will receive corrupted data.
The solution to this problem lies in the use of the RTS protocol. Before sending a certain size IP packet, a station sends an RTS (Request To Send) packet. If the recipient is not currently receiving packets from another source, it sends back a CTS (Clear To Send) packet, indicating that the station can send the IP packet. Try setting the
RTS Threshold
343 Chapter 10: Working with Wireless Networks
Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity parameter in the wireless network's advanced settings to a lower value. This will cause stations to use RTS for smaller IP packets, thus decreasing the likeliness of collisions.
In addition, try setting the
Fragmentation Threshold parameter in the wireless network's advanced settings to a lower value. This will cause stations to fragment IP packets of a certain size into smaller packets, thereby reducing the likeliness of collisions and increasing network speed.
Note: Reducing the RTS Threshold and the Fragmentation Threshold too much can have a negative impact on performance.
Note: Setting an RTS Threshold value equal to the Fragmentation Threshold value effectively disables RTS.
I am not getting the full speed. What should I do?
• The actual speed is always less than the theoretical speed, and degrades with distance.
• Read the section about reception problems. Better reception means better speed.
• Check that all your wireless stations support the wireless standard you are using
(802.11g or 802.11g Super), and that this standard is enabled in the station software. Transmission speed is determined by the slowest station associated with the access point. For a list of wireless stations that support 802.11g Super, see www.super-ag.com.
344 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Viewing the Safe@Office Appliance Status
Chapter 11
Viewing Reports
This chapter describes the Safe@Office Portal reports.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Viewing the Safe@Office Appliance Status............................................. 345
Viewing the Routing Table....................................................................... 374
Viewing Wireless Station Statistics .......................................................... 376
Viewing the Safe@Office Appliance Status
The Safe@Office Status Monitor provides a snapshot of the Safe@Office appliance's current status, enabling you to view the following information in a single glance:
• General appliance information
• Appliance module statuses
• Appliance port statuses
• Resource utilization information
• Recent logged events
Chapter 11: Viewing Reports 345
Viewing the Safe@Office Appliance Status
To view the Safe@Office appliance's current status
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Status tab.
The
Status Monitor page appears.
The page displays the information in the following table.
2. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
346 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 57: Status Monitor Fields
This field…
Device Information
Displays…
Viewing the Safe@Office Appliance Status
Information about the Safe@Office appliance.
Product The licensed software and the number of allowed nodes.
MAC Address
Firmware
Uptime
System
Cellular Modems
Status
The Safe@Office appliance's WAN MAC address.
The currently installed firmware:
• Main. The version of the primary firmware
• Backup. The version of the backup firmware
The time that elapsed from the moment the unit was turned on
A diagram of the Safe@Office appliance's ports, indicating the ports' statuses. Ports that are currently in use appear in green.
Information about connected cellular modems, including the following:
• An icon indicating whether the modem is connected to the
Internet ( ) or not ( )
• The modem model name
• The modem's access technology
• A bar graph indicating the current signal strength
• The cellular operator’s name
You can mouse over the field to view the modem manufacturer, model number, and access technology value, and current signal strength in dBm.
Information about the Safe@Office appliance's status.
347 Chapter 11: Viewing Reports
Viewing the Safe@Office Appliance Status
This field…
Internet
Displays…
The Safe@Office appliance's overall Internet connection status. This can be any of the following:
Icon Description
OK. One or both Internet connections are connected.
Idle. Both Internet connections are in “idle” state.
Disabled. Both Internet connections are disabled.
Connected with problems. One Internet connection is connected, and the other Internet connection is in “Establishing
Connection” state.
No connectivity. All enabled Internet connections are in
“Establishing Connection” state.
VPN
For information on individual Internet connections' statuses, see Status
The Safe@Office appliance's VPN tunnel status. This can be any of the following:
Icon Description
No tunnels connected. There are no open VPN tunnels.
Tunnels are established. There are open VPN tunnels.
Some permanent tunnels are down. Some permanent VPN tunnels are currently down. To view VPN tunnels, click on the link.
348 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
This field…
Antivirus
Services
Viewing the Safe@Office Appliance Status
Displays…
The Safe@Office appliance's VStream Antivirus status. This can be any of the following:
Icon Description
Antivirus enabled. VStream Antivirus is enabled.
Antivirus disabled. VStream Antivirus is disabled.
Antivirus is enabled but no database is installed. VStream Antivirus is enabled; however, the VStream Antivirus databases are not installed.
The Safe@Office appliance's Service Center connection status. This can be any of the following:
Icon Description
Connected. The Safe@Office appliance is connected to the
Service Center, and security services are active.
Firmware download: x% completed. The Safe@Office appliance is currently downloading a firmware file from the Service
Center. The download is x% complete.
Disabled. You are not subscribed to a Service Center.
Expired. Your subscription to security services has expired.
Failed to connect. The Safe@Office appliance failed to connect to the Service Center.
Chapter 11: Viewing Reports 349
Viewing the Safe@Office Appliance Status
This field…
HA
Displays…
The Safe@Office appliance's High Availability status. This can be any of the following:
Icon Description
Passive. High Availability is enabled, and this appliance is a
Passive Gateway.
Master. High Availability is enabled, and this appliance is the
Active Gateway.
Disabled. High Availability is disabled.
Resource Utilization
Kernel Mem
User Mem
FW Mem
Safe@Office appliance resource utilization information.
A bar graph next to each resource indicates the amount currently consumed.
The percentage of used memory in the kernel module, followed by the amount in kilobytes.
The percentage of used memory in the user module, followed by the amount in kilobytes.
The percentage of used memory in the firewall module, followed by the amount in kilobytes.
350 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
This field…
System Mem
Configuration
CPU
Connections
VPN Tunnels
Nodes
Last Events
Viewing the Safe@Office Appliance Status
Displays…
The percentage of system memory in use, followed by the amount in kilobytes.
The percentage of configuration storage space in use out of the total amount of space allocated for configuration storage, followed by the amount in kilobytes.
The percentage of CPU in use.
The percentage of established connections out of the licensed number of connections, followed by the number of established connections.
The percentage of established VPN tunnels out of the licensed number of
VPN tunnels, followed by the number of established VPN tunnels.
The percentage of nodes in use out of the licensed number of nodes, followed by the number of nodes in used.
The last five messages logged to the Event Log.
Chapter 11: Viewing Reports 351
Using the Traffic Monitor
Using the Traffic Monitor
You can view incoming and outgoing traffic for selected network interfaces and QoS classes using the Traffic Monitor. This enables you to identify network traffic trends and anomalies, and to fine tune Traffic Shaper QoS class assignments.
The Traffic Monitor displays separate bar charts for incoming traffic and outgoing traffic, and displays traffic rates in kilobits/second. If desired, you can change the number of seconds represented by the bars in the charts, using the procedure Configuring Traffic
In network traffic reports, the traffic is color-coded as described in the following table. In the
All QoS Classes report, the traffic is color-coded by QoS class.
Table 58: Traffic Monitor Color Coding for Networks
Traffic marked in this color… Indicates…
Blue VPN-encrypted traffic
Red Traffic blocked by the firewall
Green Traffic accepted by the firewall
You can export a detailed traffic report for all enabled networks and all defined QoS
classes, using the procedure Exporting General Traffic Reports on page 356.
352 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Viewing Traffic Reports
To view a traffic report
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Traffic tab.
The
Traffic Monitor page appears.
Using the Traffic Monitor
2. In the
Traffic Monitor Report drop-down list, select the network interface for which you want to view a report.
The list includes all currently enabled networks. For example, if the DMZ network is enabled, it will appear in the list.
If Traffic Shaper is enabled, the list also includes the defined QoS classes. Choose
All
QoS Classes to display a report including all QoS classes. For information on enabling
Traffic Shaper see Using Internet Setup on page 141.
The selected report appears in the
Traffic Monitor page.
353 Chapter 11: Viewing Reports
Using the Traffic Monitor
3. To refresh all traffic reports, click
Refresh.
4. To clear all traffic reports, click
Clear.
Note: The firewall blocks broadcast packets used during the normal operation of your network. This may lead to a certain amount of traffic of the type "Traffic blocked by firewall" that appears under normal circumstances and usually does not indicate an attack.
Configuring Traffic Monitor Settings
You can configure the interval at which the Safe@Office appliance should collect traffic data for network traffic reports.
To configure Traffic Monitor settings
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Traffic tab.
The
Traffic Monitor page appears.
2. Click
Settings.
354 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Traffic Monitor Settings page appears.
Using the Traffic Monitor
3. In the
Sample monitoring data every field, type the interval (in seconds) at which the Safe@Office appliance should collect traffic data.
The default value is one sample every 1800 seconds (30 minutes).
4. Click
Apply.
Chapter 11: Viewing Reports 355
Using the Traffic Monitor
Exporting General Traffic Reports
You can export a general traffic report that includes information for all enabled networks and all defined QoS classes to a *.csv (Comma Separated Values) file. You can open and view the file in Microsoft Excel.
To export a general traffic report
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Traffic tab.
The
Traffic Monitor page appears.
2. Click
Export.
A standard
File Download dialog box appears.
3. Click
Save.
The
Save As dialog box appears.
4. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
5. Type a name for the configuration file and click
Save.
A *.csv file is created and saved to the specified directory.
356 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Viewing Computers
Viewing Computers
This option allows you to view the currently active computers on your network. The computers are graphically displayed, each with its name, IP address, and settings (DHCP,
Static, etc.). You can also view node limit information.
To view the computers
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the My Computers tab.
The
Active Computers page appears.
If you configured High Availability, both the master and backup appliances are shown. If you configured OfficeMode, the OfficeMode network is shown.
If there are wireless networks, the wireless stations are shown under the network to which they are connected. For information on viewing statistics for these computers,
see Viewing Wireless Station Statistics on page 376. If a wireless station has been
357 Chapter 11: Viewing Reports
Viewing Computers blocked from accessing the Internet through the Safe@Office appliance, the reason why it was blocked is shown in red.
If a network is bridged, the bridge's name appears in parentheses next to the network's name.
If you are exceeding the maximum number of computers allowed by your license, a warning message appears, and the computers over the node limit are marked in red.
These computers are still protected, but they are blocked from accessing the Internet through the Safe@Office appliance.
Note: Computers that did not communicate through the firewall are not counted for node limit purposes, even though they are protected by the firewall and appear in the
Active Computers table.
Note: To increase the number of computers allowed by your license, you can upgrade your product. For further information, see Upgrading Your Software Product on
If Secure HotSpot is enabled for some networks, each computer's HotSpot status is displayed next to it. The possible statuses include:
• Authenticated. The computer is logged in to My HotSpot.
• Not Authenticated. The computer is not logged in to My HotSpot.
• Excluded from HotSpot. The computer is in an IP address range excluded from
HotSpot enforcement. To enforce HotSpot, you must edit the network object.
See Adding and Editing Network Objects on page 229.
If Remote Desktop is enabled, a link appears next to each computer, enabling you to access its desktop remotely. For information on using Remote Desktop, see Using
Next to each computer, an
Add button enables you to add a network object for the computer, or an
Edit button enables you to edit an existing network object for the computer. For information on adding and editing network objects, see Adding and
Editing Network Objects on page 229.
2. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
3. To view node limit information, do the following: a. Click
Node Limit.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 358
Viewing Connections
The
Node Limit window appears with installed software product and the number of nodes used. b. Click
Close to close the window.
Viewing Connections
This option allows you to view currently active connections between your networks, as well as those from your networks to the Internet.
Note: The report does not display connections between bridged networks, where
Firewall Between Members is disabled.
To view the active connections
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Connections tab.
Chapter 11: Viewing Reports 359
Viewing Connections
The
Connections page appears.
The page displays the information in the following table.
2. To view information about a destination machine, click its IP address.
The Safe@Office appliance queries the Internet WHOIS server, and a window displays the name of the entity to which the IP address is registered and their contact information.
3. To view information about a destination port, click the port.
A window opens displaying information about the port.
4. To resize a column, drag the relevant column divider right or left.
5. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 360
Table 59: Connections Fields
This field… Displays…
Protocol The protocol used (TCP, UDP, and so on)
Source IP
Port
Destination IP
Port
QoS Class
Options
Viewing Network Statistics
The source IP address.
The source port
The destination IP address.
The destination port.
The QoS class to which the connection belongs (if Traffic Shaper is enabled)
An icon indicating further details:
•
•
•
- The connection is encrypted.
- The connection is being scanned by VStream Antivirus.
- The connection is being scanned by VStream Antispam.
361 Chapter 11: Viewing Reports
Viewing Network Statistics
Viewing Network Statistics
You can view statistics for each of the Safe@Office appliance's Internet connections, internal networks and bridges, using the Network Interface Monitor.
Viewing General Network Statistics
You can view general statistics for the Safe@Office appliance's network interfaces.
To view general network statistics
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Networks tab.
The
Networks page appears displaying general network statistics. For information on the fields, see the following table.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 362
2. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
Table 60: General Network Statistics
This field… Displays…
Total Networks The total number of internal networks.
Total Sent
Viewing Network Statistics
The total number of sent packets on all network interfaces.
Total Received The total number of received packets on all network interfaces.
Viewing Internet Connection Statistics
You can view statistics for the primary and secondary Internet connections.
To view statistics for an Internet connection
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Networks tab.
The
Networks page appears.
2. In the tree, click on the Internet connection.
Chapter 11: Viewing Reports 363
Viewing Network Statistics
The page displays statistics for the Internet connection. The following example shows statistics for the primary Internet connection.
For information on the fields, see the following table.
3. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
Table 61: Internet Connection Statistics
This field… Displays…
Type The Internet connection's type
Status
IP Address
MAC Address
The Internet connection's status
The appliance's current IP address on the network interface
The appliance's MAC address on the network interface
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 364
Viewing Network Statistics
This field…
Internet
Mode
Displays…
Connected
The Internet connection method used
The connection duration, in the format hh:mm:ss, where: hh=hours mm=minutes ss=seconds
Remote IP
Address
The IP address of the PPP peer.
Connection Probing
This field is only relevant for PPP-based Internet connections.
The connection probing method configured for the Internet connection Probing Method
ADSL
These fields only appear for ADSL connections.
Standard The DSL line's standard
Annex
Self Test
The Safe@Office ADSL model (Annex A, Annex B)
Indicates whether DSL modem has passed a self-test
Trellis Coding The DSL line's trellis coding
Framing Structure The DSL line's framing structure
Line Rate
ADSL Firmware
ADSL Firmware
[Backup]
The line rate for transmission (TX) and reception (RX) in kbps
The installed ADSL firmware
The installed backup ADSL firmware
365 Chapter 11: Viewing Reports
Modem
Manufacturer
Model
Revision
Serial
Operator
Signal Strength
BER
Access
Technology
Statistics
Packets
Viewing Network Statistics
This field…
RF status
Tx Power
Displays…
These fields only appear for ADSL connections.
SNR Margin
Line Attenuation
The local and remote transmission power in dB
The local and remote Signal to Noise Ration (SNR) margin in dB.
The SNR margin is the difference between the amount of noise received by the local/remote line end, and the amount of noise it can tolerate.
The local and remote line attenuation in dB.
The line attenuation is the difference between the signal power transmitted to the local/remote line end, and that which it received.
These fields only appear if a cellular modem is connected.
The modem manufacturer
The modem model
The modem revision
The modem serial number
The cellular operator
The current signal strength in dB
The bit error rate
The access technology used
Statistics only appear if the Internet connection is connected
The total number of transmitted and received packets
366 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
This field…
Errors
Dropped
Overruns
Frame/Carrier
Viewing Network Statistics
Displays…
The total number of transmitted and received packets for which an error occurred
The total number of transmitted and received packets that the firewall dropped
The total number of transmitted and received packets that were lost, because they were sent or arrived more quickly that the appliance could handle
The total number of frame alignment and carrier errors.
Frame alignment errors occur when a frame that has extra bits is received.
The number of such errors appears in the
Received column.
Carrier errors occur when the carrier is not present at the start of data transmission, or when the carrier is lost during transmission. Such errors usually indicate a problem with the cable. The number of such errors appears in the
Transmitted column.
Chapter 11: Viewing Reports 367
Viewing Network Statistics
Viewing Wired Network Statistics
You can view statistics for wired network interfaces, including the LAN, DMZ,
OfficeMode, tag-based VLANs, and port-based VLANs.
To view statistics for a wired network
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Networks tab.
The
Networks page appears.
2. In the tree, click on the wired network.
The page displays statistics for the network. The following example shows statistics for the LAN. For information on the fields, see the following table.
3. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
368 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 62: Wired Network Statistics
This field… Displays…
Type
Status
The network's type.
The network's current status (
Enabled/Disabled).
IP Address
Viewing Network Statistics
The appliance's current IP address on the network interface.
MAC Address
Statistics
Packets
Errors
Dropped
Overruns
Frame/Carrier
The appliance's MAC address on the network interface.
Statistics only appear if the network is enabled
The total number of transmitted and received packets
The total number of transmitted and received packets for which an error occurred
The total number of transmitted and received packets that the firewall dropped
The total number of transmitted and received packets that were lost, because they were sent or arrived more quickly that the appliance could handle
The total number of frame alignment and carrier errors.
Frame alignment errors occur when a frame that has extra bits is received.
The number of such errors appears in the
Received column.
Carrier errors occur when the carrier is not present at the start of data transmission, or when the carrier is lost during transmission. Such errors usually indicate a problem with the cable. The number of such errors appears in the
Transmitted column.
369 Chapter 11: Viewing Reports
Viewing Network Statistics
Viewing Wireless Network Statistics
If the primary WLAN is enabled, you can view wireless statistics for the primary WLAN and VAPs.
To view statistics for the primary WLAN and VAPs
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Networks tab.
The
Networks page appears.
2. In the tree, click on the wireless network's name.
The page displays statistics for the network. For information on the fields, see the following table.
3. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
370 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 63: Wireless Statistics
This field… Displays…
Type
Status
The network's type, in this case "Wireless"
The network's current status (
Enabled/Disabled)
IP Address The IP address of the wireless network's default gateway
Viewing Network Statistics
MAC Address
Wireless
Wireless Mode
The MAC address of the wireless network interface
The operation mode used by the WLAN, followed by the transmission rate in Mbps
Domain
Country
Channel
Security
Statistics
Frames OK
The Safe@Office access point's region
The country configured for the WLAN
The radio frequency used by the WLAN
The security mode used by the wireless network
Statistics only appear if the network is enabled
The total number of frames that were successfully transmitted and received
Errors
Wrong
NWID/ESSID
The total number of transmitted and received frames for which an error occurred
The total number of received packets that were dropped, because they were destined for another access point
Invalid Encryption
Key
The total number of transmitted and received packets with the wrong encryption key
371 Chapter 11: Viewing Reports
Viewing Network Statistics
This field… Displays…
Missing Fragments The total number of packets missed during transmission and reception that were dropped, because fragments of the packet were lost
Discarded Retries The total number of discarded retry packets that were transmitted and received
Discarded Misc The total number of transmitted and received packets that were discarded for other reasons
Viewing Bridge Statistics
You can view statistics for bridges.
To view statistics for a bridge
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Networks tab.
The
Networks page appears.
2. In the tree, click on the bridge.
372 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Viewing Network Statistics
The page displays statistics for the bridge. For information on the fields, see the following table.
3. To view statistics for bridged networks, in the tree, expand the bridge's node.
The page displays statistics for the bridged network.
4. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
Table 64: Bridge Statistics
This field… Displays…
Type The network's type, in this case "Bridge"
IP Address
Statistics
Packets
The appliance's current IP address on the bridge interface
Statistics only appear if the bridge is enabled
The total number of transmitted and received packets
Chapter 11: Viewing Reports 373
Viewing the Routing Table
This field…
Errors
Displays…
The total number of transmitted and received packets for which an error occurred
Dropped
Overruns
The total number of transmitted and received packets that the firewall dropped
The total number of transmitted and received packets that were lost, because they were sent or arrived more quickly that the appliance could handle
Frame/Carrier The total number of frame alignment and carrier errors.
Frame alignment errors occur when a frame that has extra bits is received.
The number of such errors appears in the
Received column.
Carrier errors occur when the carrier is not present at the start of data transmission, or when the carrier is lost during transmission. Such errors usually indicate a problem with the cable. The number of such errors appears in the
Transmitted column.
Viewing the Routing Table
This option allows you to view the routing table currently in effect on the Safe@Office appliance.
To view the current routing table
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Routing tab.
374 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Routing Table page appears.
Viewing the Routing Table
The page displays the information in the following table.
2. To resize a column, drag the relevant column divider right or left.
3. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
Table 65: Routing Table Fields
This field… Displays…
Source The route's source
Destination
Service
Gateway
Metric
The route's destination
The network service for which the route is configured
The gateway's IP address
The route's metric
Chapter 11: Viewing Reports 375
Viewing Wireless Station Statistics
This field…
Interface
Displays…
The interface for which the route is configured
Origin The route's type:
• Connected Route. A route to a network that is directly connected to the Safe@Office appliance
• Static Route. A destination-based or service-based static route.
See Using Static Routes on page 241.
• Dynamic Route. A route obtained through a dynamic routing protocol, such as OSPF
• Source Route. A source-based static route. See Using Static
Viewing Wireless Station Statistics
If the primary WLAN is enabled, you can view wireless statistics for individual wireless stations.
To view statistics for a wireless station
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the My Computers tab.
The
Active Computers page appears.
The following information appears next to each wireless station:
• The signal strength in dB
• A series of bars representing the signal strength
2. Mouse-over the information icon next to the wireless station.
A tooltip displays statistics for the wireless station, as described in the following table.
3. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
376 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 66: Wireless Station Statistics
This field… Displays…
Current Rate The current reception and transmission rate in Mbps
Viewing Wireless Station Statistics
Frames OK
Management
The total number of frames that were successfully transmitted and received
The total number of transmitted and received management packets
Control
Errors
Dup ratio
Cipher
QoS
XR
The total number of received control packets
The total number of transmitted and received frames for which an error occurred
The percentage of frames received more than once.
The security protocol used for the wireless connection
Indicates whether the client is using Multimedia QoS (WMM). Possible values are:
• yes. The client is using WMM.
• no. The client is not using WMM.
Indicates whether the wireless client supports Extended Range (XR) mode.
Possible values are:
• yes. The wireless client supports XR mode.
• no. The wireless client does not support XR mode.
Chapter 11: Viewing Reports 377
Viewing the Event Log
Chapter 12
Viewing Logs
This chapter describes the Safe@Office appliance logs.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Viewing the Event Log
The Event Log displays general appliance events, including the following:
• Authentication attempts
• Changes in setup
• Internet connection status changes
• Errors
• Warnings
This information is useful for troubleshooting. You can export the logs to an *.xls
(Microsoft Excel) file, and then store it for analysis purposes or send it to technical support.
Note: You can configure the Safe@Office appliance to send event and security logs
to a Syslog server. For information, see Configuring Syslog Logging on page 726.
Chapter 12: Viewing Logs 379
Viewing the Event Log
To view the event log
1. Click
Logs in the main menu, and click the Event Log tab.
The
Event Log page appears.
The log table contains the columns described in Event Log Columns on page 382. The
log messages are color-coded as described in Event Log Color Coding on page 383.
2. To navigate the log table, do any of the following:
• To scroll through the displayed log page:
Use the scroll bars, or
Click on a log message and then press the UP and DOWN arrows on your keyboard.
• To view the next log page, click Next.
• To view the previous log page, click Back.
3. To specify the number of logs to display per page, in the drop-down list at the bottom of the log table, select the desired number.
4. To resize a column, drag the relevant column divider right or left.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 380
Viewing the Event Log
5. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
6. To save the displayed events to an *.xls file: a. Click
Save.
A standard
File Download dialog box appears. b. Click
Save.
The
Save As dialog box appears. c. Browse to a destination directory of your choice. d. Type a name for the configuration file and click
Save.
The *.xls file is created and saved to the specified directory.
7. To copy log messages, do the following: a. Select the desired logs, by clicking in the log table and dragging the cursor.
The selected logs are highlighted in yellow. b. Press CTRL+C.
Chapter 12: Viewing Logs 381
Viewing the Event Log
If you are using Internet Explorer, and this is the first time that you copy logs, a dialog box asks you whether you want to allow the Safe@Office Portal to access your clipboard. In this case, click
Allow access.
The selected logs are copied to your clipboard.
8. To clear all displayed events: a. Click
Clear.
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
All events are cleared.
Table 67: Event Log Columns
This column... Displays...
No The log message number
Date
Time
Information
The date on which the event occurred, in the format DD:MM:YYYY, where:
DD=date
MM=month, in abbreviated form
YYYY=year
The time at which the event occurred, in the format hh:mm:ss, where: hh=hour mm=minutes ss=seconds
A description of the logged event
382 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 68: Event Log Color Coding
An event marked in this color…
Indicates…
Red An error message
Orange A warning message
Blue An informational message
Viewing the Security Log
Viewing the Security Log
The Security Log displays security-related events, including the following:
• Connections logged by firewall rules
• Connections logged by VStream Antivirus
• Connection logged by VStream Antispam
• Security events logged by SmartDefense
• Web sites blocked by Web rules or the centralized Web Filtering service
This information is useful for troubleshooting. You can export the logs to an *.xls
(Microsoft Excel) file, and then store it for analysis purposes or send it to technical support.
Note: You can configure the Safe@Office appliance to send event and security logs
to a Syslog server. For information, see Configuring Syslog Logging on page 726.
Chapter 12: Viewing Logs 383
Viewing the Security Log
To view the security log
1. Click
Logs in the main menu, and click the Security Log tab.
The
Security Log page appears.
The log table contains the columns described in Security Log Columns on page 387.
The log messages are color-coded as described in Security Log Color Coding on page
2. To display information about a connection source or destination, click the relevant IP address.
The Safe@Office appliance queries the Internet WHOIS server, and a window displays the name of the entity to whom the IP address is registered and their contact information. This information is useful in tracking down hackers.
3. To view information about a destination port, click the port.
A window opens displaying information about the port.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 384
Viewing the Security Log
4. To navigate the log table, do any of the following:
• To scroll through the displayed log page:
Use the scroll bars, or
Click on a log message and then press the UP and DOWN arrows on your keyboard.
• To view the next log page, click Next.
• To view the previous log page, click Back.
5. To specify the number of logs to display per page, in the drop-down list at the bottom of the log table, select the desired number.
6. To resize a column, drag the relevant column divider right or left.
7. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
8. To save the displayed events to an *.xls file: a. Click
Save.
A standard
File Download dialog box appears. b. Click
Save.
The
Save As dialog box appears. c. Browse to a destination directory of your choice. d. Type a name for the configuration file and click
Save.
The *.xls file is created and saved to the specified directory.
9. To copy log messages, do the following: a. Select the desired logs, by clicking in the log table and dragging the cursor.
385 Chapter 12: Viewing Logs
Viewing the Security Log
The selected logs are highlighted in yellow. b. Press CTRL+C.
If you are using Internet Explorer, and this is the first time that you copy logs, a dialog box asks you whether you want to allow the Safe@Office Portal to access your clipboard. In this case, click
Allow access.
The selected logs are copied to your clipboard.
10. To clear all displayed events: a. Click
Clear.
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
All events are cleared.
386 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 69: Security Log Columns
This column... Displays...
No The log message number
Date
Time
Dir
Act
Source
Port
Destination
Viewing the Security Log
The date on which the action occurred, in the format DD:MM:YYYY, where:
DD=date
MM=month, in abbreviated form
YYYY=year
The time at which the action occurred, in the format hh:mm:ss, where: hh=hour mm=minutes ss=seconds
•
•
•
An icon indicating the direction of the connection on which the firewall acted. This can be one of the following:
Incoming connection
Outgoing connection
Internal connection
An icon indicating the action that the firewall performed on a connection. For a list of Actions icons, see Security Log Actions on
The IP address of the connection's source.
The source port used for the connection.
The IP address of the connection's destination.
Chapter 12: Viewing Logs 387
Viewing the Security Log
This column...
Service
Reason
Rule
Net
Information
Displays...
The protocol and destination port used for the connection.
The reason the action was logged.
The number of the firewall rule that was executed.
The internal network where the action occurred.
Additional information about the logged action.
Table 70: Security Log Actions
Action Icon Description
Connection Accepted The firewall accepted a connection.
Connection Decrypted
Connection Dropped
Connection Encrypted
Connection Rejected
Connection Monitored
URL Allowed
URL Filtered
Virus Detected
Potential Spam Stamped
The firewall decrypted a connection.
The firewall dropped a connection.
The firewall encrypted a connection.
The firewall rejected a connection.
A security event was monitored; however, it was not blocked, due to the current configuration.
The firewall allowed a URL.
The firewall blocked a URL.
A virus was detected in an email.
An email was marked as potential spam.
388 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Action
Potential Spam Detected
Icon Description
An email was rejected as potential spam.
Viewing the Security Log
Mail Allowed
Blocked by VStream
Antivirus
A non-spam email was logged.
VStream Antivirus blocked a connection.
Table 71: Security Log Color Coding
An event marked in this color…
Indicates…
Red Connection attempts that were blocked by your firewall, by a security policy downloaded from your Service Center, or by user-defined rules.
Orange
Green
Traffic detected as suspicious, but accepted by the firewall.
For example, if a SmartDefense protection's
Action field is set to
"Track" instead of "Block", and a connection triggers this protection, the connection is accepted and logged in orange.
Traffic accepted by the firewall.
By default, accepted traffic is not logged. However, such traffic may be logged if specified by a security policy downloaded from your Service
Center, or if specified in user-defined rules.
Chapter 12: Viewing Logs 389
The Safe@Office Firewall Security Policy
Chapter 13
Setting Your Security Policy
This chapter describes how to set up your Safe@Office appliance security policy.
You can enhance your security policy by subscribing to services such as Web Filtering and
Email Filtering. For information on subscribing to services, see Using Subscription
This chapter includes the following topics:
The Safe@Office Firewall Security Policy .............................................. 391
Setting the Firewall Security Level .......................................................... 394
Using the EAP Authenticator ................................................................... 433
The Safe@Office Firewall Security Policy
What Is a Security Policy?
A
security policy is a set of rules that defines your security requirements, including (but not limited to) network security. By themselves, the network security-related rules comprise the
network security policy.
When configured with the necessary network security rules, the Safe@Office appliance serves as the enforcement agent for your network security policy. Therefore, the
Safe@Office appliance's effectiveness as a security solution is directly related to the network security policy's content.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 391
The Safe@Office Firewall Security Policy
Security Policy Implementation
The key to implementing a network security policy is to understand that a firewall is simply a technical tool that reflects and enforces a network security policy for accessing network resources.
A rule base is an ordered set of individual network security rules, against which each attempted connection is checked. Each rule specifies the source, destination, service, and action to be taken for each connection. A rule also specifies how a communication is tracked, logged, and displayed. In other words, the rule base is the implementation of the security policy.
Security Policy Enforcement
The Safe@Office appliance uses the unique, patented INSPECT engine to enforce the configured security policy and to control traffic between networks. The INSPECT engine examines all communication layers and extracts only the relevant data, enabling highly efficient operation, support for a large number of protocols and applications, and easy extensibility to new applications and services.
Planning the Safe@Office Firewall Security Policy
Before creating a security policy for your system, answer the following questions:
• Which services, including customized services and sessions, are allowed across the network?
• Which user permissions and authentication schemes are needed?
• Which objects are in the network? Examples include gateways, hosts, networks, routers, and domains.
• Which network objects can connect to others, and should the connections be encrypted?
• What should be the event logging policy?
• Which Quality of Service (QoS) classes will you need?
392 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Default Security Policy
Default Security Policy
The Safe@Office default security policy includes the following rules:
• Access is blocked from the WAN (Internet) to all internal networks (LAN,
DMZ, primary WLAN, VLANs, VAPs, and OfficeMode).
• Access is allowed from the internal networks to the WAN, according to the firewall security level (Low/Medium/High).
• Access is allowed from the LAN network to the other internal networks (DMZ, primary WLAN, VLANs, VAPs, and OfficeMode).
• Access is blocked from the DMZ, primary WLAN, VLAN, VAP, and
OfficeMode networks to the other internal networks, (including between different VLANs and VAPs).
• HTTPS access to the Safe@Office Portal (my.firewall, my.hotspot, and my.vpn) is allowed from all internal networks.
• HTTP access to the Safe@Office Portal (my.firewall, my.hotspot, and my.vpn) is allowed from all internal networks except the WLAN and VAPs. You can allow HTTP access from the primary WLAN and VAPs by creating a specific user-defined firewall rule.
• When using the print server function (see Using Network Printers on page 767),
access from internal networks to connected network printers is allowed.
• Access from the WAN to network printers is blocked.
These rules are independent of the firewall security level.
You can easily override the default security policy, by creating user-defined firewall rules.
For further information, see Using Rules on page 400.
393 Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy
Setting the Firewall Security Level
Setting the Firewall Security Level
The firewall security level can be controlled using a simple lever available on the
Firewall page. You can set the lever to the following states.
Table 72: Firewall Security Levels
This level…
Does this…
Low
Further Details
Enforces basic control on incoming connections, while permitting all outgoing connections.
All inbound traffic is blocked to the external
Safe@Office appliance IP address, except for
ICMP echoes ("pings").
All outbound connections are allowed.
Medium
High
Enforces strict control on all incoming connections, while permitting safe outgoing connections.
All inbound traffic is blocked.
All outbound traffic is allowed to the Internet except for Windows file sharing (NBT ports 137, 138, 139 and 445).
This is the default level and is recommended for most cases. Leave it unchanged unless you have a specific need for a higher or lower security level.
Enforces strict control on all incoming and outgoing connections.
All inbound traffic is blocked.
Restricts all outbound traffic except for the following: Web traffic (HTTP, HTTPS), email (IMAP,
POP3, SMTP), ftp, newsgroups, Telnet, DNS,
IPSEC IKE and VPN traffic.
394 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting the Firewall Security Level
This level…
Does this… Further Details
Block All Blocks all access between networks.
All inbound and outbound traffic is blocked between the internal networks.
This does not affect traffic to and from the gateway itself.
The definitions of firewall security levels provided in this table represent the Safe@Office appliance’s default security policy.
You can easily override the default security policy, by creating user-defined firewall rules.
For further information, see Using Rules on page 400.
Note: If the security policy is remotely managed, this lever might be disabled.
Note: Security updates downloaded from a Service Center may alter the security policy and change these definitions.
To change the firewall security level
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Firewall tab.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 395
Setting the Firewall Security Level
The
Firewall page appears.
2. Drag the security lever to the desired level.
The Safe@Office appliance security level changes accordingly.
396 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Servers
Configuring Servers
Note: If you do not intend to host any public Internet servers in your network (such as a Web Server, Mail Server, or an exposed host), you can skip this section.
The Safe@Office appliance enables you to configure the following types of public Internet servers:
• Servers for specific services
You can allow all incoming connections of a specific service and forward them to a particular host in your network. For example, you can set up your own Web server,
Mail server, or FTP server.
Note: Configuring servers is equivalent to creating simple Allow and Forward rules for common services, where the destination is
This Gateway. For information on creating
more complex rules, see Using Rules on page 400.
• Exposed host
If you need to allow
unlimited incoming and outgoing connections between the
Internet and a particular host, you can define an exposed host. An exposed host is not protected by the firewall, and it receives all traffic that was not forwarded to another computer by use of Allow and Forward rules.
Warning: Defining an exposed host is not recommended unless you are fully aware of the security risks. For example, an exposed host may be vulnerable to hacker attacks.
To allow services to be run on a specific host
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Servers tab.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 397
Configuring Servers
The
Servers page appears, displaying a list of services and a host IP address for each allowed service.
2. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
3. Click
Apply.
A success message appears.
398 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 73: Servers Page Fields
In this column… Do this…
Allow
Host IP
Configuring Servers
Select the check box next to the public server you want to configure. This can be either of the following:
• A specific service or application (rows 1-9)
• An exposed host (row 10)
Type the IP address of the computer that will run the service (one of your network computers), or click the corresponding
This Computer button to allow your computer to host the service.
VPN Only Select this option to allow only connections made through a VPN.
To stop the forwarding of services to a specific host
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Servers tab.
The
Servers page appears.
2. In the desired server's row, click
Clear.
The
Host IP field is cleared.
3. Click
Apply.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 399
Using Rules
Using Rules
The Safe@Office appliance checks the protocol used, the ports range, and the destination
IP address, when deciding whether to allow or block traffic.
User-defined rules have priority over the default security policy rules and provide you with greater flexibility in defining and customizing your security policy.
For example, if you assign your company’s accounting department to the LAN network and the rest of the company to the DMZ network, then as a result of the default security policy rules, the accounting department will be able to connect to all company computers, while the rest of the employees will not be able to access any sensitive information on the accounting department computers. You can override the default security policy rules, by creating firewall rules that allow specific DMZ computers (such a manager’s computer) to connect to the LAN network and the accounting department.
The Safe@Office appliance processes user-defined rules in the order they appear in the
Rules table, so that rule 1 is applied before rule 2, and so on. This enables you to define exceptions to rules, by placing the exceptions higher up in the
Rules table.
400 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Rules
For example, if you want to block all outgoing FTP traffic, except traffic from a specific IP address, you can create a rule blocking all outgoing FTP traffic and move the rule down in the
Rules table. Then create a rule allowing FTP traffic from the desired IP address and move this rule to a higher location in the Rules table than the first rule. In the figure below, the general rule is rule number 2, and the exception is rule number 1.
The Safe@Office appliance will process rule 1 first, allowing outgoing FTP traffic from the specified IP address, and only then it will process rule 2, blocking all outgoing FTP traffic.
The following rule types exist:
401 Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy
Using Rules
Table 74: Firewall Rule Types
Rule Description
Allow and
Forward
This rule type enables you to do the following:
• Permit incoming traffic from the Internet to a specific service and destination IP address in your internal network and then forward all such connections to a specific computer in your network. Such rules are called NAT forwarding rules.
For example, if the gateway has two public IP addresses,
62.98.112.1 and 62.98.112.2, and the network contains two private
Web servers, A and B, you can forward all traffic with the destination
62.98.112.1 to server A, while forwarding all traffic with the destination 62.98.112.2 to server B.
Note: Creating an Allow and Forward rule for incoming traffic to the default destination
This Gateway (which represents the Safe@Office IP address), is equivalent to defining a server in the
Servers page.
• Permit outgoing traffic from your internal network to a specific service and destination IP address on the Internet and then divert all such connections to a specific IP address. Such rules are called transparent proxy rules.
For example, you can redirect all traffic destined for a specific Web server on the Internet to a different IP address.
• Redirect the specified connections to a specific port. This option is called Port Address Translation (PAT).
• Assign traffic to a QoS class.
If Traffic Shaper is enabled for incoming traffic, then Traffic Shaper will handle relevant connections as specified in the bandwidth policy for the selected QoS class. For example, if Traffic Shaper is enabled for incoming traffic, and you create an Allow and Forward rule associating all incoming Web traffic with the Urgent QoS class, then
Traffic Shaper will handle incoming Web traffic as specified in the bandwidth policy for the Urgent class.
For information on Traffic Shaper and QoS classes, see Using
Note: You must use this type of rule to allow incoming connections if your network uses Hide NAT.
402 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Rule
Allow
Block
Using Rules
Description
This rule type enables you to do the following:
• Permit outgoing access from your internal network to a specific service on the Internet.
Permit incoming access from the Internet to a specific service in your internal network.
• Assign traffic to a QoS class.
If Traffic Shaper is enabled for the direction of traffic specified in the rule (incoming or outgoing), then Traffic Shaper will handle relevant connections as specified in the bandwidth policy for the selected QoS class. For example, if Traffic Shaper is enabled for outgoing traffic, and you create an Allow rule associating all outgoing Web traffic with the Urgent QoS class, then Traffic Shaper will handle outgoing Web traffic as specified in the bandwidth policy for the Urgent class.
For information on Traffic Shaper and QoS classes, see Using
Note: You cannot use an Allow rule to permit incoming traffic, if the network or
VPN uses Hide NAT. Use an “Allow and Forward” rule instead. However, you can use Allow rules for static NAT IP addresses.
This rule type enables you to do the following:
• Block outgoing access from your internal network to a specific service on the Internet.
• Block incoming access from the Internet to a specific service in your internal network.
• Block connections between hosts on different internal networks.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 403
Using Rules
Adding and Editing Firewall Rules
To add or edit a firewall rule
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Rules tab.
The
Rules page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a new rule, click Add Rule.
• To edit an existing rule, click
next to the desired rule.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 404
Using Rules
The
Safe@Office Firewall Rule wizard opens, with the Step 1: Rule Type dialog box displayed.
3. Select the type of rule you want to create.
4. Click
Next.
The
Step 2: Service dialog box appears.
The example below shows an Allow and Forward rule.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 405
Using Rules
5. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
6. Click
Next.
The
Step 3: Destination & Source dialog box appears.
7. To configure advanced settings, click
Show Advanced Settings.
New fields appear.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 406
8. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
9. Click
Next.
The
Step 4: Rule Options dialog box appears.
Using Rules
10. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
11. Click
Next.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 407
Using Rules
The
Step 5: Done dialog box appears.
12. If desired, type a description of the rule in the field provided.
13. Click
Finish.
The new rule appears in the
Rules page.
Table 75: Firewall Rule Fields
In this field… Do this…
Any Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to any service.
Standard Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific standard service or a network service object.
You must then select the desired service or network service object from the drop-down list.
Custom Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific nonstandard service.
The
Protocol and Port Range fields are enabled. You must fill them in.
408 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Rules
In this field… Do this…
Protocol Select the protocol for which the rule should apply (ESP, GRE, TCP, UDP,
ICMP, IGMP, or OSPF).
To specify that the rule should apply for any protocol, select
ANY.
To specify a protocol by number, select
Other. The Protocol Number field appears.
Port Range To specify the port range to which the rule applies, type the start port number in the left text box, and the end port number in the right text box.
Note: If you do not enter a port range, the rule will apply to all ports. If you enter only one port number, the range will include only that port.
Protocol Number Type the number of the protocol for which the rule should apply.
Source
Destination
Select the source of the connections you want to allow/block. This list includes network objects.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the field provided.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.
To specify the Safe@Office IP address, select
This Gateway.
To specify any source, select
ANY.
Select the destination of the connections you want to allow/block. This list includes network objects.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the text box.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 409
Using Rules
In this field… Do this…
To specify the Safe@Office IP addresses, select
This Gateway.
To specify any destination except the Safe@Office Portal IP addresses, select
ANY.
If the current time Select this option to specify that the rule should be applied only during is certain hours of the day.
You must then use the fields and drop-down lists provided, to specify the desired time range.
Forward the connection to
Quality of
Service class
Select the destination to which matching connections should be forwarded.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the text box.
This field only appears when defining an Allow and Forward rule.
Select the QoS class to which you want to assign the specified connections.
If Traffic Shaper is enabled, Traffic Shaper will handle these connections as specified in the bandwidth policy for the selected QoS class. If Traffic Shaper is not enabled, this setting is ignored. For information on Traffic Shaper and
QoS classes, see Using Traffic Shaper on page 293.
This drop-down list only appears when defining an Allow rule or an Allow and
Forward rule.
Redirect to port Select this option to redirect the connections to a specific port.
You must then type the desired port in the field provided.
This option is called Port Address Translation (PAT), and is only available when defining an Allow and Forward rule.
410 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Rules
In this field… Do this…
Log accepted connections /
Log blocked connections
Select this option to log the specified blocked or allowed connections.
By default, accepted connections are not logged, and blocked connections are logged. You can modify this behavior by changing the check box's state.
Enabling/Disabling Firewall Rules
You can temporarily disable a user-defined rule.
To enable/disable a firewall rule
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Rules tab.
The
Rules page appears.
2. Next to the desired rule, in the
Enabled column, do one of the following:
• To enable the rule, click
.
The button changes to and the rule is enabled.
• To disable the rule, click
.
The button changes to and the rule is disabled.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 411
Using Rules
Reordering Firewall Rules
To reorder firewall rules
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Rules tab.
The
Rules page appears.
2. For each rule you want to move, click on the rule and drag it to the desired location in the table.
Enabling/Disabling Firewall Rule Logging
You can enable or disable logging for a firewall rule, by using the information in Adding
and Editing Firewall Rules on page 404, or by using the following shortcut.
To enable/disable logging for a firewall rule
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Rules tab.
The
Rules page appears.
2. Next to the desired rule, in the
Log column, do one of the following:
• To enable logging, click
.
The button changes to and logging is enabled for the rule.
• To disable logging, click
.
The button changes to and logging is disabled for the rule.
412 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Viewing and Deleting Firewall Rules
To view or delete an existing firewall rule
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Rules tab.
The
Rules page appears with a list of existing firewall rules.
2. To resize a column, drag the relevant column divider right or left.
3. To delete a rule, do the following. a. In the desired rule's row, click .
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The rule is deleted.
Using Port-Based Security
Using Port-Based Security
The Safe@Office appliance supports the IEEE 802.1x standard for secure authentication of users and devices that are directly attached to Safe@Office appliance's LAN and DMZ ports, as well as the wireless LAN. Authentication can be performed either by an external
RADIUS server, or by the Safe@Office appliance's built-in EAP authenticator. For information on the Safe@Office EAP authenticator, see Using the Safe@Office EAP
When an 802.1x security scheme is implemented for a port, users attempting to connect to that port are required to authenticate using their network user name and password. The
Safe@Office appliance sends the user's credentials to the configured authentication server, and if authentication succeeds, a connection is established. If the user fails to authenticate, the port is physically isolated from other ports on the gateway.
If desired, you can specify how users should be handled after successful or failed authentication. Users who authenticate successfully on a specific port are assigned to the network with which that port is associated. For example, if the port is assigned to the DMZ
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 413
Using Port-Based Security network, all users who authenticate successfully on that port are assigned to the DMZ network.
When using a RADIUS server for authentication, you can assign authenticated users to specific network segments, by configuring dynamic VLAN assignment on the RADIUS server. Upon successful authentication, the RADIUS server sends RADIUS option 81
[Tunnel-Private-Group-ID] to the Safe@Office appliance, indicating to which network segment the user should be assigned. For example, if a member of the Accounting team connects to a network port and attempts to log in, the Safe@Office appliance relays the information to the RADIUS server, which replies with RADIUS option 81 and the value
“Accounting”. The appliance then assigns the user’s port to the Accounting network, granting the user access to all the resources of the Accounting team.
The Safe@Office appliance also enables you to automatically assign users to a
“Quarantine” network when authentication fails. All Quarantine network security and network rules will apply to those users. For example, you can create security rules allowing users on the Quarantine network to access the Internet and blocking them from accessing sensitive company resources. You can also configure Traffic Shaper to grant members of the Quarantine network a lower amount of bandwidth than authorized users.
You can choose to exclude specific network objects from 802.1x port-based security enforcement. Excluded network objects will be able to connect to the Safe@Office appliance's ports and access the network without authenticating. For information on excluding network objects from 802.1x port-based security enforcement, see Using
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 414
Configuring Port-Based Security
Using Port-Based Security
To configure 802.1x port-based security for a port
1. Do one of the following:
• To use the Safe@Office EAP authenticator for authenticating clients, follow the workflow Using the Safe@Office EAP Authenticator for Authentication
You will be referred back to this procedure at the appropriate stage in the workflow, at which point you can continue from the next step.
• To use a RADIUS server for authenticating clients, do the following:
1) Configure a RADIUS server.
See Using RADIUS Authentication on page 688.
2) Configure the clients for 802.1x authentication.
For information, refer to your RADIUS server documentation.
2. To configure dynamic VLAN assignment, do the following: a. Add port-based VLAN networks as needed.
See Adding and Editing Port-Based VLANs on page 220.
b. Configure RADIUS option 81 [Tunnel-Private-Group-ID] on the
RADIUS server.
For information, refer to your RADIUS server documentation.
This step is only relevant when using a RADIUS server.
3. To configure a Quarantine network other than the LAN or DMZ, add a portbased VLAN network.
See Adding and Editing Port-Based VLANs on page 220.
4. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 415
Using Port-Based Security
The
Ports page appears.
5. Next to the desired port, click
Edit.
416 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Port Setup page appears.
Using Port-Based Security
6. In the
Port Security drop-down list, select 802.1x.
The
Quarantine Network, Authentication Server, and Allow multiple hosts fields are enabled.
7. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
8. Click
Apply.
A warning message appears.
9. Click
OK.
417 Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy
Using Port-Based Security
Table 76: Port-Based Security Fields
In this field… Do this…
Assign to network Specify how the Safe@Office appliance should handle users who authenticate successfully, by selecting one of the following:
• A network name. All users who authenticate to this port successfully are assigned to the specified network.
• From RADIUS. Use dynamic VLAN assignment to assign users to specific networks. This option is only relevant when using a
RADIUS server.
Authentication
Server
Quarantine
Network
Allow multiple hosts
Specify which authentication server you are using, by selecting one of the following:
• RADIUS. A RADIUS server.
• Internal User Database. The Safe@Office EAP authenticator.
Specify which network should serve as the Quarantine network, by selecting one of the following:
• A network name. All users for whom authentication to this port fails are assigned to the specified network.
• None. No Quarantine network is selected.
To allow multiple hosts to connect to this port, select this option.
Normally, 802.1x port-based security allows only a single host to connect to each port. However, when this option is selected, multiple clients can connect to the same port via a hub or switch. Each client on the port must authenticate separately.
For information on cascading the Safe@Office appliance to a hub or switch,
see Cascading Your Appliance on page 102.
Note: Enabling this option makes 802.1x port-based security less secure.
Therefore, it is recommended to enable this option only in locations where the number of ports are a limiting factor, and where an external 802.1xcapable switch cannot be installed.
418 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Resetting 802.1x Locking
Using Secure HotSpot
When 802.1x port-based security is configured for a LAN port, the first host that attempts to connect to this port is “locked” to the port. In order to connect a different computer to the port, you must first reset 802.1x locking.
To reset 802.1x locking on all ports
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
2. Click
Reset 802.1x.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click
OK.
The 802.1x status of all ports is reset to "Unauthenticated".
Using Secure HotSpot
You can enable your Safe@Office appliance as a public Internet access hotspot for specific networks. When users on those networks attempt to access the Internet, they are automatically re-directed to the My HotSpot page http://my.hotspot.
Note: You can configure Secure HotSpot to use HTTPS. In this case, the My HotSpot page will be https://my.hotspot.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 419
Using Secure HotSpot
On this page, users must read and accept the My HotSpot terms of use, and if My HotSpot is configured to be password-protected, they must log in using their Safe@Office username and password. The users may then access the Internet or other corporate networks.
Users can also log out in the My HotSpot page.
Note: HotSpot users are automatically logged out after one hour of inactivity. If you are using RADIUS authentication, you can change the Secure HotSpot session timeout by configuring the RADIUS Session-Timeout Attribute. See Using RADIUS
Safe@Office Secure HotSpot is useful in any wired or wireless environment where Webbased user authentication or terms-of-use approval is required prior to gaining access to the network. For example, Secure HotSpot can be used in public computer labs, educational institutions, libraries, Internet caf
יs, and so on. You can also track and charge for Secure
HotSpot use, by enabling RADIUS accounting. For information, see Using RADIUS
The Safe@Office appliance allows you to add guest users quickly and easily. By default, guest users are given a username and password that expire in 24 hours and granted
HotSpot Access permissions only. For information on adding quick guest users, see
Adding Quick Guest Users on page 685.
You can choose to exclude specific network objects from HotSpot enforcement. Excluded network objects will be able to access the network without viewing the
My HotSpot page.
Furthermore, users will be able to access the excluded network object without viewing the
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 420
Using Secure HotSpot
My HotSpot page. For information on excluding network objects from HotSpot
enforcement, see Using Network Objects on page 227.
Important: SecuRemote/SecureClient/L2TP/Endpoint Connect VPN software users who are authenticated by the Internal VPN Server are automatically exempt from
HotSpot enforcement. This allows, for example, authenticated employees to gain full access to the corporate LAN, while guest users are permitted to access the Internet only.
Note: HotSpot enforcement can block traffic passing through the firewall; however, it does not block local traffic on the same network segment (traffic that does not pass through the firewall).
Setting Up Secure HotSpot
To set up Secure HotSpot
1. Enable Secure HotSpot for the desired networks.
See Enabling/Disabling Secure HotSpot on page 422.
2. Customize Secure HotSpot as desired.
See Customizing Secure HotSpot on page 423.
3. Grant HotSpot Access permissions to users on the selected networks.
See Adding and Editing Users on page 680.
4. To exclude specific computers from Secure HotSpot enforcement, add or edit their network objects.
See Adding and Editing Network Objects on page 229.
You must select
Exclude this computer/network from HotSpot enforcement option.
5. Add quick guest users as needed.
See Adding Quick Guest Users on page 685.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 421
Using Secure HotSpot
Enabling/Disabling Secure HotSpot
To enable/disable Secure HotSpot
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the HotSpot tab.
The
My HotSpot page appears.
2. In the
HotSpot Networks area, do one of the following:
• To enable Secure HotSpot for a specific network, select the check box next to the network.
• To disable Secure HotSpot for a specific network, clear the check box next to the network.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 422
3. Click
Apply.
Customizing Secure HotSpot
Using Secure HotSpot
To customize Secure HotSpot
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the HotSpot tab.
The
My HotSpot page appears.
2. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
3. To preview the My HotSpot page, click
Preview.
A browser window opens displaying the My HotSpot page.
4. Click
Apply.
Your changes are saved.
Table 77: My HotSpot Fields
In this field… Do this…
Prior to login Specify the degree of access to grant users who have not yet logged in to
Secure HotSpot or for whom authentication failed, by selecting one of the following:
• Block Access to Other Networks. Users cannot access internal networks, the Internet, or VPN. This is the default.
• Block Access to External Networks Only. Users can access internal networks, but not the Internet or VPN.
• Block Access to VPN Only. Users can access internal networks and the Internet, but not VPN.
My HotSpot Title Type the title that should appear on the My HotSpot page.
The default title is "Welcome to My HotSpot".
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 423
Using NAT Rules
In this field… Do this…
My HotSpot
Terms
Type the terms to which the user must agree before accessing the Internet.
You can use HTML tags as needed.
My HotSpot is passwordprotected
Select this option to require users to enter their username and password before accessing the Internet.
If this option is not selected, users will be required only to accept the terms of use before accessing the network.
The
Allow a user to login from more than one computer at the same time check box appears.
Allow a user to login from more than one computer at the same time
Select this option to allow a single user to log in to My HotSpot from multiple computers at the same time.
Use HTTPS Select this option to use HTTPS for Secure HotSpot.
After login, redirect to URL
To redirect users to a specific URL after logging in to My HotSpot, select this option and type the desired URL in the field provided.
For example, you can redirect authenticated users to your company’s Web site or a “Welcome” page.
424 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using NAT Rules
Using NAT Rules
Overview
In an IP network, each computer is assigned a unique IP address that defines both the host and the network. A computer's IP address can be public and Internet-routable, or private and non-routable. Since IPv4, the current version of IP, provides only 32 bits of address space, available public IP addresses are becoming scarce, most having already been assigned. Internet Service Providers will usually allocate only one or a few public IP addresses at a time, and while larger companies may purchase several such addresses for use, purchasing addresses for every computer on the network is usually impossible.
Due to the lack of available public IP addresses, most computers in an organization are assigned private, non-routable IP addresses. Even if more public IP addresses became available, changing the private IP address of every machine in a large network to a public
IP address would be an administrative nightmare, being both labor intensive and time consuming. Therefore, organization's computers will most likely remain with private, nonroutable IP addresses, even though in most cases they require access to the Internet.
In addition to the issue of arranging Internet access for computers with non-routable IP addresses, IP networks present a security challenge. Since making a network’s internal addresses public knowledge can reveal the topology of the entire network, the network administrator may want to conceal both routable and non-routable IP addresses from outside the organization, or even from other parts of the same organization, in order to enhance security.
The Safe@Office appliance solves both issues through the use of Network Address
Translation (NAT) rules. A NAT rule is a setting used to change the source, destination, and/or service of specific connections.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 425
Using NAT Rules
Supported NAT Rule Types
The Safe@Office appliance enables you to define the following types of custom NAT
rules:
• Static NAT (or One-to-One NAT). Translation of an IP address range to another IP address range of the same size.
This type of NAT rule allows the mapping of Internet IP addresses or address ranges to hosts inside the internal network. This is useful if you want each computer in your private network to have its own Internet IP addresses.
• Hide NAT (or Many-to-One NAT). Translation of an IP address range to a single IP address.
This type of NAT rule enables you to share a single public Internet IP address among several computers, by “hiding” the private IP addresses of the internal computers behind the Safe@Office appliance’s single Internet IP address. For more information
on Hide NAT, see How Does Hide NAT Work? on page 427.
• Few-to-Many NAT. Translation of a smaller IP address range to a larger IP address range.
When this type of NAT rule is used, static NAT is used to map the IP addresses in the smaller range to the IP addresses at the beginning of the larger range. The remaining
IP addresses in the larger range remain unused.
• Many-to-Few NAT. Translation of a larger IP address range to a smaller IP address range.
When this type of NAT rule is used, static NAT is used to map the IP addresses in the larger range to all but the final IP address in the smaller range. Hide NAT is then used to map all of the remaining IP addresses in the larger range to the final IP address in the smaller range.
• Service-Based NAT. Translation of a connection's original service to a different service.
The Safe@Office appliance also supports implicitly defined NAT rules. Such rules are created automatically upon the following events:
• Hide NAT is enabled on an internal network
• An Allow and Forward firewall rule is defined
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 426
Using NAT Rules
• Static NAT is configured for a network object (for information, see Using
• NAT rules are received from the Service Center
Implicitly defined NAT rules can only be edited or deleted indirectly. For example, in order to remove a NAT rule created when a certain network object was defined, you must modify the relevant network object.
The
Address Translation page displays both custom NAT rules and implicitly defined NAT rules, and it allows you to create, edit, and delete custom NAT rules.
How Does Hide NAT Work?
In Hide NAT, traffic to and from the internal networks traverses an enforcement module.
When a packet from an internal network passes through the gateway, the source IP address is changed to the hiding IP address, and the source port is changed to a dynamically assigned port that uniquely identifies the connection. The relationship between the dynamically assigned port and the internal IP address is recorded in the gateway’s state tables. When reply packets arrive, the enforcement module uses the destination port to determine to which connection the packet belongs, and then adjusts the destination port and IP address accordingly.
Adding and Editing NAT Rules
This procedure explains how to add and edit custom NAT rules. You cannot add or edit an implicitly defined NAT rule directly.
To add or edit a custom NAT rule
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the NAT tab.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 427
Using NAT Rules
The
Address Translation page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a new rule, click New.
• To edit an existing rule, click
next to the desired rule.
428 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using NAT Rules
The
Address Translation wizard opens, with the Step 1 of 3: Original Connection Details dialog box displayed.
3. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
4. Click
Next.
The
Step 2 of 3: Translations to Perform dialog box appears.
5. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 429
Using NAT Rules
6. Click
Next.
The
Step 3 of 3: Save Address Translation dialog box appears.
7. If desired, type a description of the rule in the field provided.
8. Click
Finish.
The new rule appears in the
Address Translation page.
Table 78: Address Translation Wizard Fields
Field Description
The source is Select the original source of the connections you want to translate. This list includes network objects.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the field provided.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 430
Using NAT Rules
Field
And the destination is
Description
Select the original destination of the connections you want to translate. This list includes network objects.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the text box.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.
To specify the Safe@Office IP addresses, select
This Gateway.
To specify any destination except the Safe@Office Portal IP addresses, select
ANY.
And the service is Select the original service used for the connections you want to translate.
This list includes network service objects.
Change the source to
Select the new source to which the original source should be translated.
This list includes network objects.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the field provided.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.
To specify that the original source should not be translated, select
Don't
Change.
431 Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy
Using NAT Rules
Field
Change the destination to
Description
Select the new destination to which the original destination should be translated. This list includes network objects.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the field provided.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.
To specify that the original destination should not be translated, select
Don't
Change.
Change the service to
Select the new service to which the original service should be translated.
This list includes network service objects.
To specify that the original service should not be translated, select
Don't
Change.
Viewing and Deleting NAT Rules
This procedure explains how to view all NAT rules and how to delete custom NAT rules.
You cannot delete implicitly defined NAT rules directly.
To view and delete NAT rules
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the NAT tab.
The
Address Translation page appears with a list of all existing NAT rules.
Implicitly defined NAT rules are marked
Automatic Rule in the right-most column.
2. To delete a custom NAT rule, do the following. a. In the desired rule's row, click .
A confirmation message appears.
432 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using the EAP Authenticator b. Click
OK.
The rule is deleted.
Using the EAP Authenticator
Wi-Fi Protected Access Enterprise (WPA-Enterprise) and 802.1x are Network Access
Control (NAC) protocols that can be used to authenticate users connecting to the Check
Point Safe@Office appliance. Both WPA-Enterprise and 802.1x can be used to control access to the wireless network; however, WPA-Enterprise has the added capability of encrypting transmitted data, and 802.1x can be used to secure connections to the
Safe@Office appliance's LAN and DMZ ports as well.
Traditionally, WPA-Enterprise and 802.1x require installing an external Remote
Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) server. When a user tries to authenticate using 802.1x or WPA-Enterprise, the Safe@Office appliance sends the entered user credentials to the RADIUS server. The server then checks whether the RADIUS database contains a matching set of credentials. If so, then the user is logged in.
While purchasing and configuring a RADIUS server may pose little challenge for a large enterprise, such a solution may be costly and complex, and may therefore be unsuitable for smaller networks. In such cases, it is recommended to configure the Safe@Office appliance's built-in Extended Authentication Protocol (EAP) authenticator, which allows using the local user database, enabling the use of WPA-Enterprise or 802.1x without an external RADIUS server.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 433
Using the EAP Authenticator
Workflows
The Safe@Office built-in EAP authenticator can be used to authenticate wireless clients or wired clients connecting to appliance ports.
Using the EAP Authenticator for Authentication of Wireless Clients
To use the EAP authenticator for authentication of wireless clients
1. Configure the Safe@Office appliance as follows: a. Configure the desired wireless network for use with the EAP authenticator.
For information on configuring the primary WLAN, see Manually Configuring a
Wireless Network on page 321. For information on configuring a VAP, see
Configuring Virtual Access Points on page 333.
Note: The Security field must set to 802.1x or WPA-Enterprise, and the Authentication
Server field must be set to Internal User Database. b. Ensure that the Safe@Office appliance has a certificate installed in the
Safe@Office Portal's
VPN > Certificate page.
The certificate can be any of the following:
A self-signed certificate generated by the Safe@Office appliance, version
8.0 or later.
If a self-signed certificate is installed on the appliance, but was generated by an earlier firmware version, you must generate a new certificate. For instructions on generating a self-signed certificate, see Generating a
A certificate received from the Service Center. c. Export the Safe@Office appliance's CA certificate.
See Exporting the Safe@Office Appliance CA Certificate on page 669.
d. For each client that should be allowed to connect to the Safe@Office appliance, add a user with Network Access permissions to the local user database.
434 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using the EAP Authenticator
See Adding and Editing Users on page 680.
e. Provide each of the users with the authentication credentials you configured for them.
2. Configure each wireless client as follows: a. Configure the client for server authentication.
See Configuring Clients for Server Authentication on Wireless Connections on
b. Install the Safe@Office appliance's CA certificate as a trusted root CA.
See Installing the Safe@Office Appliance's CA Certificate on Clients on page
3. Connect the wireless client to the wireless network.
See Connecting Clients to the Safe@Office Appliance on page 447.
Using the EAP Authenticator for Authentication of Wired Clients
To use the EAP authenticator for authentication of wired clients
1. Configure the Safe@Office appliance as follows: a. Configure the desired port for port-based security using the Safe@Office
EAP authenticator.
See Configuring Port-Based Security on page 415.
Note: The Port Security field must set to 802.1x, and the Authentication Server field must be set to
Internal User Database. b. Ensure that the Safe@Office appliance has a certificate installed in the
Safe@Office Portal's
VPN > Certificate page.
The certificate can be any of the following:
A self-signed certificate generated by the Safe@Office appliance, version
8.0 or later.
If a self-signed certificate is installed on the appliance, but was generated by an earlier firmware version, you must generate a new certificate. For
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 435
Using the EAP Authenticator instructions on generating a self-signed certificate, see Generating a
A certificate received from the Service Center. c. Export the Safe@Office appliance's CA certificate.
See Exporting the Safe@Office Appliance CA Certificate on page 669.
d. For each client that should be allowed to connect to the Safe@Office appliance, add a user with Network Access permissions to the local user database.
See Adding and Editing Users on page 680.
e. Provide each of the users with the authentication credentials you configured for them.
2. Configure each wired client as follows: a. Configure the client for server authentication.
See Configuring Clients for Server Authentication on Wired Connections on
b. Install the Safe@Office appliance's CA certificate as a trusted root CA.
See Installing the Safe@Office Appliance's CA Certificate on Clients on page
3. Connect the client directly to the port, and enter the Network Access user's authentication credentials when prompted.
Configuring Clients for Server Authentication on
Wireless Connections
To configure a Microsoft Windows client for server authentication
1. In the START menu, click
Control Panel.
2. Click
Network Connections.
3. Double-click on the wireless network connection.
4. Do one of the following:
436 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using the EAP Authenticator
• If the Choose a Wireless Network screen appears, click Change Advanced
Settings.
• If you are already connected to a wireless network, click Properties.
The
Wireless Network Connection Properties dialog box appears displaying the General tab.
5. Click the
Wireless Networks tab.
The
Wireless Networks tab appears.
6. Click
Add and add your network.
The
Wireless network properties dialog box appears displaying the Association tab.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 437
Using the EAP Authenticator
7. In the
Network name (SSID) field, type the Safe@Office appliance wireless network name.
8. In the
Network Authentication drop-down list, select WPA.
Note: You must select WPA, regardless of whether the Safe@Office appliance is configured to use the WPA-Enterprise or 802.1x security protocol.
9. In the
Data encryption drop-down list, select AES.
10. Click the
Authentication tab.
The
Authentication tab appears.
11. In the EAP type drop-down list, select
Protected EAP (PEAP).
12. Select the
Authenticate as computer when computer information is available check box.
13. Click
Properties.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 438
The
Protected EAP Properties dialog box appears.
Using the EAP Authenticator
14. Make sure that the
Validate server certificate check box is selected.
15. In the
Select Authentication Method drop-down list, select Secured password
(EAP-MSCHAP v2).
16. If the user credentials for connecting to the Safe@Office appliance differ from the user credentials for connecting to Windows, do the following: a. Click
Configure.
The
EAP MSCHAPv2 Properties dialog box appears. b. Clear the check box. c. Click
OK.
17. Click
OK in all open windows.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 439
Using the EAP Authenticator
Configuring Clients for Server Authentication on Wired
Connections
To configure a Microsoft Windows client for server authentication
1. In the START menu, click
Control Panel.
2. Click
Network Connections.
3. Right-click on
Local Area Connection, and click Properties in the popup menu that appears.
The
Local Area Connection Properties dialog box appears displaying the General tab.
4. Click the
Authentication tab.
The
Authentication tab appears.
5. Select the
Enable IEEE 802.1x authentication for this network check box.
6. In the
EAP type drop-down list, select Protected EAP (PEAP).
7. Select the
Authenticate as computer when computer information is available check box.
8. Click
Properties.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 440
The
Protected EAP Properties dialog box appears.
Using the EAP Authenticator
9. Make sure that the
Validate server certificate check box is selected.
10. In the
Select Authentication Method drop-down list, select Secured password
(EAP-MSCHAP v2).
11. If the user credentials for connecting to the Safe@Office appliance differ from the user credentials for connecting to Windows, do the following: a. Click
Configure.
The
EAP MSCHAPv2 Properties dialog box appears. b. Clear the check box. c. Click
OK.
12. Click
OK in all open windows.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 441
Using the EAP Authenticator
Installing the Safe@Office Appliance's CA Certificate on
Clients
To install the Safe@Office appliance's CA certificate on a Microsoft Windows client
1. On the client, right-click on the Safe@Office appliance's CA certificate you exported, and click
Install PFX in the pop-up menu that appears.
For information on exporting the CA certificate, see Exporting the Safe@Office
Appliance CA Certificate on page 669.
The
Certificate Import Wizard opens displaying the Welcome to Certificate Import Wizard screen.
2. Click
Next.
442 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
File to Import dialog box appears.
Using the EAP Authenticator
3. Browse to the Safe@Office appliance's CA certificate (*.p12 file).
4. Click
Next.
The
Password dialog box appears.
Do not type a password.
5. Click
Next.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 443
Using the EAP Authenticator
The
Certificate Store dialog box appears.
6. Click
Automatically select the certificate store based on the type of certificate.
7. Click
Next.
The
Completing the Certificate Import Wizard screen appears.
8. Click
Finish.
444 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using the EAP Authenticator
If the Safe@Office appliance certificate was self-signed, a warning message appears.
Do the following: a. Click
Yes.
A success message appears. b. Click
OK.
9. To check that the certificate was successfully installed as a trusted root CA, do the following: a. On the client, open Internet Explorer. b. In the
Tools menu, click Internet Options.
The
Internet Options dialog box appears displaying the General tab. c. Click the
Content tab.
The
Content tab appears.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 445
Using the EAP Authenticator d. Click
Certificates.
The
Certificates dialog box appears. e. Click the
Trusted Root Certification Authorities tab.
The
Trusted Root Certification Authorities tab appears. f. In the list, locate the Safe@Office appliance's CA certificate.
The certificate's name is in the format CA-<Identifier>, where
<Identifier> is the Safe@Office appliance's MAC address or gateway name. g. To view further information about the certificate, double-click on it.
446 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using the EAP Authenticator
The
Certificate dialog box appears with additional information.
Connecting Wireless Clients to the Safe@Office
Appliance
To connect a Microsoft Windows wireless client to the Safe@Office appliance with
WPA Enterprise authentication
1. In the START menu, click
Control Panel.
2. Click
Network Connections.
A list of wireless networks appears.
3. Select the Safe@Office appliance wireless network.
4. Click
Connect.
A popup message appears asking you to supply credentials.
5. Click on the popup message.
Chapter 13: Setting Your Security Policy 447
Using the EAP Authenticator
The
Enter Credentials dialog box appears.
6. Type the Network Access user's user name and password in the fields provided.
7. Click
OK.
The wireless client attempts to connect to the network.
Upon successful connection, the client indicates that it is connected to the network.
448 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Overview
Chapter 14
Using SmartDefense
This chapter explains how to use Check Point SmartDefense Services.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Configuring SmartDefense ....................................................................... 450
Resetting SmartDefense to its Defaults .................................................... 503
Overview
The Safe@Office appliance includes Check Point SmartDefense Services, based on Check
Point Application Intelligence. SmartDefense provides a combination of attack safeguards and attack-blocking tools that protect your network in the following ways:
• Validating compliance to standards
• Validating expected usage of protocols (Protocol Anomaly Detection)
• Limiting application ability to carry malicious data
• Controlling application-layer operations
In addition, SmartDefense aids proper usage of Internet resources, such as FTP, instant messaging, Peer-to-Peer (P2P) file sharing, file-sharing operations, and File Transfer
Protocol (FTP) uploading, among others.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 449
Configuring SmartDefense
Configuring SmartDefense
You can configure SmartDefense using the following tools:
• SmartDefense Wizard. Resets all SmartDefense settings to their defaults, and then creates a SmartDefense security policy according to your network and security
preferences. See Using the SmartDefense Wizard on page 450.
• SmartDefense Tree. Enables you to fine tune individual settings in the
SmartDefense policy. You can use the SmartDefense tree instead of, or in
addition to, the wizard. See Using the SmartDefense Tree on page 456.
Using the SmartDefense Wizard
The SmartDefense Wizard allows you to configure your SmartDefense security policy quickly and easily through its user-friendly interface.
Note: The SmartDefense wizard clears any existing SmartDefense settings.
After using the wizard, you can fine tune the policy settings using the SmartDefense tree.
See Using the SmartDefense Tree on page 456.
To configure the SmartDefense policy using the wizard
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the SmartDefense tab.
450 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
SmartDefense page appears.
Configuring SmartDefense
2. Click
SmartDefense Wizard.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 451
Configuring SmartDefense
The
SmartDefense Wizard opens, with the Step 1: SmartDefense Level dialog box displayed.
3. Drag the lever to the desired level of SmartDefense enforcement.
For information on the levels, see the following table.
4. Click
Next.
The
Step 2: Application Intelligence Server Types dialog box appears.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 452
Configuring SmartDefense
5. Select the check boxes next to the types of public servers that are running on your network.
6. Click
Next.
The
Step 3: Application Blocking dialog box appears.
7. Select the check boxes next to the types of applications you want to block from running on your network.
8. Click
Next.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 453
Configuring SmartDefense
The
Step 4: Confirmation dialog box appears.
9. Click
Finish.
Existing SmartDefense settings are cleared, and the security policy is applied.
454 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 79: SmartDefense Security Levels
This level… Does this…
Minimal
Configuring SmartDefense
Disables all SmartDefense protections, except those that cannot be disabled.
Normal
High
Extra Strict
Enables the following:
• Teardrop
• Ping of Death
• LAND
• Packet Sanity
• Max Ping Size (set to 1500)
• Welchia
• Cisco IOS
• Null Payload
• IGMP
• Small PMTU (Log Only)
This level blocks the most common attacks.
Enables the same protections as
Normal level, as well as the following:
• Host Port Scan
• Sweep Scan
• HTTP Header Rejection
• Strict TCP (Log Only)
Enables the same protections as
High level, as well as the following:
• Strict TCP (Log + Block)
• Small PMTU (Log + Block)
• Max Ping Size (set to 512)
• Network Quota
455 Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense
Configuring SmartDefense
Using the SmartDefense Tree
For convenience, SmartDefense is organized as a tree, in which each branch represents a category of settings.
When a category is expanded, the settings it contains appear as nodes. For information on
each category and the nodes it contains, see SmartDefense Categories on page 458.
Each node represents an attack type, a sanity check, or a protocol or service that is vulnerable to attacks. To control how SmartDefense handles a specific attack, you must configure the relevant node's settings.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 456
Configuring SmartDefense
To configure a SmartDefense node
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the SmartDefense tab.
The
SmartDefense page appears.
The left pane displays a tree containing SmartDefense categories.
• To expand a category, click the icon next to it.
• To collapse a category, click the icon next to it.
2. Expand the relevant category, and click on the desired node.
The right pane displays a description of the node, followed by fields.
3. To modify the node's current settings, do the following: a) Complete the fields using the relevant information in SmartDefense
b) Click
Apply.
4. To reset the node to its default values:
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 457
SmartDefense Categories a) Click
Default.
A confirmation message appears. b) Click
OK.
The fields are reset to their default values, and your changes are saved.
SmartDefense Categories
SmartDefense includes the following categories:
• Denial of Service on page 458
• Instant Messaging Traffic on page 500
• Microsoft Networks on page 492
Denial of Service
Denial of Service (DoS) attacks are aimed at overwhelming the target with spurious data, to the point where it is no longer able to respond to legitimate service requests.
This category includes the following attacks:
• Non-TCP Flooding on page 462
458 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
SmartDefense Categories
Teardrop
In a Teardrop attack, the attacker sends two IP fragments, the latter entirely contained within the former. This causes some computers to allocate too much memory and crash.
You can configure how Teardrop attacks should be handled.
Track
Table 80: Teardrop Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when a Teardrop attack occurs, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log Teardrop attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the attack.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 459
SmartDefense Categories
Ping of Death
In a Ping of Death attack, the attacker sends a fragmented PING request that exceeds the maximum IP packet size (64KB). Some operating systems are unable to handle such requests and crash.
You can configure how Ping of Death attacks should be handled.
Track
Table 81: Ping of Death Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when a Ping of Death attack occurs, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log Ping of Death attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the attack.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 460
SmartDefense Categories
LAND
In a LAND attack, the attacker sends a SYN packet, in which the source address and port are the same as the destination (the victim computer). The victim computer then tries to reply to itself and either reboots or crashes.
You can configure how LAND attacks should be handled.
Track
Table 82: LAND Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when a LAND attack occurs, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log LAND attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the attack.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 461
SmartDefense Categories
Non-TCP Flooding
Advanced firewalls maintain state information about connections in a State table. In Non-
TCP Flooding attacks, the attacker sends high volumes of non-TCP traffic. Since such traffic is connectionless, the related state information cannot be cleared or reset, and the firewall State table is quickly filled up. This prevents the firewall from accepting new connections and results in a Denial of Service (DoS).
You can protect against Non-TCP Flooding attacks by limiting the percentage of state table capacity used for non-TCP connections.
Track
Table 83: Non-TCP Flooding Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when the percentage of state table capacity used for non-TCP connections reaches the
Max. percent non TCP traffic threshold.
Select one of the following:
• Block. Block any additional non-TCP connections.
• None. No action. This is the default.
Specify whether to log non-TCP connections that exceed the
Max. Percent
Non-TCP Traffic threshold, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the connections.
• None. Do not log the connections. This is the default.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 462
SmartDefense Categories
In this field… Do this…
Max. Percent
Non-TCP Traffic
Type the maximum percentage of state table capacity allowed for non-TCP connections.
The default value is 10%.
DDoS Attack
In a distributed denial-of-service attack (DDoS attack), the attacker directs multiple hosts in a coordinated attack on a victim computer or network. The attacking hosts send large amounts of spurious data to the victim, so that the victim is no longer able to respond to legitimate service requests.
You can configure how DDoS attacks should be handled.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 463
SmartDefense Categories
Table 84: Distributed Denial of Service Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action
Track
Specify what action to take when a DDoS attack occurs, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log DDoS attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the attack.
IP and ICMP
This category allows you to enable various IP and ICMP protocol tests, and to configure various protections against IP and ICMP-related attacks. It includes the following:
• Checksum Verification on page 475
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 464
SmartDefense Categories
Packet Sanity
Packet Sanity performs several Layer 3 and Layer 4 sanity checks. These include verifying packet size, UDP and TCP header lengths, dropping IP options, and verifying the TCP flags.
You can configure whether logs should be issued for offending packets.
Track
Table 85: Packet Sanity Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when a packet fails a sanity test, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the packet. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to issue logs for packets that fail the packet sanity tests, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Issue logs. This is the default.
• None. Do not issue logs.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 465
SmartDefense Categories
In this field… Do this…
Disable relaxed
UDP length verification
The UDP length verification sanity check measures the UDP header length and compares it to the UDP header length specified in the UDP header. If the two values differ, the packet may be corrupted.
However, since different applications may measure UDP header length differently, the Safe@Office appliance relaxes the UDP length verification sanity check by default, performing the check but not dropping offending packets. This is called relaxed UDP length verification.
Specify whether the Safe@Office appliance should relax the UDP length verification sanity check or not, by selecting one of the following:
• True. Disable relaxed UDP length verification. The Safe@Office appliance will drop packets that fail the UDP length verification check.
• False. Do not disable relaxed UDP length verification. The
Safe@Office appliance will not drop packets that fail the UDP length verification check. This is the default.
466 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
SmartDefense Categories
Max Ping Size
PING (ICMP echo request) is a program that uses ICMP protocol to check whether a remote machine is up. A request is sent by the client, and the server responds with a reply echoing the client's data.
An attacker can echo the client with a large amount of data, causing a buffer overflow.
You can protect against such attacks by limiting the allowed size for ICMP echo requests.
Table 86: Max Ping Size Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action
Track
Max Ping Size
Specify what action to take when an ICMP echo response exceeds the
Max
Ping Size threshold, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the request. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log ICMP echo responses that exceed the
Max Ping Size threshold, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the responses. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the responses.
Specify the maximum data size for ICMP echo response.
The default value is 548.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 467
SmartDefense Categories
IP Fragments
When an IP packet is too big to be transported by a network link, it is split into several smaller IP packets and transmitted in fragments. To conceal a known attack or exploit, an attacker might imitate this common behavior and break the data section of a single packet into several fragmented packets. Without reassembling the fragments, it is not always possible to detect such an attack. Therefore, the Safe@Office appliance always reassembles all the fragments of a given IP packet, before inspecting it to make sure there are no attacks or exploits in the packet.
You can configure how fragmented packets should be handled.
468 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 87: IP Fragments Fields
In this field… Do this…
SmartDefense Categories
Forbid IP Fragments Specify whether all fragmented packets should be dropped, by selecting one of the following:
• True. Drop all fragmented packets.
• False. No action. This is the default.
Under normal circumstances, it is recommended to leave this field set to
False. Setting this field to True may disrupt Internet connectivity, because it does not allow any fragmented packets.
Max Number of
Incomplete Packets
Type the maximum number of fragmented packets allowed. Packets exceeding this threshold will be dropped.
The default value is 300.
Timeout for
Discarding
Incomplete Packets
When the Safe@Office appliance receives packet fragments, it waits for additional fragments to arrive, so that it can reassemble the packet.
Type the number of seconds to wait before discarding incomplete packets.
The default value is 10.
Track Specify whether to log fragmented packets, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log all fragmented packets.
• None. Do not log the fragmented packets. This is the default.
469 Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense
SmartDefense Categories
Network Quota
An attacker may try to overload a server in your network by establishing a very large number of connections per second. To protect against Denial Of Service (DoS) attacks,
Network Quota enforces a limit upon the number of connections per second that are allowed from the same source IP address.
You can configure how connections that exceed that limit should be handled.
Track
Table 88: Network Quota Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when the number of network connections from the same source reaches the
Max. Connections/Second per Source IP threshold. Select one of the following:
• Block. Block all new connections from the source. Existing connections will not be blocked. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log connections from a specific source that exceed the
Max. Connections/Second per Source IP threshold, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the connections. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the connections.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 470
SmartDefense Categories
In this field… Do this…
Max.
Connections/Second from Same Source IP
Type the maximum number of network connections allowed per second from the same source IP address.
The default value is 100.
Set a lower threshold for stronger protection against DoS attacks.
Note: Setting this value too low can lead to false alarms.
Welchia
The Welchia worm uses the MS DCOM vulnerability or a WebDAV vulnerability. After infecting a computer, the worm begins searching for other live computers to infect. It does so by sending a specific ping packet to a target and waiting for the reply that signals that the target is alive. This flood of pings may disrupt network connectivity.
You can configure how the Welchia worm should be handled.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 471
SmartDefense Categories
Table 89: Welchia Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action
Track
Specify what action to take when the Welchia worm is detected, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log Welchia worm attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the attack.
Cisco IOS DOS
Cisco routers are configured to process and accept Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4) packets by default. When a Cisco IOS device is sent a specially crafted sequence of IPv4 packets (with protocol type 53 - SWIPE, 55 - IP Mobility, 77 - Sun ND, or 103 - Protocol
Independent Multicast - PIM), the router will stop processing inbound traffic on that interface.
You can configure how Cisco IOS DOS attacks should be handled.
472
Note: You cannot enable CISCO IOS DOS PIM protection in SmartDefense, when the
PIM-SM multicast routing protocol is enabled. For information on disabling the PIM-SM protocol, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 90: Cisco IOS DOS
In this field… Do this…
SmartDefense Categories
Action
Track
Specify what action to take when a Cisco IOS DOS attack occurs, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log Cisco IOS DOS attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the attack.
Number of Hops to Protect Type the number of hops from the enforcement module that Cisco routers should be protected.
The default value is 10.
Action Protection for
SWIPE - Protocol 53 /
IP Mobility - Protocol 55 /
SUN-ND - Protocol 77 /
PIM - Protocol 103
Specify what action to take when an IPv4 packet of the specific protocol type is received, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Drop the packet. This is the default.
• None. No action.
473 Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense
SmartDefense Categories
Null Payload
Some worms, such as Sasser, use ICMP echo request packets with null payload to detect potentially vulnerable hosts.
You can configure how null payload ping packets should be handled.
Track
Table 91: Null Payload Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when null payload ping packets are detected, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the packets. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log null payload ping packets, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the packets. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the packets.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 474
SmartDefense Categories
Checksum Verification
SmartDefense identifies any IP, TCP, or UDP packets with incorrect checksums. You can configure how these packets should be handled.
Track
Table 92: Checksum Verification Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when packets with incorrect checksums are detected, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the packets. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log packets with incorrect checksums, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the packets.
• None. Do not log the packets. This is the default.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 475
SmartDefense Categories
TCP
This category allows you to configure various protections related to the TCP protocol. It includes the following:
• Sequence Verifier on page 481
Strict TCP
Out-of-state TCP packets are SYN-ACK or data packets that arrive out of order, before the
TCP SYN packet.
Note: In normal conditions, out-of-state TCP packets can occur after the Safe@Office restarts, since connections which were established prior to the reboot are unknown.
This is normal and does not indicate an attack.
Note: Certain SmartDefense protections implicitly apply the Strict TCP protection to relevant connections. In such cases, "TCP Out-of-State" log messages may appear in the Security Log, even though the Strict TCP protection is disabled.
You can configure how out-of-state TCP packets should be handled.
476 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 93: Strict TCP
In this field… Do this…
Action
Track
SmartDefense Categories
Specify what action to take when an out-of-state TCP packet arrives, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the packets.
• None. No action. This is the default.
Specify whether to log null payload ping packets, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the packets. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the packets.
Small PMTU
Small PMTU (Packet MTU) is a bandwidth attack in which the client fools the server into sending large amounts of data using small packets. Each packet has a large overhead that creates a "bottleneck" on the server.
You can protect against this attack by specifying a minimum packet size for data sent over the Internet.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 477
SmartDefense Categories
Table 94: Small PMTU Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action
Track
Minimal MTU
Size
Specify what action to take when a packet is smaller than the
Minimal MTU
Size threshold, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the packet.
• None. No action. This is the default.
Specify whether to issue logs for packets are smaller than the
Minimal MTU
Size threshold, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Issue logs. This is the default.
• None. Do not issue logs.
Type the minimum value allowed for the MTU field in IP packets sent by a client.
An overly small value will not prevent an attack, while an overly large value might degrade performance and cause legitimate requests to be dropped.
The default value is 300.
478 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
SmartDefense Categories
SynDefender
In a SYN attack, the attacker sends many SYN packets without finishing the three-way handshake. This causes the attacked host to be unable to accept new connections.
You can protect against this attack by specifying a maximum amount of time for completing handshakes.
Track
Table 95: SynDefender Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when a SYN attack occurs, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the packet. This is the default.
• None. No action.
A SYN attack is when more than 5 incomplete TCP handshakes are detected within 10 seconds. A handshake is considered incomplete when it exceeds the
Maximum time for completing the handshake threshold.
Specify whether to issue logs for the events specified by the
Log Mode parameter, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Issue logs. This is the default.
• None. Do not issue logs.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 479
SmartDefense Categories
In this field… Do this…
Log mode
Maximum Time for Completing the Handshake
Specify upon which events logs should be issued, by selecting one of the following:
• None. Do not issue logs.
• Log per attack. Issue logs for each SYN attack. This is the default.
• Log individual unfinished handshakes. Issue logs for each incomplete handshake.
This field is only relevant if the
Track field is set to Log.
Type the maximum amount of time in seconds after which a TCP handshake is considered incomplete.
The default value is 10 seconds.
Protect external interfaces only
Specify whether SynDefender should be enabled for external (WAN) interfaces only, by selecting one of the following:
• Disabled. Enable SynDefender for all the firewall interfaces. This is the default.
• Enabled. Enable SynDefender for external interfaces only.
480 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
SmartDefense Categories
Sequence Verifier
The Safe@Office appliance examines each TCP packet's sequence number and checks whether it matches a TCP connection state. You can configure how the appliance handles packets that match a TCP connection in terms of the TCP session but have incorrect sequence numbers.
Track
Table 96: Strict TCP
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when TCP packets with incorrect sequence numbers arrive, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the packets.
• None. No action. This is the default.
Specify whether to log TCP packets with incorrect sequence numbers, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the packets. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the packets.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 481
SmartDefense Categories
Flags
The URG flag is used to indicate that there is urgent data in the TCP stream, and that the data should be delivered with high priority. Since handling of the URG flag is inconsistent between different operating systems, an attacker can use the URG flag to conceal certain attacks.
You can configure how the URG flag should be handled.
Table 97: Flags Fields
In this field… Do this…
URG Flag Specify whether to clear or allow the URG flag, by selecting one of the following:
• Clear. Clear the URG flag on all incoming packets. This is the default.
• Allow. Allow the URG flag.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 482
SmartDefense Categories
Port Scan
An attacker can perform a port scan to determine whether ports are open and vulnerable to an attack. This is most commonly done by attempting to access a port and waiting for a response. The response indicates whether or not the port is open.
This category includes the following types of port scans:
• Host Port Scan. The attacker scans a specific host's ports to determine which of the ports are open.
• Sweep Scan. The attacker scans various hosts to determine where a specific port is open.
You can configure how the Safe@Office appliance should react when a port scan is detected.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 483
SmartDefense Categories
Table 98: Port Scan Fields
In this field… Do this…
Number of ports accessed
SmartDefense detects ports scans by measuring the number of ports accessed over a period of time. The number of ports accessed must exceed the
Number of ports accessed value, within the number of seconds specified by the
In a period of [seconds] value, in order for SmartDefense to consider the activity a scan.
Type the minimum number of ports that must be accessed within the
In a
period of [seconds] period, in order for SmartDefense to detect the activity as a port scan.
For example, if this value is 30, and 40 ports are accessed within a specified period of time, SmartDefense will detect the activity as a port scan.
For Host Port Scan, the default value is 30. For Sweep Scan, the default value is 50.
In a period of
[seconds]
SmartDefense detects ports scans by measuring the number of ports accessed over a period of time. The number of ports accessed must exceed the
Number of ports accessed value, within the number of seconds specified by the
In a period of [seconds] value, in order for SmartDefense to consider the activity a scan.
Type the maximum number of seconds that can elapse, during which the
Number of ports accessed threshold is exceeded, in order for SmartDefense to detect the activity as a port scan.
For example, if this value is 20, and the
Number of ports accessed threshold is exceeded for 15 seconds, SmartDefense will detect the activity as a port scan. If the threshold is exceeded for 30 seconds, SmartDefense will not detect the activity as a port scan.
The default value is 20 seconds.
484 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
SmartDefense Categories
In this field… Do this…
Track Specify whether to issue logs for scans, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Issue logs. This is the default.
• None. Do not issue logs. This is the default.
Detect scans from Internet only
Specify whether to detect only scans originating from the Internet, by selecting one of the following:
• False. Do not detect only scans from the Internet. This is the default.
• True. Detect only scans from the Internet.
FTP
This category allows you to configure various protections related to the FTP protocol. It includes the following:
• Block Known Ports on page 487
• Block Port Overflow on page 488
• Blocked FTP Commands on page 489
485 Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense
SmartDefense Categories
FTP Bounce
When connecting to an FTP server, the client sends a PORT command specifying the IP address and port to which the FTP server should connect and send data. An FTP Bounce attack is when an attacker sends a PORT command specifying the IP address of a third party instead of the attacker's own IP address. The FTP server then sends data to the victim machine.
You can configure how FTP bounce attacks should be handled.
Track
Table 99: FTP Bounce Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when an FTP Bounce attack occurs, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log FTP Bounce attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the attack.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 486
SmartDefense Categories
Block Known Ports
You can choose to block the FTP server from connecting to well-known ports.
Note: Known ports are published ports associated with services (for example, SMTP is port 25).
This provides a second layer of protection against FTP bounce attacks, by preventing such attacks from reaching well-known ports.
Table 100: Block Known Ports Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take when the FTP server attempts to connect to a well-known port, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the connection.
• None. No action. This is the default.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 487
SmartDefense Categories
Block Port Overflow
FTP clients send PORT commands when connecting to the FTP sever. A PORT command consists of a series of numbers between 0 and 255, separated by commas.
To enforce compliance to the FTP standard and prevent potential attacks against the FTP server, you can block PORT commands that contain a number greater than 255.
Table 101: Block Port Overflow
In this field… Do this…
Action Specify what action to take for PORT commands containing a number greater than 255, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the PORT command. This is the default.
• None. No action.
488 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
SmartDefense Categories
Blocked FTP Commands
Some seldom-used FTP commands may compromise FTP server security and integrity.
You can specify which FTP commands should be allowed to pass through the security server, and which should be blocked.
To enable FTP command blocking
• In the Action drop-down list, select Block.
The FTP commands listed in the
Blocked Commands box will be blocked.
FTP command blocking is enabled by default.
To disable FTP command blocking
• In the Action drop-down list, select None.
All FTP commands are allowed, including those in the
Blocked Commands box.
To block a specific FTP command
1. In the
Allowed Commands box, select the desired FTP command.
2. Click
Block.
The FTP command appears in the
Blocked Commands box.
3. Click
Apply.
When FTP command blocking is enabled, the FTP command will be blocked.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 489
490
SmartDefense Categories
To allow a specific FTP command
1. In the
Blocked Commands box, select the desired FTP command.
2. Click
Accept.
The FTP command appears in the
Allowed Commands box.
3. Click
Apply.
The FTP command will be allowed, regardless of whether FTP command blocking is enabled or disabled.
HTTP
This category allows you to configure various protections related to the HTTP protocol. It includes the following:
• Header Rejection on page 490
Header Rejection
Some exploits are carried in standard HTTP headers with custom values (for example, in the Host header), or in custom HTTP headers. You can protect against such exploits by rejecting HTTP requests that contain specific headers and header values.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 102: Header Rejection Fields
In this field… Do this…
SmartDefense Categories
Action
Track
HTTP header values list
Specify what action to take when an HTTP header-based exploit is detected, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack.
• None. No action. This is the default.
Specify whether to log HTTP header-based exploits, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack.
• None. Do not log the attack. This is the default.
Select the HTTP header values to detect.
Worm Catcher
A worm is a self-replicating malware (malicious software) that propagates by actively sending itself to new machines. Some worms propagate by using security vulnerabilities in the HTTP protocol.
You can specify how HTTP-based worm attacks should be handled.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 491
SmartDefense Categories
Table 103: Worm Catcher Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action
Track
HTTP-based worm patterns list
Specify what action to take when an HTTP-based worm attack is detected, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack.
• None. No action. This is the default.
Specify whether to log HTTP-based worm attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack.
• None. Do not log the attack. This is the default.
Select the worm patterns to detect.
Microsoft Networks
This category includes
File and Print Sharing.
Microsoft operating systems and Samba clients rely on Common Internet File System
(CIFS), a protocol for sharing files and printers. However, this protocol is also widely used by worms as a means of propagation.
You can configure how CIFS worms should be handled.
492 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 104: File Print and Sharing Fields
In this field… Do this…
SmartDefense Categories
Action
Track
CIFS worm patterns list
Specify what action to take when a CIFS worm attack is detected, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack.
• None. No action. This is the default.
Specify whether to log CIFS worm attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack.
• None. Do not log the attack. This is the default.
Select the worm patterns to detect.
Patterns are matched against file names (including file paths but excluding the disk share name) that the client is trying to read or write from the server.
493 Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense
SmartDefense Categories
IGMP
This category includes the IGMP protocol.
IGMP is used by hosts and routers to dynamically register and discover multicast group membership. Attacks on the IGMP protocol usually target a vulnerability in the multicast routing software/hardware used, by sending specially crafted IGMP packets.
You can configure how IGMP attacks should be handled.
Table 105: IGMP Fields
In this field… Do this…
Action
Track
Enforce IGMP to multicast addresses
Specify what action to take when an IGMP attack occurs, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the attack. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Specify whether to log IGMP attacks, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the attack. This is the default.
• None. Do not log the attack.
According to the IGMP specification, IGMP packets must be sent to multicast addresses. Sending IGMP packets to a unicast or broadcast address might constitute and attack; therefore the Safe@Office appliance blocks such packets.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 494
SmartDefense Categories
In this field… Do this…
Specify whether to allow or block IGMP packets that are sent to nonmulticast addresses, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block IGMP packets that are sent to non-multicast addresses. This is the default.
• None. No action.
VoIP
Voice over IP (VoIP) traffic is subject to various threats, such as:
• Call redirections, in which calls intended for one recipient are redirected to another
• Stealing calls, where the caller pretends to be someone else
• System hacking, using ports that were opened for VoIP connections
This category allows you to configure various protections related to VoIP protocols. It includes the following:
495 Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense
SmartDefense Categories
SIP
The SmartDefense SIP Application Level Gateway (ALG) processes the SIP protocol, allows firewall and NAT traversal, and enables Traffic Shaper to operate on SIP connections.
By default, the SIP ALG checks SIP sessions for RFC compliance. If desired, you can allow non-RFC-compliant SIP connections, so that VoIP devices that initiate non-standard
SIP calls can communicate through the firewall. You can also disable the SIP ALG altogether, if it is not needed by your SIP clients, or if it interferes with their operation.
Table 106: SIP Fields
In this field… Do this…
SIP Protocol
Handler
RFC Noncompliant
Messages
Specify whether to enable SIP support, by selecting one of the following:
• Enabled. Enable SIP support. This is the default.
• Disabled. Disable SIP support.
Specify what action to take when non-RFC-compliant SIP packets arrive, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the packets. This is the default.
• None. No action.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 496
SmartDefense Categories
H.323
H.323 telephony is used by various devices and applications, such as Microsoft
Netmeeting. SmartDefense allows you to choose whether to disable or enable the H.323
Application Level Gateway (ALG), which allows firewall and NAT traversal of H.323 calls.
Table 107: H.323 Fields
In this field… Do this…
Peer-to-peer
H.323 Support
Specify whether to enable H.323 support, by selecting one of the following:
• Enabled. Enable H.323 support.
• Disabled. Disabled H.323 support. This is the default.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 497
498
SmartDefense Categories
Peer-to-Peer
SmartDefense can block peer-to-peer file-sharing traffic, by identifying the proprietary protocols and preventing the initial connection to the peer-to-peer networks. This prevents not only downloads, but also search operations.
This category includes the following nodes:
• BitTorrent
• eMule
• Gnutella
• KaZaA
• Winny
Note: SmartDefense can detect peer-to-peer traffic regardless of the TCP port being used to initiate the session.
In each node, you can configure how peer-to-peer connections of the selected type should be handled, using the following table.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 108: Peer to Peer Fields
In this field… Do this…
SmartDefense Categories
Action
Track
Block proprietary protocols on all ports
Specify what action to take when a connection is attempted, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the connection.
• None. No action. This is the default.
Specify whether to log peer-to-peer connections, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the connection.
• None. Do not log the connection. This is the default.
Specify whether proprietary protocols should be blocked on all ports, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the proprietary protocol on all ports. This in effect prevents all communication using this peer-to-peer application. This is the default.
• None. Do not block the proprietary protocol on all ports.
Block masquerading over HTTP protocol
Specify whether to block using the peer-to-peer application over HTTP, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block using the application over HTTP. This is the default.
• None. Do not block using the application over HTTP.
This field is not relevant for eMule and Winny.
499 Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense
500
SmartDefense Categories
Instant Messaging Traffic
SmartDefense can block instant messaging applications that use VoIP protocols, by identifying the messaging application's fingerprints and HTTP headers.
This category includes the following nodes:
• ICQ
• MSN Messenger
• Skype
• Yahoo
Note: SmartDefense can detect instant messaging traffic regardless of the TCP port being used to initiate the session.
Note: Skype versions up to 2.0.0.103 are supported.
In each node, you can configure how instant messaging connections of the selected type should be handled, using the following table.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 109: Instant Messengers Fields
In this field… Do this…
SmartDefense Categories
Action
Track
Block proprietary protocol /
Block proprietary protocols on all ports
Block masquerading over HTTP protocol
Specify what action to take when a connection is attempted, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the connection.
• None. No action. This is the default.
Specify whether to log instant messenger connections, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. Log the connection.
• None. Do not log the connection. This is the default.
Specify whether proprietary protocols should be blocked on all ports, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block the proprietary protocol on all ports. This in effect prevents all communication using this instant messenger application. This is the default.
• None. Do not block the proprietary protocol on all ports.
Specify whether to block using the instant messenger application over
HTTP, by selecting one of the following:
• Block. Block using the application over HTTP. This is the default.
• None. Do not block using the application over HTTP.
501 Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense
SmartDefense Categories
Games
This category includes
XBox LIVE.
XBox 360 requires gateways hosting XBox LIVE games to use the "Open NAT" method rather than the normal "Strict NAT" method. Therefore, if you want to host online games on an XBox 360 console, you must first configure your Safe@Office appliance to use the
"Open NAT" method.
Table 110: XBox LIVE Fields
In this field… Do this…
Xbox Live OpenNAT Specify whether the Safe@Office appliance should use the "Open NAT" method, by selecting one of the following:
• Enabled. Use the "Open NAT" method. You will be able to host
XBox LIVE games and join existing ones.
• Disabled. Do not use the "Open NAT" method. You will not be able to host XBox LIVE games, but you will still be able to join existing ones. This is the default.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 502
Resetting SmartDefense to its Defaults
Resetting SmartDefense to its Defaults
If desired, you can reset the SmartDefense security policy to its default settings. For information on the default value of each SmartDefense setting, see SmartDefense
For information on resetting individual nodes in the SmartDefense tree to their default
settings, see Using the SmartDefense Tree on page 456.
To reset SmartDefense to its defaults
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the SmartDefense tab.
The
SmartDefense page appears.
2. Click
Reset to Defaults.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click
OK.
The SmartDefense policy is reset to its default settings.
Chapter 14: Using SmartDefense 503
Overview
Chapter 15
Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering
This chapter explains how to use antivirus and antispam filtering.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Using VStream Antispam ......................................................................... 525
Using Centralized Email Filtering ............................................................ 558
Overview
The Safe@Office appliance enables you to perform both antivirus and antispam filtering, to ensure your network remains secure.
Antivirus Filtering Solutions
You can scan connections for viruses, by using VStream Antivirus and/or the Email
Antivirus subscription service (part of the centralized Email Filtering service). The following table describes the main differences between VStream Antivirus and the Email
Antivirus service:
Table 111: Comparison of Antivirus Filtering Methods
VStream Antivirus
Supported Protocols VStream Antivirus supports multiple protocols, including incoming SMTP and outgoing
POP3 connections.
Email Antivirus
Email Antivirus is specific to email, scanning incoming POP3 and outgoing
SMTP connections only.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 505
Overview
VStream Antivirus Email Antivirus
Point of Enforcement VStream Antivirus scans for viruses in the Safe@Office
Email Antivirus is centralized, redirecting traffic through the Service Center for gateway itself. scanning.
You can use either antivirus solution, or both in conjunction.
Antispam Filtering Solutions
You can scan email messages for spam, by using VStream Antispam and/or the Email
Antispam subscription service (part of the centralized Email Filtering service). The following table describes the main differences between VStream Antispam and the Email
Antispam service:
Table 112: Comparison of Antispam Filtering Methods
VStream Antispam Email Antispam
Supported Protocols VStream Antispam supports both incoming and outgoing POP3 and
Email Antispam scans incoming POP3 and outgoing SMTP connections only.
SMTP, as well as POP3 and
SMTP connections between internal networks.
Point of Enforcement VStream Antispam scans for spam in the Safe@Office
Email Antispam is centralized, redirecting traffic through the Service Center for gateway itself. scanning.
You can use either antispam solution, or both in conjunction.
506 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using VStream Antivirus
Using VStream Antivirus
The Safe@Office appliance includes VStream Antivirus, an embedded stream-based antivirus engine based on Check Point Stateful Inspection and Application Intelligence technologies, that performs virus scanning at the kernel level.
VStream Antivirus scans files for malicious content on the fly, without downloading the files into intermediate storage. This means minimal added latency and support for unlimited file sizes; and since VStream Antivirus stores only minimal state information per connection, it can scan thousands of connections concurrently. In order to scan archive files on the fly, VStream Antivirus performs real-time decompression and scanning of ZIP,
TAR, and GZ archive files, with support for nested archive files.
If you are subscribed to the VStream Antivirus subscription service, VStream Antivirus virus signatures are automatically updated, so that security is always up-to-date, and your network is always protected.
VStream Antivirus Actions
When VStream Antivirus detects malicious content, the action it takes depends on the protocol in which the virus was found. See the following table. In each case, VStream
Antivirus blocks the file and writes a log to the Event Log.
Table 113: VStream Antivirus Actions
If a virus if found in this protocol...
HTTP
POP3
VStream Antivirus does this... The protocol is detected
• Terminates the connection
• Terminates the connection
• Deletes the virus-infected email from the server on this port...
All ports on which VStream
Antivirus is enabled by the policy, not only port 80
The standard TCP port 110.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 507
Using VStream Antivirus
If a virus if found in this protocol...
IMAP
SMTP
FTP
TCP and UDP
VStream Antivirus does this... The protocol is detected on this port...
• Terminates the connection
• Replaces the virusinfected email with a message notifying the user that a virus was found
• Rejects the virus-infected email with error code 554
• Sends a "Virus detected" message to the sender
• Terminates the data connection
• Sends a "Virus detected" message to the FTP client
• Terminates the connection
The standard TCP port 143
The standard TCP port 25
The standard TCP port 21
Generic TCP and UDP ports, other than those listed above
Note: In protocols that are not listed in this table, VStream Antivirus uses a "best effort" approach to detect viruses. In such cases, detection of viruses is not guaranteed and depends on the specific encoding used by the protocol.
Default Antivirus Policy
The VStream Antivirus default policy includes the following rules:
• All SMTP connections are scanned, regardless of the connection's direction.
• All POP3 connections are scanned, regardless of the connection's direction.
• All IMAP connections are scanned, regardless of the connection's direction.
You can easily override the default antivirus policy, by creating user-defined rules. For
further information, see Configuring the VStream Antivirus Policy on page 511.
508 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus
To enable/disable VStream Antivirus
1. Click
Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Antivirus tab.
The
VStream Antivirus page appears.
Using VStream Antivirus
2. Drag the
On/Off lever upwards or downwards.
VStream Antivirus is enabled/disabled for all internal network computers.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 509
Using VStream Antivirus
Viewing VStream Antivirus Signature Database
Information
VStream Antivirus maintains two databases: a daily database and a main database. The daily database is updated frequently with the newest virus signatures. Periodically, the contents of the daily database are moved to the main database, leaving the daily database empty. This system of incremental updates to the main database allows for quicker updates and saves on network bandwidth.
You can view information about the VStream Antivirus signature databases currently in use, in the
VStream Antivirus page.
Table 114: VStream Antivirus Page Fields
This field… Displays…
Main database The date and time at which the main database was last updated, followed by the version number.
Daily database
Next update
Status
The date and time at which the daily database was last updated, followed by the version number.
The next date and time at which the Safe@Office appliance will check for updates.
The current status of the database. This includes the following statuses:
• Database Not Installed
• OK
510 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring the VStream Antivirus Policy
Using VStream Antivirus
VStream Antivirus includes a flexible mechanism that allows the user to define exactly which traffic should be scanned, by specifying the protocol, ports, and source and destination IP addresses.
VStream Antivirus processes policy rules in the order they appear in the
Antivirus Policy table, so that rule 1 is applied before rule 2, and so on. This enables you to define exceptions to rules, by placing the exceptions higher up in the
Rules table.
For example, if you want to scan all outgoing SMTP traffic, except traffic from a specific
IP address, you can create a rule scanning all outgoing SMTP traffic and move the rule down in the
Antivirus Policy table. Then create a rule passing SMTP traffic from the desired IP address and move this rule to a higher location in the
Antivirus Policy table than the first rule. In the figure below, the general rule is rule number 2, and the exception is rule number 1.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 511
Using VStream Antivirus
The Safe@Office appliance will process rule 1 first, passing outgoing SMTP traffic from the specified IP address, and only then it will process rule 2, scanning all outgoing SMTP traffic.
The following rule types exist:
Table 115: VStream Antivirus Rule Types
Rule Description
Pass This rule type enables you to specify that VStream Antivirus should not scan traffic matching the rule.
Scan This rule type enables you to specify that VStream Antivirus should scan traffic matching the rule.
If a virus is found, it is blocked and logged.
Adding and Editing VStream Antivirus Rules
To add or edit a VStream Antivirus rule
1. Click
Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
512 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Antivirus Policy page appears.
Using VStream Antivirus
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a new rule, click Add Rule.
• To edit an existing rule, click
next to the desired rule.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 513
Using VStream Antivirus
The
VStream Policy Rule Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Rule Type dialog box displayed.
3. Select the type of rule you want to create.
4. Click
Next.
The
Step 2: Service dialog box appears.
The example below shows a Scan rule.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 514
Using VStream Antivirus
5. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
6. Click
Next.
The
Step 3: Destination & Source dialog box appears.
7. To configure advanced settings, click
Show Advanced Settings.
New fields appear.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 515
Using VStream Antivirus
8. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
9. Click
Next.
The
Step 4: Done dialog box appears.
10. If desired, type a description of the rule in the field provided.
11. Click
Finish.
The new rule appears in the
Antivirus Policy page.
Table 116: VStream Antivirus Rule Fields
In this field… Do this…
Any Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to any service.
Standard Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific standard service or network service object.
You must then select the desired service or network service object from the drop-down list.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 516
Using VStream Antivirus
In this field… Do this…
Custom Service Click this option to specify that the rule should apply to a specific nonstandard service.
The
Protocol and Port Range fields are enabled. You must fill them in.
Protocol Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, or ANY) for which the rule should apply.
Port Range To specify the port range to which the rule applies, type the start port number in the left text box, and the end port number in the right text box.
Note: If you do not enter a port range, the rule will apply to all ports. If you enter only one port number, the range will include only that port.
If the connection source is
Select the source of the connections you want to allow/block. This list includes network objects.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the field provided.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.
To specify any source, select
ANY.
And the destination is
Select the destination of the connections you want to allow or block. This list includes network objects.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the text box.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.
To specify the Safe@Office IP addresses, select
This Gateway.
To specify any destination except the Safe@Office Portal IP addresses, select
ANY.
517 Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering
Using VStream Antivirus
In this field… Do this…
Data Direction Select the direction of connections to which the rule should apply:
• Download and Upload data. The rule applies to downloaded and uploaded data. This is the default.
• Download data. The rule applies to downloaded data, that is, data flowing from the destination of the connection to the source of the connection.
• Upload data. The rule applies to uploaded data, that is, data flowing from the source of the connection to the destination of the connection.
If the current time is
Select this option to specify that the rule should be applied only during certain hours of the day.
You must then use the fields and drop-down lists provided, to specify the desired time range.
518 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antivirus Rules
Using VStream Antivirus
You can temporarily disable a VStream Antivirus rule.
To enable/disable a VStream Antivirus rule
1. Click
Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The
Antivirus Policy page appears.
2. Next to the desired rule, do one of the following:
• To enable the rule, click
.
The button changes to and the rule is enabled.
• To disable the rule, click
.
The button changes to and the rule is disabled.
Reordering VStream Antivirus Rules
To reorder VStream Antivirus rules
1. Click
Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The
Antivirus Policy page appears.
2. For each rule you want to move, click on the rule and drag it to the desired location in the table.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 519
Using VStream Antivirus
Viewing and Deleting VStream Antivirus Rules
To view or delete an existing VStream Antivirus rule
1. Click
Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The
Antivirus Policy page appears with a list of existing VStream Antivirus rules.
2. To resize a column, drag the relevant column divider right or left.
3. To delete a rule, do the following. a. In the desired rule's row, click .
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The rule is deleted.
Configuring VStream Antivirus Advanced Settings
To configure VStream Antivirus advanced settings
1. Click
Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Advanced tab.
520 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Advanced Antivirus Settings page appears.
Using VStream Antivirus
2. Complete the fields using the following table.
3. Click
Apply.
4. To restore the default VStream Antivirus settings, do the following: a) Click
Default.
A confirmation message appears. b) Click
OK.
The VStream Antivirus settings are reset to their defaults. For information on the default values, refer to the following table.
521 Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering
Using VStream Antivirus
Table 117: Advanced Antivirus Settings Fields
In this field…
File Types
Do this…
Block potentially unsafe file types in email messages
Select this option to block all emails containing potentially unsafe attachments.
Unsafe file types are:
• DOS/Windows executables, libraries and drivers
• Compiled HTML Help files
• VBScript encoded files
• Files with {CLSID} in their name
• The following file extensions: ade, adp, bas, bat, chm, cmd,com, cpl, crt, exe, hlp, hta, inf, ins, isp, js, jse, lnk, mdb, mde, msc, msi, msp, mst, pcd, pif, reg, scr, sct, shs,shb, url, vb, vbe, vbs, wsc, wsf, wsh.
To view a list of unsafe file types and their descriptions, click
Show next to this option.
Pass safe file types without scanning
Select this option to accept common file types that are known to be safe, without scanning them.
Safe files types are:
• GIF
• BMP
• JFIF standard
• EXIF standard
• PNG
• MPEG video stream
• MPEG sys stream
• Ogg Stream
• MP3 file with ID3 version 2
• MP3
• PostScript
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 522
In this field…
Using VStream Antivirus
Archive File Handling
Maximum Nesting Level
Maximum Compression
Ratio 1:x
Do this…
• WMA/WMV/ASF
• RealMedia file
• JPEG - only the header is scanned, and the rest of the file is skipped
To view a list of safe file types, click
Show next to this option.
Selecting this option reduces the load on the gateway by skipping safe file types. This option is selected by default.
Type the maximum number of nested content levels that VStream
Antivirus should scan.
Setting a higher number increases security. Setting a lower number prevents attackers from overloading the gateway by sending extremely nested archive files.
The default value is 5 levels.
Fill in the field to complete the maximum compression ratio of files that VStream Antivirus should scan.
For example, to specify a 1:80 maximum compression ratio, type
80.
Setting a higher number allows the scanning of highly compressed files, but creates a potential for highly compressible files to create a heavy load on the appliance. Setting a lower number prevents attackers from overloading the gateway by sending extremely compressible files.
The default value is 100.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 523
Using VStream Antivirus
In this field… Do this…
When archived file exceeds limit or extraction fails
Specify how VStream Antivirus should handle files that exceed the
Maximum nesting level or the Maximum compression ratio, and files for which scanning fails. Select one of the following:
• Pass file without scanning. Scan only the number of levels specified, and skip the scanning of more deeply nested archives. Furthermore, skip scanning highly compressible files, and skip scanning archives that cannot be extracted because they are corrupt. This is the default.
• Block file. Block the file.
When a passwordprotected file is found in archive
Corrupt Files
VStream Antivirus cannot extract and scan password-protected files inside archives. Specify how VStream Antivirus should handle such files, by selecting one of the following:
• Pass file without scanning. Accept the file without scanning it. This is the default.
• Block file. Block the file.
When a corrupt file is found or decoding fails
Specify how VStream Antivirus should handle corrupt files and protocol anomalies, by selecting one of the following:
• Ignore and continue scanning. Log the corrupt file or protocol anomaly, and scan the information on a besteffort basis. This is the default.
• Block file. Block and log the corrupt file or protocol anomaly.
524 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Updating VStream Antivirus
Using VStream Antispam
When you are subscribed to the VStream Antivirus updates service, VStream Antivirus virus signatures are automatically updated, keeping security up-to-date with no need for user intervention. However, you can still check for updates manually, if needed.
To update the VStream Antivirus virus signature database
1. Click
Antivirus in the main menu, and click the Antivirus tab.
The
VStream Antivirus page appears.
2. Click
Update Now.
The VStream Antivirus database is updated with the latest virus signatures.
Using VStream Antispam
The Safe@Office appliance includes VStream Antispam, an embedded antispam engine that scans emails for spam. VStream Antispam is composed three antispam engines, each of which can be enabled or disabled separately:
• IP Reputation
The IP Reputation engine protects mail servers by checking the email sender’s IP address against an online and constantly updated IP reputation database, before accepting the SMTP email connection. If the IP address belongs to a known spammer, the connection can be immediately blocked at the TCP connection level, thereby stopping the spam before it reaches your mail server.
Note: If you have a mail server in your network, it is recommended to enable the IP
Reputation engine as a first line of defense for incoming SMTP connections. When enabled, the IP Reputation engine blocks emails that would otherwise reach your mail server and require extensive analysis by the Content Based Antispam and
Block List engines, both of which examine email content and consume network, gateway, and mail server resources. By reducing the amount of emails that require in-depth analysis, the IP Reputation engine helps prevent Denial of Service (DoS)
525 Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering
Using VStream Antispam attacks on your gateway or mail server.
If you do not have a mail server in your network, there is no need to enable the IP
Reputation engine. (If you do enable this engine anyway, it will have no negative effects.)
• Block List
VStream Antispam allows configuring a list of senders whose emails should be blocked. When an email reaches your mail server, the Block List engine determines whether the sender's email address appears on the list. If so, then VStream Antispam blocks the emails.
• Content Based Antispam
The Content Based Antispam engine calculates a “spam fingerprint” for each incoming email message. The fingerprint is then sent to a VStream Antispam data center and compared to a constantly updated database of spam messages. The data center returns a "spam score", which is a value in percentages indicating the likelihood that the message is spam. If the spam score exceeds a user-configurable threshold called the “confidence level”, the message can be flagged as spam, or the message can be deleted altogether.
In addition, VStream Antispam allows you to define a Safe Sender List, which consists of senders who are exempt from the Block List and Content Based Antispam engines.
The following table provides a comparison of the VStream Antispam engines.
Table 118: Comparison of VStream Antispam Engines
IP Reputation Content Based Antispam and
Block List
Supported Protocols Protects mail servers only, and applies to the SMTP protocol only
Protects both mail servers and mail clients, and applies to both POP3 and
SMTP protocols
Email Scanning Time Scans the email before accepting the connection
Scans the email after accepting the connection
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 526
Using VStream Antispam
IP Reputation Content Based Antispam and
Block List
Detection Method
Examines the sender's IP address Content Based Antispam examines the email's content, and Block List examines the email's Sender field.
SMTP Error Message Does not return an SMTP error message to the email sender
Returns an SMTP error message to the email sender
Mail Rejection
Method
Resets the TCP connection Marks the email Subject line, marks the email header, rejects the email (SMTP only), or deletes the email (POP3 only)
Server Overload
Protection
Prevents spammers from overloading gateway and mail server resources
Does not prevent spammers from overloading gateway and mail server resources
Important: In order to use VStream Antispam, your Safe@Office appliance must be subscribed to a Service Center.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 527
Using VStream Antispam
How VStream Antispam Works
Figure 36: VStream Antispam Flow
VStream Antispam works as follows:
1. A TCP connection arrives at the SMTP port (TCP 25) or the POP3 port (TCP
110).
2. The connection is checked against the VStream Antispam policy, to determine whether it should be scanned.
3. If the IP Reputation engine is enabled, and the connection is an SMTP connection: a. VStream Antispam sends the connection's source IP address to a VStream
Antispam data center. b. The VStream Antispam data center checks the reputation of this IP address against a list of known spam sender IP addresses, and then returns a spam score. c. One of the following things happens:
If the spam score does not exceed the configured confidence level, the email passes to the next enabled VStream Antispam engine for processing.
528 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using VStream Antispam
If the spam score exceeds the configured confidence level, VStream
Antispam determines that the email is spam and handles it as specified by the IP Reputation engine's settings. d. VStream Antispam caches the results of the IP Reputation check.
4. VStream Antispam checks whether the email sender appears on the Safe
Sender List. If so, then the email is accepted.
5. If the Block List engine is enabled: a. VStream Antispam examines the email content and compares the sender to the list of blocked senders. b. One of the following things happens:
If the sender is not on the list of blocked senders, the email passes to the next enabled VStream Antispam engine for processing.
If the sender is on the list of blocked senders, VStream Antispam determines that the email is spam and handles it as specified by the Block
List engine's settings.
By default, VStream Antispam marks the email subject.
6. If the Content Based Antispam engine is enabled: a. VStream Antispam examines the email content and creates a spam fingerprint. b. VStream Antispam sends the fingerprint to a VStream Antispam data center, where it is checked against an online database of spam messages. c. The VStream Antispam data center returns a spam score. d. One of the following things happens:
If the spam score does not exceed the configured confidence level, the email is accepted.
If the spam score exceeds the configured confidence level, VStream
Antispam determines that email is spam and handles it and handles it as specified by the Content Based Antispam engine's settings.
By default, VStream Antispam marks the email as spam.
7. One of the following things happen:
• If the connection is an SMTP connection, the mail server forwards the email to the recipient.
• If the connection is a POP3 connection, the email client receives the email.
529 Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering
Using VStream Antispam
Header Marking
VStream Antispam adds the following headers to each email that is scanned by the Content
Based Antispam or Block List engine, but not blocked:
• X-VStream-Spam-Level. Contains an integer between 0 and 100, where
100 indicates the highest likelihood that the email is spam.
• X-VStream-Engine. The VStream Antispam engine, (either "Content Based
Antispam" or "Block List")
• X-Spam-Level. Contains one to five asterisks, where five asterisks indicates the highest likelihood that the email is spam.
• X-Spam-Flag. Contains YES if the email is deemed to be spam, according to the currently configured thresholds.
For example:
X-VStream-Spam-Level: 81%
X-VStream-Engine: Content Based Antispam
X-Spam-Level: ***
X-Spam-Flag: YES
If your email client allows defining rules based on message headers, you can create rules specifying that emails with certain headers should be moved to specific folders. For example, you can configure your email client to move all emails with the X-Spam-
Flag: YES header directly to a "Spam Email" folder.
Default Antispam Policy
The VStream Antispam default policy includes the following rules:
• All incoming SMTP connections are scanned, unless they originate from VPN.
This protects mail servers in your network.
• All outgoing POP3 connections are scanned. This protects mail clients in your network.
You can easily override the default antispam policy, for example to exclude certain addresses or networks from spam scanning, by creating user-defined rules. For further
information, see Configuring the VStream Antispam Policy on page 547.
530 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antispam
Using VStream Antispam
You must enable at least one VStream Antispam engine in order for VStream Antispam to work. Once you have enabled the desired engines, you must configure them, using the relevant sections in this guide.
To enable/disable VStream Antispam
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Antispam tab.
The
VStream Antispam page appears.
2. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 531
Using VStream Antispam
Table 119: VStream Antispam Fields
In this field… Do this…
Content Based
Antispam
Specify the Content Based Antispam engine's mode, by dragging the lever to one of the following:
• On. The Content Based Antispam engine is on. VStream
Antispam will check email fingerprints against an online spam detection database. Emails that fail the check will be handled according to configured Content Based Antispam settings.
• Monitor Only. The Content Based Antispam engine is on.
VStream Antispam will check email fingerprints against an online spam detection database. Emails that fail the check will be logged only, and any action configured in the
Content Based
Antispam Settings page will not be performed.
• Off. The Content Based Antispam engine is off.
You can then click
Settings to configure the Content Based Antispam settings. For further information, see Configuring the Content Based
Block List Specify the Block List engine's mode, by dragging the lever to one of the following:
• On. The Block List engine is on. VStream Antispam will check email messages against a list of blocked senders. Emails that fail the check will be handled according to configured Block
List settings.
• Monitor Only. The Block List engine is on. VStream Antispam will check email messages against a list of blocked senders.
Emails that fail the check will be logged only, and any action configured in the
Antispam Block List Settings page will not be performed.
• Off. The Block List engine is off.
You can then click
Settings to configure the Block List settings. For further information, see Configuring the Block List Engine Settings on page
532 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using VStream Antispam
In this field… Do this…
IP Reputation
Checking
Specify the IP Reputation engine's mode for SMTP connections, by dragging the lever to one of the following:
• On. The IP Reputation engine is on. VStream Antispam will check the reputation of email senders against an online IP reputation database prior to accepting the TCP connection.
Emails that fail the check will be handled according to configured IP Reputation settings.
• Monitor Only. The IP Reputation engine is on. VStream
Antispam will check the reputation of email senders against an online IP reputation database. Emails that fail the check will be
logged only, and any action configured in the
Antispam IP
Reputation Settings page will not be performed.
• Off. The IP Reputation engine is off.
You can then click
Settings to configure the IP Reputation settings. For further information, see Configuring the IP Reputation Engine on page
Viewing VStream Antispam Statistics
To view VStream Antispam statistics
• Click Antispam in the main menu, and click the Antispam tab.
The
VStream Antispam page appears.
Table 120: VStream Antispam Status Fields
This field…
Email Messages
Displays...
Statistics for the Content Based Antispam and Block List engines.
Pending The number of SMTP and POP3 email messages pending for the Content
Based Antispam and Block List engines.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 533
Using VStream Antispam
This field…
Spam
Displays...
The number of SMTP and POP3 email messages that the Content Based
Antispam and Block List engines determined to be spam.
Suspected Spam
Not scanned
Non Spam
Total
IP Reputation
Pending
Allowed
Blocked
Total
The number of SMTP and POP3 email messages that the Content Based
Antispam and Block List engines determined to be suspected spam.
The number of SMTP and POP3 email messages that were not scanned, due to temporary loss of contact with the VStream Antispam data center, or due to gateway resource overload.
The number of SMTP and POP3 email messages that the Content Based
Antispam and Block List engines determined to be legitimate.
The total number of SMTP and POP3 email messages scanned by the
Content Based Antispam and Block List engines.
Statistics for the IP Reputation engine.
The number of SMTP email connections currently pending for handling by the IP Reputation engine.
The number of SMTP email connections allowed by the IP Reputation engine.
The number of SMTP email connections blocked by the IP Reputation engine.
The total number of SMTP email connections scanned by the IP
Reputation engine.
534 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using VStream Antispam
Configuring the Content Based Antispam Engine
You can configure how VStream Antispam should handle spam and suspected spam that is detected by the Content Based Antispam engine.
For information on enabling this engine, see Enabling/Disabling VStream Antispam on
To configure Content Based Antispam engine settings
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Antispam tab.
The
VStream Antispam page appears.
2. Next to the
Content Based Antispam lever, click Settings.
The
Content Based Antispam Settings page appears.
3. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 535
Using VStream Antispam
4. Click
Apply.
Table 121: Content Based Antispam Settings Fields
In this field…
Spam
Do this…
Configure how VStream Antispam should handle spam that is detected using the Content Based Antispam engine.
Action
Mark Text
Specify the action VStream Antispam should take upon detecting spam, by selecting one of the following:
• None. Take no action.
• Reject. Block the email. The email will be permanently deleted.
• Mark Subject. Mark the email's Subject line.
If you select
Mark Subject, the Mark Text field appears.
Note: If the Content Based Antispam engine is in Monitor Only mode, this setting is ignored. For information on changing the engine's mode, see
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antispam on page 531.
Type the prefix to the text appearing in the
Subject field of the spam notification email.
For example, if you type [SPAM] and the original email's
Subject field displays "Earn Money the Easy Way", the spam notification email's
Subject field will display: "[SPAM] Earn Money the Easy Way".
The default value is [SPAM].
Note: If your email client allows defining rules based on the Subject field, you can create rules specifying that emails whose
Subject field contains certain words should be moved to specific folders. For example, you can configure your email client to move all emails whose
Subject field contains
[SPAM] directly to the Deleted Items folder.
536 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
Track
Confidence
Suspected Spam
Action
Mark Text
Using VStream Antispam
Do this…
Specify whether VStream Antispam should log spam, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. VStream Antispam should log spam.
• None. VStream Antispam should not log spam.
Type the minimum spam confidence level (SCL). If an email's SCL matches or exceeds this threshold, the email is considered spam.
Setting a higher SCL reduces the number of legitimate emails erroneously identified as spam. Setting a lower SCL increases the amount of spam that is identified as legitimate email.
The default value is 90.
Configure how VStream Antispam should handle suspected spam that is detected using the Content Based Antispam engine.
Specify the action VStream Antispam should take upon detecting potential spam, by selecting one of the following:
• None. Take no action.
• Reject. Block the email. The email will be permanently deleted.
• Mark Subject. Mark the email's Subject line.
If you select
Mark Subject, the Mark Text field appears.
Note: If the Content Based Antispam engine is in Monitor Only mode, this setting is ignored. For information on changing the engine's mode, see
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antispam on page 531.
Type the prefix to the text appearing in the
Subject field of the suspected spam notification email.
For example, if you type [SUSPECTED SPAM] and the original email's
Subject field displays "Earn Money the Easy Way", the suspected spam notification email's
Subject field will display: "[SUSPECTED SPAM] Earn
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 537
Using VStream Antispam
In this field… Do this…
Money the Easy Way".
The default value is [SUSPECTED SPAM].
Note: If your email client allows defining rules based on the Subject field, you can create rules specifying that emails whose
Subject field contains certain words should be moved to specific folders. For example, you can configure your email client to move all emails whose
Subject field contains
[SUSPECTED SPAM] directly to a Quarantine folder.
Track
Confidence
Specify whether VStream Antispam should log suspected spam, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. VStream Antispam should log suspected spam.
• None. VStream Antispam should not log suspected spam.
Type the minimum spam confidence level (SCL). If an email's SCL matches or exceeds this threshold, the email is considered suspected spam.
Setting a higher SCL reduces the number of legitimate emails erroneously identified as suspected spam. Setting a lower SCL increases the amount of potential spam that is identified as legitimate email.
The default value is 80.
538 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring the Block List Engine
Using VStream Antispam
You can configure a list of email addresses and domain names that VStream Antispam should automatically block, if the Block List engine is enabled.
For information on enabling the Block List engine, see Enabling/Disabling VStream
Adding Blocked Senders
To add a blocked sender
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Antispam tab.
The
VStream Antispam page appears.
2. Next to the
Block List lever, click Edit List.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 539
Using VStream Antispam
The
Blocked Sender List page appears.
3. Click
Add.
The
Add Email to List dialog box appears.
4. In the field provided, do one of the following:
• To block all email from a specific sender, type the sender's email address.
• To block all email from addresses ending with a specific domain, type the domain name.
For example, if you type "@special-offers.com", then email addresses such as [email protected] and [email protected] will be blocked.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 540
5. Click
OK.
The sender appears in the
Block Sender List table.
Viewing and Deleting Blocked Senders
To delete a blocked sender
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Antispam tab.
The
VStream Antispam page appears.
2. Next to the
Block List lever, click Edit List.
The
Blocked Sender List page appears.
3. In the desired sender's row, click .
The sender is deleted.
Configuring the Block List Engine Settings
To configure Block List engine settings
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Antispam tab.
The
VStream Antispam page appears.
2. Next to the
Block List lever, click Settings.
Using VStream Antispam
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 541
Using VStream Antispam
The
Antispam Block List Settings page appears.
3. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
4. Click
Apply.
542 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 122: Antispam Block List Settings Fields
In this field… Do this…
Block Action
Mark Text
Using VStream Antispam
Specify the action VStream Antispam should take upon receiving an email from a blocked sender, by selecting one of the following:
• None. Take no action.
• Reject. Block the email.
• Mark Subject. Mark the email's Subject line.
If you select
Mark Subject, the Mark Text field appears.
Note: If the Block List engine is in Monitor Only mode, this setting is ignored.
For information on changing the engine's mode, see Enabling/Disabling
Type the prefix to the text appearing in the
Subject field of the spam notification email.
For example, if you type [SPAM] and the original email's
Subject field displays "Earn Money the Easy Way", the spam notification email's
Subject field will display: "[SPAM] Earn Money the Easy Way".
The default value is [SPAM].
Note: If your email client allows defining rules based on the Subject field, you can create rules specifying that emails whose
Subject field contains certain words should be moved to specific folders. For example, you can configure your email client to move all emails whose
Subject field contains
[SPAM] directly to the Deleted Items folder.
Track Blocked
Specify whether VStream Antispam should log emails from blocked senders, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. VStream Antispam should log emails from blocked senders.
• None. VStream Antispam should not log emails from blocked senders.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 543
Using VStream Antispam
Configuring the IP Reputation Engine
You can configure how VStream Antispam should handle spam and suspected spam that is detected by the IP Reputation engine.
For information on enabling this engine, see Enabling/Disabling VStream Antispam on
To configure IP Reputation engine settings
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Antispam tab.
The
VStream Antispam page appears.
2. Next to the
IP Reputation Checking lever, click Settings.
The
Antispam IP Reputation Settings page appears.
3. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 544
4. Click
Apply.
Using VStream Antispam
Table 123: Antispam IP Reputation Settings Fields
In this field…
Spam
Do this…
Configure how VStream Antispam should handle spam that is detected using the IP Reputation engine.
Action
Track
Confidence
Suspected Spam
Specify the action VStream Antispam should take upon detecting spam, by selecting one of the following:
• Reject. Block the email.
• None. Take no action.
Note: If the IP Reputation engine is in Monitor Only mode, this setting is ignored. For information on changing the engine's mode, see
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antispam on page 531.
Specify whether VStream Antispam should log spam, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. VStream Antispam should log spam.
• None. VStream Antispam should not log spam.
Type the minimum spam confidence level (SCL) needed to fail this check.
If an email's SCL matches or exceeds this threshold, the email is considered spam.
Setting a higher SCL reduces the number of legitimate emails erroneously identified as spam. Setting a lower SCL increases the amount of spam that is identified as legitimate email.
The default value is 90.
Configure how VStream Antispam should handle suspected spam that is detected using the IP Reputation engine.
545 Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering
Using VStream Antispam
In this field…
Action
Do this…
Specify the action VStream Antispam should take upon detecting potential spam, by selecting one of the following:
• Reject. Block the email.
• None. Take no action.
Note: If the IP Reputation engine is in Monitor Only mode, this setting is ignored. For information on changing the engine's mode, see
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antispam on page 531.
Track
Confidence
Specify whether VStream Antispam should log suspected spam, by selecting one of the following:
• Log. VStream Antispam should log suspected spam.
• None. VStream Antispam should not log suspected spam.
Type the minimum spam confidence level (SCL) needed to fail this check.
If an email's SCL matches or exceeds this threshold, the email is considered suspected spam.
Setting a higher SCL reduces the number of legitimate emails erroneously identified as suspected spam. Setting a lower SCL increases the amount of potential spam that is identified as legitimate email.
The default value is 80.
546 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring the VStream Antispam Policy
Using VStream Antispam
VStream Antispam includes a flexible mechanism that allows the user to define exactly which emails should be scanned for spam and which should be considered safe, by specifying the protocol, and the source and destination IP addresses.
VStream Antispam processes policy rules in the order they appear in the
Antispam Policy table, so that rule 1 is applied before rule 2, and so on. This enables you to define exceptions to rules, by placing the exceptions higher up in the
Rules table.
For example, if you want to scan all outgoing SMTP traffic, except traffic from a specific
IP address, you can create a rule scanning all outgoing SMTP traffic and move the rule down in the
Antispam Policy table. Then create a rule passing SMTP traffic from the desired IP address and move this rule to a higher location in the
Antispam Policy table than the first rule. In the figure below, the general rule is rule number 2, and the exception is rule number 1.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 547
Using VStream Antispam
The Safe@Office appliance will process rule 1 first, passing outgoing SMTP traffic from the specified IP address, and only then it will process rule 2, scanning all outgoing SMTP traffic.
The following rule types exist:
Table 124: VStream Antispam Rule Types
Rule Description
Pass This rule type enables you to specify that VStream Antispam should allow all emails matching the rule, without scanning the emails.
Scan
Reject
This rule type enables you to specify that VStream Antispam should scan all emails matching the rule.
This rule type enables you to specify that VStream Antispam should reject all emails matching the rule, without scanning the emails.
Adding and Editing VStream Antispam Rules
To add or edit a VStream Antispam rule
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
548 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Antispam Policy page appears.
Using VStream Antispam
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a new rule, click Add Rule.
• To edit an existing rule, click
next to the desired rule.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 549
Using VStream Antispam
The
VStream Antispam Policy Rule Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Rule Type dialog box displayed.
3. Select the type of rule you want to create.
4. Click
Next.
The
Step 2: Destination & Source dialog box appears.
5. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 550
6. Click
Next.
The
Step 3: Done dialog box appears.
Using VStream Antispam
7. If desired, type a description of the rule in the field provided.
8. Click
Finish.
The new rule appears in the
Antispam Policy page.
Table 125: VStream Antispam Policy Rule Wizard Fields
In this field… Do this…
If the email protocol is
Select the email protocol to which the rule should apply. The supported protocols are SMTP and POP3.
To specify both SMTP and POP3, select
ANY.
Note: When defining a Reject rule, this field is set to Mail Server (SMTP).
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 551
Using VStream Antispam
In this field… Do this…
The connection source is
Select the source of the connections to which the rule should apply.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the field provided.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired IP address range in the fields provided.
To specify connections originating from this gateway, select
This Gateway.
To specify any source except this gateway, select
ANY.
And the destination is
Description
Select the destination of the connections to which the rule should apply. This list includes network objects.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the text box.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.
To specify the Safe@Office IP addresses, select
This Gateway.
To specify any destination except the Safe@Office Portal IP addresses, select
ANY.
Type a description of the rule.
552 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Enabling/Disabling VStream Antispam Rules
You can temporarily disable a VStream Antispam rule.
To enable/disable a VStream Antispam rule
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The
Antispam Policy page appears.
2. Next to the desired rule, do one of the following:
• To enable the rule, click
.
The button changes to and the rule is enabled.
• To disable the rule, click
.
The button changes to and the rule is disabled.
Reordering VStream Antispam Rules
Using VStream Antispam
To reorder VStream Antispam rules
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The
Antispam Policy page appears.
2. For each rule you want to move, click on the rule and drag it to the desired location in the table.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 553
Using VStream Antispam
Viewing and Deleting VStream Antispam Rules
To view or delete an existing VStream Antispam rule
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Policy tab.
The
Antispam Policy page appears with a list of existing VStream Antispam rules.
2. To resize a column, drag the relevant column divider right or left.
3. To delete a rule, do the following. a. In the desired rule's row, click .
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The rule is deleted.
Configuring the Safe Sender List
You can configure a list of email addresses and domain names that are "safe". VStream
Antispam will treat all emails sent from these addresses or domains as legitimate (nonspam) mail.
Note: The IP Reputation check is performed before accepting the TCP connection, at which point the sender’s email address is not yet available. Therefore, if the IP
Reputation engine is enabled, and an SMTP session is received from an IP address that is reputed to be a source of spam, VStream Antispam will block the connection, regardless of whether the sender's email address is on the Safe Sender List.
Adding Safe Senders
To add a safe sender
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Safe Senders tab.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 554
The
Safe Sender List page appears.
Using VStream Antispam
2. Click
Add.
The
Add Email to List dialog box appears.
3. In the field provided, do one of the following:
• To allow all email from a specific sender, type the sender's email address.
• To allow all email from addresses ending with a specific domain, type the domain name.
For example, if you type "@mycompany.com", then email addresses such as [email protected] and [email protected] will be allowed.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 555
Using VStream Antispam
4. Click
OK.
The sender appears in the
Safe Senders table.
Viewing and Deleting Safe Senders
To view or delete a safe sender
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Safe Senders tab.
The
Safe Sender List page appears.
2. In the desired sender's row, click
Erase.
The sender is deleted.
556 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using VStream Antispam
Configuring VStream Antispam Advanced Settings
To configure VStream Antispam advanced settings
1. Click
Antispam in the main menu, and click the Advanced tab.
The
Advanced Antispam Settings page appears.
2. In the
Track Non Spam Emails drop-down list, do one of the following:
• To specify that VStream Antispam should log email that is detected as legitimate mail, select
Log.
• To specify that VStream Antivirus should not log email that is detected as legitimate mail, select
None.
3. In the
Track Safe Senders drop-down list, do one of the following:
• To specify that VStream Antispam should log email sent by addresses on the
Safe Sender List, select
Log.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 557
Using Centralized Email Filtering
• To specify that VStream Antivirus should not log email sent by addresses on the Safe Sender List, select
None.
4. Click
Apply.
Using Centralized Email Filtering
There are two centralized Email Filtering services:
• Email Antivirus
When the Email Antivirus service is enabled, your email is automatically scanned for the detection and elimination of all known viruses and vandals. If a virus is detected, it is removed and replaced with a warning message.
• Email Antispam
When the Email Antispam service is enabled, your email is automatically scanned for the detection of spam. If spam is detected, the email’s Subject line is modified to indicate that it is suspected spam. If your email client allows defining rules based on the
Subject field, you can create rules to divert such messages to a special folder.
Note: Email Filtering services are only available if you are connected to a Service
Center and subscribed to the services. For information on using subscription services,
see Using Subscription Services on page 591.
Note: For information on the differences between the centralized Email Filtering
services and VStream Antivirus or VStream Antispam, see Overview on page 505.
558 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Enabling/Disabling Email Filtering
Using Centralized Email Filtering
To enable/disable Email Filtering
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Email Filtering tab.
The
Email Filtering page appears.
2. Next to
Email Antivirus, drag the On/Off lever upwards or downwards.
Email Antivirus is enabled/disabled.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 559
Using Centralized Email Filtering
Selecting Protocols for Scanning
If you are locally managed, you can define which protocols should be scanned for viruses and spam:
• Email retrieving (POP3). If enabled, all incoming email in the POP3 protocol will be scanned.
• Email sending (SMTP). If enabled, all outgoing email will be scanned.
Protocols marked with will be scanned, while those marked with will not.
Note: If the Safe@Office appliance is remotely managed, contact your Service Center administrator to change these settings.
To enable virus and spam scanning for a protocol
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Email Filtering tab.
The
Email Filtering page appears.
2. In the
Options area, click or next to the desired protocol.
Configuring Email Filtering Advanced Settings
Note: If the Safe@Office appliance is remotely managed, contact your Service Center administrator to change these settings.
To configure Email Filtering advanced settings
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Email Filtering tab.
The
Email Filtering page appears.
560 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Centralized Email Filtering
2. Next to the
Bypass scanning if Service Center is unavailable option, specify how the gateway should handle Email Filtering when the service is enabled and the Service Center is unavailable, by doing do one of the following:
• To temporarily block all email traffic, click
.
This ensures constant protection from spam and viruses.
The button changes to .
• To temporarily allow all email traffic, click
.
This ensures continuous access to email; however, it does not protect against viruses and spam, so use this option cautiously.
The button changes to .
When the Service Center is available again, the gateway will enforce the configured
Email Filtering policy.
Temporarily Disabling Email Filtering
If you are having problems sending or receiving email you can temporarily disable the
Email Filtering services.
To temporarily disable Email Filtering
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Email Filtering tab.
The
Email Filtering page appears.
2. Click
Snooze.
• Email Antivirus and Email Antispam are temporarily disabled for all internal network computers.
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 561
Using Centralized Email Filtering
• The Snooze button changes to Resume.
• The Email Filtering Off popup window opens.
3. To re-enable Email Antivirus and Email Antispam, click
Resume, either in the popup window, or on the
Email Filtering page.
• The services are re-enabled for all internal network computers.
• If you clicked Resume in the Email Filtering page, the button changes to
Snooze.
• If you clicked Resume in the Email Filtering Off popup window, the popup window closes.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 562
Using Centralized Email Filtering
Chapter 15: Using Antivirus and Antispam Filtering 563
Overview
Chapter 16
Using Web Content Filtering
This chapter explains how to use Web content filtering.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Customizing the Access Denied Page ...................................................... 582
Overview
You can allow or block users from accessing Web content, by configuring Web rules and/or the Web Filtering service. The following table describes the main differences between Web rules and the Web Filtering service:
Table 126: Comparison of Web Content Filtering Methods
Filtering Action
Web Rules Web Filtering
Web rules allow and block specific URLs.
The Web Filtering service is category based; that is, it filters Web sites based on the category to which they belong.
Point of Enforcement HTTP requests are analyzed in the gateway, by comparing each request against a list of rules.
HTTP requests are analyzed in the gateway, by extracting each request's URL and then sending the URL to the Service
Center, to determine to which categories the URL belongs. The request is then allowed or denied according to the configured list of allowed categories.
Chapter 16: Using Web Content Filtering 565
Overview
Web Rules Web Filtering
Subscription and
Connection
Requirement
Web rules are included with the
Safe@Office appliance and do not require a Service Center subscription or connection.
The Web Filtering service is subscriptionbased and requires a connection to the
Service Center.
You can use either Web content filtering solution or both in conjunction. When a user attempts to access a Web site, the Safe@Office appliance first evaluates the Web rules. If the site is not blocked or allowed by the Web rules, the Web Filtering service is then consulted.
Regardless of which method is used, if a user attempts to access a blocked page, the
Access Denied page appears. For information on customizing this page, see Customizing
the Access Denied Page on page 582.
If desired, you can permit specific users to override Web content filtering, by granting them Web Filtering Override permissions. Such users will be able to view Web pages without restriction, after they have provided their username password via the
Access
Denied page. For information on granting Web Filtering Override permissions, see Adding
and Editing Users on page 680.
In addition, you can choose to exclude specific network objects from Web content filtering enforcement. Users connecting from these network objects will be able to view Web pages without restriction, regardless of whether they have Web Filtering Override permissions.
For information on configuring network objects, see Using Network Objects on page 227.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 566
Using Web Rules
Using Web Rules
You can block or allow access to specific Web pages, by defining Web rules.
Note: Web rules affect outgoing traffic only and cannot be used to allow or limit access from the Internet to internal Web servers.
The Safe@Office appliance processes Web rules in the order they appear in the
Web Rules table, so that rule 1 is applied before rule 2, and so on. This enables you to define exceptions to rules, by placing the exceptions higher up in the
Web Rules table.
For example, if you want to block all the pages of a particular Web site, except a specific page, you can create a rule blocking access to all of the Web site's pages and move the rule down in the
Web Rules table. Then create a rule allowing access to the desired page and move this rule to a higher location in the
Web Rules table than the first rule. In the figure below, the general rule is rule number 2, and the exception is rule number 1.
Chapter 16: Using Web Content Filtering 567
Using Web Rules
The Safe@Office appliance will process rule 1 first, allowing access to the desired page, and only then it will process rule 2, blocking access to the rest of the site.
The following rule types exist:
Table 127: Web Rule Types
Rule Description
Allow This rule type enables you to specify that a specific Web page should be allowed.
Block This rule type enables you to specify that a specific Web page should be blocked.
Adding and Editing Web Rules
To add or edit a Web rule
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Web Rules tab.
568 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Web Rules page appears.
Using Web Rules
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a new rule, click Add Rule.
• To edit an existing rule, click
next to the desired rule.
Chapter 16: Using Web Content Filtering 569
Using Web Rules
The
Safe@Office Web Rule Wizard opens, with the Step 1: Rule Type dialog box displayed.
3. Select the type of rule you want to create.
4. Click
Next.
The
Step 2: Rule Location dialog box appears.
570 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The example below shows a Block rule.
Using Web Rules
5. To configure advanced settings, click
Show Advanced Settings.
New fields appear.
6. Complete the fields using the relevant information in the following table.
7. Click
Next.
Chapter 16: Using Web Content Filtering 571
Using Web Rules
The
Step 3: Confirm Rule dialog box appears.
8. Click
Finish.
The new rule appears in the
Web Rules page.
Table 128: Web Rules Fields
In this field… Do this…
Block/Allow access to the following URL
Type the URL or IP address to which the rule should apply.
Wildcards (*) are supported. For example, to block all URLs that start with
"http://www.casino-", set this field's value to: http://www.casino-*
Note: If you block a Web site based on its domain name
(http://<domain_name>), the Web site is not automatically blocked when surfing to the Web server's IP address (http://<IP_address>). Likewise, if you block a Web site based on its IP address, the Web site is not automatically blocked when surfing to the domain name. To prevent access to both the domain name and the IP address, you must block both.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 572
Using Web Rules
In this field… Do this…
Log allowed connections /
Log blocked connections
Select this option to log the specified blocked or allowed connections.
By default, allowed Web pages are not logged, and blocked Web pages are logged.
If the connection source is
Select the source of the connections you want to allow/block. This list includes network objects.
To specify an IP address, select
Specified IP and type the desired IP address in the field provided.
To specify an IP address range, select
Specified Range and type the desired
IP address range in the fields provided.
If the current time is
Select this option to specify that the rule should be applied only during certain hours of the day.
You must then use the fields and drop-down lists provided, to specify the desired time range.
Reordering Web Rules
To reorder Web rules
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Web Rules tab.
The
Web Rules page appears.
2. For each rule you want to move, click on the rule and drag it to the desired location in the table.
Chapter 16: Using Web Content Filtering 573
Using Web Rules
Viewing and Deleting Web Rules
To view or delete an existing Web rule
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Web Rules tab.
The
Web Rules page appears with a list of existing Web rules.
2. To resize a column, drag the relevant column divider right or left.
3. To delete a rule, do the following. a. In the desired rule's row, click .
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The rule is deleted.
Enabling/Disabling Web Rule Logging
You can enable or disable logging for a Web rule, by using the information in Adding and
Editing Web Rules on page 568, or by using the following shortcut.
To enable/disable logging for a Web rule
1. Click
Security in the main menu, and click the Web Rules tab.
The
Web Rules page appears.
2. Next to the desired rule, in the
Log column, do one of the following:
• To enable logging, click
.
The button changes to and logging is enabled for the rule.
• To disable logging, click
.
The button changes to and logging is disabled for the rule.
574 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Web Filtering
Using Web Filtering
When the Web Filtering service is enabled, access to Web content is restricted according to the categories specified in the
Allow Categories area of the Web Filtering page.
Note: The Web Filtering service is only available if you are connected to a Service
Center and subscribed to this service. For information on using subscription
services, see Using Subscription Services on page 591.
Enabling/Disabling Web Filtering
To enable/disable Web Filtering
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Web Filtering tab.
Chapter 16: Using Web Content Filtering 575
Using Web Filtering
The
Web Filtering page appears.
2. Drag the
On/Off lever upwards or downwards.
Web Filtering is enabled/disabled.
576 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Selecting Categories for Blocking
Using Web Filtering
You can define which types of Web sites should be considered appropriate for your family or office members, by selecting the categories. Categories marked with will remain visible, while categories marked with will be blocked and will require the administrator password for viewing.
Note: If the Safe@Office appliance is remotely managed, contact your Service Center administrator to change these settings.
Note: The list of supported categories may vary, depending on the Service Center to which the Safe@Office appliance is connected.
To allow/block a category
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Web Filtering tab.
The
Web Filtering page appears.
2. In the
Allow Categories area, use the scroll bar to scroll through all of the categories.
3. Click or next to the desired category.
Configuring Web Filtering Advanced Settings
Note: If the Safe@Office appliance is remotely managed, contact your Service Center administrator to change these settings.
To configure Web Filtering advanced settings
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Web Filtering tab.
The
Web Filtering page appears.
Chapter 16: Using Web Content Filtering 577
Using Web Filtering
2. Next to the
Bypass scanning if Service Center is unavailable option, specify how the gateway should handle Web Filtering when the service is enabled and the Service Center is unavailable, by doing do one of the following:
• To temporarily block all connections to the Internet, click
.
This ensures that users will not gain access to undesirable Web sites, even when the Service Center is unavailable.
The button changes to .
• To temporarily allow all connections to the Internet, click
This ensures continuous access to the Internet.
.
The button changes to .
When the Service Center is available again, the gateway will enforce the configured
Web Filtering policy.
Temporarily Disabling Web Filtering
If desired, you can temporarily disable the Web Filtering service.
To temporarily disable Web Filtering
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Web Filtering tab.
The
Web Filtering page appears.
2. Click
Snooze.
• Web Filtering is temporarily disabled for all internal network computers.
578 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
• The Snooze button changes to Resume.
Using Web Filtering
• The Web Filtering Off popup window opens.
3. To re-enable the service, click
Resume, either in the popup window, or on the
Web Filtering page.
Chapter 16: Using Web Content Filtering 579
Using Web Filtering
• The service is re-enabled for all internal network computers.
• If you clicked Resume in the Web Filtering page, the button changes to
Snooze.
• If you clicked Resume in the Web Filtering Off popup window, the popup window closes.
Configuring Automatic Snooze
You can automatically disable the Web Filtering service during certain hours of the day, by configuring Automatic Snooze.
To configure Automatic Snooze
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Web Filtering tab.
The
Web Filtering page appears.
2. In the
Advanced area, next to Automatic Snooze, click Set.
580 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Web Filtering Automatic Snooze Settings page appears.
Using Web Filtering
3. Do one of the following:
• To enable Automatic Snooze:
1) Select the
Automatic Snooze check box.
2) In the fields provided, specify the hours between which the Web
Filtering service should be disabled.
• To disable Automatic Snooze, clear the Automatic Snooze check box.
4. Click
Apply.
Automatic Snooze is enabled/disabled.
If you enabled Automatic Snooze, the
Web Filtering page displays the hours during which the Web Filtering service will be disabled.
581 Chapter 16: Using Web Content Filtering
Customizing the Access Denied Page
Resetting Web Filtering Categories to Defaults
If desired, you can reset the Web Filtering categories to their default settings.
To restore Web Filtering defaults
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Web Filtering tab.
The
Web Filtering page appears.
2. Click
Defaults
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click
OK.
Customizing the Access Denied Page
The
Access Denied page appears when a user attempts to access a page that is blocked either by a Web rule or by the Web Filtering service. You can customize this page using the following procedure.
To customize the Access Denied page
1. Do one of the following:
• Click Security in the main menu, and click the Web Rules tab.
The
Web Rules page appears.
• Click Services in the main menu, and click the Web Filtering tab.
The
Web Filtering page appears.
2. Click
Settings.
582 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Customizing the Access Denied Page
The
Customize Access Denied Page page appears. In the following example, this page was accessed via the
Web Rules page.
3. In the text box, type the message that should appear when a user attempts to access a blocked Web page.
You can use HTML tags as needed.
4. To display the Access Denied page using HTTPS, select the
Use HTTPS check box.
5. To preview the Access Denied page, click
Preview.
A browser window opens displaying the Access Denied page.
6. Click
Apply.
Your changes are saved.
Chapter 16: Using Web Content Filtering 583
Overview
Chapter 17
Updating the Firmware
This chapter explains how to update the Safe@Office appliance's firmware.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Updating the Firmware Manually ............................................................. 588
Overview
You can update your Safe@Office appliance with new product features and protection against new security threats. To do so, you must update your appliance's firmware, by using one of the following methods:
• Software Updates. This subscription service allows checking for new security and software updates, either automatically or manually. Detected updates are downloaded and installed without user intervention.
• Manual updates. If you are not subscribed to the Software Updates service, you must update the firmware manually.
Note: To obtain firmware updates, whether via the Software Updates service, or for the purpose of updating you appliance manually, you must purchase a support/software subscription plan for your appliance.
Chapter 17: Updating the Firmware 585
Using Software Updates
Using Software Updates
Checking for Software Updates when Remotely Managed
If your Safe@Office appliance is remotely managed, it automatically checks for software updates and installs them without user intervention. However, you can still check for updates manually, if needed.
To manually check for security and software updates
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Software Updates tab.
The
Software Updates page appears.
2. Click
Update Now.
586 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Software Updates
The system checks for new updates and installs them.
Checking for Software Updates when Locally Managed
If your Safe@Office appliance is locally managed, you can set it to automatically check for software updates, or you can set it so that software updates must be checked for manually.
To configure software updates when locally managed
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Software Updates tab.
The
Software Updates page appears.
2. To set the Safe@Office appliance to automatically check for and install new software updates, drag the
Automatic/Manual lever upwards.
The Safe@Office appliance checks for new updates and installs them according to its schedule.
587 Chapter 17: Updating the Firmware
Updating the Firmware Manually
Note: When the Software Updates service is set to Automatic, you can still manually check for updates.
3. To set the Safe@Office appliance so that software updates must be checked for manually, drag the
Automatic/Manual lever downwards.
The Safe@Office appliance does not check for software updates automatically.
4. To manually check for software updates, click
Update Now.
The system checks for new updates and installs them.
Updating the Firmware Manually
Updating the Safe@Office firmware manually
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The
Firmware page appears.
2. Click
Firmware Update.
588 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Firmware Update page appears.
Updating the Firmware Manually
3. Click
Browse.
A browse window appears.
4. Select the image file and click
Open.
The
Firmware Update page reappears. The path to the firmware update image file appears in the
Browse text box.
5. Click
Upload.
Your Safe@Office appliance firmware is updated.
Updating may take a few minutes. Do not power off the appliance.
At the end of the process the Safe@Office appliance restarts automatically.
Chapter 17: Updating the Firmware 589
Connecting to a Service Center
Chapter 18
Using Subscription Services
This chapter explains how to connect your Safe@Office appliance to a Service Center and start subscription services.
Note: Check with your reseller regarding availability of subscription services, or surf to www.sofaware.com/servicecenters to locate a Service Center in your area.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Connecting to a Service Center ............................................................... 591
Viewing Services Information ................................................................. 597
Refreshing Your Service Center Connection ........................................... 598
Configuring Your Account ...................................................................... 599
Disconnecting from Your Service Center ................................................ 599
Connecting to a Service Center
To connect to a Service Center
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Account tab.
Chapter 18: Using Subscription Services 591
Connecting to a Service Center
The
Account page appears.
2. In the
Service Account area, click Connect.
592 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Connecting to a Service Center
The
Safe@Office Services Wizard opens, with the Service Center dialog box displayed.
3. Make sure the
Connect to a Service Center check box is selected.
4. Do one of the following:
• To connect to the SofaWare Service Center, choose usercenter.sofaware.com.
• To specify a Service Center, choose Specified IP and then in the Specified IP field, enter the desired Service Center’s IP address, as given to you by your system administrator.
5. Click
Next.
• The Connecting screen appears.
Chapter 18: Using Subscription Services 593
Connecting to a Service Center
• If the Service Center requires authentication, the Service Center Login dialog box appears.
Enter your gateway ID and registration key in the appropriate fields, as given to you by your service provider, then click
Next.
• The Connecting screen appears.
• The Confirmation dialog box appears with a list of services to which you are subscribed.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 594
6. Click
Next.
The
Done screen appears with a success message.
Connecting to a Service Center
7. Click
Finish.
The following things happen:
• If a new firmware is available, the Safe@Office appliance may start downloading it. This may take several minutes. Once the download is complete, the Safe@Office appliance restarts using the new firmware.
• The Welcome page appears.
Chapter 18: Using Subscription Services 595
Connecting to a Service Center
• The services to which you are subscribed are now available on your
Safe@Office appliance and listed as such on the
Account page. See Viewing
Services Information on page 597 for further information.
596
• The Services submenu includes the services to which you are subscribed.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Viewing Services Information
Viewing Services Information
The
Account page displays the following information about your subscription.
Table 129: Account Page Fields
This field… Displays…
Service Center
Name
The name of the Service Center to which you are connected (if known).
Gateway ID
Subscription will end on
Service
Subscription
Your gateway ID.
The date on which your subscription to services will end.
Status
Information
The services available in your service plan.
The status of your subscription to each service:
• Subscribed
• Not Subscribed
The status of each service:
• Connected. You are connected to the service through the
Service Center.
• Connecting. Connecting to the Service Center.
• N/A. The service is not available.
The mode to which each service is set.
If you are subscribed to Dynamic DNS, this field displays your gateway's domain name.
For further information, see Web Filtering on page 575, Virus Scanning
on page 558, and Automatic and Manual Updates on page 586.
Chapter 18: Using Subscription Services 597
Refreshing Your Service Center Connection
Refreshing Your Service Center Connection
This option restarts your Safe@Office appliance’s connection to the Service Center and refreshes your Safe@Office appliance’s service settings.
To refresh your Service Center connection
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Account tab.
The
Account page appears.
2. In the
Service Account area, click Refresh.
The Safe@Office appliance reconnects to the Service Center.
Your service settings are refreshed.
598 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Your Account
Configuring Your Account
This option allows you to access your Service Center's Web site, which may offer additional configuration options for your account. Contact your Service Center for a user
ID and password.
To configure your account
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Account tab.
The
Account page appears.
2. In the
Service Account area, click Configure.
Note: If no additional settings are available from your Service Center, this button will not appear.
Your Service Center's Web site opens.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
Disconnecting from Your Service Center
If desired, you can disconnect from your Service Center.
To disconnect from your Service Center
1. Click
Services in the main menu, and click the Account tab.
The
Account page appears.
2. In the
Service Account area, click Connect.
The
Safe@Office Services Wizard opens, with the first Subscription Services dialog box displayed.
3. Clear the
Connect to a Service Center check box.
Chapter 18: Using Subscription Services 599
Disconnecting from Your Service Center
4. Click
Next.
The
Done screen appears with a success message.
5. Click
Finish.
The following things happen:
• You are disconnected from the Service Center.
• The services to which you were subscribed are no longer available on your
Safe@Office appliance.
600 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Overview
Chapter 19
Working With VPNs
This chapter describes how to use your Safe@Office appliance as a Remote Access VPN
Client, server, or gateway.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server ..................... 607
Adding and Editing VPN Sites ................................................................ 621
Viewing and Deleting VPN Sites ............................................................. 654
Enabling/Disabling a VPN Site ................................................................ 654
Logging in to a Remote Access VPN Site ................................................ 655
Logging Out of a Remote Access VPN Site ............................................. 658
Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections .............................................. 673
Viewing VPN Topology ........................................................................... 674
Overview
You can configure your Safe@Office appliance as part of a virtual private network (VPN).
A VPN is a private data network consisting of a group of gateways that can securely connect to each other. Each member of the VPN is called a VPN site, and a connection between two VPN sites is called a VPN tunnel. VPN tunnels encrypt and authenticate all traffic passing through them. Through these tunnels, employees can safely use their company’s network resources when working at home. For example, they can securely read email, use the company’s intranet, or access the company’s database from home.
The Safe@Office appliance supports the following types of VPN sites:
• SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server. Makes a network remotely available to authorized users who connect to the Remote Access VPN Server using the
Check Point SecuRemote VPN Client (provided for free with your
Safe@Office) or another Safe@Office.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 601
Overview
• SecuRemote Internal VPN Server. SecuRemote can also be used from your internal networks, allowing you to secure your wired or wireless network with strong encryption and authentication.
• Endpoint Connect VPN Server. Makes a network available to authorized users who connect from the Internet or from your internal networks using the Check
Point Endpoint Connect VPN Client. Endpoint Connect provides mobile users with seamless connectivity to corporate resources, by encrypting and authenticating data transmitted during secure remote access sessions.
• L2TP VPN Server. Makes a network available to authorized users who connect from the Internet or from your internal networks using an L2TP client such as the Microsoft L2TP IPSec VPN Client.
• Site-to-Site VPN Gateway. Can connect with another Site-to-Site VPN Gateway in a permanent, bi-directional relationship.
• Remote Access VPN Client. Can connect to a Remote Access VPN Server, but other VPN sites cannot initiate a connection to the Remote Access VPN Client.
Defining a Remote Access VPN Client is a hardware alternative to using remote access software.
All Safe@Office models provide full VPN functionality. They can act as a Remote Access
VPN Client, a Remote Access VPN Server for multiple users, or a Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway.
A virtual private network (VPN) must include at least one Remote Access VPN Server or gateway. The type of VPN sites you include in a VPN depends on the type of VPN you want to create, Site-to-Site or Remote Access.
Note: A locally managed Remote Access VPN Server or gateway must have a static
IP address. If you need a Remote Access VPN Server or gateway with a dynamic IP address, you must use SofaWare Security Management Portal (SMP) management.
A SecuRemote/SecureClient/L2TP/Endpoint Connect or Safe@Office Remote
Access VPN Client can have a dynamic IP address, regardless of whether it is locally or remotely managed.
Note: This chapter explains how to define a VPN locally. However, if your appliance is centrally managed by a Service Center, then the Service Center can automatically deploy VPN configuration for your appliance.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 602
Overview
Site-to-Site VPNs
A Site-to-Site VPN consists of two or more Site-to-Site VPN Gateways that can communicate with each other in a bi-directional relationship. The connected networks function as a single network. You can use this type of VPN to mesh office branches into one corporate network.
Figure 37: Site-to-Site VPN
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 603
Overview
To create a Site-to-Site VPN with two VPN sites
1. On the first VPN site’s Safe@Office appliance, do the following: a. Define the second VPN site as a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway, using the
procedure Adding and Editing VPN Sites on page 621.
b. Enable a Remote Access VPN Server using the procedure Setting Up
Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server on page 607.
2. On the second VPN site’s Safe@Office appliance, do the following: a. Define the first VPN site as a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway, using the
procedure Adding and Editing VPN Sites on page 621.
b. Enable a Remote Access VPN Server using the procedure Setting Up
Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server on page 607.
Note: You can manually configure each VPN site's internal encryption domain via the
CLI. For information, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
604 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Overview
Remote Access VPNs
A Remote Access VPN consists of one Remote Access VPN Server or Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway, and one or more Remote Access VPN Clients. You can use this type of VPN to make an office network remotely available to authorized users, such as employees working from home, who connect to the office Remote Access VPN Server with their Remote
Access VPN Clients.
Figure 38: Remote Access VPN
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 605
Overview
To create a Remote Access VPN with two VPN sites
1. On the remote user VPN site's Safe@Office appliance, add the office Remote
Access VPN Server as a Remote Access VPN site.
See Adding and Editing VPN Sites on page 621.
The remote user's Safe@Office appliance will act as a Remote Access VPN Client.
2. On the office VPN site's Safe@Office appliance, enable a Remote Access
VPN Server.
See Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server on page 607.
Internal VPN Server
You can use your Safe@Office appliance as an internal VPN Server, for enhanced wired and wireless security. When an internal VPN Server is enabled, internal network PCs and
PDAs with the appropriate software installed can establish a Remote Access VPN session to the gateway. This means that connections from internal network users to the gateway can be encrypted and authenticated.
The benefits of using an internal VPN Server are two-fold:
• Accessibility
Using SecureClient, Endpoint Connect, or L2TP, you can enjoy a secure connection from anywhere—in your wireless network or on the road—without changing any settings. The standard is completely transparent and allows you to access company resources the same way, whether you are sitting at your desk or anywhere else.
Note: Only SecureClient and Endpoint Connect can connect to the SecuRemote
Internal VPN server, not SecuRemote.
• Security
Many of today's attacks are increasingly introduced from inside the network. Internal security threats cause outages, downtime, and lost revenue. Wired networks that deal with highly sensitive information—especially networks in public places, such as classrooms—are vulnerable to users trying to hack the internal network.
Using an internal VPN Server, along with a strict security policy for non-VPN users, can enhance security both for wired networks and for wireless networks, which are particularly vulnerable to security breaches.
606 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
For information on setting up your Safe@Office appliance as an internal VPN Server, see
Configuring the Internal VPN Server on page 610.
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN
Server
You can make your network available to authorized users connecting from the Internet or from your internal networks, by setting up your Safe@Office appliance as a VPN Server.
When the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server or SecuRemote Internal VPN Server is enabled, users can connect to the server via Check Point SecuRemote/SecureClient or via a
Safe@Office appliance in Remote Access VPN mode.
The Endpoint Connect VPN Server can be enabled in addition to one or more of the
SecuRemote VPN Servers, to allow users to connect from relevant locations using an
Endpoint Connect VPN Client. For example, if both the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN
Server and the Endpoint Connect VPN Server are enabled, but the SecuRemote Internal
VPN Server is not enabled, then users will be able to use the Endpoint Connect VPN
Client to connect from the Internet but not from your internal networks. Endpoint Connect users are automatically assigned to the OfficeMode network, enabling you to configure special security rules for them.
When the L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol) VPN Server is enabled, users can connect to the server using an L2TP client such as the Microsoft Windows L2TP IPSEC VPN Client.
L2TP users are automatically assigned to the OfficeMode network, enabling you to configure special security rules for them.
SecuRemote/SecureClient supports split tunneling, which means that VPN Clients can connect directly to the Internet, while traffic to and from VPN sites passes through the
VPN Server. In contrast, the L2TP VPN Client does not support split tunneling, meaning that all Internet traffic to and from a VPN Client passes through the VPN Server and is routed to the Internet.
Enabling the Safe@Office VPN Server for users connecting from your internal networks adds a layer of security to such connections. For example, while you could create a firewall rule allowing a specific user on the DMZ to access the LAN, enabling VPN access for the user means that such connections can be encrypted and authenticated. For more
information, see Internal VPN Server on page 606.
607 Chapter 19: Working With VPNs
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
Note: The use of all Remote VPN Clients is subject to Check Point’s purchasing terms and conditions.
To set up your Safe@Office appliance as a VPN Server
1. Configure the VPN Server in one or more of the following ways:
• To accept SecuRemote/SecureClient or Safe@Office remote access connections from the Internet.
See Configuring the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server on page 609.
• To accept SecuRemote/SecureClient connections from your internal networks.
See Configuring the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server on page 610.
• To accept Endpoint Connect remote access connections from the Internet and/or from your internal networks.
See Configuring the Endpoint Connect VPN Server on page 611.
• To accept L2TP remote access connections from the Internet, as well L2TP connections from your internal networks.
See Configuring the L2TP VPN Server on page 612.
2. If you configured the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server, install
SecuRemote/SecureClient on the desired internal network computers.
See Installing SecuRemote on page 613.
3. If you configured both the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server and the Endpoint
Connect VPN Server, install Endpoint Connect on the desired internal network computers.
See Installing Endpoint Connect on page 613.
4. If you configured the L2TP VPN Server, do the following: a. Configure the OfficeMode network.
See Configuring the OfficeMode Network on page 214.
All users connecting via L2TP will be assigned to the OfficeMode network. b. Configure L2TP VPN Clients on the desired internal network computers.
See Configuring L2TP VPN Clients on page 614.
5. Set up remote VPN access for users.
608 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
See Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users on page 687.
Note: Disabling the VPN Server for a specific type of connection will cause all existing
VPN tunnels of that type to disconnect.
Configuring the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server
To configure the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Server tab.
The
VPN Server page appears.
2. Select the
Allow remote users to connect from the Internet check box.
New check boxes appear.
3. To allow authenticated users connecting from the Internet to bypass NAT when connecting to your internal network, select the
Bypass NAT check box.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 609
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
4. To allow authenticated users connecting from the Internet to bypass the default firewall policy and access your internal network without restriction, select the
Bypass default firewall policy check box.
User-defined rules will still apply to the authenticated users.
5. Click
Apply.
The SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server is enabled for the specified connection types.
Configuring the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server
To configure the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Server tab.
The
VPN Server page appears.
2. Select the
Allow remote users to connect from my internal networks check box.
New check boxes appear.
3. To allow authenticated users connecting from internal networks to bypass the default firewall policy and access your internal network without restriction, select the
Bypass default firewall policy check box.
User-defined rules will still apply to the authenticated users.
4. Click
Apply.
Note: Bypass NAT is always enabled for the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server, and cannot be disabled.
The SecuRemote Internal VPN Server is enabled for the specified connection types.
610 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
Configuring the Endpoint Connect VPN Server
To configure the Endpoint Connect VPN Server
1. Do one or more of the following:
• To accept Endpoint Connect remote access connections from the Internet, configure the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server.
See Configuring the SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server on page 609.
• To accept Endpoint Connect connections from your internal networks, configure the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server.
See Configuring the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server on page 610.
2. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Server tab.
The
VPN Server page appears.
3. Select the
Allow Endpoint Connect users to connect check box.
The
Listening Port field appears.
4. (Optional) In the
Listening Port field, type the TCP port on which the appliance should accept incoming Endpoint Connect connection requests.
The default listening port is 443.
5. Click
Apply.
The Endpoint Connect Remote Access VPN Server is enabled.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 611
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
Configuring the L2TP VPN Server
To configure the L2TP VPN Server
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Server tab.
The
VPN Server page appears.
2. Select the
Allow L2TP clients to connect check box.
New check boxes appear.
3. In the
Preshared Secret field, type the preshared secret to use for secure communications between the L2TP clients and the VPN Server.
The secret can contain spaces and special characters. It is used to secure L2TP connections for all users.
In addition to entering this secret, each L2TP user will have to authenticate with a username and password.
For information on defining users with VPN access permissions, see Setting Up
Remote VPN Access for Users on page 687.
4. To allow authenticated users to bypass the default firewall policy and access your internal network without restriction, select the
Bypass default firewall
policy check box.
User-defined rules will still apply to the authenticated users.
5. Click
Apply.
The L2TP VPN Server is enabled for the specified connection types.
612 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Installing SecuRemote
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
If you configured the SecuRemote Internal VPN Server, you must install the
SecuRemote/SecureClient VPN Client on all internal network computers that should be allowed to remotely access your network via SecuRemote connections.
To install SecureClient/SecuRemote
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Server tab.
The
VPN Server page appears.
2. Click the
Download link.
The
VPN clients for UTM-1 Edge and Safe@Office page opens in a new window.
3. Follow the online instructions to complete installation.
SecureClient/SecuRemote is installed.
For information on using SecureClient/SecuRemote, see the User Help. To access
SecureClient/SecuRemote User Help, right-click on the VPN Client icon in the taskbar, select
Settings, and then click Help.
Installing Endpoint Connect
If you configured the Endpoint Connect Internal VPN Server, you must install the
Endpoint Connect VPN Client on all computers that should be allowed to remotely access your network.
To install Endpoint Connect
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Server tab.
The
VPN Server page appears.
2. Click the
Download link.
The
VPN clients for UTM-1 Edge and Safe@Office page opens in a new window.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 613
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
3. Follow the online instructions to complete installation.
Endpoint Connect is installed.
Configuring L2TP VPN Clients
If you configured the L2TP VPN Server, you must configure the L2TP VPN Client on all computers that should be allowed to remotely access your network via L2TP connections.
This procedure is relevant for computers with a Windows XP operating system.
Note: The Safe@Office appliance supports the following authentication methods:
• PAP. For both local users and RADIUS users
• EAP-MD5, CHAP. For local users, but not for RADIUS users
To configure L2TP VPN Clients on Microsoft Windows
1. Click
Start > Settings > Control Panel.
The
Control Panel window appears.
2. Double-click the
Network and Dial-up Connections icon.
The
Network and Dial-up Connections window appears.
3. Click
File > New Connection.
614 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
The
New Connection Wizard opens displaying the Welcome to the New Connection
Wizard screen.
4. Click
Next.
The
Network Connection Type dialog box appears.
5. Choose
Connect to the network at my workplace.
6. Click
Next.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 615
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
7. The
Network Connection dialog box appears.
8. Choose
Virtual Private Network connection.
9. Click
Next.
The
Connection Name dialog box appears.
10. In the
Company Name field, type your company's name.
11. Click
Next.
616 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Public Network dialog box appears.
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
12. Choose
Do not dial the initial connection.
13. Click
Next.
The
VPN Server Selection dialog box appears.
14. In the field, type the Safe@Office appliance's IP address.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 617
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
The
Completing the New Connection Wizard screen appears.
15. Click
Finish.
16. In the
Network and Dial-up Connections window, right-click on the L2TP connection, and click
Properties in the popup menu.
The connection's
Properties dialog box opens.
17. In the
Security tab, choose Advanced (custom settings).
18. Click
Settings.
618 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
The
Advanced Security Settings dialog box opens.
19. In the
Data encryption drop-down list, select Optional encryption.
20. Choose
Allow these protocols.
21. Select the
Unencrypted password (PAP) check box, and clear all other check boxes.
22. Click
OK.
23. In
Properties dialog box's Security tab, click IPSec Settings.
The
IPSec Settings dialog box opens.
24. Select the
Use pre-shared key for authentication check box.
25. In the
Key field, type the preshared secret you configured on the L2TP VPN
Server.
26. Click
OK.
27. In
Properties dialog box, click the Networking tab.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 619
Setting Up Your Safe@Office Appliance as a VPN Server
28. In the
Type of VPN drop-down list, select L2TP IPSec VPN.
29. Click
OK.
620 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
To add or edit VPN sites
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Sites tab.
The
VPN Sites page appears with a list of VPN sites.
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
2. Do one of the following:
• To add a VPN site, click New Site.
• To edit a VPN site, click Edit in the desired VPN site’s row.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 621
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
The
Safe@Office VPN Site Wizard opens, with the Welcome to the VPN Site Wizard dialog box displayed.
3. Do one of the following:
• Select Remote Access VPN to establish remote access from your Remote
Access VPN Client to a Remote Access VPN Server.
• Select Site-to-Site VPN to create a permanent bi-directional connection to another Site-to-Site VPN Gateway.
4. Click
Next.
622 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
Configuring a Remote Access VPN Site
If you selected
Remote Access VPN, the VPN Gateway Address dialog box appears.
1. Enter the IP address of the Remote Access VPN Server to which you want to connect, as given to you by the network administrator.
2. To allow the VPN site to bypass the default firewall policy and access your internal network without restriction, select the
Bypass default firewall policy check box.
User-defined rules will still apply to the VPN site.
3. Click
Next.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 623
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
The
VPN Network Configuration dialog box appears.
4. Specify how you want to obtain the VPN network configuration. Refer to VPN
Network Configuration Fields on page 633.
5. Click
Next.
The following things happen in the order below:
624 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
• If you chose Specify Configuration, a second VPN Network Configuration dialog box appears.
Complete the fields using the information in VPN Network Configuration Fields
Next.
• If you chose Specify Configuration or Route All Traffic, the Backup Gateway dialog box appears.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 625
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
In the
Backup Gateway IP field, type the name of the VPN site to use if the primary VPN site fails, and then click
Next.
• The Authentication Method dialog box appears.
6. Complete the fields using the information in Authentication Methods Fields
7. Click
Next.
626 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
Username and Password Authentication Method
If you selected
Username and Password, the VPN Login dialog box appears.
1. Complete the fields using the information in VPN Login Fields on page 635.
2. Click
Next.
• If you selected Automatic Login, the Connect dialog box appears.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 627
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
Do the following:
1) To try to connect to the Remote Access VPN Server, select the
Try to
Connect to the VPN Gateway check box.
This allows you to test the VPN connection.
Warning: If you try to connect to the VPN site before completing the wizard, all existing tunnels to this site will be terminated.
2) Click
Next.
If you selected
Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the Connecting… screen appears, and then the
Contacting VPN Site screen appears.
• The Site Name dialog box appears.
3. Enter a name for the VPN site.
You may choose any name.
4. Click
Next.
628 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
VPN Site Created screen appears.
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
5. Click
Finish.
The
VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in the
VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the VPN
Sites list.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 629
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
Certificate Authentication Method
If you selected
Certificate, the Connect dialog box appears.
1. To try to connect to the Remote Access VPN Server, select the
Try to Connect
to the VPN Gateway check box.
This allows you to test the VPN connection.
Warning: If you try to connect to the VPN site before completing the wizard, all existing tunnels to this site will be terminated.
2. Click
Next.
If you selected
Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the Connecting… screen appears, and then the
Contacting VPN Site screen appears.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 630
The
Site Name dialog box appears.
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
3. Enter a name for the VPN site.
You may choose any name.
4. Click
Next.
The
VPN Site Created screen appears.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 631
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
5. Click
Finish.
The
VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in the
VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the VPN
Sites list.
RSA SecurID Authentication Method
If you selected
RSA SecurID, the Site Name dialog box appears.
1. Enter a name for the VPN site.
You may choose any name.
2. Click
Next.
632 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
VPN Site Created screen appears.
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
3. Click
Finish.
The
VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in the
VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the VPN
Sites list.
Table 130: VPN Network Configuration Fields
In this field… Do this…
Download
Configuration
Click this option to obtain the network configuration by downloading it from the VPN site
.
This option will automatically configure your VPN settings, by downloading the network topology definition from the Remote Access VPN Server.
Note: Downloading the network configuration is only possible if you are connecting to a Check Point VPN-1 or Safe@Office Site-to-Site VPN
Gateway.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 633
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
In this field…
Specify
Configuration
Do this…
Click this option to provide the network configuration manually.
Route All Traffic Click this option to route all network traffic through the VPN site.
For example, if your VPN consists of a central office and a number of remote offices, and the remote offices are only allowed to access Internet resources through the central office, you can choose to route all traffic from the remote offices through the central office.
Note: You can only configure one VPN site to route all traffic.
Route Based VPN Click this option to create a virtual tunnel interface (VTI) for this site, so that it can participate in a route-based VPN.
Route-based VPNs allow routing connections over VPN tunnels, so that remote VPN sites can participate in dynamic or static routing schemes.
This improves network and VPN management efficiency for large networks.
For constantly changing networks, it is recommended to use a route-based
VPN combined with OSPF dynamic routing. This enables you to make frequent changes to the network topology, such as adding an internal network, without having to reconfigure static routes.
OSPF is enabled using CLI. For information on using CLI, see Controlling
the Appliance via the Command Line on page 711. For information on
the relevant commands for OSPF, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.
This option is only available when configuring a Site-to-Site VPN gateway.
Destination network Type up to three destination network addresses at the VPN site to which you want to connect.
634 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
In this field… Do this…
Subnet mask Select the subnet masks for the destination network addresses.
Note: Obtain the destination networks and subnet masks from the VPN site’s system administrator.
Table 131: Authentication Methods Fields
In this field… Do this…
Username and
Password
Select this option to use a user name and password for VPN authentication.
In the next step, you can specify whether you want to log in to the VPN site automatically or manually.
Certificate Select this option to use a certificate for VPN authentication.
If you select this option
, a certificate must have been installed. (Refer to
Installing a Certificate on page 659 for more information about
certificates and instructions on how to install a certificate.)
RSA SecurID
Token
Select this option to use an RSA SecurID token for VPN authentication.
When authenticating to the VPN site, you must enter a four-digit PIN code and the SecurID passcode shown in your SecurID token's display. The
RSA SecurID token generates a new passcode every minute.
SecurID is only supported in Remote Access manual login mode.
Table 132: VPN Login Fields
In this field…
Manual Login
Do this…
Click this option to configure the site for Manual Login.
Manual Login connects only your computer to the VPN site, and only when
635 Chapter 19: Working With VPNs
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
In this field… Do this… the appropriate user name and password have been entered. For further information on Automatic and Manual Login, see, Logging in to a VPN
Automatic Login
Username
Click this option to enable the Safe@Office appliance to log in to the VPN site automatically.
You must then fill in the
Username and Password fields.
Automatic Login provides all the computers on your internal network with constant access to the VPN site. For further information on Automatic and
Manual Login, see Logging in to a VPN Site on page 655.
Type the user name to be used for logging in to the VPN site.
Password Type the password to be used for logging in to the VPN site.
Configuring a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway
If you selected
Site-to-Site VPN, the VPN Gateway Address dialog box appears.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 636
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
1. Complete the fields using the information in VPN Gateway Address Fields on
2. Click
Next.
The
VPN Network Configuration dialog box appears.
3. Specify how you want to obtain the VPN network configuration. Refer to VPN
Network Configuration Fields on page 633.
4. Click
Next.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 637
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
• If you chose Specify Configuration, a second VPN Network Configuration dialog box appears.
Complete the fields using the information in VPN Network Configuration Fields
Next.
• If you chose Specify Configuration or Route All Traffic, the Backup Gateway dialog box appears.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 638
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
In the
Backup Gateway IP field, type the name of the VPN site to use if the primary VPN site fails, and then click
Next.
• If you chose Route Based VPN, the Route Based VPN dialog box appears.
Complete the fields using the information in Route Based VPN Fields on page
Next.
• The Authentication Method dialog box appears.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 639
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
5. Complete the fields using the information in Authentication Methods Fields
6. Click
Next.
640 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
Shared Secret Authentication Method
If you selected
Shared Secret, the Authentication dialog box appears.
If you chose
Download Configuration, the dialog box contains additional fields.
1. Complete the fields using the information in VPN Authentication Fields on
Next.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 641
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
The
Security Methods dialog box appears.
2. To configure advanced security settings, click
Show Advanced Settings.
New fields appear.
3. Complete the fields using the information in Security Methods Fields on page
Next.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 642
The
Connect dialog box appears.
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
4. To try to connect to the Remote Access VPN Server, select the
Try to Connect
to the VPN Gateway check box.
This allows you to test the VPN connection.
Warning: If you try to connect to the VPN site before completing the wizard, all existing tunnels to this site will be terminated.
5. Click
Next.
• If you selected Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the Connecting… screen appears, and then the
Contacting VPN Site screen appears.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 643
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
• The Site Name dialog box appears.
6. Type a name for the VPN site.
You may choose any name.
7. To keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive even if there is no network traffic between the Safe@Office appliance and the VPN site, select
Keep this site
alive.
8. Click
Next.
644 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
• If you selected Keep this site alive, and previously you chose Download
Configuration, the "Keep Alive" Configuration dialog box appears.
Do the following:
1) Type up to three IP addresses which the Safe@Office appliance should ping in order to keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive.
2) Click
Next.
• The VPN Site Created screen appears.
9. Click
Finish.
The
VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in the
VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the VPN
Sites list.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 645
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
Certificate Authentication Method
If you selected
Certificate, the following things happen:
• If you chose Download Configuration, the Authentication dialog box appears.
646
Complete the fields using the information in VPN Authentication Fields on page
Next.
• The Security Methods dialog box appears.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
1. To configure advanced security settings, click
Show Advanced Settings.
New fields appear.
2. Complete the fields using the information in Security Methods Fields on page
Next.
The
Connect dialog box appears.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 647
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
3. To try to connect to the Remote Access VPN Server, select the
Try to Connect
to the VPN Gateway check box.
This allows you to test the VPN connection.
Warning: If you try to connect to the VPN site before completing the wizard, all existing tunnels to this site will be terminated.
4. Click
Next.
• If you selected Try to Connect to the VPN Gateway, the following things happen:
The
Connecting… screen appears.
• The Contacting VPN Site screen appears.
• The Site Name dialog box appears.
5. Enter a name for the VPN site.
You may choose any name.
6. To keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive even if there is no network traffic between the Safe@Office appliance and the VPN site, select
Keep this site
alive.
7. Click
Next.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 648
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
• If you selected Keep this site alive, and previously you chose Download
Configuration, the "Keep Alive" Configuration dialog box appears.
Do the following:
1) Type up to three IP addresses which the Safe@Office appliance should ping in order to keep the tunnel to the VPN site alive.
2) Click
Next.
• The VPN Site Created screen appears.
8. Click
Finish.
The
VPN Sites page reappears. If you added a VPN site, the new site appears in the
VPN Sites list. If you edited a VPN site, the modifications are reflected in the VPN
Sites list.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 649
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
Table 133: VPN Gateway Address Fields
In this field… Do this…
Gateway Address Type the IP address of the Site-to-Site VPN Gateway to which you want to connect, as given to you by the network administrator.
Bypass NAT Select this option to allow the VPN site to bypass NAT when connecting to your internal network.
This option is selected by default.
Bypass default firewall policy
Select this option to allow the VPN site to bypass the default firewall policy and access your internal network without restriction.
User-defined rules will still apply to the VPN site.
Table 134: Route Based VPN Fields
In this field… Do this…
Tunnel Local IP Type a local IP address for this end of the VPN tunnel.
Tunnel Remote IP Type the IP address of the remote end of the VPN tunnel.
OSPF Cost Type the cost of this link for dynamic routing purposes.
The default value is 10.
If OSPF is not enabled, this setting is not used. OSPF is enabled using the
Safe@Office command line interface (CLI). For information on using CLI,
see Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line on page 711. For
information on the relevant commands for OSPF, refer to the Embedded
NGX CLI Reference Guide.
650 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 135: Authentication Methods Fields
In this field… Do this…
Shared Secret
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
Select this option to use a shared secret for VPN authentication.
A shared secret is a string used to identify VPN sites to each other.
Certificate Select this option to use a certificate for VPN authentication.
If you select this option
, a certificate must have been installed. (Refer to
Installing a Certificate on page 659 for more information about
certificates and instructions on how to install a certificate.)
Table 136: VPN Authentication Fields
In this field… Do this…
Topology User Type the topology user’s user name.
Topology Password Type the topology user’s password.
Use Shared Secret Type the shared secret to use for secure communications with the VPN site.
This shared secret is a string used to identify the VPN sites to each other.
The secret can contain spaces and special characters.
651 Chapter 19: Working With VPNs
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
Table 137: Security Methods Fields
In this field…
Phase 1
Do this…
Security Methods
Diffie-Hellman group
Select the encryption and integrity algorithm to use for IKE negotiations:
• Automatic. The Safe@Office appliance automatically selects the best security methods supported by the site. This is the default.
• A specific algorithm
Select the Diffie-Hellman group to use:
• Automatic. The Safe@Office appliance automatically selects a group. This is the default.
• A specific group
A group with more bits ensures a stronger key but lowers performance.
Renegotiate every Type the interval in minutes between IKE Phase-1 key negotiations. This is the IKE Phase-1 SA lifetime.
A shorter interval ensures higher security, but impacts heavily on performance. Therefore, it is recommended to keep the SA lifetime around its default value.
The default value is 1440 minutes (one day).
Phase 2
Security Methods Select the encryption and integrity algorithm to use for VPN traffic:
• Automatic. The Safe@Office appliance automatically selects the best security methods supported by the site. This is the default.
• A specific algorithm
652 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
Perfect Forward
Secrecy
Diffie-Hellman group
Adding and Editing VPN Sites
Do this…
Specify whether to enable Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS), by selecting one of the following:
• Enabled. PFS is enabled. The Diffie-Hellman group field is enabled.
• Disabled. PFS is disabled. This is the default.
Enabling PFS will generate a new Diffie-Hellman key during IKE Phase 2 and renew the key for each key exchange.
PFS increases security but lowers performance. It is recommended to enable PFS only in situations where extreme security is required.
Select the Diffie-Hellman group to use:
• Automatic. The Safe@Office appliance automatically selects a group. This is the default.
• A specific group
A group with more bits ensures a stronger key but lowers performance.
Renegotiate every Type the interval in seconds between IPSec SA key negotiations. This is the IKE Phase-2 SA lifetime.
A shorter interval ensures higher security.
The default value is 3600 seconds (one hour).
653 Chapter 19: Working With VPNs
Viewing and Deleting VPN Sites
Viewing and Deleting VPN Sites
To view or delete a VPN site
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Sites tab.
The
VPN Sites page appears, with a list of all VPN sites.
2. To delete a VPN site, do the following. a. In the desired VPN site's row, click the Erase icon.
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The VPN site is deleted.
Enabling/Disabling a VPN Site
You can only connect to VPN sites that are enabled.
To enable/disable a VPN site
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Sites tab.
The
VPN Sites page appears, with a list of VPN sites.
2. To enable a VPN site, do the following: a. Click the icon in the desired VPN site’s row.
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The icon changes to , and the VPN site is enabled.
3. To disable a VPN site, do the following:
654 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Logging in to a Remote Access VPN Site
Note: Disabling a VPN site eliminates the tunnel and erases the network topology. a. Click the icon in the desired VPN site’s row.
A confirmation message appears. b. Click
OK.
The icon changes to , and the VPN site is disabled.
Logging in to a Remote Access VPN Site
You need to manually log in to Remote Access VPN Servers configured for Manual Login.
You do not need to manually log in to a Remote Access VPN Server configured for
Automatic Login or a Site-to-Site VPN Gateway: all the computers on your network have constant access to it.
Manual Login can be done through either the Safe@Office Portal or the my.vpn page.
When you log in and traffic is sent to the VPN site, a VPN tunnel is established. Only the computer from which you logged in can use the tunnel. To share the tunnel with other computers in your home network, you must log in to the VPN site from those computers, using the same user name and password.
Note: You must use a single user name and password for each VPN destination gateway.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 655
Logging in to a Remote Access VPN Site
Logging in through the Safe@Office Portal
Note: You can only log in to sites that are configured for Manual Login.
To manually log in to a VPN site through the Safe@Office Portal
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the VPN Sites tab.
The
VPN Sites page appears.
2. Next to the desired VPN site, click
Login.
The
VPN Status dialog box appears.
3. Type your user name and password in the appropriate fields.
4. Click
Login.
• If the Safe@Office appliance is configured to automatically download the network configuration, the Safe@Office appliance downloads the network configuration.
• If when adding the VPN site you specified a network configuration, the
Safe@Office appliance attempts to create a tunnel to the VPN site.
Once the Safe@Office appliance has finished connecting, the dialog box displays
“Connected”.
• The VPN Status dialog box remains open until you manually log out of the
VPN site.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 656
Logging in through the my.vpn page
Logging in to a Remote Access VPN Site
To manually log in to a VPN site through the my.vpn page
1. Direct your Web browser to http://my.vpn
The
VPN Login screen appears.
2. In the
Site Name list, select the site to which you want to log in.
3. Enter your user name and password in the appropriate fields.
4. Click
Login.
• If the Safe@Office appliance is configured to automatically download the network configuration, the Safe@Office appliance downloads the network configuration.
• If when adding the VPN site you specified a network configuration, the
Safe@Office appliance attempts to create a tunnel to the VPN site.
• The VPN Login Status box appears. The Status field tracks the connection’s progress.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 657
Logging Out of a Remote Access VPN Site
• Once the Safe@Office appliance has finished connecting, the Status field changes to “Connected”.
• The VPN Login Status box remains open until you manually log out of the
VPN site.
Logging Out of a Remote Access VPN Site
You can manually log out of a VPN site, if it is a Remote Access VPN site configured for
Manual Login.
To log out of a VPN site
• In the VPN Login Status box, click Logout.
All open tunnels from the Safe@Office appliance to the VPN site are closed, and the
VPN Login Status box closes.
Note: Closing the browser or dismissing the VPN Login Status box will also terminate the VPN session within a short time.
Using Certificates
A digital certificate is a secure means of authenticating the Safe@Office appliance to other
Site-to-Site VPN Gateways. The certificate is issued by the Certificate Authority (CA) to entities such as gateways, users, or computers. The entity then uses the certificate to identify itself and provide verifiable information.
For instance, the certificate includes the Distinguished Name (DN) (identifying information) of the entity, as well as the public key (information about itself). After two entities exchange and validate each other's certificates, they can begin encrypting information between themselves using the public keys in the certificates.
The certificate also includes a fingerprint, a unique text used to identify the certificate. You can email your certificate's fingerprint to the remote user. Upon connecting to the
658 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Certificates
Safe@Office VPN Server for the first time, the entity should check that the VPN peer's fingerprint displayed in the SecuRemote/SecureClient VPN Client is identical to the fingerprint received.
The Safe@Office appliance supports certificates encoded in the PKCS#12 (Personal
Information Exchange Syntax Standard) format.
Installing a Certificate
The Safe@Office appliance enables you to install PKCS#12 certificates in the following ways:
• By generating a self-signed certificate.
See Generating a Self-Signed Certificate on page 660.
• By importing a certificate.
The PKCS#12 file you import must have a ".p12" file extension. If you do not have such a PKCS#12 file, obtain one from your network security administrator.
See Importing a Certificate on page 664.
Note: To use certificates authentication, each Safe@Office appliance should have a unique certificate. Do not use the same certificate for more than one gateway.
Note: If your Safe@Office appliance is centrally managed, a certificate is automatically generated and downloaded to your appliance. In this case, there is no need to generate a self-signed certificate.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 659
Using Certificates
Generating a Self-Signed Certificate
To generate a self-signed certificate
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the Certificate tab.
The
Certificate page appears.
2. Click
Install Certificate.
660 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Certificates
The
Safe@Office Certificate Wizard opens, with the Certificate Wizard dialog box displayed.
3. Click
Generate a self-signed security certificate for this gateway.
The
Create Self-Signed Certificate dialog box appears.
4. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
5. Click
Next.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 661
Using Certificates
The Safe@Office appliance generates the certificate. This may take a few seconds.
The
Done dialog box appears, displaying the certificate's details.
6. Click
Finish.
The Safe@Office appliance installs the certificate. If a certificate is already installed, it is overwritten.
The Certificate Wizard closes.
The
Certificates page displays the following information:
• The gateway's certificate
• The gateway's name
• The gateway certificate's fingerprint
• The CA's certificate
• The name of the CA that issued the certificate (in this case, the Safe@Office gateway)
• The CA certificate's fingerprint
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 662
Using Certificates
• The starting and ending dates between which the gateway's certificate and the
CA's certificate are valid
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 663
Using Certificates
Table 138: Certificate Fields
In this field… Do this…
Country Select your country from the drop-down list.
Organization Name Type the name of your organization.
Organizational Unit Type the name of your division.
Gateway Name
Valid Until
Type the gateway's name. This name will appear on the certificate, and will be visible to remote users inspecting the certificate.
This field is filled in automatically with the gateway's MAC address. If desired, you can change this to a more descriptive name.
Use the drop-down lists to specify the month, day, and year when this certificate should expire.
Note: You must renew the certificate when it expires.
Importing a Certificate
To install a certificate
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the Certificate tab.
The
Certificate page appears.
2. Click
Install Certificate.
The
Safe@Office Certificate Wizard opens, with the Certificate Wizard dialog box displayed.
3. Click
Import a security certificate in PKCS#12 format.
664 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Import Certificate dialog box appears.
Using Certificates
4. Click
Browse to open a file browser from which to locate and select the file.
The filename that you selected is displayed.
5. Click
Next.
The
Import-Certificate Passphrase dialog box appears. This may take a few moments.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 665
Using Certificates
6. Type the pass-phrase you received from the network security administrator.
7. Click
Next.
The
Done dialog box appears, displaying the certificate's details.
8. Click
Finish.
The Safe@Office appliance installs the certificate. If a certificate is already installed, it is overwritten.
The Certificate Wizard closes.
The
Certificates page displays the following information:
• The gateway's certificate
• The gateway's name
• The gateway certificate's fingerprint
• The CA's certificate
• The name of the CA that issued the certificate
• The CA certificate's fingerprint
• The starting and ending dates between which the gateway's certificate and the
CA's certificate are valid
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 666
Uninstalling a Certificate
Using Certificates
If you uninstall the certificate, no certificate will exist on the Safe@Office appliance, and you will not be able to connect to the VPN if a certificate is required.
You cannot uninstall the certificate if there is a VPN site currently defined to use certificate authentication.
Note: If you want to replace a currently-installed certificate, there is no need to uninstall the certificate first. When you install the new certificate, the old certificate will be overwritten.
To uninstall a certificate
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the Certificate tab.
The
Certificate page appears with the name of the currently installed certificate.
2. Click
Uninstall.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click
OK.
The certificate is uninstalled.
A success message appears.
4. Click
OK.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 667
Using Certificates
Exporting Certificates
The Safe@Office appliance allows you to export the following certificates:
• The device certificate
Exporting the device certificate is useful for backup purposes.
Note: If your Safe@Office appliance is centrally managed, there is no need to back up the device certificate, as it can be downloaded from the Service Center as needed.
• The device Certificate Authority (CA) certificate
When using the Safe@Office EAP authenticator with WPA-Enterprise or 802.1x security protocols, you must export the device CA certificate and send it to clients that need to connect to the Safe@Office appliance. For information on the EAP
authenticator, see Using the EAP Authenticator on page 433.
The certificates are exported in PKCS#12 format (that is, as a *.p12 file).
Exporting the Safe@Office Appliance Certificate
To export the Safe@Office appliance certificate
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the Certificate tab.
The
Certificate page appears with the name of the currently installed certificate.
2. Click
Export Certificate.
A standard
File Download dialog box appears.
3. Click
Save.
The
Save As dialog box appears.
4. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
5. Type a name for the certificate file and click
Save.
668 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Certificates
The certificate is exported as a *.p12 file and saved to the specified directory.
Note: This file contains the gateway's private key, which is confidential and must not be passed to unauthorized users.
Exporting the CA Certificate
To export the CA certificate
1. Click
VPN in the main menu, and click the Certificate tab.
The
Certificate page appears with the name of the currently installed certificate.
2. Click
Export CA Certificate.
A standard
File Download dialog box appears.
3. Click
Save.
The
Save As dialog box appears.
4. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
5. Type a name for the CA certificate file and click
Save.
The CA certificate is exported as a *.p12 file and saved to the specified directory.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 669
Viewing VPN Tunnels
Viewing VPN Tunnels
You can view a list of currently established VPN tunnels. VPN tunnels are created and closed as follows:
• Remote Access VPN sites configured for Automatic Login and Site-to-Site VPN
Gateways
A tunnel is created whenever your computer attempts any kind of communication with a computer at the VPN site. The tunnel is closed when not in use for a period of time.
Note: Although the VPN tunnel is automatically closed, the site remains open, and if you attempt to communicate with the site, the tunnel will be reestablished.
• Remote Access VPN sites configured for Manual Login
A tunnel is created whenever your computer attempts any kind of communication with a computer at the VPN site, after you have manually logged in to the site. All open tunnels connecting to the site are closed when you manually log out.
To view VPN tunnels
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Tunnels tab.
670 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
VPN Tunnels page appears with a table of open VPN tunnels.
Viewing VPN Tunnels
The
VPN Tunnels page includes the information described in the following table.
2. To resize a column, drag the relevant column divider right or left.
3. To refresh the table, click
Refresh.
Table 139: VPN Tunnels Page Fields
This field… Displays…
Type The currently active security protocol (IPSEC).
Source The IP address or address range of the entity from which the tunnel originates.
The entity's type is indicated by an icon. See VPN Tunnel Icons on page
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 671
Viewing VPN Tunnels
This field…
Destination
Displays…
The IP address or address range of the entity to which the tunnel is connected.
The entity's type is indicated by an icon. See VPN Tunnel Icons on page
Security The type of encryption used to secure the connection, and the type of
Message Authentication Code (MAC) used to verify the integrity of the message. This information is presented in the following format: Encryption type/Authentication type.
In addition, if IPSec compression is enabled for the tunnel, this field displays the icon.
Note: All VPN settings are automatically negotiated between the two sites.
The encryption and authentication schemes used for the connection are the strongest of those used at the two sites.
Your Safe@Office appliance supports AES, 3DES, and DES encryption schemes, and MD5 and SHA authentication schemes.
Established The time at which the tunnel was established.
This information is presented in the format hh:mm:ss, where: hh=hours mm=minutes ss=seconds
Table 140: VPN Tunnels Icons
This icon… Represents…
This gateway
672 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections
This icon… Represents…
A network for which an IKE Phase-2 tunnel was negotiated
A Remote Access VPN Server
A Site-to-Site VPN Gateway
A remote access VPN user
An L2TP user
Viewing IKE Traces for VPN Connections
If you are experiencing VPN connection problems, you can save a trace of IKE (Internet
Key Exchange) negotiations to a file, and then use the free IKE View tool to view the file.
The IKE View tool is available for the Windows platform.
Note: Before viewing IKE traces, it is recommended to do the following:
• The Safe@Office appliance stores traces for all recent IKE negotiations.
If you want to view only new IKE trace data, clear all IKE trace data currently stored on the Safe@Office appliance.
• Close all existing VPN tunnels except for the problematic tunnel, so as to make it easier to locate the problematic tunnel's IKE negotiation trace in the exported file.
To clear all currently-stored IKE traces
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Tunnels tab.
The
VPN Tunnels page appears with a table of open tunnels to VPN sites.
2. Click
Clear IKE Trace.
All IKE trace data currently stored on the Safe@Office appliance is cleared.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 673
Viewing VPN Topology
To view the IKE trace for a connection
1. Establish a VPN tunnel to the VPN site with which you are experiencing connection problems.
For information on when and how VPN tunnels are established, see Viewing VPN
2. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Tunnels tab.
The
VPN Tunnels page appears with a table of open tunnels to VPN sites.
3. Click
Save IKE Trace.
A standard
File Download dialog box appears.
4. Click
Save.
The
Save As dialog box appears.
5. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
6. Type a name for the *.elg file and click
Save.
The *.elg file is created and saved to the specified directory. This file contains the IKE traces of all currently-established VPN tunnels.
7. Use the IKE View tool to open and view the *.elg file, or send the file to technical support.
Viewing VPN Topology
You can view the topology of VPN sites to which the Safe@Office appliance is currently connected.
To view VPN topology
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the Tunnels tab.
The
VPN Tunnels page appears with a table of open tunnels to VPN sites.
2. Click
View Topology.
674 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Viewing VPN Topology
The
VPN Topology page appears displaying a tree of VPN sites to which the appliance is connected.
3. To view topology information for a VPN site, in the tree, click the VPN site's name.
The right pane displays the information described in the following table.
Chapter 19: Working With VPNs 675
Viewing VPN Topology
Table 141: VPN Topology Page Fields
This field… Displays…
Split DNS The VPN site's split DNS mappings.
When split DNS is configured for a VPN site, certain domain suffixes are mapped to corporate DNS servers. This means that requests for these domain suffixes are sent to the specific DNS servers to which they are mapped, while all other requests are sent to the ISP's DNS servers. For example, a VPN site's split DNS mappings might indicate that all requests for the domain suffix ".acme.com" should be sent to the Acme company's corporate DNS servers.
Trusted CAs
Sub-CAs
A list of root CAs at the VPN site, whose certificates are trusted by this gateway.
A list of second-level CAs at the VPN site, which are signed by a trusted root
CA.
676 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Changing Your Login Credentials
Chapter 20
Managing Users
This chapter describes how to manage Safe@Office appliance users. You can define multiple users, set their passwords, and assign them various permissions.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Changing Your Login Credentials ............................................................ 677
Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users ......................................................... 685
Viewing and Deleting Users ..................................................................... 686
Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users ............................................... 687
Using RADIUS Authentication ................................................................ 688
Configuring RADIUS Attributes .............................................................. 694
Changing Your Login Credentials
You can change your username and password at any time.
To change your login credentials
1. Click
Users in the main menu, and click the Internal Users tab.
Chapter 20: Managing Users 677
Changing Your Login Credentials
The
Internal Users page appears.
2. In the row of your username, click
Edit.
678 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Changing Your Login Credentials
The
Account Wizard opens displaying the Set User Details dialog box.
3. Edit the
Username field.
4. Edit the
Password and Confirm password fields.
Note: Use 5 to 25 characters (letters or numbers) for the new password.
5. Click
Next.
Chapter 20: Managing Users 679
Adding and Editing Users
The
Set User Permissions dialog box appears.
6. Click
Finish.
Your changes are saved.
Adding and Editing Users
This procedure explains how to add and edit users.
For information on quickly adding guest HotSpot users via a shortcut that the Safe@Office
appliance provides, see Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users on page 685.
To add or edit a user
1. Click
Users in the main menu, and click the Internal Users tab.
The
Internal Users page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• To create a new user, click New User.
• To edit an existing user, click
next to the desired user.
680 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding and Editing Users
The
Account Wizard opens displaying the Set User Details dialog box.
3. Complete the fields using the information in Set User Details Fields on page
4. Click
Next.
The
Set User Permissions dialog box appears.
Chapter 20: Managing Users 681
Adding and Editing Users
The options that appear on the page are dependant on the software and services you are using.
5. Complete the fields using the information in Set User Permissions Fields on
6. Click
Finish.
The user is saved.
Table 142: Set User Details Fields
In this field… Do this…
Username Enter a username for the user.
Password
Confirm Password
Enter a password for the user. Use five to 25 characters (letters or numbers) for the new password.
Re-enter the user’s password.
Expires On To specify an expiration time for the user, select this option and specify the expiration date and time in the fields provided.
When the user account expires, it is locked, and the user can no longer log in to the Safe@Office appliance.
If you do not select this option, the user will not expire.
682 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 143: Set User Permissions Fields
In this field... Do this...
Adding and Editing Users
Administrator Level Select the user’s level of access to the Safe@Office Portal.
The levels are:
• No Access: The user cannot access the Safe@Office Portal.
• Read Only: The user can log in to the Safe@Office Portal, but cannot modify system settings or export the appliance configuration via the
Setup>Tools page. For example, you could assign this administrator level to technical support personnel who need to view the Event Log.
• Read/Write: The user can log in to the Safe@Office Portal and modify system settings.
The default level is
No Access.
The “admin” user’s Administrator Level (Read/Write) cannot be changed.
VPN Remote Access Select this option to allow the user to connect to this Safe@Office appliance using their VPN client.
For further information on setting up VPN remote access, see Setting
Up Remote VPN Access for Users on page 687
Web Filtering
Override
HotSpot Access
Select this option to allow the user to override the Web Filtering service and Web rules.
This option cannot be changed for the “admin” user.
Select this option to allow the user to log in to the My HotSpot page.
For information on Secure HotSpot, see Configuring Secure HotSpot
This option only appears in Safe@Office <500PP>.
Chapter 20: Managing Users 683
Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users
Remote Desktop
Access
Select this option to allow the user to log in to the my.firewall portal, view the
My Computers page, and remotely access computers' desktops, using the Remote Desktop feature.
Note: The user can perform these actions, even if their level of administrative access is "No Access".
For information on Remote Desktop, see Using Remote Desktop on
Users Manager
Network Access
Select this option to allow the user to log in to the Safe@Office Portal and add, edit, or delete "No Access"-level users, but not modify other system settings.
For example, you could assign this administrator level to clerks who need to manage HotSpot users.
Select this option to allow the user to connect to this Safe@Office appliance via a wireless client or by connecting to the appliance's ports, when the Safe@Office EAP authenticator is used.
For information on the Safe@Office EAP authenticator, see Using the
Safe@Office EAP Authenticator on page 433.
684 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users
Adding Quick Guest HotSpot Users
The Safe@Office appliance provides a shortcut for quickly adding a guest HotSpot user.
This is useful in situations where you want to grant temporary network access to guests, for example in an Internet caf
י. The shortcut also enables printing the guest user's details in one click.
By default, the quick guest user has the following characteristics:
• Username in the format guest<number>, where <number> is a unique three-digit number.
For example: guest123
• Randomly generated password
• Expires in 24 hours
• Administration Level: No Access
• Permissions: HotSpot Access only
For information on configuring Secure HotSpot, see Using Secure HotSpot on page 419.
For information on changing the default expiration period, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.
To quickly create a guest user
1. Click
Users in the main menu, and click the Internal Users tab.
The
Internal Users page appears.
2. Click
Quick Guest.
Chapter 20: Managing Users 685
Viewing and Deleting Users
The
Account Wizard opens displaying the Save Quick Guest dialog box.
3. In the
Expires field, click on the arrows to specify the expiration date and time.
4. To print the user details, click
Print.
5. Click
Finish.
The guest user is saved.
You can edit the guest user's details and permissions using the procedure Adding and
Viewing and Deleting Users
To view or delete users
1. Click
Users in the main menu, and click the Internal Users tab.
The
Internal Users page appears with a list of all users and their permissions.
The expiration time of expired users appears in red.
2. To delete a user, do the following:
686 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
a) In the desired user’s row, click .
A confirmation message appears. b) Click
OK.
The user is deleted.
3. To delete all expired users, do the following: a) Click
Clear Expired.
A confirmation message appears. b) Click
OK.
The expired users are deleted.
Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users
Setting Up Remote VPN Access for Users
If you are using your Safe@Office appliance as a SecuRemote Remote Access VPN
Server, as an internal VPN Server, or as an L2TP VPN Server, you can allow users to access it remotely through their Remote Access VPN Clients (a Check Point SecureClient,
Check Point SecuRemote, an L2TP VPN Client, an Endpoint Connect client, or another
Embedded NGX appliance).
To set up remote VPN access for a user
1. Enable your VPN Server, using the procedure Setting Up Your Safe@Office
Appliance as a VPN Server on page 607.
2. Add or edit the user, using the procedure Adding and Editing Users on page
You must select the
VPN Remote Access option.
Chapter 20: Managing Users 687
Using RADIUS Authentication
Using RADIUS Authentication
You can use Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) to authenticate both
Safe@Office appliance users and Remote Access VPN Clients trying to connect to the
Safe@Office appliance.
Note: When RADIUS authentication is in use, the Safe@Office appliance must have a certificate.
When a user tries to log in to the Safe@Office Portal, the Safe@Office appliance sends the entered user name and password to the RADIUS server. The server then checks whether the RADIUS database contains a matching user name and password pair. If so, then the user is logged in.
By default, all RADIUS-authenticated users are assigned the set of permissions specified in the Safe@Office Portal's
RADIUS page. However, you can configure the RADIUS server to pass the Safe@Office appliance a specific set of permissions to grant the authenticated user, instead of these default permissions. This is done by configuring the RADIUS
Vendor-Specific Attribute (VSA) with a set of attributes containing permission information for specific users. If the VSA is configured for a user, then the RADIUS server passes the VSA to the Safe@Office appliance as part of the response to the authentication request, and the gateway assigns the user permissions as specified in the VSA. If the VSA is not returned by the RADIUS server for a specific user, the gateway will use the default permission set for this user.
In addition, you can configure the RADIUS server to pass the Safe@Office appliance a
Secure HotSpot session timeout value. When the RADIUS server's Session-Timeout
Attribute is configured, HotSpot users will be logged out after the specified session timeout has elapsed.
Finally, you can track network usage, by configuring RADIUS accounting. When this option is enabled, the Safe@Office appliance sends session information to the RADIUS server at the begining and end of a user session, including the unique session identifier, session start/end time, and additional statistical data. This data can then be used to charge the user for network usage and to compile performance reports. For example, when Secure
HotSpot is enabled, you can use RADIUS accounting to measure HotSpot sessions and bill
HotSpot users accordingly. You can also use third-party products with the RADIUS server
688 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using RADIUS Authentication to analyze RADIUS accounting data and generate performance reports for Secure HotSpot usage.
Note: You can configure the Safe@Office appliance to send accounting information to the RADIUS server throughout the entire session. This allows for richer data collection. For information, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
To use RADIUS authentication
1. Click
Users in the main menu, and click the RADIUS tab.
The
RADIUS page appears.
Chapter 20: Managing Users 689
Using RADIUS Authentication
2. Complete the fields using the following table.
3. Click
Apply.
4. To restore the default RADIUS settings, do the following: a) Click
Default.
A confirmation message appears. b) Click
OK.
The RADIUS settings are reset to their defaults. For information on the default values, refer to the following table.
5. If desired, configure user permissions and/or the HotSpot session timeout on the RADIUS server.
See Configuring RADIUS Attributes on page 694.
Table 144: RADIUS Page Fields
In this field…
Primary/Secondary
RADIUS Server
Do this…
Configure the primary and secondary RADIUS servers.
By default, the Safe@Office appliance sends a request to the primary
RADIUS server first. If the primary RADIUS server does not respond after three attempts, the Safe@Office appliance will send the request to the secondary RADIUS server.
Address
Port
Shared Secret
Type the IP address of the computer that will run the RADIUS service
(one of your network computers) or click the corresponding
This Computer button
to allow your computer to host the service.
To clear the text box, click
Clear.
Type the port number on the RADIUS server’s host computer.
The default port number is 1812.
Type the shared secret to use for secure communication with the
RADIUS server.
690 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
Realm
Using RADIUS Authentication
Do this…
If your organization uses RADIUS realms, type the realm to append to
RADIUS requests. The realm will be appended to the username as follows: <username>@<realm>
For example, if you set the realm to “myrealm”, and the user "JohnS" attempts to log in to the Safe@Office Portal, the Safe@Office appliance will send the RADIUS server an authentication request with the username “JohnS@myrealm”.
This field is optional.
Timeout Type the interval of time in seconds between attempts to communicate with the RADIUS server.
The default value is 3 seconds.
RADIUS Accounting Select this option to enabling RADIUS accounting on the server.
The
Accounting Port field and the Advanced Accounting area appear.
Accounting Port Type the port number on the RADIUS server's host computer to use for
RADIUS accounting purposes.
The default port number is 1813.
RADIUS User
Permissions
If the RADIUS VSA (Vendor-Specific Attribute) is configured for a user, the fields in this area will have no effect, and the user will be granted the permissions specified in the VSA.
If the VSA is not configured for the user, the permissions configured in this area will be used.
691 Chapter 20: Managing Users
Using RADIUS Authentication
In this field… Do this…
Administrator Level Select the level of access to the Safe@Office Portal to assign to all users authenticated by the RADIUS server.
The levels are:
• No Access: The user cannot access the Safe@Office Portal.
• Read Only: The user can log in to the Safe@Office Portal, but cannot modify system settings or export the appliance configuration via the
Setup>Tools page. For example, you could assign this administrator level to technical support personnel who need to view the Event Log.
• Read/Write: The user can log in to the Safe@Office Portal and modify system settings.
The default level is
No Access.
VPN Remote Access Select this option to allow all users authenticated by the RADIUS server to connect to this Safe@Office appliance using their VPN client.
For further information on setting up VPN remote access, see Setting
Up Remote VPN Access for Users on page 687.
Web Filtering
Override
HotSpot Access
Select this option to allow all users authenticated by the RADIUS server to override Web Filtering.
This option only appears if the Web Filtering service is defined.
Select this option to allow all users authenticated by the RADIUS server to access the My HotSpot page.
For information on Secure HotSpot, see Configuring Secure HotSpot
This option only appears in Safe@Office <500PP>.
692 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
In this field…
Remote Desktop
Access
Users Manager
Advanced Accounting
Send Periodic
Updates
Update Interval
Using RADIUS Authentication
Do this…
Select this option to allow all users authenticated by the RADIUS server to log in to the my.firewall portal, view the
Active Computers page, and remotely access computers' desktops, using the Remote Desktop feature.
Note: Authenticated users can perform these actions, even if their level of administrative access is "No Access".
For information on Remote Desktop, see Using Remote Desktop on
Select this option to allow all users authenticated by the RADIUS server to log in to the Safe@Office Portal and add, edit, or delete "No Access"level users, but not modify other system settings.
For example, you could assign this administrator level to clerks who need to manage HotSpot users.
If you enabled RADIUS accounting, this area appears.
Select this option to specify that the Safe@Office appliance should send accounting information to the RADIUS server throughout a user session.
If you do not select this option, the Safe@Office appliance will only send accounting information to the RADIUS server at the beginning and end of the session.
The interval of time in seconds, at which the Safe@Office appliance should send accounting information to the RADIUS server during a session.
The default value is 0.
Chapter 20: Managing Users 693
Configuring RADIUS Attributes
Configuring RADIUS Attributes
To configure a timeout for Secure HotSpot sessions
• Set the Session-Timeout Attribute (attribute 27) to the number of seconds after which users should be automatically logged out from the hotspot.
To assign permissions to specific RADIUS-authenticated users
1. Create a remote access policy as follows: a) Assign the policy’s VSA (attribute 26) the SofaWare vendor code (6983). b) For each permission you want to grant, configure the relevant attribute of the VSA with the desired value, as described in the following table.
For example, to assign the user VPN access permissions, set attribute number 2 to
“true”.
2. Assign the policy to the desired user or user group.
For detailed instructions and examples, refer to the "Configuring the RADIUS Vendor-
Specific Attribute" white paper.
694 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 145: VSA Syntax
Permission Description
Admin
Configuring RADIUS Attributes
Indicates the administrator’s level of access to the Safe@Office
Portal
1
Attribute
Number
Attribute
Format
String
Attribute Values
none. The user cannot access the
Safe@Office Portal.
readonly. The user can log in to the
Safe@Office Portal, but cannot modify system settings.
users-manager. The user can log in to the Safe@Office
Portal and add, edit, or delete "No
Access"-level users.
However, the user cannot modify other system settings.
readwrite. The user can log in to the
Safe@Office Portal and modify system settings.
Notes
695 Chapter 20: Managing Users
Configuring RADIUS Attributes
Permission Description
VPN
Hotspot
UFP
Indicates whether the user can access the network from a
Remote Access
VPN Client.
2
Indicates whether the user can log in via the My HotSpot page.
Indicates whether the user can override Web
Filtering.
Attribute
Number
Attribute
Format
String
Attribute Values
3
4
String
String
Notes
true. The user can remotely access the network via VPN.
This permission is only relevant if the Safe@Office
false. The user cannot remotely access the network via VPN.
Remote Access
VPN Server is enabled. The gateway must have a certificate.
true. The user can access the Internet via My HotSpot.
false. The user cannot access the
Internet via My
HotSpot.
This permission is only relevant if the Secure
HotSpot feature is enabled.
true. The user can override Web
Filtering.
false. The user cannot override
Web Filtering.
This permission is only relevant if the Web Filtering service is enabled.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 696
Permission Description
Configuring RADIUS Attributes
RemoteDe sktop
Indicates whether the user can remotely access computers' desktops, using the Remote
Desktop feature.
5
Attribute
Number
Attribute
Format
String
Attribute Values Notes
true. The user can log in to the my.firewall portal, view the
Active
Computers page, and remotely access computers' desktops
(irrespective of their level of administrative access).
This permission is only relevant if the Remote
Desktop feature is enabled.
false. The user cannot remotely access computers' desktops.
697 Chapter 20: Managing Users
Overview
Chapter 21
Using Remote Desktop
This chapter describes how to remotely access the desktop of each of your computers, using the Safe@Office appliance's Remote Desktop feature.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Configuring Remote Desktop ................................................................... 701
Configuring the Host Computer ............................................................... 704
Accessing a Remote Computer's Desktop ................................................ 707
Overview
Your Safe@Office appliance includes an integrated client for Microsoft Terminal Services, allowing you to remotely access the desktop of each of your computers from anywhere, via the Safe@Office Portal. You can even redirect your printers or ports to a remote computer, so that you can print and transfer files with ease.
Remote Desktop sessions use the Microsoft Remote Desktop Protocol (RDP) on TCP port
3389. This port is opened dynamically between the Remote Desktop client and the Remote
Desktop server as needed, meaning that the port is not exposed to the Internet, and your constant security is ensured.
Note: By default, the Microsoft RDP protocol is secured with 128-bit RC4 encryption.
For the strongest possible security, it is recommended to use Remote Desktop over an IPSec VPN connection. For information on VPNs, see Working With VPNs on
Chapter 21: Using Remote Desktop 699
Workflow
Workflow
To use Remote Desktop
1. Configure Remote Desktop.
See Configuring Remote Desktop on page 701.
2. Enable the Remote Desktop server on computers that authorized users should be allowed to remotely access.
See Configuring the Host Computer on page 704.
3. Grant Remote Desktop Access permissions to users who should be allowed to remotely access desktops.
See Adding and Editing Users on page 680.
4. The authorized users can access remote computers' desktops as desired.
See Accessing a Remote Computer's Desktop on page 707.
700 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Remote Desktop
Configuring Remote Desktop
To configure Remote Desktop
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Remote Desktop tab.
The
Remote Desktop page appears.
2. Do one of the following:
• To enable Remote Desktop, select the Allow remote desktop access check box.
Chapter 21: Using Remote Desktop 701
Configuring Remote Desktop
New fields appear.
• To disable Remote Desktop, clear the Allow remote desktop access check box.
Fields disappear.
3. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
4. Click
Apply.
702 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring Remote Desktop
Table 146: Remote Desktop Options
In this field…
Sharing
Do this…
Share local drives Select this option to allow the host computer to access hard drives on the client computer. This enables remote users to access their local hard drives when logged in to the host computer.
Share local printers
Share local smartcards
Share local COM ports
Advanced
Full screen mode
Select this option to allow the host computer to access printers on the client computer. This enables remote users to access their local printer when logged in to the host computer.
Select this option to allow the host computer to access smartcards on the client computer. This enables remote users to access their local smartcards when logged in to the host computer.
Select this option to allow the host computer to access COM ports on the client computer. This enables remote users to access their local
COM ports when logged in to the host computer.
Select this option to open Remote Desktop sessions on the whole screen.
Optimize performance for slow links
Select this option to optimize Remote Desktop sessions for slow links.
Bandwidth-consuming options, such as wallpaper and menu animations, will be disabled.
Chapter 21: Using Remote Desktop 703
Configuring the Host Computer
Configuring the Host Computer
To enable remote users to connect to a computer, you must enable the Remote Desktop server on that computer.
Note: The host computer must have one of the following operating systems installed:
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003
• Microsoft Windows XP Professional
• Microsoft Windows XP Media Center
• Microsoft Windows XP Tablet PC 2005
To enable users to remotely connect to a computer
1. Log on to the desired computer as an administrator.
2. For each remote user who should be allowed to access this computer, create a user account with a password.
For information, refer to Microsoft documentation.
3. On the desktop, right-click on
My Computer, and select Properties in the popup menu that appears.
The
System Properties dialog box appears displaying the General tab.
4. Click the
Remote tab.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 704
The
Remote tab appears.
Configuring the Host Computer
5. Select the
Allow users to connect remotely to this computer check box.
6. Click
Select Remote Users.
The
Remote Desktop Users dialog box appears.
7. Do the following for each remote user who should be allowed to access this computer: a. Click
Add.
Chapter 21: Using Remote Desktop 705
Configuring the Host Computer
The
Select Users dialog box appears. b. Type the desired user's username in the text box.
The
Check Names button is enabled. c. Click
Check Names. d. Click
OK.
The
Remote Desktop Users dialog box reappears with the desired user's username.
8. Click
OK.
9. Click
OK.
706 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Accessing a Remote Computer's Desktop
Accessing a Remote Computer's Desktop
Note: The client computer must meet the following requirements:
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later
• A working Internet connection
To access a remote computer's desktop
1. Click
Reports in the main menu, and click the My Computers tab.
The
My Computers page appears.
2. Next to the desired computer, click
Remote Desktop.
The following things happen:
• If you are prompted to install the Remote Desktop Active X Control, then install it.
Chapter 21: Using Remote Desktop 707
Accessing a Remote Computer's Desktop
• The Remote Desktop Connection Security Warning dialog box appears.
3. Select the desired connection options.
The available options depend on your Remote Desktop configuration. See
Configuring Remote Desktop on page 701.
4. Click
OK.
The
Log On to Windows dialog box appears.
5. Type your username and password for the remote computer.
These are the credentials configured for your user account in Enabling the Remote
6. Click
OK.
The remote computer's desktop appears onscreen.
708 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Accessing a Remote Computer's Desktop
You can use the following keyboard shortcuts during the Remote Desktop session:
Table 147: Remote Desktop Keyboard Shortcuts
This shortcut… Does this…
ALT+INSERT
ALT+HOME
Cycles through running programs in the order that they were started
Displays the
Start menu
CTRL+ALT+BREAK Toggles between displaying the session in a window and on the full screen
Opens the
Windows Security dialog box
CTRL+ALT+END
Chapter 21: Using Remote Desktop 709
Overview
Chapter 22
Controlling the Appliance via the
Command Line
This chapter describes various ways of controlling your Safe@Office appliance through the command line.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Using the Safe@Office Portal .................................................................. 712
Overview
Depending on your Safe@Office model, you can control your appliance via the command line in the following ways:
• Using the Safe@Office Portal's command line interface.
See Using the Safe@Office Portal on page 712.
• Using a console connected to the Safe@Office appliance.
For information, see Using the Serial Console on page 714.
• Using an SSH client.
See Configuring SSH on page 717.
Chapter 22: Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line 711
Using the Safe@Office Portal
Using the Safe@Office Portal
You can control your appliance via the Safe@Office Portal's command line interface.
To control the appliance via the Safe@Office Portal
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The
Tools page appears.
2. Click
Command.
712 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Command Line page appears.
Using the Safe@Office Portal
3. In the upper field, type a command.
You can view a list of supported commands using the command
help.
For information on all commands, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
4. Click
Go.
The command is implemented.
713 Chapter 22: Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line
Using the Serial Console
Using the Serial Console
You can connect a console to the Safe@Office appliance, and use the console to control the appliance via the command line.
Note: Your terminal emulation software and your Safe@Office appliance's Serial port must be configured for the same speed.
By default, the appliance's Serial port's speed is 57600 bps. For information on changing the Serial port's speed, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
To control the appliance via a console
1. Connect the serial console to your Safe@Office appliance's Serial port, using an RS-232 Null modem cable.
For information on locating the Serial port, see Rear Panel.
2. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
714 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Ports page appears.
Using the Serial Console
3. Next to the
Serial port, click Edit.
Chapter 22: Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line 715
Using the Serial Console
The
Port Setup page appears.
4. In the
Assign to drop-down list, select Console.
5. In the
Port Speed drop-down list, select the Serial port's speed (in bits per second).
The Serial port's speed must match that of the attached serial console. The default value is 57600.
6. In the
Flow Control drop-down list, select the method of flow control supported by the attached device:
• RTS/CTS. Hardware-based flow control, using the Serial port's RTS/CTS lines.
• XON/XOFF. Software-based flow control, using XON/XOFF characters.
7. Click
Apply.
You can now control the Safe@Office appliance from the serial console.
For information on all supported commands, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 716
Configuring SSH
Configuring SSH
Safe@Office appliance users can control the appliance via the command line, using the
SSH (Secure Shell) management protocol. You can enable users to do so via the Internet, by configuring remote SSH access. You can also integrate the Safe@Office appliance with
SSH-based management systems.
Note: The Safe@Office appliance supports SSHv2 clients only. The SSHv1 protocol contains security vulnerabilities and is not supported.
Note: Configuring SSH is equivalent to creating a simple Allow rule, where the destination is
This Gateway. To create more complex rules for SSH, such as allowing
SSH connections from multiple IP address ranges, define Allow rules for TCP port
22, with the destination
This Gateway. For information, see Using Rules on page 400.
To configure SSH
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Management tab.
The
Management page appears.
2. Specify from where SSH access should be granted.
Refer to the following table.
Warning: If remote SSH is enabled, your Safe@Office appliance settings can be changed remotely, so it is especially important to make sure all Safe@Office appliance users’ passwords are difficult to guess.
Chapter 22: Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line 717
Configuring SSH
If you selected
Internal Networks + IP Range, additional fields appear.
3. If you selected
Internal Networks + IP Range, enter the desired IP address range in the fields provided.
4. Click
Apply.
The SSH configuration is saved. If you configured remote SSH access, you can now control the Safe@Office appliance from the Internet, using an SSHv2 client.
For information on all supported commands, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI
Reference Guide.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 718
Table 148: SSH Access Options
Select this option…
To allow access from…
Internal Networks The internal network only.
This disables remote access capability. This is the default.
The internal network and your VPN. Internal Networks +
VPN
Internal Networks +
IP Range
ANY
Disabled
Configuring SSH
A particular range of IP addresses.
Additional fields appear, in which you can enter the desired IP address range.
Any IP address.
Nowhere.
This disables both local and remote access capability.
This option is relevant to the SNMP protocol only.
Chapter 22: Controlling the Appliance via the Command Line 719
Viewing Firmware Status
Chapter 23
Maintenance
This chapter describes the tasks required for maintenance and diagnosis of your
Safe@Office appliance.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Upgrading Your Software Product ........................................................... 722
Configuring a Gateway Hostname............................................................ 724
Configuring Syslog Logging .................................................................... 726
Setting the Time on the Appliance ........................................................... 735
Backing Up and Restoring the Safe@Office Appliance Configuration ... 752
Using Rapid Deployment ......................................................................... 759
Resetting the Safe@Office Appliance to Defaults ................................... 762
Rebooting the Safe@Office Appliance .................................................... 766
Viewing Firmware Status
The firmware is the software program embedded in the Safe@Office appliance.
You can view your current firmware version and additional details.
To view the firmware status
• Click Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
720 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Firmware page appears.
Viewing Firmware Status
The
Firmware page displays the following information:
Table 149: Firmware Status Fields
This field… Displays… For example…
WAN MAC Address The MAC address used for the Internet connection
00:80:11:22:33:44
Firmware Version
Installed Product
The current version of the firmware
8.1
The licensed software and the number of allowed nodes
Safe@Office 1000N (unlimited nodes)
Chapter 23: Maintenance 721
Upgrading Your Software Product
This field…
Uptime
Displays…
The time that elapsed from the moment the unit was turned on
Hardware Type The type of the current
Safe@Office appliance hardware
For example…
01:21:15
SBox-200
Hardware Version The current hardware version of the Safe@Office appliance
Upgrading Your Software Product
You can upgrade your Safe@Office 1000N appliance by adding the Safe@Office 1000N
Power Pack. After purchasing the Power Pack, you will receive a new Product Key that enables you to use the Power Pack on the same Safe@Office appliance you have today.
There is no need to replace your hardware. You can also purchase node upgrades, as needed.
Note: To purchase the Power Pack or node upgrades, contact your Safe@Office appliance provider. Alternatively, you can click
Upgrades & Services in the Welcome page to view and purchase available upgrades.
To upgrade your product, you must install the new Product Key.
To install a Product Key
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The
Firmware page appears.
2. Click
Upgrade Product.
722 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Upgrading Your Software Product
The
Safe@Office Licensing Wizard opens, with the Install Product Key dialog box displayed.
3. Click
Enter a different Product Key.
4. In the
Product Key field, enter the new Product Key.
5. Click
Next.
The
Installed New Product Key dialog box appears.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 723
Configuring a Gateway Hostname
6. Click
Finish.
Configuring a Gateway Hostname
You can define a gateway hostname for the Safe@Office appliance. The gateway hostname is used to identify the Safe@Office appliance and appears in the following places:
• The Safe@Office Portal’s title bar
• The Safe@Office appliance's SNMP hostname
• Syslog messages sent by the Safe@Office appliance
• The command line prompt
By default, the Safe@Office appliance's MAC address is used as the gateway hostname.
Note: Configuring the gateway hostname is only available if the Safe@Office appliance is not subscribed to the Remote Management service. When remotely managed, the gateway hostname is set by the Service Center.
To configure the gateway hostname
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The
Firmware page appears.
2. In the
Gateway Name row, click Edit.
724 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Gateway Name page appears.
Configuring Syslog Logging
3. In the
Gateway Name field, type the desired hostname.
4. To reset the gateway hostname to the default value (the appliance's MAC address), click
Default.
5. Click
Apply.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 725
Configuring Syslog Logging
Configuring Syslog Logging
You can configure the Safe@Office appliance to send event logs to a Syslog server residing in your internal network or on the Internet. The logs detail the date and the time each event occurred. If the event is a communication attempt that was rejected by the firewall, the event details include the source and destination IP address, the destination port, and the protocol used for the communication attempt (for example, TCP or UDP).
This same information is also available in the Event Log page (see Viewing the Event Log
on page 379). However, while the Event Log can display hundreds of logs, a Syslog server
can store an unlimited number of logs. Furthermore, Syslog servers can provide useful tools for managing your logs.
Note: Kiwi Syslog Daemon is freeware and can be downloaded from http://www.kiwisyslog.com. For technical support, contact Kiwi Enterprises.
To configure Syslog logging
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Logging tab.
726 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Logging page appears.
Configuring Syslog Logging
2. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
3. Click
Apply.
Table 150: Logging Page Fields
In this field… Do this…
Syslog Server
Clear
Type the IP address of the computer that will run the Syslog service
(one of your network computers), or click
This Computer to allow your computer to host the service.
Click to clear the
Syslog Server field.
Syslog Port
Default
Type the port number of the Syslog server.
Click to reset the
Syslog Port field to the default (port 514 UDP).
Chapter 23: Maintenance 727
Configuring HTTPS
Configuring HTTPS
You can enable Safe@Office appliance users to access the Safe@Office Portal from the
Internet. To do so, you must first configure HTTPS.
Note: Configuring HTTPS is equivalent to creating a simple Allow rule, where the destination is
This Gateway. To create more complex rules for HTTPS, such as allowing HTTPS connections from multiple IP address ranges, define Allow rules for
TCP port 443, with the destination
This Gateway. For information, see Using Rules on
To configure HTTPS
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Management tab.
The
Management page appears.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 728
Configuring HTTPS
2. Specify from where HTTPS access to the Safe@Office Portal should be granted.
See Access Options on page 730 for information.
Warning: If remote HTTPS is enabled, your Safe@Office appliance settings can be changed remotely, so it is especially important to make sure all Safe@Office appliance users’ passwords are difficult to guess.
Note: You can use HTTPS to access the Safe@Office Portal from your internal network, by surfing to https
://my.firewall.
If you selected
Internal Networks + IP Range, additional fields appear.
3. If you selected
Internal Networks + IP Range, enter the desired IP address range in the fields provided.
4. Click
Apply.
The HTTPS configuration is saved. If you configured remote HTTPS, you can now access the Safe@Office Portal through the Internet, using the procedure Accessing the
Safe@Office Portal Remotely on page 116.
729 Chapter 23: Maintenance
Configuring SNMP
Table 151: Access Options
Select this option…
To allow access from…
Internal Networks The internal network only.
This disables remote access capability. This is the default.
The internal network and your VPN. Internal Networks +
VPN
Internal Networks +
IP Range
ANY
A particular range of IP addresses.
Additional fields appear, in which you can enter the desired IP address range.
Any IP address.
Disabled Nowhere.
This disables both local and remote access capability.
This option is relevant to the SNMP protocol only.
Configuring SNMP
Safe@Office appliance users can monitor the Safe@Office appliance, using tools that support SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). You can enable users to do so via the Internet, by configuring remote SNMP access.
The Safe@Office appliance supports the following SNMP MIBs:
• SNMPv2-MIB
• RFC1213-MIB
• IF-MIB
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 730
Configuring SNMP
• IP-MIB
All SNMP access is read-only.
Note: Configuring SNMP is equivalent to creating a simple Allow rule, where the destination is
This Gateway. To create more complex rules for SNMP, such as allowing SNMP connections from multiple IP address ranges, define Allow rules for the relevant port (by default, TCP port 161), with the destination
This Gateway. For
information, see Using Rules on page 400.
To configure SNMP
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Management tab.
The
Management page appears.
2. Specify from where SNMP access should be granted.
See Access Options on page 730 for information.
If you selected
Internal Networks + IP Range, additional fields appear.
The
Community field and the Advanced link are enabled.
731 Chapter 23: Maintenance
Configuring SNMP
3. If you selected
Internal Networks + IP Range, enter the desired IP address range in the fields provided.
4. In the
Community field, type the name of the SNMP community string.
SNMP clients uses the SNMP community string as a password, when connecting to the Safe@Office appliance.
The default value is "public". It is recommended to change this string.
5. To configure advanced SNMP settings, do the following: a. Click
Advanced.
The
SNMP Configuration page appears.
732 b. Complete the fields using the following table.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Configuring SNMP
If you selected the
Send SNMP Traps check box, additional fields appear.
6. Click
Apply.
The SNMP configuration is saved.
7. Configure the SNMP clients with the SNMP community string.
Table 152: Advanced SNMP Settings
In this field... Do this…
System Location Type a description of the appliance's location.
This information will be visible to SNMP clients, and is useful for administrative purposes.
System Contact Type the name of the contact person.
This information will be visible to SNMP clients, and is useful for administrative purposes.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 733
Setting the Time on the Appliance
In this field...
SNMP Port
Do this…
Type the port to use for SNMP.
The default port is 161.
Send SNMP Traps
Send Traps On:
Startup / Shutdown
Select this option to enable sending SNMP traps. An SNMP trap is a notification sent from one application to another.
Indicates that SNMP traps will automatically be sent upon startup/shutdown events.
This option is always selected.
Send Traps On:
SNMP Authentication
Failure
Select this option to to send an SNMP trap on each SNMP authentication failure event.
Send Traps On: Link up/down
Select this option to send an SNMP trap on each link up/down event.
Trap Community Type the SNMP community string of the trap receiver.
The default value is public .
Trap Port
Trap Destination
Trap Type
Type The UDP port of the trap receiver.
The default value is 162.
Type the IP address or DNS name of the SNMP trap receiver agent.
Select the type of SNMP traps to use.
734 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting the Time on the Appliance
Setting the Time on the Appliance
You set the time displayed in the Safe@Office Portal during initial appliance setup. If desired, you can change the date and time using the procedure below.
To set the time
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The
Tools page appears.
2. Click
Set Time.
The
Safe@Office Set Time Wizard opens displaying the Set the Safe@Office Time dialog box.
3. Complete the fields using the information in Set Time Wizard Fields on page
4. Click
Next.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 735
Setting the Time on the Appliance
The following things happen in the order below:
• If you selected Specify date and time, the Specify Date and Time dialog box appears.
Set the date, time, and time zone in the fields provided, then click
Next.
• If you selected Use a Time Server, the Time Servers dialog box appears.
736
Complete the fields using the information in Time Servers Fields on page 738,
then click
Next.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
• The Date and Time Updated screen appears.
Setting the Time on the Appliance
5. Click
Finish.
Table 153: Set Time Wizard Fields
Select this option… To do the following…
Your computer's clock Set the appliance time to your computer’s system time.
Your computer’s system time is displayed to the right of this option.
Keep the current setting
Use a Time Server
Specify date and time
Do not change the appliance’s time.
The current appliance time is displayed to the right of this option.
Synchronize the appliance time with a Network Time Protocol
(NTP) server.
Set the appliance to a specific date and time.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 737
Using Diagnostic Tools
Table 154: Time Servers Fields
In this field… Do this…
Primary Server Type the IP address of the Primary NTP server.
Secondary Server
Clear
Type the IP address of the Secondary NTP server.
This field is optional.
Clear the field.
Select your time zone Select the time zone in which you are located.
Using Diagnostic Tools
The Safe@Office appliance is equipped with a set of diagnostic tools that are useful for troubleshooting Internet connectivity.
Table 155: Diagnostic Tools
Use this tool… To do this…
Ping Check that a specific IP address or DNS name can be reached via the Internet.
For information, see...
Traceroute Display a list of all routers used to connect from the Safe@Office appliance to a specific IP address or DNS name.
WHOIS Display the name and contact information of the entity to which a specific IP address or DNS name is registered. This information is useful in tracking down hackers.
738 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Diagnostic Tools
Use this tool… To do this… For information, see...
Packet Sniffer Capture network traffic. This information is useful troubleshooting network problems.
Using Packet Sniffer on page
Using IP Tools
To use an IP tool
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The
Tools page appears.
2. In the
IP Tools area, complete the fields using the information in the following table.
3. Click
Go.
• If you selected Ping, the following things happen:
The Safe@Office appliance sends packets to the specified the IP address or DNS name.
The
IP Tools window opens and displays the percentage of packet loss and the amount of time it took each packet to reach the specified host and return (roundtrip) in milliseconds.
• If you selected Traceroute, the following things happen:
The Safe@Office appliance connects to the specified IP address or DNS name.
739 Chapter 23: Maintenance
Using Diagnostic Tools
The
IP Tools window opens and displays a list of routers used to make the connection.
• If you selected WHOIS, the following things happen:
The Safe@Office appliance queries the Internet WHOIS server.
A window displays the name of the entity to which the IP address or DNS name is registered and their contact information.
740 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 156: IP Tools Fields
In this field… Do this…
Tool Select the desired tool.
Source Address
Using Diagnostic Tools
Select the IP address from which the packets should originate. This can be any of the following:
• Auto. Automatically select a connected or enabled interface form which to send the packets.
• A connected Internet connection
• An enabled internal network
This field is only enabled if you selected the Ping or Traceroute tools.
Address Type the IP address or DNS name for which to run the tool.
Using Packet Sniffer
The Safe@Office appliance includes the Packet Sniffer tool, which enables you to capture packets from any internal network or Safe@Office port. This is useful for troubleshooting network problems and for collecting data about network behavior.
If desired, you can configure Packet Sniffer to capture each packet twice: once before firewall processing and once after firewall processing. This allows you to observe exactly what the Safe@Office firewall does to your packets.
The Safe@Office appliance saves the captured packets to a file on your computer. You can use a free protocol analyzer, such as Ethereal or Wireshark, to analyze the file, or you can send it to technical support. Wireshark runs on all popular computing platforms and can be downloaded from http://www.wireshark.org. Ethereal can be downloaded from http://www.ethereal.com.
Note: If you enabled the Packet Sniffer's Firewall Monitor option, and you would like to view the results in Ethereal/Wireshark, you must do the following: open the capture file, click
Edit > Preferences, in the left pane click Protocols > Ethernet, and select the
Attempt to interpret as Firewall-1 monitor file check box. The capture file will display the interface name on which the packet was captured, and the packet’s processing
741 Chapter 23: Maintenance
Using Diagnostic Tools direction will be indicated by i (input) or o (output).
To use Packet Sniffer
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The
Tools page appears.
2. Click
Sniffer.
The
Packet Sniffer window opens.
3. Complete the fields using the information in the following table.
4. Click
Start.
The
Packet Sniffer window displays the name of the interface, the number of packets collected, and the percentage of storage space remaining on the appliance for storing the packets.
5. Click
Stop to stop collecting packets.
A standard
File Download dialog box appears.
6. Click
Save.
The
Save As dialog box appears.
742 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
7. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
8. Type a name for the configuration file and click
Save.
The *.cap file is created and saved to the specified directory.
9. Click
Cancel to close the Packet Sniffer window.
Table 157: Packet Sniffer Fields
In this field… Do this…
Interface
Using Diagnostic Tools
Select the interface from which to collect packets.
The list includes the primary Internet connection, the Safe@Office appliance ports, and all defined networks.
Filter String Type the filter string to use for filtering the captured packets. Only packets that match the filter condition will be saved.
For a list of basic filter strings elements, see Filter String Syntax on
For detailed information on filter syntax, go to http://www.tcpdump.org/tcpdump_man.html.
Note: Do not enclose the filter string in quotation marks.
If you do not specify a filter string, Packet Sniffer will save all packets on the selected interface.
Capture only traffic to/from this gateway
Select this option to capture incoming and outgoing packets for this gateway only.
If this option is not selected, Packet Sniffer will collect packets for all traffic on the interface.
Firewall Monitor Select this option to capture each packet both before and after firewall processing, and to record the name of the interface on which the packet was captured.
743 Chapter 23: Maintenance
Using Diagnostic Tools
Filter String Syntax
The following represents a list of basic filter string elements:
For detailed information on filter syntax, refer to http://www.tcpdump.org.
and
P URPOSE
The and element is used to concatenate filter string elements. The filtered packets must match all concatenated filter string elements.
S YNTAX element
and element [and element...] element
&& element [&& element...]
P ARAMETERS element
String. A filter string element.
744 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Diagnostic Tools
E XAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that both originate from IP address is
192.168.10.1 and are destined for port 80: src 192.168.10.1 and dst port 80
dst
P URPOSE
The dst element captures all packets with a specific destination.
S
YNTAX
dst destination
P
ARAMETERS destination IP Address or String. The computer to which the packet is sent. This can be the following:
• An IP address
• A host name
E XAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that are destined for the IP address 192.168.10.1: dst 192.168.10.1
dst port
P URPOSE
The dst port element captures all packets destined for a specific port.
S YNTAX
dst port port
Note: This element can be prepended by tcp or udp. For information, see tcp on page
Chapter 23: Maintenance 745
Using Diagnostic Tools
P ARAMETERS port
Integer. The port to which the packet is sent.
E XAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that are destined for port 80: dst port 80
ether proto
P URPOSE
The ether proto element is used to capture packets of a specific ether protocol type.
S YNTAX
ether proto \protocol
P ARAMETERS protocol String. The protocol type of the packet.
This can be the following: ip, ip6, arp, rarp, atalk, aarp, dec net, sca, lat, mopdl, moprc, iso, stp, ipx, or netbeui .
E XAMPLE
The following filter string saves ARP packets: ether proto arp
746 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Diagnostic Tools
host
P URPOSE
The host element captures all incoming and outgoing packets for a specific computer.
S YNTAX
host host
P
ARAMETERS host IP Address or String. The computer to/from which the packet is sent. This can be the following:
• An IP address
• A host name
E XAMPLE
The following filter string saves all packets that either originated from IP address
192.168.10.1, or are destined for that same IP address: host 192.168.10.1
not
P URPOSE
The not element is used to negate filter string elements.
S
YNTAX
not element
! element
P
ARAMETERS element
String. A filter string element.
E XAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that are not destined for port 80: not dst port 80
Chapter 23: Maintenance 747
Using Diagnostic Tools
or
P URPOSE
The or element is used to alternate between string elements. The filtered packets must match at least one of the filter string elements.
S YNTAX element
or element [or element...] element
|| element [|| element...]
P ARAMETERS element
String. A filter string element.
E XAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that either originate from IP address 192.168.10.1 or IP address 192.168.10.10: src 192.168.10.1 or src 192.168.10.10
port
P URPOSE
The port element captures all packets originating from or destined for a specific port.
S YNTAX
port port
Note: This element can be prepended by tcp or udp. For information, see tcp on page
P ARAMETERS port Integer. The port from/to which the packet is sent.
748 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Using Diagnostic Tools
E XAMPLE
The following filter string saves all packets that either originated from port 80, or are destined for port 80: port 80
src
P URPOSE
The src element captures all packets with a specific source.
S YNTAX
src source
P ARAMETERS source
IP Address or String. The computer from which the packet is sent. This can be the following:
• An IP address
• A host name
E XAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that originated from IP address 192.168.10.1: src 192.168.10.1
src port
P
URPOSE
The src port element captures all packets originating from a specific port.
S YNTAX
src port port
Note: This element can be prepended by tcp or udp. For information, see tcp on page
Chapter 23: Maintenance 749
Using Diagnostic Tools
P ARAMETERS port
Integer. The port from which the packet is sent.
E XAMPLE
The following filter string saves packets that originated from port 80: src port 80
tcp
P URPOSE
The tcp element captures all TCP packets. This element can be prepended to port-related elements.
Note: When not prepended to other elements, the tcp element is the equivalent of ip proto tcp .
S YNTAX
tcp
tcp element
P ARAMETERS element String. A port-related filter string element that should be restricted to saving only TCP packets. This can be the following:
•
•
• dst port - Capture all TCP packets destined for a specific port. port - Capture all TCP packets originating from or destined for a specific port. src port - Capture all TCP packets originating from a specific port.
750 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
E XAMPLE 1
The following filter string captures all TCP packets: tcp
E
XAMPLE
2
The following filter string captures all TCP packets destined for port 80: tcp dst port 80
Using Diagnostic Tools
udp
P URPOSE
The udp element captures all UDP packets. This element can be prepended to port-related elements.
Note: When not prepended to other elements, the udp element is the equivalent of ip proto udp .
S
YNTAX
udp
udp element
P ARAMETERS element String. A port-related filter string element that should be restricted to saving only UDP packets. This can be the following:
•
•
• dst port - Capture all UDP packets destined for a specific port. port - Captures all UDP packets originating from or destined for a specific port. src port - Capture all UDP packets originating from a specific port.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 751
Backing Up and Restoring the Safe@Office Appliance Configuration
E XAMPLE 1
The following filter string captures all UDP packets: udp
E
XAMPLE
2
The following filter string captures all UDP packets destined for port 80: udp dst port 80
Backing Up and Restoring the Safe@Office
Appliance Configuration
The Safe@Office appliance provides the following ways of backing up and restoring its configuration:
• Backup and restore on your computer
You can export the Safe@Office appliance configuration to a *.cfg file on your computer, and use this file to backup and restore Safe@Office appliance settings, as needed.
The file includes all of your settings, except for the security policy and certificate.
• Backup and restore on a USB flash drive
You can back up the appliance configuration and device certificate to a USB flash drive. You can then restore the Safe@Office appliance settings from the USB flash drive as needed.
This method requires a USB port on your appliance.
Note: In both cases, the configuration file is saved as a textual CLI script. If desired, you can edit the file. For a full explanation of the CLI script format and the supported
CLI commands, see the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
752 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Backing Up and Restoring the Safe@Office Appliance Configuration
Backing Up the Appliance Configuration
Exporting the Appliance Configuration to Your Computer
To export the Safe@Office appliance configuration to your computer
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The
Tools page appears.
2. Click
Export.
A standard
File Download dialog box appears.
3. Click
Save.
The
Save As dialog box appears.
4. Browse to a destination directory of your choice.
5. Type a name for the configuration file and click
Save.
The *.cfg configuration file is created and saved to the specified directory.
You can now import the configuration file as needed. See Importing the Appliance
Configuration from Your Computer on page 756.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 753
Backing Up and Restoring the Safe@Office Appliance Configuration
Backing Up the Appliance Configuration to a USB Flash Drive
The USB flash drive must have at least 64MB of free space.
Note: Some USB flash drives may not be supported by the appliance.
To backup the appliance configuration to a USB flash drive
1. Connect a USB flash drive to one of your Safe@Office appliance's USB ports.
For information on locating the USB ports, see Introduction on page 1.
2. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The
Tools page appears.
3. Click
Backup/Restore.
The
Backup/Restore Wizard opens displaying the Step 1: Select Action dialog box.
4. Click
Backup this gateway to a storage device.
5. Click
Next.
754 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Backing Up and Restoring the Safe@Office Appliance Configuration
The Safe@Office appliance creates the folder <MACAddress> on the USB flash drive, where <MACAddress> is the appliance's MAC address, and writes the following files to this folder:
• embeddedngx.cfg
• embeddedngx.p12
The
Step 2: Backup Complete screen appears.
6. Click
Finish.
You can now restore the configuration from the USB flash drive as needed. See
Restoring the Appliance Configuration from a USB Flash Drive on page 758.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 755
Backing Up and Restoring the Safe@Office Appliance Configuration
Restoring the Appliance Configuration
Importing the Appliance Configuration from Your Computer
To import the appliance configuration from your computer
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The
Tools page appears.
2. Click
Import.
The
Import Settings page appears.
3. Do one of the following:
• In the Import Settings field, type the full path to the configuration file.
Or
• Click Browse, and browse to the configuration file.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 756
Backing Up and Restoring the Safe@Office Appliance Configuration
4. Click
Upload.
A confirmation message appears.
5. Click
OK.
The Safe@Office appliance settings are imported.
The
Import Settings page displays the configuration file's content and the result of implementing each configuration command.
Note: If the appliance's IP address changed as a result of the configuration import, your computer may be disconnected from the network; therefore you may not be able to see the results.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 757
Backing Up and Restoring the Safe@Office Appliance Configuration
Restoring the Appliance Configuration from a USB Flash Drive
To restore the appliance configuration from a USB flash drive
1. Connect a USB flash drive to one of your Safe@Office appliance's USB ports.
For information on locating the USB ports, see Introduction on page 1.
2. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The
Tools page appears.
3. Click
Backup/Restore.
The
Backup/Restore Wizard opens displaying the Step 1: Select Action dialog box.
4. Click
Restore this gateway from a storage device.
5. Click
Next.
The Safe@Office appliance is restored from the <MACAddress> folder on the USB flash drive, where <MACAddress> is the appliance's MAC address. This may take some time.
The
Step 2: Restore Complete screen appears displaying the configuration file's content and the result of implementing each configuration command.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 758
Using Rapid Deployment
Note: If the appliance's IP address changed as a result of the configuration import, your computer may be disconnected from the network; therefore you may not be able to see the results.
6. Click
Finish.
Using Rapid Deployment
Safe@Office appliances are shipped with a specific firmware and group of settings that represent the appliance's default state. When installing a new appliance, you can configure different settings and install new firmware versions as needed; however, this can be timeconsuming. Rapid deployment avoids this hassle, by allowing you to load the following settings from a USB flash drive during product initialization:
• The primary firmware
• The backup firmware
• The configuration file
• The default configuration file
The default configuration file contains settings that represent the desired appliance default state. The settings in the default configuration file become the appliance's new default settings and are retained even after a reset to defaults operation.
Important: The default configuration file cannot be cleared by performing a Reset to
Defaults operation. It can only be cleared by loading an empty default configuration file.
• The certificate
Rapid deployment can be used to configure several appliances in succession. If multiple appliances share a group of settings, you can use rapid deployment to configure each appliance with both the shared settings and the appliance-specific settings, all in one action. For example, before shipping appliances to your company’s branch offices, you can quickly configure all of the appliances with the corporate security policy and VPN settings, as well as with branch-specific settings.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 759
Using Rapid Deployment
Preparing the USB Flash Drive for Rapid Deployment
Before performing a rapid deployment, you must load the USB flash drive with the files you want to install on the appliance(s).
To prepare the USB flash drive
1. For each appliance you want to deploy, create a folder named
<MACAddress> , where <MACAddress> is the appliance’s MAC address, and the colons are replaced by underscores.
For example, if the appliance's MAC address is 00:11:22:33:44:55, the folder name should be 00_11_22_33_44_55.
2. If you would like to deploy multiple appliances that share settings, create a folder named deploy.
3. Prepare the files that you want to install on the appliances.
The files must be named according to the following table.
4. Add files containing settings that should be shared by all of the appliances to the deploy folder.
5. For each appliance, add files containing settings that are specific to the appliance to the folder named after the appliance's MAC address.
For example, if you want two Safe@Office appliances to share the same primary firmware but to have different configuration files, you must prepare a single primary.firm file and add it to the deploy folder. Then you must prepare two different embeddedngx.cfg
configuration files, and add one to each appliance's folder.
760 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Table 158: Rapid Deployment File Names
This file... Should be named...
The primary firmware primary.firm / primary.img
Using Rapid Deployment
The backup firmware secondary.firm / secondary.img
The configuration file embeddedngx.cfg
The default configuration file preset.cfg
The certificate embeddedngx.p12
Performing a Rapid Deployment
You must perform the following procedure on each Safe@Office appliance you want to deploy.
To perform a rapid deployment
1. Reset the Safe@Office appliance to its default settings.
See Resetting the Safe@Office Appliance to Defaults on page 762.
2. Disconnect the Safe@Office appliance from its power adapter.
3. Insert the USB flash drive into the appliance’s USB port.
For information on locating the USB ports, see Introduction on page 1.
4. Reconnect the Embedded NGX appliance to its power adapter.
The following things happen:
• The PWR/SEC LED flashes quickly in green, signaling that rapid deployment is in progress.
• The file results-<MACAddress>.log is created in the USB flash drive's root folder, where <MACAddress> is the appliance's MAC address.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 761
Resetting the Safe@Office Appliance to Defaults
• If the deploy folder exists, the appliance loads shared settings from it. The appliance then loads its private settings from the folder named after its MAC address.
Note: If the appliance loads an updated firmware file, the appliance restarts and then continues the rapid deployment process. Do not disconnect the USB flash drive until the process is complete.
• If an error occurs during the rapid deployment process, the PWR/SEC LED blinks quickly in red, the errors are logged to the Event Log, and rapid deployment continues.
• When rapid deployment is complete, the PWR/SEC LED is a constant green.
5. To check the results of rapid deployment, in the USB flash drive's root folder, open the file results-<MACAddress>.log.
Settings that loaded successfully are marked as "ok", and settings that failed to load are marked as "failed".
Resetting the Safe@Office Appliance to Defaults
You can reset the Safe@Office appliance to its default settings. When you reset your
Safe@Office appliance, it reverts to the state it was originally in when you purchased it.
Warning: This operation erases all your settings and password information. You will have to set a new password and reconfigure your Safe@Office appliance for Internet connection. For information on performing these tasks, see Setting Up the
Safe@Office Appliance on page 107.
This operation also resets your appliance to its default Product Key. Therefore, if you upgraded your license, you should save your Product Key before resetting to defaults.
You can view the installed Product Key by in the
Safe@Office Licensing Wizard. For
information on accessing this wizard, see Upgrading Your License on page 722.
You can reset the Safe@Office appliance to defaults via the Web management interface
(software) or by manually pressing the Reset button (hardware) located at the back of the
Safe@Office appliance.
762 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Resetting the Safe@Office Appliance to Defaults
When resetting the appliance via the Safe@Office Portal, you can choose to keep the current firmware or to revert to the firmware version that shipped with the Safe@Office appliance. In contrast, using the Reset button automatically reverts the firmware version.
To reset the Safe@Office appliance to factory defaults via the Web interface
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The
Tools page appears.
2. Click
Factory Settings.
A confirmation message appears.
3. To revert to the firmware version that shipped with the appliance, select the check box.
4. Click
OK.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 763
Resetting the Safe@Office Appliance to Defaults
• The Please Wait screen appears.
• The Safe@Office appliance returns to its factory defaults.
• The Safe@Office appliance is restarted.
This may take a few minutes.
• The Login page appears.
To reset the Safe@Office appliance to factory defaults using the Reset button
1. Make sure the Safe@Office appliance is powered on.
2. Using a pointed object, press the RESET button on the back of the
Safe@Office appliance steadily for seven seconds and then release it.
3. Allow the Safe@Office appliance to boot-up until the system is ready.
For information on the appliance's front and rear panels, see the Getting to Know Your
Appliance section in Introduction on page 1.
Warning: If you choose to reset the Safe@Office appliance by disconnecting the power cable and then reconnecting it, be sure to leave the Safe@Office appliance disconnected for at least three seconds. Disconnecting and reconnecting the power without waiting might cause permanent damage.
764 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Running Diagnostics
Running Diagnostics
You can view technical information about your Safe@Office appliance’s hardware, firmware, license, network status, and Service Center.
This information is useful for troubleshooting. You can export it to an *.html file and send it to technical support.
To view diagnostic information
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Tools tab.
The
Tools page appears.
2. Click
Diagnostics.
Technical information about your Safe@Office appliance appears in a new window.
3. To save the displayed information to an *.html file: a. Click
Save.
A standard
File Download dialog box appears. b. Click
Save.
The
Save As dialog box appears. c. Browse to a destination directory of your choice. d. Type a name for the configuration file and click
Save.
The *.html file is created and saved to the specified directory.
4. To refresh the contents of the window, click
Refresh.
The contents are refreshed.
5. To close the window, click
Close.
Chapter 23: Maintenance 765
Rebooting the Safe@Office Appliance
Rebooting the Safe@Office Appliance
If your Safe@Office appliance is not functioning properly, rebooting it may solve the problem.
To reboot the Safe@Office appliance
1. Click
Setup in the main menu, and click the Firmware tab.
The
Firmware page appears.
2. Click
Restart.
A confirmation message appears.
3. Click
OK.
• The Please Wait screen appears.
• The Safe@Office appliance is restarted.
This may take a few minutes.
• The Login page appears.
766 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Overview
Chapter 24
Using Network Printers
This chapter describes how to set up and use network printers.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers ..................................... 771
Changing Network Printer Ports ............................................................... 789
Overview
Some Safe@Office models include a built-in print server, enabling you to connect USBbased printers to the appliance and share them across the network.
Note: When using computers with a Windows 2000/XP/Vista operating system, the
Safe@Office appliance supports connecting up to four USB-based printers to the appliance. When using computers with a MAC OS-X operating system, the
Safe@Office appliance supports connecting one printer.
The appliance automatically detects printers as they are plugged in, and they immediately become available for printing. Usually, no special configuration is required on the
Safe@Office appliance.
Note: The Safe@Office print server supports printing via "all-in-one" printers. Copying and scanning functions are not supported.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 767
Setting Up Network Printers
Setting Up Network Printers
To set up a network printer
1. Connect the network printer to the Safe@Office appliance.
See Connecting the Appliance to Network Printers on page 103.
2. Turn the printer on.
3. In the Safe@Office Portal, click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
4. Next to
USB, click Edit.
768 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Setting Up Network Printers
The
USB Devices page appears. If the Safe@Office appliance detected the printer, the printer is listed on the page.
If the printer is not listed, check that you connected the printer correctly, then click
Refresh to refresh the page.
5. Next to the printer, click
Edit.
769 Chapter 24: Using Network Printers
Setting Up Network Printers
The
Printer Setup page appears.
6. Write down the port number allocated to the printer.
The port number appears in the
Printer Server TCP Port field. You will need this number later, when configuring computers to use the network printer.
7. To change the port number, do the following: a. Type the desired port number in the
Printer Server TCP Port field.
Note: Printer port numbers may not overlap, and must be high ports. b. Click
Apply.
You may want to change the port number if, for example, the printer you are setting up is intended to replace another printer. In this case, you should change the replacement printer's port number to the old printer's port number, and you can skip the next step.
8. Configure each computer from which you want to enable printing to the network printer.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 770
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
See Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers on page 771.
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
Perform the relevant procedure on each computer from which you want to enable printing via the Safe@Office print server to a network printer.
Windows Vista
This procedure is relevant for computers with a Windows Vista operating system.
To configure a computer to use a network printer
1. If the computer for which you want to enable printing is located on the WAN, create an Allow rule for connections from the computer to
This Gateway.
See Adding and Editing Rules on page 404.
2. Click
Start > Control Panel.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 771
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
The
Control Panel window opens.
3. Under
Hardware and Sound, click Printer.
772 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Printers screen appears.
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
4. Click
Add a printer.
The
Add Printer wizard opens displaying the Choose a local or network printer screen.
5. Click
Add a local printer.
6. Click
Next.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 773
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
The
Choose a printer port dialog box appears.
7. Click
Create a new port.
8. In the
Type of port drop-down list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.
9. Click
Next.
The
Type a printer hostname or IP address dialog box appears.
10. In the
Device type drop-down list, select Autodetect.
11. In the
Hostname or IP address field, type the Safe@Office appliance's LAN IP address, or "my.firewall".
You can find the LAN IP address in the Safe@Office Portal, under
Network > My
Network.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 774
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
12. In the
Port name field, type the port name.
13. Select the
Query the printer and automatically select the driver to use check box.
14. Click
Next.
The following things happen:
• If Windows cannot identify your printer, the Additional Port Information
Required dialog box appears.
Do the following:
1) Click
Custom.
2) Click
Settings.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 775
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
The
Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box opens.
3) In the
Protocol area, make sure that Raw is selected.
4) In the
Port Number field, type the printer's port number, as shown in the
Printers page.
5) Click
OK.
6) Click
Next.
• The Install the printer driver dialog box displayed.
15. Do one of the following:
• Use the lists to select the printer's manufacturer and model.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 776
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
• If your printer does not appear in the lists, insert the CD that came with your printer in the computer's CD-ROM drive, and click
Have Disk.
16. Click
Next.
17. Complete the remaining dialog boxes in the wizard as desired, and click
Finish.
The printer appears in the
Printers and Faxes window.
18. Right-click the printer and click
Properties in the popup menu.
The printer's
Properties dialog box opens.
19. In the
Ports tab, in the list box, select the port you added.
The port's name is IP_<LAN IP address>.
20. Click
OK.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 777
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
Windows 2000/XP
This procedure is relevant for computers with a Windows 2000/XP operating system.
To configure a computer to use a network printer
1. If the computer for which you want to enable printing is located on the WAN, create an Allow rule for connections from the computer to
This Gateway.
See Adding and Editing Rules on page 404.
2. Click
Start > Settings > Control Panel.
The
Control Panel window opens.
3. Click
Printers and Faxes.
The
Printers and Faxes window opens.
4. Right-click in the window, and click
Add Printer in the popup menu.
The
Add Printer Wizard opens with the Welcome dialog box displayed.
5. Click
Next.
778 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Local or Network Printer dialog box appears.
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
6. Click
Local printer attached to this computer.
Note: Do not select the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer check box.
7. Click
Next.
The
Select a Printer Port dialog box appears.
8. Click
Create a new port.
9. In the
Type of port drop-down list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.
10. Click
Next.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 779
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
The
Add Standard TCP/IP Port Wizard opens with the Welcome dialog box displayed.
11. Click
Next.
The
Add Port dialog box appears.
12. In the
Printer Name or IP Address field, type the Safe@Office appliance's LAN
IP address, or "my.firewall".
You can find the LAN IP address in the Safe@Office Portal, under
Network > My
Network.
The
Port Name field is filled in automatically.
13. Click
Next.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 780
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
The
Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard opens, with the Additional Port
Information Required dialog box displayed.
14. Click
Custom.
15. Click
Settings.
The
Configure Standard TCP/IP Port Monitor dialog box opens.
16. In the
Port Number field, type the printer's port number, as shown in the
Printers page.
17. In the
Protocol area, make sure that Raw is selected.
18. Click
OK.
The
Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard reappears.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 781
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
19. Click
Next.
The
Completing the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.
20. Click
Finish.
The
Add Printer Wizard reappears, with the Install Printer Software dialog box displayed.
21. Do one of the following:
• Use the lists to select the printer's manufacturer and model.
• If your printer does not appear in the lists, insert the CD that came with your printer in the computer's CD-ROM drive, and click
Have Disk.
22. Click
Next.
23. Complete the remaining dialog boxes in the wizard as desired, and click
Finish.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 782
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
The printer appears in the
Printers and Faxes window.
24. Right-click the printer and click
Properties in the popup menu.
The printer's
Properties dialog box opens.
25. In the
Ports tab, in the list box, select the port you added.
The port's name is IP_<LAN IP address>.
26. Click
OK.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 783
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
MAC OS-X
This procedure is relevant for computers with the latest version of the MAC OS-X operating system.
Note: This procedure may not apply to earlier MAC OS-X versions.
To configure a computer to use a network printer
1. If the computer for which you want to enable printing is located on the WAN, create an Allow rule for connections from the computer to
This Gateway.
See Adding and Editing Rules on page 404.
2. Choose
Apple -> System Preferences.
The
System Preferences window appears.
3. Click
Show All to display all categories.
4. In the
Hardware area, click Print & Fax.
784 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
The
Print & Fax window appears.
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
5. In the
Printing tab, click Set Up Printers.
The
Printer List window appears.
6. Click
Add.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 785
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
New fields appear.
7. In the first drop-down list, select
IP Printing.
8. In the
Printer Type drop-down list, select Socket/HP Jet Direct.
9. In the
Printer Address field, type the Safe@Office appliance's LAN IP address, or "my.firewall".
You can find the LAN IP address in the Safe@Office Portal, under
Network > My
Network.
10. In the
Queue Name field, type the name of the required printer queue.
For example, the printer queue name for HP printers is RAW.
11. In the
Printer Model list, select the desired printer type.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 786
A list of models appears.
Configuring Computers to Use Network Printers
12. In the
Model Name list, select the desired model.
13. Click
Add.
The new printer appears in the
Printer List window.
14. In the
Printer List window, select the newly added printer, and click Make
Default.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 787
Viewing Network Printers
Viewing Network Printers
To view network printers
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
2. Next to
USB, click Edit.
The
USB Devices page appears, displaying a list of connected printers.
For each printer, the model, serial number, and status is displayed.
A printer can have the following statuses:
• Initialize. The printer is initializing.
• Ready. The printer is ready.
• Not Ready. The printer is not ready. For example, it may be out of paper.
• Printing. The printer is processing a print job.
• Restarting. The printer server is restarting.
• Fail. An error occurred. See the Event Log for details (Viewing the Event Log
3. To refresh the display, click
Refresh.
788 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Changing Network Printer Ports
Changing Network Printer Ports
When you set up a new network printer, the Safe@Office appliance automatically assigns a port number to the printer. If you want to use a different port number, you can easily
change it, as described in Setting Up Network Printers on page 768.
However, you may sometimes need to change the port number after completing printer setup. For example, you may want to replace a malfunctioning network printer, with another existing network printer, without reconfiguring the client computers. To do this, you must change the replacement printer's port number to the malfunctioning printer's port number, as described below.
Note: Each printer port number must be different, and must be a high port.
To change a printer's port
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
2. Next to
USB, click Edit.
The
USB Devices page appears, displaying a list of connected printers.
3. Next to the desired printer, click
Edit.
The
Printer Setup page appears.
4. In the printer's
Printer Server TCP Port field, type the desired port number.
5. Click
Apply.
Chapter 24: Using Network Printers 789
Resetting Network Printers
Resetting Network Printers
You can cause a network printer to restart the current print job, by resetting the network printer. You may want to do this if the print job has stalled.
To reset a network printer
1. Click
Network in the main menu, and click the Ports tab.
The
Ports page appears.
2. Next to
USB, click Edit.
The
USB Devices page appears, displaying a list of connected printers.
3. Next to the desired printer, click
Reset Server.
The network printer's current print job is restarted.
790 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Connectivity
Chapter 25
Troubleshooting
This chapter provides solutions to common problems you may encounter while using the
Safe@Office appliance.
Note: For information on troubleshooting wireless connectivity, see
Troubleshooting Wireless Connectivity on page 342.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Service Center and Upgrades ................................................................... 795
Connectivity
I cannot access the Internet. What should I do?
• Verify that the Safe@Office appliance is operating. If not, check the power connection to the Safe@Office appliance.
• Check if the LED for the WAN port is green. If not, check the network cable to the modem and make sure the modem is turned on.
• Check if the LED for the LAN port used by your computer is green. If not, check if the network cable linking your computer to the Safe@Office appliance is connected properly. Try replacing the cable or connecting it to a different
LAN port.
• Using your Web browser, go to http://my.firewall and see whether "Connected" appears on the Status Bar. Make sure that your Safe@Office appliance network settings are configured as per your ISP directions.
• Check your TCP/IP configuration according to Installing and Setting up the
Safe@Office Appliance on page 85.
• If Web Filtering or Email Filtering are on, try turning them off.
Chapter 25: Troubleshooting 791
Connectivity
• Check if you have defined firewall rules which block your Internet connectivity.
• Check with your ISP for possible service outage.
• Check whether you are exceeding the maximum number of computers allowed by your license, by viewing the
My Computers page.
I cannot access my DSL broadband connection. What should I do?
DSL equipment comes in two flavors: bridges (commonly known as DSL modems) and routers. Some DSL equipment can be configured to work both ways.
• If you connect to your ISP using a PPPoE or PPTP dialer defined in your operating system, your equipment is most likely configured as a DSL bridge.
Configure a PPPoE or PPTP type DSL connection.
• If you were not instructed to configure a dialer in your operating system, your equipment is most likely configured as a DSL router. Configure a LAN connection, even if you are using a DSL connection.
For instructions, see Configuring the Internet Connection on page 125.
I cannot access my Cable broadband connection. What should I do?
• Some cable ISPs require you to register the MAC address of the device behind the cable modem. You may need to clone your Ethernet adapter MAC address onto the Safe@Office appliance. For instructions, see Configuring the Internet
• Some cable ISPs require using a hostname for the connection. Try reconfiguring your Internet connection and specifying a hostname. For further information, see
Configuring the Internet Connection on page 125.
I cannot access my ADSL connection from an ADSL appliance. What should I do?
• Check that a micro-filter is used on all the phone sockets on the line (required in most locations).
• Check that the DSL Standard setting configured for your appliance is compatible with your service provider. You can view this setting in the
Network > Internet
Setup page.
• Advanced ADSL configuration fine tuning options are available via the CLI. For information, refer to the Embedded NGX CLI Reference Guide.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 792
Connectivity
I cannot access http://my.firewall or http://my.vpn. What should I do?
• Verify that the Safe@Office appliance is operating.
• Check if the LED for the LAN port used by your computer is green. If not, check if the network cable linking your computer to the Safe@Office appliance is connected properly.
• By default, unencrypted HTTP access is not allowed from the wireless LAN to http://my.firewall or http://my.vpn. Therefore, if you are connecting from the wireless LAN, try connecting to https://my.firewall instead.
• Try surfing to 192.168.10.1 instead of to my.firewall.
Note: 192.168.10 is the default value, and it may vary if you changed it in the My
Network page.
• Check your TCP/IP configuration according to Installing and Setting up the
Safe@Office Appliance on page 85.
• Restart your Safe@Office appliance and your broadband modem by disconnecting the power and reconnecting after 5 seconds.
• If your Web browser is configured to use an HTTP proxy to access the
Internet, add my.firewall or my.vpn to your proxy exceptions list.
My network seems extremely slow. What should I do?
• The Ethernet cables may be faulty. For proper operation, the Safe@Office appliance requires STP CAT5 (Shielded Twisted Pair Category 5) Ethernet cables. Make sure that this specification is printed on your cables.
• Your Ethernet card may be faulty or incorrectly configured. Try replacing your
Ethernet card.
• There may be an IP address conflict in your network. Check that the TCP/IP settings of all your computers are configured to obtain an IP address automatically.
I changed the network settings to incorrect values and am unable to correct my error. What should I do?
Reset the network to its default settings using the button on the back of the Safe@Office
appliance unit. See Resetting the Safe@Office Appliance to Defaults on page 762.
793 Chapter 25: Troubleshooting
Connectivity
I am using the Safe@Office appliance behind another NAT device, and I am having problems with some applications. What should I do?
By default, the Safe@Office appliance performs Network Address Translation (NAT). It is possible to use the Safe@Office appliance behind another device that performs NAT, such as a DSL router or Wireless router, but the device will block all incoming connections from reaching your Safe@Office appliance.
To fix this problem, do ONE of the following. (The solutions are listed in order of preference.)
• Consider whether you really need the router. The Safe@Office appliance can be used as a replacement for your router, unless you need it for some additional functionality that it provides.
• If possible, disable NAT in the router. Refer to the router’s documentation for instructions on how to do this.
• If the router has a “DMZ Computer” or “Exposed Host” option, set it to the
Safe@Office appliance’s external IP address.
• Open the following ports in the NAT device:
• UDP 9281/9282
• UDP 500
• UDP 2746
• TCP 256
• TCP 264
• ESP IP protocol 50
• TCP 981
I cannot receive audio or video calls through the Safe@Office appliance. What should I do?
To enable audio/video, you must configure an
IP Telephony (H.323) virtual server. For
instructions, see Configuring Servers on page 397.
I run a public Web server at home but it cannot be accessed from the Internet. What should I do?
Configure a virtual Web Server. For instructions, see Configuring Servers on page 397.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 794
Service Center and Upgrades
I cannot connect to the LAN network from the DMZ or primary WLAN network. What should I do?
By default, connections from the DMZ or primary WLAN network to the LAN network are blocked. To allow traffic from the DMZ or primary WLAN to the LAN, configure
appropriate firewall rules. For instructions, see Using Rules on page 400.
Service Center and Upgrades
I have exceeded my node limit. What does this mean? What should I do?
Your Product Key specifies a maximum number of nodes that you may connect to the
Safe@Office appliance.
The Safe@Office appliance tracks the cumulative number of nodes on the internal network that have communicated through the firewall. When the Safe@Office appliance encounters an IP address that exceeds the licensed node limit, the
My Computers page displays a warning message and marks nodes over the node limit in red. These nodes will not be able to access the Internet through the Safe@Office appliance, but will be protected. The
Event
Log page also warns you that you have exceeded the node limit.
To upgrade your Safe@Office appliance to support more nodes, purchase a new Product
Key. Contact your reseller for upgrade information.
While trying to connect to a Service Center, I received the message “The Service Center did not respond”. What should I do?
• If you are using a Service Center other than the Check Point Service Center, check that the Service Center IP address is typed correctly.
• The Safe@Office appliance connects to the Service Center using UDP ports
9281/9282. If the Safe@Office appliance is installed behind another firewall, make sure that these ports are open.
I purchased an advanced Safe@Office model, but I only have the functionality of a simpler
Safe@Office model. What should I do?
Your have not installed your product key. For further information, see Upgrading Your
Chapter 25: Troubleshooting 795
Other Problems
Other Problems
I have forgotten my password. What should I do?
Reset your Safe@Office appliance to factory defaults using the
Reset button as detailed in
Resetting the Safe@Office Appliance to Defaults on page 762.
Why are the date and time displayed incorrectly?
You can adjust the time on the
Setup page's Tools tab. For information, see Setting the
Time on the Appliance on page 735.
I cannot use a certain network application. What should I do?
Look at the
Event Log page. If it lists blocked attacks, do the following:
• Set the Safe@Office appliance's firewall level to Low and try again.
• If the application still does not work, set the computer on which you want to use the application to be the exposed host.
For instructions, see Defining an Exposed Host.
When you have finished using the application, make sure to clear the exposed host setting, otherwise your security might be compromised.
In the Safe@Office Portal, I do not see the pop-up windows that the guide describes. What should I do?
Disable any pop-up blockers for http://my.firewall.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 796
Technical Specifications
Chapter 26
Specifications
This chapter includes the following topics:
CE Declaration of Conformity ................................................................. 807
Technical Specifications
Safe@Office 1000N and 1000NW
ADSL Model Attributes
Table 159: Safe@Office ADSL Model Attributes
Attribute Safe@Office 1000N ADSL
SBXNDEF-100-2
Physical Attributes
Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
20 x 3.1 x 12.8 cm
Weight 805g. (full / packaged 1560g)
Retail Box Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
290 x 250 x 80 mm
Power Adapter Unit
Power Adapter Nominal
Input
In: 100~240VAC @ 0.65A
Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL
SBXNWDE-100-2
20 x 3.1 x 12.8 cm
850g. (full / packaged 1625g)
290 x 250 x 80 mm
In: 100~240VAC @ 0.65A
Chapter 26: Specifications 797
Technical Specifications
Power Adapter Nominal
Output
12VDC @ 2 A
Max. Power
Consumption
15W
20W (including USB devices)
Environmental
Conditions
Temperature:
Storage/Transport
-20ºC ~ 70ºC
Temperature: Operation 0ºC ~ 35ºC
Humidity:
Storage/Operation
10 ~ 90% / 10 ~ 90%
(non-condensed)
Applicable Standards
Safety
Quality
EMC
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD Reliability
Environment
MTBF (hours)
RF
TBD
TBD
TBD
12VDC @ 2 A
15W
20W (including USB devices)
-20ºC ~ 70ºC
0ºC ~ 35ºC
10 ~ 90% / 10 ~ 90%
(non-condensed)
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
798 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Non-ADSL Model Attributes
Technical Specifications
Table 160: Safe@Office Non-ADSL Model Attributes
Attribute
Physical Attributes
Safe@Office 1000N SBXN-
100-1
Safe@Office 1000NW
SBXNW-100-1
Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
20 x 3.1 x 12.8 cm
(7.87 x 1.22 x 5.04 inches)
Weight 750g. (full / packaged 1505g)
Retail Box Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
Power Adapter Unit
290 x 250 x 80 mm
(11.42 x 9.84 x 3.15 inches)
Power Adapter Nominal
Input
In: 100~240VAC @ 0.65A
Power Adapter Nominal
Output
12VDC @ 2 A
Max. Power
Consumption
12W
20 x 3.1 x 12.8 cm
(7.87 x 1.22 x 5.04 inches)
(excluding antenna connectors)
770g. (full / packaged 1545g)
290 x 250 x 80 mm
(11.42 x 9.84 x 3.15 inches)
In: 100~240VAC @ 0.65A
12VDC @ 2 A
16W
21W (including USB devices)
Environmental
Conditions
Temperature:
Storage/Transport
-20÷C ~ 70÷C
Temperature: Operation 0÷C ~ 35÷C
-20÷C ~ 70÷C
0÷C ~ 35÷C
799 Chapter 26: Specifications
Technical Specifications
Humidity:
Storage/Operation
10 ~ 90% / 10 ~ 90%
(non-condensed)
Applicable Standards
Safety
Quality
EMC
Reliability
Environment
MTBF (hours)
RF cULus, CB, CE, LVD
ISO9001, ISO 14001, TL9000
CE, FCC 15B
EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3
RoHS & WEEE, China RoHS
100,000 hours at 25÷C
N/A
10 ~ 90% / 10 ~ 90%
(non-condensed) cULus, CB, CE, LVD
ISO9001, ISO 14001, TL9000
CE, FCC 15B
EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3
RoHS & WEEE, China RoHS
100,000 hours at 25÷C
CE R&TTE .FCC15C,TELCO
800 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Wireless Attributes
Technical Specifications
Table 161: Safe@Office Wireless Attributes
Attribute Safe@Office 1000NW SBXNW-100-1
Safe@Office 1000NW ADSL SBXNWDE-100-2
Operation Frequency 2.412-2.484 MHz
Transmission Power
Modulation
WPA Authentication
Modes
Mode
802.11b dBm
16 mW
40mW
802.11g
802.11n (HT20)
11 (54Mbps), 16
(6Mbps)
13mW (54Mbps),
40mW (6Mbps)
9 (MCS7, MCS15),
16 (MCS0)
8mW (MCS7,
MCS15), 40mW
(MCS0)
802.11n (HT40) 8 (MCS7, MCS15),
16 (MCS0)
6.3mW (MCS7,
MCS15), 40mW
(MCS0)
50mW Max
OFDM, DSSS, 64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, BPSK, CCK, DQPSK,
DBPSK
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP (EAP-GTC), PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2)
801 Chapter 26: Specifications
Technical Specifications
Safe@Office 500 and 500W
Table 162: Safe@Office ADSL Models Attributes
Attribute
Physical Attributes
Safe@Office 500 ADSL
SBXD-166LHGE-5
Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
200 x 33 x 122 mm
(7.87 x 1.3 x 4.8 inches)
Weight 660 g (1.46 lbs)
Retail Box Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
5V Power Adapter Unit
290 x 250 x 80 mm
(11.42 x 9.84 x 3.15 inches)
Power Adapter Nominal
Input
In: 100~240VAC @ 0.5A
Power Adapter Nominal
Output
5V DC @ 3.3A
Max. Power
Consumption
Environmental
Conditions
Temperature:
Storage/Transport
8.5W
13.5W (including USB devices)
-5÷C ~ 80÷ C
Safe@Office 500W ADSL
SBXWD-166LHGE-5
200 x 33 x 130 mm
(7.87 x 1.3 x 5.12 inches)
(incl. antenna connectors)
694 g (1.53 lbs)
290 x 250 x 80 mm
(11.42 x 9.84 x 3.15 inches)
In: 100~240VAC @ 0.5A
5V DC @ 3.3A
10.5W
15.5W (including USB devices)
-5÷C ~ 80÷C
802 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Temperature: Operation 0÷C ~ 40÷C
Humidity:
Storage/Operation
10 ~ 95% / 10 ~ 90%
(non-condensed)
Applicable Standards
Safety cULus, CB, LVD
ISO9001, ISO 14001, TL9000 Quality
EMC CE . FCC 15B.VCCI
EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3 Reliability
Environment RoHS & WEEE
FCC Part 68.CS03 ADSL
RF N/A
Technical Specifications
0÷C ~ 40÷C
10 ~ 95% / 10 ~ 90%
(non-condensed) cULus, CB, LVD
ISO9001, ISO 14001, TL9000
CE . FCC 15B.VCCI
EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3
RoHS & WEEE
FCC Part 68.CS03
FCC15C, TELCO
Table 163: Safe@Office Non-ADSL Models Attributes
Attribute
Physical Attributes
Safe@Office 500
SBX-166LHGE-5
Safe@Office 500W
SBXW-166LHGE-5
Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
200 x 33 x 122 mm
(7.87 x 1.3 x 4.8 inches)
Weight 580 g (1.28 lbs)
Retail Box Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
290 x 250 x 80 mm
(11.42 x 9.84 x 3.15 inches)
200 x 33 x 130 mm
(7.87 x 1.3 x 5.12 inches)
(incl. antenna connectors)
635 g (1.40 lbs)
290 x 250 x 80 mm
(11.42 x 9.84 x 3.15 inches)
Chapter 26: Specifications 803
Technical Specifications
5V Power Adapter Unit
Power Adapter Nominal
Input
In: 100~240VAC @ 0.5A
Power Adapter Nominal
Output
9VAC @ 1.5 A
OR:
12VDC @ 1.5 A
Max. Power
Consumption
4.5W
Environmental
Conditions
Temperature:
Storage/Transport
-5÷C ~ 80÷C
Temperature: Operation 0÷C ~ 40÷C
Humidity:
Storage/Operation
10 ~ 95% / 10 ~ 90%
(non-condensed)
Applicable Standards
Safety cULus, CB, LVD
ISO9001, ISO 14001, TL9000 Quality
EMC CE . FCC 15B.VCCI
EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3 Reliability
Environment
MTBF (hours)
RoHS & WEEE
68,000 hours at 30÷C
In: 100~240VAC @ 0.5A
12VDC @ 1.5 A
6.5W
11.5W (including USB devices)
-5÷C ~ 80÷C
0÷C ~ 40÷C
10 ~ 95% / 10 ~ 90%
(non-condensed) cULus, CB, LVD
ISO9001, ISO 14001, TL9000
CE . FCC 15B.VCCI
EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3
RoHS & WEEE
68,000 hours at 30÷C
804 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Technical Specifications
RF
Table 164:
N/A FCC15C,TELCO
Table 165: Safe@Office Non-ADSL Models Attributes
Attribute Safe@Office 500
SBX-166LHGE-6
Physical Attributes
Safe@Office 500W
SBXW-166LHGE-6
Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
200 x 32 x 128 mm
(7.87 x 1.26 x 5.04 inches)
200 x 32 x 128 mm
(7.87 x 1.26 x 5.04 inches)
Weight 675 g (1.49 lbs)
Retail Box Dimensions
(width x height x depth)
290 x 250 x 80 mm
(11.42 x 9.84 x 3.15 inches)
Retail box weight
5V Power Adapter Unit
1.36 kg (3 lbs)
Power Adapter Nominal
Input
100 to 240 Vac
50 to 60 Hz
Power Adapter Nominal
Output
12VDC @ 1.5 A
685 g (1.51 lbs)
290 x 250 x 80 mm
(11.42 x 9.84 x 3.15 inches)
1.38 kg (3.04 lbs)
100 to 240 Vac
50 to 60 Hz
12VDC @ 1.5 A
Max. Power
Consumption
15W 15W
20W (including USB devices)
Environmental Conditions
Temperature:
Storage/Transport
-20ºC ~ 65ºC -20ºC ~ 65ºC
805 Chapter 26: Specifications
Technical Specifications
Temperature: Operation 0ºC ~ 40ºC
Humidity:
Storage/Operation
Applicable Standards
Safety
Quality
EMC
Reliability
Environment
MTBF (hours)
10% ~ 85%
(non-condensed)
IEC 60950, EN 60950
ISO 9001, 9002, 14001
FCC part 15B
VCCI V-3/V-4
EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3
RoHS & WEEE
68,000 hours at 30ºC
0ºC ~ 40ºC
10% ~ 85%
(non-condensed)
IEC 60950, EN 60950
ISO 9001, 9002, 14001
FCC Part 15 B & C
AS/NZS 4268: 2003 A1
DGT
EN 300 019 - 1, 2, 3
RoHS & WEEE
68,000 hours at 30ºC
RF N/A
Wireless Attributes
Table 166: Safe@Office Wireless Attributes
Attribute
CE, FCC15C, TELCO
All Wireless Models
Operation Frequency 2.412-2.484 MHz
Transmission Power 79.4 mW
Modulation OFDM, DSSS, 64QAM, 16QAM, QPSK, BPSK, CCK, DQPSK,
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide 806
CE Declaration of Conformity
DBPSK
WPA Authentication
Modes
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS, PEAP (EAP-GTC), PEAP (EAP-MSCHAP V2)
CE Declaration of Conformity
CE
Check Point is committed to protecting the environment. Safe@Office unified threat management appliances are compliant with the RoHS Directive, meeting the European
Union's strict restrictions on hazardous substances.
RoHS & WEEE Declaration and Certification
The Safe@Office appliance has been verified to comply with the following directives, throughout the design, development, and supply chain stages:
• Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council, of 27 January 2003, on the Restriction of the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and
Electronic Equipment (RoHS – 2002/95/EC)
• Directive of the European Parliament and of the Council, of 27 January 2003, on
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE – 2002/96/CE)
For a copy of the original signed declaration (in full conformance with EN45014), contact
SofaWare technical support at www.sofaware.com/support.
SofaWare Technologies Ltd., 3 Hilazon St., Ramat-Gan Israel, hereby declares that this equipment is in conformity with the essential requirements specified in Article 3.1 (a) and
3.1 (b) of:
• Directive 89/336/EEC (EMC Directive)
• Directive 73/23/EEC (Low Voltage Directive – LVD)
• Directive 99/05/EEC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal
Equipment Directive)
In accordance with the following standards:
807 Chapter 26: Specifications
CE Declaration of Conformity
Table 167: Safe@Office CE Compliance Standards
Attribute 500 500 ADSL 500W ADSL 500W
H/W Model
EMC:
SBX-166LHGE-5
V
EN 55022
EN 50081-1
EN 50082-1
V
SBX-166LHGE-5
V
V
SBX-166LHGE-5
V
V
EN 61000-3-
2
V V V
V V EN 61000-3-
3
V
EN 55024 V
V CISPR 22
Safety:
EN 60950
V
V
IEC 60950
Telecom:
ITU-T
G.992.1, .2,
.3*, .4*
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SBX-166LHGE-6
V
V
V
V
808 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Attribute 500 500 ADSL 500W ADSL
ETSI TS 101
388
ITU-T G.703
ITU-T G.704
RF:
EN 300 328
EN 301 489-
1
EN 301 489-
17
V
V
V
V
V
V
EN 50385
Table 168: Safe@Office CE Compliance Standards
Attribute 1000N 1000NW 1000N ADSL
CE Declaration of Conformity
500W
V
V
V
V
V
1000NW ADSL
H/W Model
EMC:
EN 55022
SBXN-100-1
V
SBXNW-100-1
V
SBXNDEF-100-2
V
SBXNWDE-100-2
V
Chapter 26: Specifications 809
CE Declaration of Conformity
Attribute 1000N 1000NW 1000N ADSL 1000NW ADSL
EN 61000-3-
2
V
EN 61000-3-
3
V
EN 55024
CISPR 22
Safety:
EN 60950
V
V
V
IEC 60950
Telecom:
TBR21
ITU-T
G.992.1, .2,
.3*, .4*
ETSI TS 101
388
ITU-T G.703
ITU-T G.704
RF:
V
810
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Attribute 1000N 1000NW
CE Declaration of Conformity
1000N ADSL 1000NW ADSL
EN 300 328
EN 301 489-
1
V
V
V
V
EN 301 489-
17
V V
EN 50385 V V
The "CE" mark is affixed to this product to demonstrate conformance to the R&TTE
Directive 99/05/EEC (Radio Equipment and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment
Directive) and FCC Part 15 Class B.
The product has been tested in a typical configuration. For a copy of the Original Signed
Declaration (in full conformance with EN45014), please contact SofaWare at the above address.
North America
Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment complies with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Shielded cables must be used with this equipment to maintain compliance with FCC regulations.
Any changes or modifications to this product not explicitly approved by the manufacturer could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment and any assurances of Safety or
Performance, and could result in violation of Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Chapter 26: Specifications 811
CE Declaration of Conformity
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement for Wireless Models
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. The antenna(s) used for this equipment must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least eight inches (20 cm) from all persons. This equipment must not be operated in conjunction with any other antenna.
Table 169: Safe@Office North America Compliance Standards
Attribute 500 500 ADSL 500W ADSL 500W
H/W Model
SBX-166LHGE-
5
SBX-166LHGE-5 SBX-166LHGE-5
EMC:
V
FCC Part
15, Class B
V
V
V
V
V
CISPR 22 V
ICES-003 V
ANSI C63.4 V
Safety:
V
UL 60950 V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SBX-166LHGE-6
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
812 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Attribute 500
CE Declaration of Conformity
500 ADSL 500W ADSL 500W
C22.2 No.
60950
V
K60950
Telecom:
FCC Part
68
TIA-968-A-
1, 2 & 3
CS-03 Part
I & VIII
Issue 8
RF:
FCC Part
15, Subpart
C
IEEE C95.1
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Table 170: Safe@Office North America Compliance Standards
Attribute 1000N 1000NW 1000N ADSL 1000NW ADSL
H/W Model
SBXN-100-1 SBXNW-100-1 SBXNDEF-100-2 SBXNWDE-100-2
Chapter 26: Specifications 813
CE Declaration of Conformity
Attribute 1000N
EMC:
FCC Part
15, Class B
V
CISPR 22 V
ICES-003 V
ANSI C63.4 V
Safety:
UL 60950 V
C22.2 No.
60950
Telecom:
FCC Part
68
CS-03 Part
I & VIII
Issue 8
V
RF:
FCC Part
15, Subpart
C
IEEE C95.1 V
V
V
V
V
V
V
1000NW
V
814
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
1000N ADSL
V
1000NW ADSL
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
CE Declaration of Conformity
China
China RoHS, RoHS & WEEE Declaration and Certification
These systems have been verified to comply with the China RoHS and EU RoHS & WEEE
Directives throughout the design, development and supply chain definition.
China RoHS, RoHS & WEEE
(Environmental Data – Product's Materials Information Restricted Substances)
SofaWare's products does NOT contain any of the following substances (in concentrations exceeding legal threshold limits):
• Asbestos
• Colorants in components that come into direct contact with human skin
• Cadmium and its compounds (except for use in applications exempted by the EU
RoHS Directive)
• Class I and Class II CFCs (chlorofluorocarbons) and HCFCs (hydro fluorocarbons)
• Chloroparaffins, short chained (10-13 carbon chain)
• Chromium VI and its compounds (except for use in applications exempted by the EU RoHS Directive)
• Halogenated dioxins or furans (i.e. polychlorinated dibenzodioxines, polychlorinated dibenzofurans)
• Lead and its compounds (except for use in applications exempted by the EU
RoHS Directive)
• Mercury (except for use in applications exempted by the EU RoHS Directive)
• Nickel and its compounds in components that are likely to result in prolonged skin exposure
• PCBs (polychlorobiphenyls) or PCTs (polychloroterphenyls)
• PBBs (polybromobiphenyls) or PBDEs (polybrominated diphenylethers)
• PVC (polyvinyl chloride) in plastic parts greater than 25 grams
• Polychlorinated naphthalenes (PCNs)
815 Chapter 26: Specifications
CE Declaration of Conformity
• Tributyl tin (TBT) and triphenyl tin (TPT) compounds
Additional Materials Information
• The cables may use PVC as an insulating material to ensure product safety
• The case material is sheet metal
• Product may contain post-industrial recycled content (plastics, metal, glass)
No CFCs (chlorofluorocarbons), HCFCs (hydrofluorocarbons) or other ozone depleting substances are used in packaging material. Chromium, lead, mercury, or cadmium are not intentionally added to packaging materials and are not present in a cumulative concentration greater than 100 ppm as incidental impurities. No halogenated plastics or polymers are used for packaging material. The System fully complies with the EU
Directive 94/62/EEC.
Table 171: Hazardous Substances in Components
Component Name Lead
(Pb)
Mercur
y (Hg)
Cadmi um
(Cd)
Chromiu m VI
Compoun ds (Cr 6+
)
PCB
O O O O O
Polybromin ated
Biphenyls
(PBB)
O
Polybrominat ed Diphenyl
Ethers (PBDE)
Components onboard
See the following table
O
Main Chassis
O O
O O
O O
O
O
O
O
816 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
AC Mains
Accessories
Cables
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
CE Declaration of Conformity
O
O
O
Table 172: Onboard Components - Lead (Pb)
Component Name Part Hazardous
Substance s
Concentrati on (ppm)
RoHS
Exemptions
Components onboard DC Jack Lead (Pb) 36050
Quantity
Lead as an alloying element in steel containing up to
0,35 % lead by weight, aluminium containing up to
0,4 % lead by weight and as a copper alloy containing up to
4 % lead by weight.
(2002/95/EC)
1
Chapter 26: Specifications 817
CE Declaration of Conformity
Crystal Lead (Pb) 11800
CAPACITO
R
CAPACITO
R
Lead (Pb)
Lead (Pb)
6551
6981
Lead in high melting temperature type solders (i.e. lead-based alloys containing
85 % by weight or more lead).
(2005/747/EC)
1
Lead in electronic ceramic parts
(e.g. piezoelectronic devices)
(2002/95/EC)
2
Lead in electronic ceramic parts
(e.g. piezoelectronic devices)
(2002/95/EC)
1
818 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Glossary of Terms
A
ADSL Modem
A device connecting a computer to the
Internet via an existing phone line.
ADSL (Asymmetric Digital Subscriber
Line) modems offer a high-speed
'always-on' connection.
C
CA
The Certificate Authority (CA) issues certificates to entities such as gateways, users, or computers. The entity later uses the certificate to identify itself and provide verifiable information. For instance, the certificate includes the
Distinguished Name (DN) (identifying information) of the entity, as well as the public key (information about itself), and possibly the IP address.
After two entities exchange and validate each other's certificates, they can begin encrypting information between themselves using the public keys in the certificates.
Cable Modem
A device connecting a computer to the
Internet via the cable television network. Cable modems offer a highspeed 'always-on' connection.
Glossary of Terms
Certificate Authority
The Certificate Authority (CA) issues certificates to entities such as gateways, users, or computers. The entity later uses the certificate to identify itself and provide verifiable information. For instance, the certificate includes the
Distinguished Name (DN) (identifying information) of the entity, as well as the public key (information about itself), and possibly the IP address.
After two entities exchange and validate each other's certificates, they can begin encrypting information between themselves using the public keys in the certificates.
Cracking
An activity in which someone breaks into someone else's computer system, bypasses passwords or licenses in computer programs; or in other ways intentionally breaches computer security. The end result is that whatever resides on the computer can be viewed and sensitive data can be stolen without anyone knowing about it. Sometimes, tiny programs are 'planted' on the computer that are designed to watch out for, seize and then transmit to another computer, specific types of data.
Glossary of Terms 819
Glossary of Terms
D
DHCP
Any machine requires a unique IP address to connect to the Internet using
Internet Protocol. Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a communications protocol that assigns
Internet Protocol (IP) addresses to computers on the network.
DHCP uses the concept of a "lease" or amount of time that a given IP address will be valid for a computer.
DMZ
A DMZ (demilitarized zone) is an internal network defined in addition to the LAN network and protected by the
Safe@Office appliance.
DNS
The Domain Name System (DNS) refers to the Internet domain names, or easy-to-remember "handles", that are translated into IP addresses.
An example of a Domain Name is
'www.sofaware.com'.
Domain Name System
Domain Name System. The Domain
Name System (DNS) refers to the
Internet domain names, or easy-toremember "handles", that are translated into IP addresses.
An example of a Domain Name is
'www.sofaware.com'.
E
Exposed Host
An exposed host allows one computer to be exposed to the Internet. An example of using an exposed host would be exposing a public server, while preventing outside users from getting direct access form this server back to the private network.
F
Firmware
Software embedded in a device.
G
Gateway
A network point that acts as an entrance to another network.
H
Hacking
An activity in which someone breaks into someone else's computer system, bypasses passwords or licenses in computer programs; or in other ways intentionally breaches computer security. The end result is that whatever resides on the computer can be viewed and sensitive data can be stolen without anyone knowing about it. Sometimes, tiny programs are 'planted' on the computer that are designed to watch out for, seize and then transmit to another computer, specific types of data.
820 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
HTTPS
Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure
Socket Layer, or HTTP over SSL.
A protocol for accessing a secure Web server. It uses SSL as a sublayer under the regular HTTP application. This directs messages to a secure port number rather than the default Web port number, and uses a public key to encrypt data
HTTPS is used to transfer confidential user information.
Hub
A device with multiple ports, connecting several PCs or network devices on a network.
I
IP Address
An IP address is a 32-bit number that identifies each computer sending or receiving data packets across the
Internet. When you request an HTML page or send e-mail, the Internet
Protocol part of TCP/IP includes your
IP address in the message and sends it to the IP address that is obtained by looking up the domain name in the
Uniform Resource Locator you requested or in the e-mail address you're sending a note to. At the other end, the recipient can see the IP address of the
Web page requestor or the e-mail sender and can respond by sending another message using the IP address it received.
Glossary of Terms
Glossary of Terms
IP Spoofing
A technique where an attacker attempts to gain unauthorized access through a false source address to make it appear as though communications have originated in a part of the network with higher access privileges. For example, a packet originating on the Internet may be masquerading as a local packet with the source IP address of an internal host.
The firewall can protect against IP spoofing attacks by limiting network access based on the gateway interface from which data is being received.
IPSEC
IPSEC is the leading Virtual Private
Networking (VPN) standard. IPSEC enables individuals or offices to establish secure communication channels ('tunnels') over the Internet.
ISP
An ISP (Internet service provider) is a company that provides access to the
Internet and other related services.
L
LAN
A local area network (LAN) is a group of computers and associated devices that share a common communications line and typically share the resources of a single server within a small geographic area.
821
Glossary of Terms
M
MAC Address
The MAC (Media Access Control) address is a computer's unique hardware number. When connected to the Internet from your computer, a mapping relates your IP address to your computer's physical (MAC) address on the LAN.
Mbps
Megabits per second. Measurement unit for the rate of data transmission.
MTU
The Maximum Transmission Unit
(MTU) is a parameter that determines the largest datagram than can be transmitted by an IP interface (without it needing to be broken down into smaller units). The MTU should be larger than the largest datagram you wish to transmit un-fragmented. Note:
This only prevents fragmentation locally. Some other link in the path may have a smaller MTU - the datagram will be fragmented at that point. Typical values are 1500 bytes for an Ethernet interface or 1452 for a PPP interface.
N
NAT
Network Address Translation (NAT) is the translation or mapping of an IP address to a different IP address. NAT can be used to map several internal IP addresses to a single IP address, thereby sharing a single IP address assigned by the ISP among several PCs.
822
Check Point FireWall-1's Stateful
Inspection Network Address Translation
(NAT) implementation supports hundreds of pre-defined applications, services, and protocols, more than any other firewall vendor.
NetBIOS
NetBIOS is the networking protocol used by DOS and Windows machines.
P
Packet
A packet is the basic unit of data that flows from one source on the Internet to another destination on the Internet.
When any file (e-mail message, HTML file, GIF file etc.) is sent from one place to another on the Internet, the file is divided into "chunks" of an efficient size for routing. Each of these packets is separately numbered and includes the
Internet address of the destination. The individual packets for a given file may travel different routes through the
Internet. When they have all arrived, they are reassembled into the original file at the receiving end.
PPPoE
PPPoE (Point-to-Point Protocol over
Ethernet) enables connecting multiple computer users on an Ethernet local area network to a remote site or ISP, through common customer premises equipment
(e.g. modem).
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
PPTP
The Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol
(PPTP) allows extending a local network by establishing private
“tunnels” over the Internet. This protocol it is also used by some DSL providers as an alternative for PPPoE.
R
RJ-45
The RJ-45 is a connector for digital transmission over ordinary phone wire.
Router
A router is a device that determines the next network point to which a packet should be forwarded toward its destination. The router is connected to at least two networks.
S
Server
A server is a program (or host) that awaits and requests from client programs across the network. For example, a Web server is the computer program, running on a specific host, that serves requested HTML pages or files.
Your browser is the client program, in this case.
Stateful Inspection
Stateful Inspection was invented by
Check Point to provide the highest level of security by examining every layer within a packet, unlike other systems of inspection. Stateful Inspection extracts information required for security
Glossary of Terms
Glossary of Terms decisions from all application layers and retains this information in dynamic state tables for evaluating subsequent connection attempts. In other words, it learns!
Subnet Mask
A 32-bit identifier indicating how the network is split into subnets. The subnet mask indicates which part of the IP address is the host ID and which indicates the subnet.
T
TCP
TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) is a set of rules (protocol) used along with the Internet Protocol (IP) to send data in the form of message units between computers over the Internet. While IP takes care of handling the actual delivery of the data, TCP takes care of keeping track of the individual units of data (called packets) that a message is divided into for efficient routing through the Internet.
For example, when an HTML file is sent to you from a Web server, the
Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) program layer in that server divides the file into one or more packets, numbers the packets, and then forwards them individually to the IP program layer.
Although each packet has the same destination IP address, it may get routed differently through the network.
823
Glossary of Terms
At the other end (the client program in your computer), TCP reassembles the individual packets and waits until they have arrived to forward them to you as a single file.
TCP/IP
TCP/IP (Transmission Control
Protocol/Internet Protocol) is the underlying communication protocol of the Internet.
U
UDP
UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is a communications protocol that offers a limited amount of service when messages are exchanged between computers in a network that uses the
Internet Protocol (IP). UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control
Protocol (TCP) and, together with IP, is sometimes referred to as UDP/IP. Like the Transmission Control Protocol,
UDP uses the Internet Protocol to actually get a data unit (called a datagram) from one computer to another. Unlike TCP, however, UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packets (datagrams) and reassembling it at the other end.
UDP is often used for applications such as streaming data.
URL
A URL (Uniform Resource Locator) is the address of a file (resource) accessible on the Internet. The type of
824 resource depends on the Internet application protocol. On the Web
(which uses the Hypertext Transfer
Protocol), an example of a URL is
'http://www.sofaware.com'.
V
VPN
A virtual private network (VPN) is a private data network that makes use of the public telecommunication infrastructure, maintaining privacy through the use of a tunneling protocol and security procedures.
VPN tunnel
A secure connection between a Remote
Access VPN Client and a Remote
Access VPN Server.
W
WLAN
A WLAN is a wireless local area network protected by the Safe@Office appliance.
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
8
802.1x configuring for a wireless network • 309 configuring for ports • 411 excluding network objects from • 225
A
Access Denied page customizing • 578 account configuring • 595
ADSL configuring a direct connection • 123
ADSL modem about • 817 antispam filtering solutions about • 504 comparison of • 504
Email Antivirus • 556
VStream Antispam • 523 antivirus filtering solutions about • 503
Email Antivirus • 556 solutions • 503
VStream Antivirus • 505
Index
Index
B
backup connection configuring • 189
Block Known Ports • 485
Block List engine adding senders • 537 configuring settings • 539 deleting senders • 539 enabling/disabling • 529
Block Port Overflow • 486
Blocked FTP Commands • 487 bridges adding and editing • 264 adding connections to • 272 adding networks to • 268 deleting • 276 explained • 257 multiple • 262 using • 257
C
CA, explained • 654, 817 cable modem configuring a connection • 123 explained • 817
Index
825
Index certificate explained • 654 exporting • 663 exporting CA • 664 exporting device • 663 generating self-signed • 655 importing • 659 installing • 654 uninstalling • 662
Checksum Verification • 473
Cisco IOS DOS • 470 command line interface controlling the appliance via • 707
Content Based Antispam engine configuring • 533 enabling/disabling • 529
D
DDoS Attack • 461
DHCP configuring • 198 connection • 132 explained • 818 options • 204
DHCP Server enabling/disabling • 198 explained • 198 diagnostic tools
826
Packet Sniffer • 738
Ping • 735
Traceroute • 735 using • 735
WHOIS • 735 diagnostics running • 762 dialup connection • 164
RS232 modem • 175
USB modem • 179 direct ADSL connection • 135, 142
DMZ configuring • 209 configuring High Availability for • 279 explained • 818
DNS • 189, 735, 818
Dynamic DNS • 26, 593
E
EAP authenticator explained • 431 using with wired clients • 433 using with wireless clients • 432 workflows • 432
Email Antispam, see Email Filtering • 556
Email Antivirus, see Email Filtering • 556
Email Filtering
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Email Antispam • 556
Email Antivirus • 556 enabling/disabling • 557 selecting protocols for • 558 snoozing • 559 temporarily disabling • 559
EoA configuring a connection • 123
Event Log viewing • 377 exposed host defining a computer as • 395 explained • 818
F
File and Print Sharing • 490 firewall about • 389 levels • 392 rule types • 400 setting security level • 392 technologies • 76 firewall rules adding and editing • 402 deleting • 411 enabling/disabling • 409 enabling/disabling logging • 410 reordering • 410
Index types • 402 using • 398 firmware explained • 818 updating • 581 updating by using Software Updates •
582 updating manually • 584 viewing status • 716
Flags • 480
FTP Bounce • 484
G
gateway hostname configuring • 720 gateways backup • 279 default • 239 explained • 818
ID • 593 master • 279
H
H.323 • 495
Header Rejection • 488
Hide NAT enabling/disabling • 197 explained • 197 high availability
Index
827
Index configuring • 279 explained • 279
Host Port Scan • 481
HTTPS configuring • 724 explained • 819 using • 116 hub • 99, 189, 279, 789, 819
I
IGMP • 492
IKE traces viewing • 668 installation
ADSL models • 100 cable type • 99 network • 99 non-ADSL models • 99 software requirements • 26
Instant Messengers • 498 internal DNS Server about • 222 configuring • 222 internal VPN Server configuring • 606 explained • 602
Internet connection configuring • 123
828 configuring backup • 189 enabling/disabling • 188 establishing quick • 188 terminating • 188 troubleshooting • 789 viewing information • 186
Internet Setup using • 139
Internet Wizard using • 124
IP address changing • 196 explained • 819 hiding • 197
IP Fragments • 466
IP Reputation engine configuring • 542 enabling/disabling • 529
IPoA configuring a connection • 149
ISP explained • 819
L
L2TP VPN Clients configuring • 610
L2TP VPN Server about • 603
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
configuring • 608
LAN cable • 99 configuring a connection • 123 configuring High Availability for • 279 explained • 819 ports • 99
LAND • 459 licenses upgrading • 718 link configurations modifying • 254 load balancing about • 190 configuring • 190 login initial • 111 regular • 114 logs event logs • 377 exporting • 377 security logs • 381 viewing • 377
M
MAC address explained • 820
Max Ping Size • 465
Index
Index
MTU explained • 820
N
NAT rules about • 423 adding and editing • 425 types • 424 using • 423 viewing and deleting • 430
NetBIOS explained • 820 network changing internal range of • 196 configuring • 193 configuring a DMZ • 209 configuring a virtual access point (VAP)
• 331 configuring a VLAN • 214 configuring DHCP options • 204 configuring high availability • 279 configuring the OfficeMode network •
212 configuring the WLAN • 303 enabling DHCP Server on • 198 enabling Hide NAT • 197 installation on • 99 managing • 193 objects • 225
829
Index
Network Interface Monitor viewing bridge statistics • 370 viewing general network statistics • 360 viewing Internet connection statistics •
361 viewing wired network statistics • 366 viewing wireless network statistics • 368 network objects adding and editing • 227 using • 225 viewing and deleting • 235
Network Quota • 468 network service objects adding and editing • 236 viewing and deleting • 238 node limit viewing • 355
Non-TCP Flooding • 460
Null Payload • 472
O
OfficeMode about • 212 configuring • 212
P
packet • 186, 239, 735, 819, 820
Packet Sanity • 463
Packet Sniffer
830 filter string syntax • 741 using • 738 password changing • 673 setting up • 111
Peer to Peer • 496
Ping of Death • 458
Port-based VLAN about • 214 adding and editing • 218 deleting • 221 ports configuring 802.1x security scheme for •
411 managing • 244 modifying assignments • 252 modifying link configurations • 254 resetting to defaults • 255 viewing statuses • 245
PPPoA configuring a connection • 123
PPPoE connection • 123 explained • 820
PPTP connection • 123 explained • 821 primary WLAN
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
configuring • 303 defined • 822 printers changing ports • 787 configuring computers to use • 769 resetting • 788 setting up • 766 using • 765 viewing • 786
Q
QoS classes • 291 explained • 291
QoS classes adding and editing • 296 assigning services to • 398 deleting • 300 explained • 291 predefined • 294 restoring defaults • 301
R
RADIUS configuring VSA • 690 explained • 684 using • 684 rapid deployment about • 756
Index performing • 758 preparing for • 757
Remote Access VPN Clients
Remote Access VPN Clients • 597
Remote Access VPN Servers configuring • 603 explained • 597
Remote Desktop accessing a remote desktop • 703 configuring • 697 configuring the host computer • 700 using • 695 reports active computers • 355 active connections • 357 network statistics • 360 node limit • 355 routing table • 372
Safe@Office appliance status • 343 traffic • 350 viewing • 343 wireless statistics • 368 routers • 189, 279, 735, 789, 821
RS232 dialup modem setting up • 175 rules firewall • 398
Index
831
Index
NAT • 423
VStream Antispam • 545
VStream Antivirus • 509
Web • 563
S
Safe Senders adding • 553 deleting • 554
Safe@Office <OLD500><OLDEX> front panel • 53 network requirements • 51 package contents • 51 rear panel • 51
Safe@Office
<OLD500ADSL><OLDEXADSL> front panel • 58 network requirements • 55 package contents • 55 rear panel • 56
Safe@Office <OLD500W><OLDEW> front panel • 63 network requirements • 61 package contents • 60 rear panel • 61
Safe@Office
<OLD500WADSL><OLDEWADSL> front panel • 68 network requirements • 65
832 package contents • 65 rear panel • 66
Safe@Office 500 series about • 1 features • 3 product family • 2
Safe@Office appliance backing up • 749 cascading • 102 changing internal IP address of • 196 configuring Internet connection • 123 connecting to network printers • 103 controlling via the command line • 707 features • 3 firewall • 76 installing • 85 internal DNS server • 222 maintenance • 716 models • 2 mounting • 103 preparing for a wireless connection • 102 rapid deployment • 756 rebooting • 763 resetting to factory defaults • 759 restoring • 749 securing against theft • 105 security • 71
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
setting the time • 732 setting up • 107 status • 343 technical specifications • 795
Safe@Office appliance configuration backing up to a USB flash drive • 751 exporting • 750 importing • 753 restoring from a USB flash drive • 755
Safe@Office Portal elements • 118 initial • 111 logging in • 114 logging out • 653 remotely accessing • 116 using • 118
Secure HotSpot customizing • 421 enabling/disabling • 420 quick guest users • 681 setting up • 419 using • 417
SecuRemote explained • 602 installing • 609
SecuRemote Remote Access VPN Server configuring • 605
Index
Index explained • 597 security about • 71 configuring port-based security • 411 configuring servers • 395 creating firewall rules • 398 defining a computer as an exposed host •
395 firewall • 392
Secure HotSpot • 417
SmartDefense • 447
Security Log resetting • 381 viewing • 381 security policy about • 389 default • 391 enforcement • 390 implementation • 390 planning • 390 setting up • 389
Sequence Verifier • 479 serial console controlling appliance via • 710 using • 710 servers configuring • 395 explained • 821
833
Index
Service Center connecting to • 587 disconnecting from • 595 refreshing a connection to • 594 service routing explained • 239 services
Email Filtering • 556 software updates • 582
Web Filtering • 571
Setup Wizard • 111, 124
SIP • 494
Site-to-Site VPN gateways explained • 597
PPPoE tunnels • 617
Small PMTU • 475
SmartDefense categories • 456 configuring • 448 using • 447
SNMP configuring • 727 explained • 727 software updates checking for manually • 582 explained • 582 source routing
834 explained • 239
Spanning Tree Protocol explained • 262 with WDS • 305
SSH configuring • 713 explained • 713
Stateful Inspection explained • 821 technology • 79
Static IP configuring a connection • 131
Static NAT explained • 225 using • 227 static routes adding and editing • 240 explained • 239 using • 239 viewing and deleting • 243 viewing the routing table • 372
Status Monitor viewing • 343
Strict TCP • 474 subnet masks explained • 821 subscription services
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
explained • 587 starting • 587 viewing information • 593
Sweep Scan • 481
SynDefender • 477
Syslog logging configuring • 722 explained • 722
T
Tag-based VLAN about • 214 adding and editing • 220 deleting • 221
TCP
TCP, explained • 821
TCP/IP setting up for MAC OS • 95 setting up for Windows XP/2000 • 90
Teardrop • 457 technical support contacting • 70
Telstra
Telstra • 162
Traffic Monitor configuring • 352 exporting reports • 354 using • 350
Index
Index viewing reports • 351 traffic reports exporting • 354 viewing • 351
Traffic Shaper advanced • 291 enabling • 291 explained • 291 restoring defaults • 301 setting up • 293 simplified • 291 using • 291 troubleshooting • 789
U
UDP explained • 822
URL explained • 822 users adding and editing • 676 adding quick guest HotSpot • 681 managing • 673 setting up remote VPN access for • 683 viewing and deleting • 682
V
Vendor-Specific Attribute about • 684
835
Index configuring • 509 virtual access points (VAPs) about • 214 adding and editing • 331 deleting • 221
VLAN adding and editing • 217 configuring • 53 configuring port-based • 218 configuring tag-based • 220 configuring virtual access points • 331 deleting • 221 types • 214
VPN explained • 597
Remote Access • 601 sites • 597
Site-to-Site • 599 tunnnels • 597 viewing IKE traces • 668
VPN Server configuring • 603
SecuRemote internal • 602 types • 603
VPN sites adding and editing • 617 deleting • 649
836 enabling/disabling • 649 logging in • 650 logging out • 653 types • 597
VPN tunnels creation and closing of • 665 establishing • 650 explained • 822 viewing • 665
VStream Antispam about • 523 configuring advanced settings • 555 configuring the Block List engine • 537 configuring the Content Based Antispam engine • 533 configuring the IP Reputation engine •
542 configuring the Safe Sender list • 552 default policy • 528 enabling/disabling • 529 header marking • 528 how it works • 526 rules • 545 viewing statistics • 531
VStream Antispam rules adding and editing • 546 deleting • 552 enabling/disabling • 551
Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
reordering • 551 types • 546
VStream Antivirus about • 505 configuring • 505 configuring advanced settings • 518 configuring policy • 509 default policy • 506 enabling/disabling • 507 rules • 510 updating • 523 viewing database information • 508
VStream Antivirus rules adding and editing • 510 deleting • 518 enabling/disabling • 517 reordering • 517 types • 510
W
WAN cable • 99 load balancing • 190
WDS explained • 305 links • 305
WDS links configuring • 336
Index explained • 305
Web content filtering solutions about • 561 comparison of • 561
Web Filtering • 571
Web rules • 563
Web Filtering customizing the Access Denied page •
578 enabling/disabling • 571 excluding network objects from • 225 resetting to defaults • 577 selecting categories for • 573 snoozing • 574 temporarily disabling • 574
Web rules adding and editing • 564 customizing the Access Denied page •
578 enabling/disabling logging • 570 reordering • 569 using • 563 viewing and deleting • 570
Welchia • 469
WEP • 303, 309 wireless networks troubleshooting connectivity • 340 viewing statistics for • 368
Index
837
Index wireless protocols supported • 309 wireless stations viewing • 368
Worm Catcher • 489
X
XBox LIVE • 500
838 Check Point Safe@Office User Guide
Изтегляне
Публичната връзка е актуализирана
Публичната връзка към вашия чат е актуализирана. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Публична връзка към документа
Реклама
